IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
:/.
^
1.0
I.I
11.25
i^ Ki^ 1112.2
Ht U£ 12.0
1.8
1-4 ill 1.6
V]
<^
7^
/
/J.
'W J^' /'/
y
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, NY. 14580
(716) 872-4503
\
o<^
\
\
k
iv^ <* >, -"^tiS
^^>. Q
^
'^KO
%
V^\ ^
■^
^
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques
The
toti
The Institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
D
D
D
D
Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur
I I Covers damaged/
Couverture endommagAe
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaurie et/ou pelliculAe
Cover title missing/
Le titre de couverture manque
I I Coloured maps/
Cartes giographiquea en couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de coulsur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur
Bound with other material/
Reli6 avec d'autres documents
r~~1 Tight bi iding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
La re liurq serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distorsiort le long de la marge int6rieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais, iorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas iti filmies.
Additional comments:/
Comnentaires supplimentaires:
L'Instltut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la m^thode normale de fiimage
sont indiquis ci-dessous.
□ Coloured pages/
Pages de couleur
□ Pages damaged/
Pages endommagies
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
n
Pages restauries et/ou pelliculdes
Pages discoloured, stained or foxei
Pages dicolor^es, tacheties ou piquies
Pages detached/
Pages ditachdes
Showthrough/
Transparence
Quality of prir
Qualiti inigale de I'impression
Includes supplementary materit
Comprend du materiel supplementaire
Only edition available/
Seule Edition disponible
The
poei
of tl
film
Oris
begi
the
slon
othi
first
sion
orii
r~~1 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
r~| Pages detached/
r~;] Showthrough/
I I Quality of print varies/
rn Includes supplementary material/
I I Only edition available/
The
shal
TINI
whii
Mar
diff<
entl
begi
righ
reqi
met
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont ixi filmies d nouveau de facon d
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous.
10X 14X 1SX 22X
9fiy
30X
•
_y
12X
16X
aox
24X
28X
32X
The copy ffilmad h«r« hat bean reproduced thank*
to the generosity of:
Douglas Library
Queen's University
L'exemplaire filmA f ut reproduit grAce A la
gAnArosit* de:
Douglas Library
Queen's University
The Images appearing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or Illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated Impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
Les images suivantes ont AtA reproduites avec ie
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de la nettetA de l'exemplaire film6, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est ImprimAe sont filmte en commen^ant
par Ie premier plat et en terminant soit par la
derniire page qui comporte une empreinte
d'Impresslon ou d'lliustration, soit par Ie second
plat, selcrn Ie cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont flimte en commenpant par la
premldre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'Impresslon ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle
emitreinto.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol — ^ {meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Un des symboies suivants apparaftra sur la
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon Ie
cas: ie symbols —^ signifie "A SUIVRE", Ie
symbols V signifie "FIN".
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure ere filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
rsqulred. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
filmte A des taux de reduction diffirents.
Lorsque Ie document est trop grand pour Atre
reproduit en un seul clichA, il est film6 d partir
de i'angle supArleur gauche, de gauche d droite,
et de haut on bas, en prenant ie nombre
d'images nAcessalre. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la mAthode.
1 2 3
32X
1
2
3
4
5
6
LP
LLz).T
1% ie>G4
MEMBERS OF THE SENATE
Of THB
llttivwitjj irf ^0mU.
THE HON. JOSEPH C. MORRISON, Chancellor
ADAM CROOKS. LL.D., Q.C., Vice-Chancellor
THE REV. JOHN McCAUL, LL.D.
HON. JAMES PATTON, LL.D., Q.C.
JOHN LANGTON, M.A.
THE HON. DAVID CHRISTIE, M.L.C.
SIR WM. E. LOGAN, F.R.S.
JAMES J. HAYES, M.D.
THE REV. A. LILLIE, D.D.
E. M. HODDER, M.D., F.R.C.S., Eng Presid.n, .r at ^- , »
THP wnw TnuxT Tr /^ . , ^■' ^'"**"" of Medical Board.
THE HON. JOHN H. CAMERON, Q.C Trea»,ir^r r,f r c. •
THE REV. .3. RYERSON D D rw V ^ ^'"''^'
THE PRINCIPAL OP QUEEN'S COLLEGE, Kingston
THE REV. J. TABAREP, S.,,r;.r%,J„^,Z'
J. B. CHERRIMAN, M.A.
DANIEL WILSON, LL.D, \
THE REV. JOHN JENNINGS, D.D. \
HON. 0. MOVVAT, V.O.
GEORGE HERRICK, M.D. \
IRA LEWIS, M.A. \
LARRATT WM. SMITH, D.C.L.
S. 8. MACDONELL, LL.D.
THE REV. H. BATE JESSOPP. M A v \
JOHN HELLIWELL, M.A. \
WM. GEO. DRAPER, M.A.
5J688S0
2
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO.
MEMBERS OP THE 8EmTE^Continued
T. A. McLEAN, M.A.
JOHN BOYD, M.A., B.C.L.
DANIEL MoMICHAEL, LL.D.
JOHN E. THOMSON, B.A.
E. C. JONES, B.A.
J. D. ARMOUR, B.A.
J. J. KINGSMILL, B.A.
HON. WM. CAYLEY.
REV. W. McCLURE, M.A.
REV. R. FYFE, D.D,
J. H. MORRIS, M.A.
EDWARD BLAKE, M.A., Q.C.
C. F. ELLIOT, M.A.
EEV. j. BARCLAY, D.D.
T. J. ROBERTSON, M.A.
REV. W. F. CHECKLEY, M.A.
REV. VICAR-GENERAL WALSH.
REV. A. CARMAN, M.A.
T. H. BULL, M.A.
REV. J. DAVISON.
REV. DR. HELLMUTH.
i?«r,ar_DAVID BUCHAN, Esq.
Hfffiatrar— THOMAS MOSS, M.A.
Librarian— KEY, A. LORIMER, B.A.
Bedel— T. C. JOY.
EXAMINERS, 1884.
LA.W.
Adam Cbooks, Q.C, LL.D. E. FiTzaKaAi,D, M.A., LL.B.
MEDICINE.
Midwifery and VediealJurisprudence. C.J. rinLBRicK,M,D.,M.R.C.S.,Eng.
Surgery and Anatomy \s, T. AiKiNS, M D.
Physiology and Comparative Anatomy. M. Barrett, M.D , M.A.
Medicine and Therapeutict Uzzxel Oqden, M.D.
MEDICINE AND ARTS.
Chemistry , Hbnry Croft, D.C.L.
miural Ilittory i ]^^^ W. Hincks, F.R.S-
■ I T. J. Cottle, Esq.
ARTS.
Greek and Latin / '^"^ ^^^- John McCaui,, LL.D.
\ Thomas Moss, MA.
Malhenatics / J- B, Chehriman, M.A.
I Rev. W. Jones, li.A.
English and History i ?• .WiJ^*>n, LL.D.
\J.A. BotD, M.A.
French, German, Italian, and Spanish J i'^^^"'^ Fo«neri, LL D.
^ \ Robert SiJLiavAN, xM.A.
Mineralogy and Geology T. S. Hunt M.A., F.R.S.
Metaphysics and Ethics / ^^^^- James Dbaven, D.D.
I Rev. J. C. Murray, M.A.
Oriental Languages H' ^^- HiRschielder, Esq.
* I Rev. M. WiLLft, D.D.
Meteorology Q. T. KiNasTON,M.A.
Civil Engineering T. C. Kkefer, Esq., c.E.
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO,
GRADUATES.
Diite of
Admitcioo.
D.C.L.
1850. Croft, H. H. {Hon.)
1852. Crookshank, G (o4.)
1847. Lundy,Rev.P.J.(^rfe«„rfeOT)
1862. Smith, L. W.
LL.D.
Croaks, A., M.A.
Hurlburt, J.
Mncdonell, S. S.
^McMichael, D.
Patton, J.
'WicksoD, Rev. A.
M.D.
Beaumont, W. (/7on.)
Bovell, J. {Ad tundem.)
Boyd, W.
Boys, H. {Ad emdem.)
Chewett, W. C.
Cronyn, J.
Desmond, If,
Eastwood, W. O.
Eastwood, C. S.
Freeman, C.
Hamilton, J. (ob.)
Henry, J.
Herrick, G. {Admndem.)
King J. {ob.)
«AliIIer, T.
McKenzie, M.B. {ob.)
Nicol, W. B.
*0ille, L. S.
O'Brien, L.{Ad emdem.)
Pfiillips, T. G.
Richardson. J. H.
Scott. J. {Ad eundm.)
Shantz, S. E.
Thorburn, J. {AUundem.)
«TisdelI, F. B. {»b.)
Turner, H., {AJ eundem.)
Walker, N. 0.
Wanless, J.
1863.
1856.
1858.
18(50.
1858.
1860.
1860.
1848.
1863.
1844.
1851.
1860.
1853.
1851.
1851.
1853.
18-f4.
1864.
1854.
1844.
1859.
1853.
1850.
1859.
1845.
1860.
1850.
1850.
1864.
1859.
1861.
1859.
1859.
1862.
1. Medallist In Metaplysics and Ethici.
*• I'Old VledalligtinOftsslci.
_. .,!...-, :>itrUaillSI.
*. flold Mrdallifit
•• fldvsr AledaJlUt.
Date of M.D.
Admisalon.
1853. Winer, W.
1856. Woodruff, W.
M.A.
1849. Baldwin, Rer. E.
1857. Barber, G. A. {ob.)
1858. Barrett, M.
1845. Barron, P. W.
1858. Blake, D. E.
1857. Boulton, J. p.
1868. iBowIby, W. H.
1850. Boyd, J.
1861. ^Boyd.J.A.
1856. lloyd, W. T.
1856. 'Brown, J.
I860. Cameron, H. {Ad eundm.)
1856. C&mhie, C. {Ad eundem.)
1858. *Cattenach, A. J.
1854. sciark, A. M.
1858. Craigie, W.
1864. «Cooper, G.
1867. TCrombie, E.
1868. scrombie, M. M.
1863. BCrooks,A.
1849. Crookshank, O. {ob.)
1850. Draper, W. G.
1863. lOEHof. C. P.
1857. "English, C. E.
1860. i^Fitch, B. p.
1867. "Fitzgerald, E.
1858. Francis, W, S.
1861. "Fraser, J. T.
1. Jameson Medallist.
^ ^Silver MedHllU in K?h?4 *""• "**
4. Gold Medallist in Modern u^guaee.
. «"'';'»'ne*""n Medallist. ""'K'"'8"»
'■''.fnKa,K*''^^-«-'«>'»J»n»p.
8. Gold M,.daliist in Classics.
^eJ'l' r.<*? "«"° ClHssics. and Sliver-
iJ'II/^m'I"!"'''" Ethics.
^" "Naturaf?hii;«^^h;:^"^^'"-"«« '"'*
U. Gold Medallist In ClLiM.
Date of
Admiation.
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO.
QRABVATEa—Conlinutd.
MA.
1864. JSFrisby, E.
1864."aibson, J. Morison.
1848. Grasett, Rev. E.
1863, Hatton. J. C.
1850. iHelHwell, J.
1859. Hill, Rev. G.
1859. Ilodgins, T. H.
1860. JHylcomb^ J. W.
1864. "Hubbert, J.
1869. Hume, Eev. R.
1862. Hunter, J. H.
1849. *Je88opp, Rev. II. B,
1858. Jones, C.
1860. 6Kerr, W. U. C.
1860. "Kennedy, G.
1858. 'Kingsmill, N.
1857. Liiwrason, W. L.
1848. Lewis, I.
1864. Light, R.N.
1845. Lightburne, S.
1859. Litton, J. L. (Ad eundem.)
1864. SLoudon, J.
1849. Macdonell, S. S.
1858. Macnabb, A.
1856. «Marling, 8. A.
1868. Montgomery, Rev. D. E.{Ad
leundem.)
1864. Morris, J. U.
1859. "AJosa, T.
1850. Murray, Rev. R. (oJ.)'
1857. "McGregor, C. J.
1856 McKeown, J.
ih' I. """■ 'i^«L'""^t5n Mathematics
1. Gold Medallist in CIbspIck.
S wT"" JI''?"'"'* In Metaphynlre. Ae
6. Gold Medallist in Classics.
8 n„r; »':?•'? '"'^'"Cla.s^c.s. ' "
On M M*1" n!"'*" "atll«matio8.
OoI,| Meda Ii«t in Classics, and Chan-
„ andM^tn'i^an'^™' "*'"-««««
Date of
AdmiHion. M.A.
1850. McLean. T. A.
1868. >McLellan, J. A. ,
I860. Ale Michael D.
1864. '.MoMurriob, W. B
1864. 'McNisb, N.
1868. Oille,L.S.
1859. Paul, CD.
1866. <Peterson, H. W,
1845. Ramsay, W.
1862. Reeve, W. A.
1848. »Roaf, J.
1867. Ryerson, E. P.
1861. Sampson, D. A.
1858. 'Sanderson, Rev. J. E.
1848. «Stennett, Rev. W.
1864. ^Sullivan, R.
1868. Tassie, W.
1866. Taylor, T.W. {Ad eundem.)
1859. Tudell, F. B. (o6.)
1869. Turpin, J. (^rfeunrfeff,,)
1869. ^Walker. N.O.
1860. Waters, D.
1858. Watts, W. A. {Adeundem.)
184a Wedd, W. '
1849. We8tropp,R G (4rf«M„rf,m.)
I860. ^Wiekion, Rev. A
1863. Willi.-..., A. L.
1857. Win. ..J. (^rf,„„^^,
1864. Withrov, W.H.
1864. lowoods, S.
B.CL.
1854, Boyd, J.
1851. Crooks, A.
1847. ZeW*,/.
4. Silver Meda ^in Kthin.
Metaphys C8 aw in b-.m!! "* *°
T, Gold Medallist inMetwhv«.«"i .
Silver M-vl.!!!"!'- ''^•^- • *«-•««»
8. Gold Medinut'invatuMl^?*"''*^
8. Vide ante. ' ""'""'al Science*.
10. Gold Sledalllit in CkwlcB,
\
UKIVERSITY OF TORONTO.
Date of
Admission
QRADVATES-Continued.
MA.
1854. "Frisby, E.
1864. "Gibson, J. Morieon.
1848. Grasett, Rev. E.
1863. Hatton. J. C.
1850. iHelliwell, J.
1859. Hill, Rev. G.
1869. Ilodgins, T. H.
1860. aflolcombi J. W.
1864. SHubbert, J.
1859. Hume, Eev. R.
1862. Hunter, J. H.
1849. *Jes8opp, Rev. H. B.
1868. Jones, C.
1860. 6Kerr, W. U. C.
1860. "Kennedy, G.
1868. ^Kingsmill, N.
1857. Liiwrason, W. L.
1848. Lewis. I.
Date of
Admission. M.A.
1850. McLean, T. A.
1868. iMcLellan, J. A. ;
I860. McMiehaelD.
1864. »McMurrlch, W. B.
1864. 'McNiah, N.
1858. Oilte, L. S.
1859. Paul, CD.
1856. t'Patat>an^ Tr m
— —.oOu, LI, rr.
1845. Bamsay, W.
1862. Reeve, W. A.
1848. fiRoaf, J.
1857. Ryerson, E. P.
1861. Sampson, D. A.
1858. 'Sanderson, Rev. J. E.
1848. «Stennett, Rev. W.
1854. TSuUivan, R.
1858. Tassie, W.
I)lit« of « -, -
Adinliiiun. B.C.L
1847. lloaf, J.
1861. 'Stinson, B. [oh.
LL D.
npguo, T. ir.
Benson, R. L.
n»lliune, J,
Itliiin, D.
Hoys, W.
1858. ^liowlKy, W. H.
18(10. Bowlby, J. W.
Cocliriuie, S. II.
Crombif, M. M.
Cronyn, V.
Cross, J. P.
Cumin, J.
Denison, 0. P.
Donroclic, E. J.
Douglna, W.
Donaldson, J.
Duggnn, a. P.
1858. n:nyl,Mh, C. E.
1801. English, L.
Fiirewell J. E.
Fitzyerald, E.
Foster, W. A.
llunn, J. V.
Ilancook, J. W.
1858. Hoilgins, T.
1860. llodglns, J. O.
1862. Ilolcomb, J. W.
1864. Ellington, J.
1804. Joseph, J. p,
1804. Kennedy, 0.
Laird, W. P.
Lerinrx, D.
I860. 'Livingsione, J.
1862. ■Marling, A.
Meredith, W R.
Miller. W. V.
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO.
GRADUATES— ronfffliwi.
Dntn nf
Adiiiliiklcin.
1863.
1800.
.1801,
1850.
1801.
1860.
1859.
1800.
1802.
1800.
1801.
18Ga.
1861.
1804.
1804-
18U4.
1858.
1860.
1860.
1800.
1859
1S04
1803.
1861.
LL.D.
Moore, Q. E.
MoCtiughejr, J.
MoDonnId, J. P.
O'llricn, W. L.
O'Gnrft, M.
Osier, B. B.
Pnpp«, 0. S.
Tenfon, E.
Road, P. A.
Robortiton, II.
^Sampson, J). A,
Sisson, J.
Smith, J. P.
Smith, 0. T.
'Smith, R.
Snelling, R.
•Spencer, T. 11.
Stftnton, W. I.
Staynor, P. II.
Stephens, R. P.
Stewart, II. D.
Stuart, A. II.
Upper, M. C.
Wood, S. O.
Wood, S. 0. (ob.)
M.B.
*Aikins, M. II.
•Barnhnrt, C. E.
1860. 'Bascom, J.
1864. Bell, W. II.
Bell, J.
^Bolster, J.
Cascaden, J.
Constnntinides, P.
Covernton, W. II.
Dack, T. B. N.
*DeGra8Pi, 0. P.
1808.
1858.
1804,
1801.
1801.
180 J.
1800.
1802.
1802.
1861.
1858.
1869.
1862.
1864.
1861.
1863.
1860.
1869.
1861.
1861.
1862.
1802.
1862.
1860.
18U2.
1868.
1859.
1861.
1862.
1862.
1864.
1863.
1803.
1862.
1. OoUl Meaallbt,
li. Uo.J MtdHUi.-U
8. Silver Meilallist
4. Qoia -Medallist.
i>. Siirvr MednUIUi
1. SilTer Medallist.
2. Silver Mtdaliist.
3. Silver Vledullift.
4. Silver Metfalligt.
6. Uold MeUalliKt.
6. Uold Me<Jalli^t
?- Giild .\!ti;5?;"*s*
8. Quid Medaiiiit
UNIVBRgIT¥ 0? TORONTO.
ORADUAT£S-Con<iiitt«/.
Admifflon
M.B.
1864. Eby, A.
1862. Eokhardt, T. B.
1861. Elliott, J.
1867. "Francis, W. 8.
1804. Fulton, J.
1864. Harlcy, J.
1864. Kelly, M. J.
1859. »King, J.
1864. Langs, M. 8,
1860. 8Martyn, DcW. H.
1860. *Morton, E. D.
1868. McAlpine, D. L.
1803. McCallum, J.
1863. McCool, D. B.
1803. McKay, VV.
1864. fixMoLaughlin, J. W.
1864. Newman, J. B.
1864. Nicol, II.
1860. «Og(ieu, W. W.
1868. Orton, R.
1860. 'Playter.E.
1861. Pollock, D. J.
1864. Potta, R.
1868. SRamsay, S. F.
1864. Sill, A.
1861. Sinclair, L. C.
1863. Stewart, J. W.
1801. Tempest, W.
1864. Thorn, J. C.
1864. Tisdale, J. C.
1863. Trenor, J. ;i
1864. Vail, C. L.
1864. Whiteside, W. N.
1864. Wian, T. B.
B.A.
1854. Adams, 0.
1853. "Alma, E. J. (oA)
1. silver Medallist
2. Silver. Medallist, '
3. .Silver M^dullist.
4. Silver MrdHllisI:.
6. Gold Medal lift.
C. Sliver .VltMlalllxt.
f. Silver Med«lliBt.
8. Gold MedallUt.
Date of
Admiiilon. B.A.
1859. Appelbo, R. 8.
1860. "Armour, J. D.
1864. »Bayley, R.
1845. Beadle, D. W. (ad tundem.)
Bell, J. W.
Bernard, R.
Bethune, N.
Bettridge, W.
Blake, S. II.
Boulton, II. J,
Boulton, J.
1862. "Bucbnn, J. M.
1864. Buclian, II. E.
Bull, S. J.
Bui!, T. II.
. Miurns, N*.
*Connor, J. \V.
«Craig, T. D.
^Crawford, W. G.
Back, T. B.
DesVeux, O. W.
Bixon, Rev. A.
Dormer, 0. (ad eundm.)
Eastwood, W. 0.
"Evans, 0, M.
Ferguson, J.
•Fisher, J.
Fleming, W. B.
Francis, W. S.
Freer, C.
Gage, 0. L.
Geddes, Rev. G.
Gibbon, II. F. II.
"Gibson, Rev. J. Monro.
1864.
1868.
184>.
1858.
1868.
1845.
1848.
1853.
1857.
1857.
1804.
1864.
1862.
1849.
1858.
1845.
1867.
1849.
1850.
1804.
1862.
1864.
1857.
18ol.
1850.
1848.
1862.
1802
1. Gold MedAl list in Cla.«Mc8.
4. S ver Med«\li8tin Natural Scieucefc
*• ^",T„*'':«l»^>"t in Classics.
' Villi: u''.^'' If '" MetaphyilM.
dei^cis *^*«»''ii'''". and in Evl-
' iii„.„ i, •"■ ; 'iuui-Tn baiignagei,
man. ^*'*'*' "' '"^ *''^'''*'« *""*«-
UNIV»RgIT¥ Olf TORONTO.
aRADUATE6h-.(7o«<»«tt«/.
Date of
Admiifion.
M.B.
1864. Eby, A.
1862. Eokhardt, T. B.
1861. Elliott, J.
1867. "Francis, W. S.
1864. Fulton, J.
1864. Harley, J.
1864. Kelly, M.J.
1859. aKing, J.
1864. Laiigs, M. S.
1860. 'Martyn, DcW, H.
1860. *Morton, E. D.
1863. McAlpint, D, L.
1863. MoCallum, J.
1863. McCool, D. B.
1868. McKay, VV.
1864. «MoLaughlin, J. W.
1864, Newman, J. B.
1864. Nicol, 11.
Date of
AdmiMion. B.A.
1859. Appelbe, R. S.
1850. lArmour, J. D.
1854. ^Bayley, R,
1845. Beadle, D. W. (ad emdem.)
1864. Bell, J. W.
1868. Bernard, R.
1845. Betbune, N.
1853. Bettridge, W.
1858. Blake, S. H.
1845. Boulton, H. J.
1848. Boulton, J,
1862. SBucban, J. M.
1864. Bucban, H. E.
1853. Bull, S. J.
1857. Bui!, T. II.
1857. *Burn8, If.
1864. sConnor, J. W.
1864. «Crftiff. T n
UKIVER5ITT Of TCIONTO.
QKADVATES^Conitnutd.
IMtAOf
AdmlHlOD.
1801.
1850.
1861.
1861.
1868.
1860.
1864.
1862.
1845.
1864.
1868.
1864.
1848.
D.A.
Qillespie, A.
'Grant, A. J.
•Grant, A.
•Gront, O.
Orajdon, S. (Ad eundtm.)
Green, 0.
Grovor, T.
Hagar, C.
Hagerman, J. T.
*Harbottle, R.
Hector, A.
Hill, R.
Hudspeth, T. A. (ob.)
1858. BHuggard, J. T.
1861
1848.
1850.
1846.
1858.
1864.
1864.
1849.
Hunter, J. H.
Hurlbwt, j.
Hurlburt, H.
Jones, E. C.
Jones, H. C. {Ad eundem.)
Keefer, W. N.
King, J.
Kingsmin, J. J.
1863. "Lafferty, A. M.
1868
1862.
1849.
1861.
1864.
1845.
(Ob.)
^Le Sueur, W.
"Livingstone, R. T.
Lorlng, G. T. (ob.)
LouDt, S.
Macallum, A.
•Marsh, Rev. J. W.
1848. "Marsh, Rev. T. W.
1856. Matheson, T. O.
1866. "Matbeson, R.
1853. Meudell, W.
1868. Milroy, W.
1. .Umenoii Medalliot.
2. Gold Medallist In Naturil Sci.>ii(!es and
Plvcr Medallist in Metaphysica. 4o
8. Gold Medallist In Metaphysics, .tc.and
. „.^T'"«inan in Oriental LanguaK^s.
4. Silver Medallidt in Nitural dcien-es
6. Gdid Medallist in Cliwics.
e. Silver Medallist in Oassica and Mathe-
matics.
7. Silver Medallist in Classics.
o fill''*'" »''^".','.'''* '* i'o'BphyslcB, 4e.
10. Silv- Medallist fti Evidences.
U. Gold MedalllBt ia Natural Sciencas.
Pate of
Admlsalon. B A. '
1859. »MitolieIl, J. L.
1868. >Mulock, W.
1859. »MoDougall, J. L.
1859. Monearrnt, N.
1857. McDermid, P.
1864. «MoMiIIttn, J.
1862. McFayden, C.
1861. McOee, R.
1849. 'McKenzie, R. , j. o. D.
1849. McKtnxie, M. B. (ob.)
•McMurcby, A.
McNaughton, T.
^MoWilliam, W.
•MoWilliams, W. Q.
•Ogden, I. 0. (ob.)
1863. "Oidright, W.
1857. "Oliver, W.
1861. "Ormiston, D.
1804. Patte8on,T. C. (Adtundem.)
1857. Preston, Rev. J. A.
1857. "Rattray, W. J.
18G2. "Reeve, R. A.
1861. "Robarts, Rev. T. T.
1864. "Robertson, T. J.
1862. Roger, W. M.
1861. Ross, J. B.
1864. Rnssin, J.
1846. "Robinson, C.
I860. Rock, W.
1857. "Ross, J.
1861.
1858.
1862.
1863.
1860.
6
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
1«.
17
18.
■ n^^ W<'d» list in Natural Sciences.
■ n M if^?' :' '^ M'^*" Languages.
Silver MedalliHtin Mod.rn LanijuainML
Silver Medallist in Metapbysiw, |^
and Prince's Prizeman. ' ■•
Si ver Medrtilist in Evidences.
I l«!; '«^ '!l!'" *" »'«thHn>atio*.
f ^«' J^"^*'""* '" Metapbys cs.
Silver Medallist in Metaphysics.
Oo d Medallist in Metaphysics.
r«M u*^*,,'-''?" ^''^'''•" '^"nguages.
Gold Medallist in Natural Sciences
^'';'«',*'«<lH V'l '" -^'athematics.
Gold Medallist in Metaphysics.
Wivrr Medallist in Natural Sciences.
Mednilistin Metaphysics.
Silver VIsHnlii.f ir. 1...11 ..
■lameson Medallist
Gold xMedaliliit in Modern UngnagM.
UNIVBR8ITT OP TORONTO.
D«t« of
Admlulon. I3.A.
1860. Ross, D. W.
1804. JRutledge, J.
1863. 'Soott. T. IL
1800. Soott, W. ir.
1804. Seath, J. A. (Ad eundm.)
1804. •Seymour, F. E.
1848. Shaw, J. (oi.)
18G4. Sharpe, W.
1860. ^Sinclair, W.
1857. Smith, J. F,
1864. »Snider, E. P.
1804. Spotten, H. B.
1846. Stanton, J.
1849. «Stin8on, E. (ob.)
1862. Strang, H. I.
1850. 'Tftssie, H.
1858. Thom, Rev. J.
QB.APVATBB— Continued.
1. Silver ModalllRt la MaUiematlca.
2. Hilvor Mi'dalllst In Modern Language*.
8. Oolil Moilalllst In Modern LanKUBgos.
4. Silver Modullist In Natural ffcieucu*.
6. Oold McdalllHt In Natural Soionces.
6. Silver Medallist In Natural PhllosophT.
7. Silver Medallist In Classics.
Dato of
AdmlstioD. B.A.
1861. »Thom, J, II.
1846, Thomson, J. E.
1854. Trow, N. M.
1801. Turnbull, J,
1801. «Tyner, R. J, (ob.)
1862. 'Tytler, W.
1866. Unsworth, R.
1864. *Vander8mis8en, W. H.
1846. Vankoughnet, B. F. (ob.)
1854. swells, R. M.
1800. White, J.
1804. 'Wilson, J. 8.
1849. Winer, W.
1853. Woodruff, W.
1868. 'Wright, T. W.
1. silver Medallist In Math..^iatlc«.
2. Chancellor's Medallist for Kvidencos
3. Oold MedalllKt In Natural Science*. '
4. Silver Mtdnllint in ClasHics.
6. Jameson Medallist, and Silver ModAl>
list In Ethics.
6. Silver Medallist in Mathomatici
7. Qold M«dallist in Matbomaties.
DIPLOMAS IN CIVIL ENQINBEBINQ.
1851. Robertson, C. F. (Prizeman.)
1862. Irwin, B.
1868. Bellairs, W. G. (Prizeman.)
DIPLOMAS IN AGBICTILTUBE.
1860. Farewell, J. C. (Prizemw.)
1862. Forneri, C. C.
1862. Thompson, J. B. (Prizeman.)
10
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Sate of
Aiimission.
1857. Adams, R. W.
1859. Alma, T.
1864. Betts, J.
1864. Brough, C. A.
1860. Burnlmm, J.
1866. Cawtlira, II.
1857. Clarke, W.
1859. Clarke, A. A.
1860. D'Aub'gny, P.
1857. Dew; r, J.
1861. Dixon, T.
1862. Duncombe, D. ]
1859. Dunn, J. M.
1860. Freel, E.
1862. Frost, A.
1857. Ghent, S. 11.
1861. Gilbert, J. H.
1861. Glassco, J. T.
1864. Green, T. J. C.
1859. Ham.lton, J. C.
1857. Howell, A.
1857. Jones, H. C.
1863. Kelly, M. J.
1858. Kerr, J. W.
1859. Kerr, W. J.
1867. Lambert, W.
1864. Land, R. C. A.
FACULTY OF LAW.
Date of
Admission.
1857. Lapsley, W.
1864. Lash, Z. A.
1864. Lillie, J. A.
1864. Masterson, C. M.
1860. McCaul, G.L.
1859. MrGlashan, J.
1858. McKelcan, F.
1860. McKellar, P. D.
1859. McKenzie, W. L.
1859. McLennan, D,
1857. McNaughton, A. T.
1860. Peebles, J.
1862. Preston, J.
1803. Preston, D. IL
1864. Richardson, W.
1856. Scott, A. F.
1800. Selby, S. B. J.
1857. Shaw, G. C.
1861. Smith, A. F.
1861. Smith, R. W.
1864. Smith, D. S.
1856. Sullivan, W. B.
1864. Sullivan, D. L.
1861. Warren, E,
1864. Webb, E.
1859. Wethey, H.
1864. Williams, A.
FACULTY OP MEDICINE.
1863.
Aberdein, R.
1862.
Bulmer, T. S.
1863.
Anderson, H.
1862.
Burnett, D.
1863.
Beith, A.
1862.
Burnbam, E. L
1861.
Bigelow, A.
1863.
Burns, J. H.
1863.
Bowmai), J. W.
1863.
Carlyle, J.
1863.
Buohanaa, C. H.
1861.
Cassady, J.
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO.
11
UNDERGRADUATES— Con/mM«i.
Date of
AdmiBsion.
1864
1868
1863,
1863,
1858,
1861,
1861.
Cttssidy. J. J.
Chapman, 0. W.
Chrysler, W. H.
Clerke, C. H.
Donaldson. J. G.
DeLaHaye, A.
.V.W.. Douglas, C. _
1864. Douglasi /.rvT.
1864. Eccles, F. R.
1858. Farewell, J, E.
1864. Farewell, W. G.
1862. Fife, J. A.
1861. Forrest, R. W.
1S63. Goodell, R. H
1862. Gouinlock, W. v..
1863. Grote, 0. W.
1864. Gwyn, 11. C.
1863. Harrison, P.
1861. Henry, J.
1862. Hodder. P. W.
1861. Holme, J.
1862. Holme, W. R.
1861. Hornibrooke, E.
1863. Howe, J.
1863. Hughes, J.
1864. Hughes. A. H.
1862. Jackes, A. G.
1864. Jacques, T.
1862. King, R.
1863. King, P.
1861. Kitchen, E.
1863. Langrill, J. A.
1863. Lynch, J.
1861. McCarthy, J. L. Q.
1864. McConnell, J.
1863. McCulloch, J.
1863. McDonald, A. E.
1864. McFarlane, L.
1864. Mclntyre, N.
1863. McKenna, C.
1862. McPherson, A. G.
1862. Miokle, W. *
Date of
Admlgflion.
1862. Miller, W.H.
18G1. Milne, W.
1864. Montgomery, J.
1864. Morton, W.
1861. Munns, W.
18G3. Murray, R. G.
1864. Newton, J. H.
1864. Oronhyatekha.
1864. Palmer, R. V.
1863. Passmorc, W. J.
1863. Pentland, W. R.
1863. Penwarden, J.
1861. Perchard, J.;P.
1864. Quinlan, J. '
1862. Rae, F.
1858. Ramsay, R.
1800. Renwick, H.
18G1, Richardson, J.
18G0. Robertson, C.
18G0. Roche, A.
18G3. Ross, W.
18G2. Scholfield, D. T.
18G1. Shantz, S. E.
1861. Sinclair, J.
18G1. Smale, S. B.
1863. Smith, D.
1858. Sparrow, J. W.
18G0. Standish, J.
1859. Stinson, C. W.
18G2. Stubbs, J.
1860. Sutton, H. H.
1863. Tempest, W. F.
1864. Tennant.
18G3. Thorburn, R.
1864. Tyiwhitt, J.
1858. Wall, J.
18G3. Wallace. J.
1861. White, T.
1861. Wilkins, G.
1864. Workman, J.
185G. Young, S. H.
1^
UNIVBRSITT OF TORONTO.
UNDERGRADUATES—Confj/iMcrf.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
I
Date of
Admission,
Date of
Aamission.
1860. ^llirrt CKwiuli,
p. (Ad
1862
Byers, M.
1863. Adams, J.
l^eundem.)
1861
Cameron, A
1860. Alexander, R. H.
1858
Campbell, A.
-1864. Amos, W.
1861.
Campbell, A. P.
1868. Anderson, A.
1853.
Campbell, P.
1857. Andrew, A.
1861.
Campb^JUJ.
1858. Andrews, H. A.
1864.
V
Campbell, J. .
1863. Austin, J.
1864.
Carney, R. -
1859. Bain, W.
1858.
Carroll, W. A.
1861. Baldwin, R.
1864.
Carruthcrs, G. F
1862. Baldwin, R. R.
1859.
Cassady, J.
1860. Ballantyne, W. D.
1864.
Cassels, A. -
1861. Barber, R.
1861.
Cassels, W. G. P
1861. Barbour, W.T.
1864.
Chase, G. A. -
1862. Barker, P. M.
1861.
Chisholm, W. R.
1862. Barron, J.
1861.
Christie A. J.
1856. Bates, N.
1862.
Clark, H.
1860. Bearman, E. C.
1860.
Cleary, R.
1869. Bell, W. C.
1859.
Coleman, E.
1862. Bell, C. W.
1863.
Connon, C. H.
1861. Bemiss, D.
1859.
Corbett, G.
1858. Bethune, J.
1861.
Corbould, C.
1861. Bielby, P.
18G4.
Coyne, J. H. -
^ 18G/. Brigg, E. M.
1859.
Cowan, S.
1861. Black, D.
I860.
Croly, J. E.
1862. Bowes, J. 0.
1864.
Crozier, J. -
1858. Boys, W.
1863.
Currie, C. D.
1861. Bowers, J. E.
1860.
Cutten, H. II.
1860. Bigg. W. R.
1852.
Davidson, W.
1861. Brisbin, B.
1862.
Davidson, G.
1857. Brodie, J.
18G1.
DelaMater, H.
1857. Brown, W.
1864.
DelaMater, R. A.
1858. Brough, R. R.
18G2.
Delamere, T. D.
>1864. Bruce, J.
1862.
Denroche, H. M.
1862. Brunei, G.
1856.
Dick, A.
1863. Bryce, G.
1861.
Dickie, T.
1859. Buckland, W. G.
1864.
Dickson, G. -.
1859. Budd, S. A.
1858.
Dill, A.
1864. Burnfield, 0.
1860.
Dixon, A.
1858. Burnham, Q. A.
1862.
DobsoU, R. L.
1862. Butler, T. P.
1859.
Donaldson, J.
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO.
13
DNDERGRADUATES-Con<i/j««i.
Dato of
▲dmisBioD.
1868. Dow, J.
1863. Dowsley, A.
1863. E11.S, W. H.
- 1864. Evans, J,
1862. Falconbridge, W. G.
1862. Farley, P.
1861. Ferguson, P.
1861. Fitzgerald, W.
- 1864. Fleming, R. MoM.
1861. Fletcher, J.
1868. Forrest, W.
- 1864. Fobs, W. D.
1861. Foster, 8.
1863. Qalbraith, J.
1862. Gilles, G.
1861. Gcodwillie, G. S.
- 1864. Goodwillie, J. M.
1859. Gordon, J.
1862. Gould, J, E.
1857. Grahame, J.
1863. Graham, W.
1862. Greenlees, A.
1861. Greer, G. M.
1857. Grierson, J. C.
- 1864. Grover, T. M.
1860. Gundy, J. R.
1859. Hamilton, W. R.
> 1864. Hamilton, A.
1859. Hastie, A.
1863. Hill, A. C.
1862. Hill, H.- p.
1861. Hill, J.
- 1864. Hodge, G.
1861. Hodgson, J.
1860. Holme, J. C.
1862. Holmes, W. R.
1863. Hope, R.
I860. Hopkin, J. W.
1863. Hudson, R. S.
1856. Hume, H. H.
18G2. Hunter, D.
1858. Hurlbert, J.
1860. Jackes, C. B.
Dat«of
Admission
I860.
1864.
1863.
1860.
1858.
1860.
1860.
1861.
1861.
1862.
1860.
1861.
1864.
1859.
1858.
1861.
1858.
1859.
1861.
1859.
1863.
1859.
1863.
1860.
1864.
1860.
1860.
1861.
1862.
1857.
1861.
1861.
1860.
1861.
1861.
1862.
1861.
1861.
1857.
1860.
1861.
1863.
1864.
Jackson, J. P.
Jamieson, C. »•
Jeffers.
Johnstone, J,
Johnson, M. M.
Jolly, J. W.
Jones, S. A.
Junor, D.
Kay, W.
Kennedy, A.
Kerr, G.
Kerr, B.
Killmaster, J. ,
Kilpatrick, G,
King, W. 0.
King, A. McP.
Kirkland, T.
Laidlaw, R, J.
Lash, Z. A.
Lazier, S. P.
Lazier, W. D.
Ledyard, T.
Ledyard, W. E.
Lount, G.
Macdonald, W. -
Magee, J.
Malcolm, J.
Malloy, W,
Mewbum, H.
Miller, A. E.
Miller, J. H.
Millar, W.
Mills, J. H.
Mitchell, G. A.
Moore, W.
Moderwell, M. C.
Morgan, J. C.
Morrison, J.
Muir, T.
Mulholland, J.
Mulholland, J. W. P.
Munro, W.
Murdoch, A. _
14
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO.
UNDERGRADUATES-Con<in«firf.
Date of
AdmitiBion.
i
1861. Murphy, J.
- 1864, McArthur, " C.
1863. McBride, W.
1858. McCarrol, W.
-1864. McCoU, J.
1862. McDiarmid, W.
1860. McEwan, P.A.
1864. McQiachy, W.{Adeunclem.)
1858. McGregor, M. A.
1856. McGrigor, J.
1858. McGuire, T.
1861. Mclnnis, W.
1861. Mclnnes, D. J.
1863. Mcintosh, .7.
1858. Mclntyre, W. B,
1858. McKay, W.
1859. McKee, R.
1858. McKenzie, G.
1858. McKenzie, W.
1862. McKenzie, M.
1861. McKinnon, A.
1858. McLean, J.
1862. McLennan, F.
1863. McLennan, P.
1858. McPherson, A. F,
^ 1864. Nason, W. R.
-1864. Nichols, W. L.
1857. Northgraves, Rev. G. R.
~ 1864. O'Meara, C.
1861. Orr, R.
1860. Osborne, R, B.
1861. Osborne, J. K.
1858 Palmer, J, H.
1860. Park, S.
1862. Paterson, J. A.
1863. Patterson, E. G.
1860. Patton, F. L.
- 1864. Paul, E.
1860. Perchard, J. P.
1863. Phillips, J. W.
1858, Phillipps, H.
1859. Piatt, G.
1862. Porter, G. B.
Date of
Admiggion.
1861.
1863.
1864.
1861.
1861,
1861,
1862,
1860.
1861.
1863.
1861.
1861.
1864.
1861.
1862.
1857.
1859.
1862.
1862.
1863.
1858.
1863.
1869.
1860.
1857.
1861.
1861.
1864.
1859.
1857.
1858.
1863,
1862,
1858.
1864.
1864,
1870.
1861.
1859.
1863.
1861.
Preston, J.
Pruyn, D,
Purdy, J. -
Purslowe, A.
Quarry, J. J.
Rathwell, W.
Rattray, C. G.
Reynolds, R. (Ad eundem.)
Reazin, H.
Reesor, F. A.
Reid, D.
Reid, L. H.
Reid, W. J. -
Rennelson, W. H.
Rennio, G,
Ridout, J. G.
Ridout, J,
Ridout, J.
Robertson, L. H.
Robertson, J.
Robinson, E.
Robinson, E. F.
Rollo, J. F.
Rolph, J. W.
Roseborough, A. M.
Sanson, J.
Scott, R. G.
Scott, J, »
Seymour, C,
Shaw, J.
Shaw, W. J.
Shaw, A.
Sheppard, G.
Sills, 0.
Sinclair, A. -
Sinclair, J, E.
Small, J. S.
Smiley, J.
Smith, A.
Smythe, E. H.
Sp,ifford, J. 8.
1864. Sparling, G. B, -
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO.
15
UNDERGRADUATES-Coniwued.
Date of
Admission.
1859.
1861.
1860.
1863.
. 1864.
. 1864.
1858.
1859.
1863.
1860.
1862.
1861.
1862.
1863.
1861.
1859.
1859.
1859.
1861.
1860.
1859.
1858.
Squier, W. R.
Squire, G. H.
Stephenson, J.
Stevenson, R. A.
Stevenson, E, S.
Stevenson, J. H.
Stewart, H. D.
Stewart, A.
Stewart, McL.
Stowell, J.
Tait, J.
Tamblyn, W. W.
Taylor, H.
Taylor, J.
Terrill, J. J.
Thompson, A.
Thompson, J. B.
Thompson, W.
Thornburn, R.
Thornton, R. M.
Traver, A. H.
Trenholme, N.
Dato of
Admission.
1862. Tyner, A. C.
1859. Ussher, S. G.
1863. Walker, W. F.
1860. Wallace, D.
1864. Walshe, S. -
1859. Warren, C.
1864. Waters, R. II. -
1862. Watt, W.
1860. White, J.
1859. Wilkins, G.
1863. Williams, C.
1863. Wilson, G.
1859. Winn, T. B.
1864. Wismer, J. A. -
1858. Wood, S. G.
1858. Woodland T.
1863. Woodside, H. J.
1861. Woolverton, A.
1862. Wright, A. H.
1861. Wright, P.
1863. Yale, H.
1864. Yokome, F. R.
*
16
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO.
MEDALLISTS~-1864.
FACULTF OF LAW.
Gold Medal.
IdiogtOD, J.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
Gold Medal McLaughlin, J. W.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
Silver Medal Clatsics Connor, J. W.
" Vandersmissen, W. H.
Mathematict Robertson, T.J.
Wilson, J. S.
Rutledge, J.
Gold Medal Modern Languages Seymour, F. E.
Natural Sciences Snider, E. F.
Ethics, Met. Jf Civil Polity Craig, T. D.
" " McMillan, J.
I<
<(
<(
It
(C
(1
-— 1
It
WEDi
t.
i(
tt
t<
ft
tl
tl
IH,
SCHOLARSHIPS.
FACULTY OF LAW.
FiEST Ybab.
THIfiD " ..
McEenzie, M.
Gibbon, H. F. H.
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
First Year Harbottle, R.
Seoonr " Reeve, R. A.
Third " McCarthy, J. L. G.
UNIVERSITY OP TORONTO.
17
FACULTY OP ARTS.
Matriculation... Oreek and Latin 'Cassels, A.
Connon, C. H.
Bell, C. W.
Hill, J.
1. 'Ilamilon, A. (doable.)
2. 'Crozier, J.
Galbraitb, J.
Patterson, J. A.
Malloy, W.
Falconbridge, W. G.
Campbell, J. (double.)
FiBST Yeab
Second «« ««
Thied «« " ««
Matriculation... Mathematics
First Year "
Second «« «•
Third " «'
Second Year Modern Languages wilh ffitt.
Third " «'
" " " 2. Tamblyn, W. W.
Second Year Natural Sciences Morgan, J. C.
Third " " Thompson, J. B.
Second Year Metaphysics, ^c Delamere, T. D.
Third «' " Campbell, J.
Matriculation... General Proficiency 1. *Coyne, T. '
" " 2. spurdy, J.
" " 8. "Grover, T. M.
4. Hamilton, A.
1. Patterson, E. G.
2. Mewburn, H.
3. Smythe, E. H.
4. Yale, H.
/Campbell, A. P.
I Fitzgerald, W.
Foster, S.
First Year..
i< i<
(I ((
« i(
Second Year.
" «i
Third " .,
*l. Pupil of Upper Canada College.
2. " Brantford Oramtuar School.
3. « Toronto Grammar School.
4. Pupil of St. Thomas Grammar School,
o. " Upper Canada College.
6. " Upper Canada College.
PRIZES.
English Essay. (The Science of Language) Campbell, J.
French Composition Tamblyn W W
Agriculture Keefer, W. N.
THESIS FOR M.A.
1863 McLellan, J. A.
1864 MoMurrich, W. B.
PRINCE'S PRIZE.
McMillan, J.
mni\)tvuiw of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1861,
MATRICULATION.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
GREEK.
Hxamznera:!^^''- J^«? ^^^aul, LL.D.
\ Thomas Moss, M.A.
Translate :
Mera rovrov^ dWo^ aveart], eTTiSeiKVv^ fxev einjdeiav
Tov ra TTkoia alrelv KeXevovro^, mirep traktv top ctoXjov
Kipovfirj TToiovfievov, iiriBeiKvi,'; Be oj? evTjOe^ el'i; ^J^fiopa
aiTeiv Trapa tovtov, <^ Xvfiatvo/ieda rrjv irpa^tv. Et Be
KaX^ Tw 'nyeixovL TTLarevcrofiev, w &v Kvpo<i BiBS, rl KiaUet
/cat, ra aKpa rjiuv KeXeveiv Kvpov irpoKaTaXafi^dveiv ;
Eyoi yhp^ oKvoCriv fiev &v 619 ra TrXola ifijSaiveiv, h rnxlv
Boi'q, fir) 7]fid^ avraZ^ rah Tpiijpeai KaraBvarj' (f>o^olfir}v
odvr^ riyefiovL & Bolt), eTreadai, firj ^fia^' dydr/y 60ev
ovx olov^ re eo-rafc e^eXdelv /3ovXoi/X7jv B" av, ukovto^
airmv Kvfiov. XaOeiv avrov aTreXOwv o ov Bvvarov iariv.
'A\\' eryw <^ixi ravra fiev (f)Xvapia<; eivai- Bokci Bi fioi,
avSpa^ eXOovTa^ irpo^ Kvpov. oirive^ iirLTTjBeioi. <rvv
KXeap^rp,^ epcorau CKeivov rl ^ovXerai r/ficu xPW^at. koX
euv ji^v r) irpa^t^i fi irapairX'qcrta om-rrep koI TrpoaOep
eprJToroi^ ^evoi<;, eKeadaL Kot ^fia^ koI firj Kadov^
eivai Ttav irpoaBev tovt^ avvava^avrav, 'E^y Be fielicav
.<■!
^!I|i
t) TTpa^L^ 7ri<} •jrpoaOev ^alvqrai, koX iTrnrovarepa, koI
iTTiKivBuvoTepa, a^iouprJTreia-avTa'qp.a^ dyeiv, r} irenTOema
7r/oo9 (f>i\,iav a<l)tivaL' ovto) yap koI e-rro/xevot hv <f)i\oi
avTQj KoX TTpoOvfioL tTToifieOu KoX uTTiovTet acr(f)a\co^ &v
uTrioiixev. 6 ti 8' &v 7rpo<i ravra Xiyrj dvayyelXai Sevpo.
t)p.a<i 8' aKovaavTa<i vrpo? rama ^ovKevea-Oai. "EBo^e
ravTa, koI avBpa<; eXofxevoi, avv Kkedp-^fp Trifiirova-iVi
OL ypcoTwv Kvpov ra So^avra rfj (rrparia.
Xenopiion, Anabasis, i., c. 3.
1. aXKo<i. Who is conjectured to have been the speaker ?
Why?
2. iiriSeiKvv';. Give principal parts of this verb.
3. w du Kvpo^ Bm. Explain the construction of ^.
4. uKpa. Where ?
5. Tptrjpeai. Decline this noun in the contracted and
uncontracted forms.
6. Boirj. Give all the moods of the active voice of this
tense.
7. \a6elv avTov uTreXdoov. Mention some other verbs that
employ the participle in a similar manner.
8. 'xprjcrdai. Explain the construction of this verb with
the accusative and the dative.
9. o'lairep kuI Trporepov. On what occasion ?
10. fiei^wv. What other form ? Give degrees of compari-
son.
11. a^tovV' How governed ?
12. 7r/309 (pikiav. Supply the ellipsis.
13. Parse : nroiovpbivov, Sc3, okvoiijv, cuydr/oiyi^ekOelvyXadelv,
KaKiov^, a(f}L€vai,, eKofjuevoi, Bo^avra.
14. Derive : TrXota, crroXo?, Tpt^p7]<ij aKavy aa<^aKq<i.
15. State what you know of Ciearchus.
Translate :
11.
'ETrel B^Karenifii>0v iiro roO 7rarph<i ^arpdTrm Av^
Tov Kn) ru^i^ " ^ ' Y^J^cKi TTpoecTtfai. ecpo^ovvTO au-
rov. Kai yap epy^ eneSe^KuvTo, koX e"\eyezl 6tl o.V
avrrore '^poono, hre\ dna^ ^tXo, airoc, i^ro oU^l
ere ^Yecov, yi,o,.ro, he hk kAkcov ^plZ^v tal
epo, 8 ^., ,al d rl, re dyadhv ^ ,aKhv /o4X atlv
eyiro roaovrovxpovov ^^v, hre vLK<6r, Ka\roi,rS kI
ircficopelro. ^^^'^?''. «A.\ ac^ecSearara 7rdvru>v
Xenophon, Anabaau, i., c. 9.
1. Karewiiirrer,. Force of Karh here ?
2. Kao-TwXoO irehiov. Where situate ?
3. ^pvyia^. How subdivided ?
4. arreecra^iyov K6pov. What is the construction '
cei^b^^tr;rl!nrtit^li^^^^^^
6. Trpoo^To. What is the form in common Greek ?
7. /^6('oi.9. Give degrees of comparison.
8. Distinguish between Kal d and et Koi.
^' "^""''P^' ^"^ - T«/,ai/^6.o,. Explain the idiom.
■
1^
10. ToaovTov ypovov. Why ftccusativo ?
11. KaTaye7<''tt^. Supply tho ellipsis.
12. Parse : ttXc/o rov, /rirciVotTo, uvroo-p^otTO, c'/Xoi/to, yepoiv-
TO, Trpd^eiau, el'a.
13. Mci tion any other historical works by Xenophon.
14. Form the cor narativo and superlative of: rap^i/?,
ixBpo^, oKiyo^j pnSios, fieyu'i.
■'1.1
min\}tt:uit9 of ^Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
MATKTOULATION.
LATIN.
Uxaminets:!^^'^' ^^^^i McCaul, LL.D.
\ Thomas Moss, M.A.
Translate :
^ HsDC ubi dixit, pauUulum commoratiH, signa canere
jubet, atque instructos ordines in looum a luum deducit.
periculo animus amphor esset, ipso pedes cKercitum pro
oco atque copus instruit. Nam, uti planit, .s erat in^e?
8.n. tros montjs et ab dexterarupis aspera, .cto cohortis
colW^ Ah L"''' ^^^•'^"'^^""^ «igna in sub.idio arctius
collocat. Ab his centunones, omnia lectos vt evocatos
pr^terea ex gregariis militibus optumum que, .quearma:
turn in primam aciem subducit. C. Manlium .n dextera
Faesu anum quendam in sinistra parte curare j. bet fnse
belTo rT V^T' P-P'-^uila^n assi i 'qZ
bello Cimbrico C. Man us in exerciSu habuisseaicebTtu^
At> ex altera parte C. Antonius, pedibus ^cr >r m^nA
pTmhtifTl "^\"''^^ ^- ^«^-- legl"^: Uum
peiraittit. Illo cohortis veteranas, quas turau i causa
suSi's'TcIt" t""^^' P"^ '^^ e'etlum^exercuum n
subsidus locat. Ipse equo circumiens, unumquemaue
ToZTZT.f-'''' '"''^^"'•' ^°Sat, ut' memrerinTs
contra la rones inermis, pro patria, pro liberis, pro aris
atqne focis su.s certare. Homo m litaris, quod anpZ
SrcurmV"'"l"^-'^"^ P^^^^^^- au^lega^f u
f'li'l.':!'^. ^^S"^ gJ?"^ ^n exercitu fuerat. plerosoue
'^^;. x.;;;-.aque eoruiu tortia noverat ; ea commemorando
mihtum aniraos accendebat. commemorando
Sallust, Catilina, c. 59.
1. Parse signa^ pedeSj ah dextera^ ampUua anno8 tngintaj
prcelio, tumulti causa.
2. What examples in this extract of " the ablative abso-
lute?"
S. Mark the quantity of the penultimate of paullulunty
deducit, collocate colonis, neguihat, latrones.
4. Oeto cohort IS. How many cohorts in a legion ? How
was each cohort divided ?
5. Centuriones. What was the designation of the chief
centurion of a legion ?
6. Fsesulanum. Where was Feesulee ?
7. Bello Cimhrico. Give a brief account of it.
8. C. Antonius. What oflSce did he hold ? Who was
his colleague ?
9. Distinguish appello and nomino, proslium, pugna^ and
acies, prsefectus^ legatus^ and prator, tumultus and helium.
II.
1. Decline fJia^ domus, hoe, vis, iter, senex.
2. What is meant by " apposition ?"
8. Compare pulcher, leviSf similis, parvus^ nequam,
henevolus.
4. What deponent verbs govern the ablative ?
5. Conjugate mordeo, spargo, tollo, pendo, gigno, soleo.
6. Give a list of verbs Avhich govern the genitive.
III.
Translate :
* Cuncta equidem tibi, Rex, fuerit quodcumque, fatebor
Vera,' inquit : ' neque me Argolica de gente negabo :
Hoc primum ; nee, si raiserum fortuna Sinonem
Finxit, vanum etiam mendacemque improba finget.
Fando aliquod si forte tuas pervenit ad aures
Belidse nomen Palamedis et inclyta fama
Gloria : quern fais^ su' proditione Felasgi
Insontem, infando indioio, q^uia bella vetabat,
Bemisere neci ; nunc cassum lumine lugent ;
Illi me comitem et consanguinitate propinquum
Pauper in arma pater primis hue misit ab annis :
Dum stabat regno incoluinis, reguraque vigebat *
Conciliis, et nos aliquod nomenque decusque
Gessimus. Invidia postquam pellacis Ulixi
(Haud ignota loquor) superis concessit ab oris ;
Afflictus vitam in tenebris luctuquo trahebam,*
Et casum insontis mecum indignabar amici.
Nee tacui demens ; et me, fors si qua tulisset,
Si patrios unquara remeassem victor ad Argos,
Promisi ultorem ; et verbis odia aspera movi. '
Hinc mihi prima mali labes ; liinc semper Ulixes
Criminibus terrere novis ; hinc spargere voces
In valgum ambiguas, et quserere conscius arma.
Nee requievit enim, donee Calchante ministro—
Sed quid ego haec autem nequi(iquam ingrata revolve ?
Quidve moror, si omnes uno ordine habetis Achivos
Idque audire sat est ? jamdudum sumite poenas : '
Hoc Ithacus velit, et magno mercentur Atridse.'
Virgil, uEneid, ii., vv. 77-104.
1. Parse neci, cassum lumine, afflictus. me, in v. 94,
terrere^ veht. ^ , , ,
2. Belidee. What is the origin of this name? What
dimculty as to quantity ?
3. Falsa sub proditione. Explain the meanintr
4. Pelasgi. Who ? Why so called ?
5. Primis ah annis. Of what ?
6. Argos. In what part of Peloponnesus ? State the
other divisions.
7. Write brief notices of Palamedes, Ulysses, and the
■Atridce,
^ 8. Calchante ministro. By what name is the figure
0. Give the laws of the quantity of final as, es, is, os
and us. ' > > *'«>
SlnfUctKiiUji of t!rocotito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
MATRICULATION.
LATIN.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
ET • f Rev. John McCaul, LL.D.
■^^^^*^^^*-'i Thomas Moss, M.A.
Translate :
I.
Sic te diva potens Cypri,
Sic fratres Helense, lucida sidera,
Ventorumque regat pater
Obstrictis aliis prjeter lapyga,
Navis, quae tibi creditum
Debes Virgilium, finibus Atticis
Reddas incolumem, precor,
Et serves animse dimidiura meao.
Illi robur et jes triplex
Circa pectus erat, qui fragilem truci
Commisit pelago ratem
Primus nee timuit praecipitem Africum
Decertantem Aquilonibus,
Nee tristes Hyadas nee rabiem Noti,
Quo non arbiter Hadrise
I\/l *i 1 #\*. ^■r\\l f\wr\ (^M«« »^rt»%«*«/\ ^Tiili* T*»rt4'0
XTXu-jui, luIxClC DCU pOiiClU T UiU llclu.
Quern mortis timuit gradum,
Qui siccis oculis monstra natantia,
.i.
If:
P.-t; Ti
iii
Qui vidit mare turgidum et
Infames scopulos Acroceraunia ?
Nequicquam Deus abscidit
Prudens Oceano dissociabili
Terras, si tamen impige
Non tangenda rates transiliunt vada.
Horace, Odes, i, 3, vv. 1-24.
^.fh^^^^^'^ *^® following words governed— ee, CyprL
hot, fimbus, zlli, Aquilonihus f
2. State the geographical position of Cmrua, Attica,
Uadria^ Acroceraunia.
3. Fratres Helensc ; ventorum pater. What were their
names ?
^ 4. Give the Latin designations of the winds from eieht
points of the compass. °
5. Reddas. Why in subjunctive ?
6. Write a brief account of the Argo.
7. Hijadas. What was their Latin name ?
8. Give scales of the metres in this ode.
9. Give scales of the metres in the Alcaic stanza.
m
II.
1. Distinguish ohlltus and bhUtus, sede and sede, vinci-
turmd vmcitur, nota and nota, labor smd labor, iacerent
and jaeerent. '^
2. What verbs take a double accusative after them ?
3. Distinguish os, oris and os, ossis, vas, vadis and vas
vasts, career and carceres, littera and litterx, opera and
operse, quccritur and queritur.
4. Explain the use of the interrogative particles utrum
auj ne, and num. '
5. Distinguish dolus, fraus, and fallacia, segrego, se-
pono, and sejungo, extemplo, repente, and subito.
6. What is oratio ohliqua ? How are the moods chanced
When a speech is transferred to that form ?
. 1-24.
'» Oypriy
Atticaj
3re their
>m eight
, vmci-
icerent
or
d vasy
'a and
itrum,
10, 86-
anged
Translate ;
Netamen ignores variorum jura dierum •
Ille Nefastus erit, per quem trk v^.l -i
Fastus erit, pe; quem^i:geteb7tti ''"'"' '
Nonarurn tutela deo%aret. Omnibus stis
Ne fallare cave, proximus Ater er t ^
Trnt'TV''-' ^"'^ ^'^ Roma kiebus
Damna sub adverso tristia Marte tuli
H^c mihi dicta semel, totis h^renia fastis
Ne senem rerum scindere cogar, erunt '
Ecce tibi faustum, Germanice, nuntiat annum
Inque meo primus carmine JanSadest'
Jane biceps, anni tacite labentis orLo *
Solus de superis qui tua terga vides'
Ovid, Fasti, i., w. 45-70.
2. Tna verba. What ?
3. What are dies intercisi ?
4. Populum includere seiih'<i a^« , i, . • .
5 v54 WW ?? ^«^^hat IS the reference?
^' V. 54. What IS the Latin word for this ?
o. Jixpress in Latin the Sfifli np q ^ ,
October, the 6th of July °^ September, the 13th of
7- V. 60. To what is the reference ?
8. Writfi brief n^'nlj-^.f
9- What Latin authors wrote Elegiac?
ft:
Uni\}tv»it^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
MATRICULATION.
GREEK.
HONORS AND SCOLARSHIPS.
Uxaminers : i ?,?^^ McCaul, LL.D.
< Thomas Moss, M.A.
Translate :
T^i/ Afey 7^^ a{;v vrfc Borj i\!Ka)7r€<i 'Axaioi
E? Xpvai^v irkii-Kovaiv. cijov^yi hh Ba>pa civaKTt'
Irjvbe veov KXiairjOev e/Sav KyjpvKe^ ayovTe<i
Kovprjv Bpiaijo^, Wjv ixol hoaav vle^ 'Axamv.
y^^i'i '^ Vf ^'^^«°"«'' 7^5 'n-epiaxeo jratSo^ Ojoq-
^t^ffova- OuXvfiTrSvSe Ata Xlaat, et irore hn tl
H e-rret (ovrjaa^ KpaSlijv Aw9 ye koX epyo).
UoWdKi ycip aio irarpo^ ivl fi^ydpoiaiv ^Kovaa
W//6i^9, ir ecfirjaea Ke\atve^kl Kpovlcovt
UtT; ev adavaroiaiv ueiKea Xotyhv dfivmt,
OTnrore^^cvJvvBrjaao 'OUfXTrcoc ^6e\ov dXXoc,
tiprj r r}8e lioa-eiSawv Kal UaWh^ 'AOtji'T).
AXXa ai, jhv 7' iXOovaa, Oeh, {jireXvaao Seaacov,
ilX eKajoyxeipov KaXiaaa e? fiUKpbv "OXvuttov,
Op Bpiapecov KaXiovat deol, dvhpe^ U re Trai^re?
Aiyalm • o yhp arke ^ly ov Trarph'i dixdvuiv. ,
Iliad, I. vv. 389-414.
1. "AvaKTu "Who is meant ?
2. do. Parse.
is
8. Distinguish between o7o^ and oto^.
4. Lino 404. Parse ov.
6. Write the common forms of : e^avy uKovaa^ Kovp'qvy vU<:.
6. Give the derivations of: eXUayne^, K€\aive(f>ii, deiKea.
II.
Translate :
T(o 7 o)<i ^^ovXevaavre BieTfiayev r) fiev cTretTa
Et9 aXaaXro fiadeiav am alyXTjevro'; 'OXvfiTrov,
Zev<;8k ebv Trpoj? Swfia. Oiol B" a/xa iravre^ avearav
E^^eSetov, (r(f)ov irarpo'i ivavrlov ovSi rt? ctXtj
Metmt itrepyofievov, aXX avrloL ecrrav airavTa.
n<i fiev kvOa KaOe^er eirl dpovov. ovBe fitu"lipr}
UyvoLTja-ev iSova on ol cvfilppdara-aTO ^ovXd<{
A^yypoTre^a Qhi^, OvyaTqp dXioio yipovro^.
AvTiKu K€^TOfiLOL(TL Aiu KpoviQJva TrpoarjvBa.
" Tt9 8' av Toi, BoXofirjTa, Oecov <rvp,(f}pd<7craT0 ^ovXa^ ;
Aiel rot (f)tXov iarlv ifiev dirovoa^Lv iovra,
KpVTTTdBia jypoveovra BiKa^e/jLCV ovBi rl irdt fiot
Tlpot^pfoy jerXrjKa^ elirelv eiro<i o rri votjafj^i"
„,P^^^ ^' »7/i6t73eT' Gireira iraTrjp dvBpwv re dedv tC
'iipVf M ^ •n-dvTa'i ijjioix; iTneXireo ixvdov^
ElBija-€cv' ;!^aX€7rot roc ecrovr dX6x(^ nrep iovarj.
Iliad, I., vv. 531-546.
1. Parse BUriiayev, oXto, rffvoirjcrev.
2. Give common forms of : dvearav, <rvfi<l>pd(Ta-aTO, dXloio,
BiKd^cfieVf iiriiXTreo.
^ 3. Derive : dpyvpoire^a. Keprofiio^, BoXofujTfj^, wpoApwv,
aXo')(p<i,
4. Notice any idiomatic peculiarity in lines 536-538.
III.
Translate :
"EvBa Be rrrvp K€iavT€<; i6v(rafiev' r}Be Kot avroi
TvpSiv alvvfievot ^dyop,ev' fiivofiiv re /xiv evBov
'^fievoi, 6009 eTTtiXOe vifxcov ^epe 8' o^pifiov dx^oi
vX7}<i d^aXer]<i, Xva ol TroriBopTriov eir).
CKToadev S' dvTpoio BaXwv opvaayBoy effntcev
VM'€i<t Be Bei<TavTe<i direaavp^ed'' e? uv^^v avrpov
aujhp Sy e,<i eupy cTTrio^ r)\aae irlova p.^\a,
apvecov, re rpdyov, re. ^aSeir^, Lo0ev ai,\r,,.^^^ '
0/ipcf.ov' ovK&u rovye 86co kuI etKoa\a^ac
eadXal. rerpa^vKXoi Jtt' o{iSeo<i 6x\la-^euiv.
roaavv vXc^arov 'rrhprjv iTrWrj^e dCpvatu.
e^ofievo, 8 r)p,eXyev 6c, Kal ^rjKdSa, aL?,
'rravra Kara ^ocpau, Kal in-' if^^pvop ^k,v kK&crr,.
Odyssey, IX., vv. 230-245.
1. Parse: ic^lavre,, Aireaavtieea, o^Beo^:, TfKev.
3. ^Xl^aro,, Mention different derivations.
4. Distinguish between ea'a and Ova).
Translate :
^ "^n? i<f>diir)v' 6 U p: olp^^a, ^p.e(^€ro uiOtp-
o) iro-rroL rjpaXalij pe 7raXal6ara 0i<Td>a0' kdveL.
-T^Xepo, hvpvpcSrj,, 6, pamoaiipr) iK^Kaaro,
Kat pavr€vop€vo, Kareyi^pa KvKXd>7r€(Taiv'
09 poc e<hraSe rrdvra reXevr^aea0a, oiriaato,
X^cpcovep O8v<rno, dpaprr,aea0aL 6ira>'jrri^. *
ev0a8 eXeyae<r0ac, peydXvv iircupivov dQv
aXX aye 8eyp 08vaev, ha roi ndp ^eivia Lro
^opnvv r' 6rp^,co 86pevac KXvrhv ^ElvoaiyaZ
rovjap eyco rrac, elpc, rrar^p S' i,,^, ei;^ Ja. elvat-
avro,8, a. k i0iXr,a\Jr^aerac, ov8i rchxXo,,
ovre 0ecov paKdpmv, oiire 0vr)r&v dv0ptiyirov.
Odyssey, IX., vv. 506-521.
1. A tto'tto^ Explain the origin of the exclamation.
2. Parse : eSiyarjv and iirLeipevoi'.
3. evvoalyaiov. Who is meant ?
V.
1. To -whom is tlio invoiitiou of the Greek alphabet
ascribed? Viy whojn are adtHtions Baid to have been made?
Whence were the forms of the breathings derived ?
2. Wliat do you understand by SiopOcoaei^ ? Distin-
guish between these, kut avBpa, and these Karh TroXet?.
3. Mention writers whom you consider representatives of
the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and ^olic dialects.
4. Mention three principal cases in which you may cer-
tainly know that the Digamma existed in a word.
5. Wlien is a long vowel "V diphtlion^ at the end of a
word generally/ made short in Homer ? What exceptions ?
G. Explain the terms : paroxytonc^ propm'oxytone^ and
propcrispomcnon.
mnmvHitii Of JCotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18C4.
MATKICULATION.
GREEK-LAW.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: IJ^^* '^^^^^' McCaul, LL.D.
/Thomas Moss, M. A.
Translate :
I.
ItiZH' ^^ A^'^t ^f-^ ^^'^^^ "^^7 e.>tfr
^t/^i, <rv8 €v AvKiy, 8re Kev rcov 8^aovrKa>aai
Ill"
i
m:
n? dpa ^(avi'iaavre, Kaff "ttttwu dt^avre,
\€tpd<; T a\\};Xwf Xa^eriju kuI mcrdiiaavTO,
"VivO' avre FXau/cro KpofiBrjs' 0ptVa? efe\cTO Zeu?,
'^0«? 7rpo«? TuBd^tjv Aiofii'jhea T€v')(e d/jL€i0ev
Xpvaca '^aXKelwv, eKaTOfx^oi evvea^oifov-
"VjKTMp 8' OS ^Kaid'i TC Trv\a<i koX <f)7)y6v ixavev,
*Afi(f> dpa fii<f 'Vpcowif d\n\0L d^ou 7j8e 6vyaTpe<i
'FApofxcvai 7ral?>d<i re Kaaiyvi'jrovs' re tTa<; re
Kat Trocrta?. 'O 8' tTreira OeoJ.f €V)(^ecr0ai dvar/ei
Ildaa<i e^eiqr ttoW^cti hk Kt'jBe i^yTTTo.
Iliad, VI., vv. 215-241.
1. OiVfcU9. How connected with Diomcde ?
2. Be'7ra<i d/KfuKVireWov' Explain.
3. oT kv &>'j(3r](nv, &c. Explain the allusion.
4. What were the sentiments of the heroic age vrith
respect to the duties of hospitality ?
5. ^ptW? i^ikero Zev^. Mention any attempts of critics
to explain the apparent meanness of this sentiment.
6. Parse and give the forms in Attic Greek of : i<r<Ti,
Kd\\i(f)\ Kt'xeico, iira/Meiylro/xev, i^iXero, TroWfjac.
7. Give the derivations of: dfivficovy ^(oarrjpa, o/ittXo?,
eKaTOfx^oia, KaaiyvqTO'i.
II.
Translate :
" ZeO dWoi re deoi, Bore 8:7 Kot rovSe yeveedat
IlatS' ifxov, ft)? Kol iyoi irepy upLirpeiria TpcoeaaiVy
*il8e ^Irjv T dyaObv, Kol 'iXiov t<^t uvdaaetv.
Kat TTore rt? eiTrrjai, irarpo^ <y ohe ttoXXov dp>eiv(ov*
'E« TToXefiov dviovra' (pipoi S" hapa ^poToevra
KreiVa? S}]L0v dvlpa, %apei7/ 8e ^peva MTrjp"
''XI9 elTTwv dXoxoto ^iXi]^ iv %e/3(Tif isdijKev
UalS" koV rj S" dpa /jLIU KrjcoBei Be^aro koXttw
AaKpvoev yeXdcraaa. lloai^ B' iXeijae vot]aa<i,
Xetpi re fiLU Karepe^ev, eiro^ t e^xir, €k t ovofxa^ev.
" Aaifiovir), fX7) fioi rt, XlijvaKaxi^eo Ovfio)-
Ov yap T19 fi vTrep alaav dvr]p "AtSt Trpoid'^eL'
Molpav 8' ov Tivd (f>7]/jLi Trecjivy/Jbivov efifievac uvBp&p,
Ov KUKov, ouBe fi6V i(rdXbv, iv^jv rd irpoiTa yivrjTai,
'AXX' ek oIkov iovcra rd a avrr]^ epya KoiiL^e,
*Io"t6j' t' r}XaKdT7]v re, kuI dfi(pLTTo\oi<xt, KeXeve
*Epyoi> iirot^eaBac- UoXcfio^ S' auSpeaai fieXy^u
Uaaip^Jfiol 8e /xaXiara, toI '\X{(p iyryeydaaiv."
''n<i apa <f^' ma-af Kopvff e'lXeTo if)ai8ifMo^"EKT(op
"iTTTTOVplV aK:)XO<! Ot <f>lX7f olKUV^e /3€J3t]Ket
'EvrpoTraXi^ofieur}. OaXepov Kara huKpu x^ovca.
Alyjra 8' tireiO' iKaue B6/j,ou<{ evuaierunuTa^
"i:KTopo<{ duBpo(f)uvoio, Ki)^,jaaTo 8" tyZuOt -rroXXas
' hp.(j)i.'nuXov'^,jfi(Tiv 8e yoou irarTtjcnv ivMpaev.
Aifihf hi ^a)bif y6ov"KKTopa m tvl oUtp'
Ou yap fiiv tT tijjavTo virorpoTrov tK TroXefioco
"l^ea-daij Trpo(f)vyuvTa p,ho^ KaX x^ipa^ 'Axaiwv.
Iliad, VI., vv. 47G-502.
1. 'I\tou. Why in genitive ?
2. 8acfiovc7}. Explain the signification of this epithet.
3. ra a avrfj^ k'pya. Translate into Latin.
4. "AiSi. What was the Homeric idea of Hades ?
5. Distinguish between civjjp ajid avepoiiroK
6. Line 479 {kuI irore ri^. &c.) Explain the construc-
tion.
in.
1. To whom is the invention of the Greek alphabet
ascribed ? Bj whom are additions said to have been made ?
Whence were the forms of the breathings derived ?
2. What do you understan<l by hiopOcoaei, ? Distinguish
between these, /car av8pa, and those, Karh ttoXgl^.
*i, ^- ,¥<^V'''" ^'tI^'""-^ ""^'^'^ ^""'^ consider representatives of
the Attic, Ionic, Doric and iEolic dialects.
_ 4. Mention three principal cases in which you may cer-
tainly know that the Digamma was present in a word.
5. When is a long vowel or diphthong at the end of a
word generally made short in Homer ? What exceptions ?
6. Explain the terms : paroxytone, proparoxytone, and
Unit^tvmp of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
MATRICULATION.
TRANSLATION INTO LATIN.
Uxaminefs:! I^^^' ^^^.^ ^^^aul, LL.D.
\ Thomas Moss, M.A.
^3
Ufa
I.
When Xenophon was performing a customary sacri-
fice, he learned that the the elder of his two sons, by name
Gryllus, had fallen in battle at Mantinea; nor did he
think that the commenced worship of the gods should
be stopped on that account, but he was satisfied
merely to lay down the crown. Having enquired in
what manner he had fallen, when he heard that he had
died fighting very bravely, he replaced the crown on
his head, having called the deities, to whom he was
sacrificing, to witness, that he felt greater pleasure from
the valour of his son than pain from his death.
Xenoplion cum sollemnis sacnficium perago, e duo
filius magnus natus, nomen Gryllus, apud Mantinea
m prcehum cado cognosco; nee ideo instituo Beus cultus
omitto puto, sed tantummodo corona depono contineo.
Percontor quisnam modus occido, ut audio fortiter
pugno mtereo, corona caput repono, numen, qui sacrijico,
testor magnus sui ex virtus filius voluptas quam ex
mors amaritudo sentio.
11.
Masinissa, the neighbour of Carthage, who enjoyed
tlie tavour of the Romans, and seems even to have been
instigated by them, neglected no opportunity of harass-
Is!'
" I.
V -'.,;
i>r
i 1
a , 1
1
ing and annoying the reviving state. The Roman
Cato, who was infatuated by a blind hatred of Carthage,
partly perhaps because the Carthaginians had rejected
his proffered mediation between them and Masinissa,
and partly from a real, though unfounded fear of the
growing power of Carthage, urged in every speech he
made in the senate the necessity of crushing the African
republic. Masinissa, who well knew the feelings of the
party at Eome hostile to Carthage, and was sure not
only of impunity, but of support and protection, increased
his own dominion at the expense of Carthage, and by
constant disputes and vexations drove the Carthaginians
to the necessity of defending their rights by force of
arms, because Rome, when appealed to, either delayed
pronouncing sentence, or decided in favour of the
aggressor. The Romans, gladly seizing the opportunity,
charged the Carthaginians with having broken the
peace. The people of Carthage implored their mercy ;
and to assure them that they had no hostile intentions,
they not only sent three hundred of their noblest citizens
as hostages to Rome, but delivered up all their ships
and arms. This happened in B.C. 149; and when all
this was done, the Romans further demanded that Car-
thage should be razed to the ground, and that the
inhabitants should build a new town for themselves at
a distance of many miles from the sea. The treacher-
ous and insolent nature of this demand drove the people
to despair and madness ; they resolved to perish under
the ruins of their own houses rather than yield to such
insolence. A bold patriotic spirit seized all ranks and
all ages, and the women cheerfully sacrificed all their
finery upon the altar of their country. The whole city
was at once changed into a military camp, temples were
at once transformed into manufactories of arms, and
nothing was spared that could serve to deliver the
country from its impending doom.
III.
In the high-towering poplar thus swinging,
My harp! hang suspended at ease ;
Thy chords at soft intervals ringing,
As swept by the hand of the breeze.
The blue vault its luH beauty displaying,
Not a cloud the pure scther o'ershades;
While in sighs his soft presence betraying,
The greeu foliage young Zephyr pervades.
m
Thus I leave thee to murmur and quiver
As waked by the slow-rising wind;
While here by the side of the river
I repose, on soft verdure reclined.
Ah! along the horizon dark scowlino-,
What tempest-bred shadows appeiu'!
Clouds! clouds rise incessantly rolling;
Hark! the storm rushes loud on my' ear.
Oh ! my harp, ray companion, my treasure,
Let us rise, let us hasten away !
'Tis thus fly the phantoms of pleasure;
Thus fade our bright hopes in decay.
J-
%
I
ntmtvm^ oc ^rotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18fi4.
MATRICULATION.
GREEK-LAW.
Examiners :\ S'^^* ^'^"^^ McCaul, LL.D.
\ Thomas Moss, M.A.
I.
Translate :
airiot ray KXrjpovofirp KaraXtTr^v d7ro\a{>eiv a^TT??, a Jr^e
raro CO, errraerv, rye,6f.euo, 6 ^al, red.'^^erac, dial
TOP ^ev evrv^ovvra i-rrl rco Traihl i^elvov '6pa, r^/roO
o^a? auTco KpoKrj, eKpifiaro. roi,, fxkv rydp -rrepl rtov '6oL
("^ «7ro. emovrayu dyy^Xcou re. kuX v^^perL. XAP
V^-avToc, ^apd rhv ^lov, ^) rl i.elvo earcv, o5 Jrll
Zai^rir"""""^ ^^^^- "^^^ 'y^^'' '"'^^ ^aaCxArj
Tr T' ' T? '^^^^''f^oviaTaroL elvat SoKOvacv, ^^co rov
Vhmv rh upcaph evp^aec nrpoa6vTa ai^J,,, c^^/3ov9, koL
i
I
Tapa'xa'it koI fila-rj, koI im^ov\a<i, Kot 6pya<: kuI KoKa-
Keiar TovTOL'i <yap a7ravre<i ^vimaiv. ew •nevOrj, koX
voaovi, Koi irdOri, i^ ia-OTifjLia<i BrjXaBi) ap)(pvTa avT&v
OTTov Be TO, Tovrwv 'TTovTjpa, Xoyl^eaOai Kaip6<i, ola rh rS>v
IBlCOT&U aV €17].
LuciAN, Charon.
i
■Sri"
1. iroii'^a-eiev. What part of the verb ? How used in
Attic Greek ?
2. avTrj<;. (line 4). With what does this word agree ?
Why in the genitive ?
3. ^OXvfjLTTia. What case, and why ? Mention the
names of the other great games of Greece.
4. itcKOfii^ovra. What is the equivalent Latin word ?
5. Parse the following words, and give the future and
second aorist active, and the perfects active and passive of
the verba from which they come : fMcidoi. e^ei, xo^pf^v, hcKev,
redv^^eraL, opa, evprjcreL.
6. Parse : iinOd'i, ^7r'o"TaTo, yevo/xiva), dOXrjTov, expi-
/Liaro, ifKeiw, Trivdtj, IBiwtmv.
7. Conjugate the present of elfxt through all the moods.
8. Decline e??? iyco, ovto<;, <rv.
9. Give the genitives of ovofxa, yvvrj, v7rr]peTi';<j, iJSu?.
II.
AHM. Xat/je, w Tifioyv, to fieya 6(p€\o<; tov yevovi, to
epeicTfia tcou ^AOrjvaicop^ rb mrpo^Xr^jjia rr}<i 'E\XaSo9' koI
fir)v irdXai ae 6 Brjfiof: ^vveLXeyfievo^i koX at ^ovXaX dficfiQ-
repai TrepifxivovaL' irporepov Be uKovaov to '^^tj^lc fiat o
xnrkp (TOV yeypa^a. 'EIIEIAH Tificov 6 ^^xeKparCBovy
Ko/VvTTei)?, dviip ov fjuovov KoXo'i KayaBo^, dXXcL Kal
0*0^09, &)9 ovK dXXo<i iv rf} 'EXXdBi, irapa Trdvra ypovov
BiareXel to, dpiara TrpdrTcov jfi iroXei' vevUrjxe ok ttv^,
Kal TrdXTjv, Kal Bpo/iov, iv 'OXv/xiria ixia<i r]iJiipa<;, Kal
reXeifp dpfxari Kal crvvwplBi, ttcoXik^, — TIM. 'AXA.' ovBe
€0€(!>'^11O'O.- i'^CO TTCOTTOTe €i<\ OXvi-iriaVi AHjVIi T( OVV '
6e(opi](Tei<; varepov rd roiavra Be TroXXd irpoaKelaOat
afxeivov. Kal iplarevae Be virep Tfj<i TroXeci)? irepvai tt/oo?
*Axapvia<}f Kal KareKo-<^e lieXoirovprjaioiiv Bvo ixoCpa<i, —
%<! Koi Ko\a-
TrevBr], koX
wra avT&v
, ola T^ T&V
Charon.
ow used in
ord agree ?
ention the
in word ?
future and
passive of
'pWV, €T€K€V,
rjTov, cKpi-
the moods.
?, riBv<!.
[) fyevovii, TO
Xd8o<i' KoX
w\a\ d/Jicl>6-
^r](f)i(rjj,at o
)(€KpaTL8oVf
aXKa Kal
VTa ypovov
'■rixe Be ttv^.,
]/Mepa<;, Kal
'AXA.* ovBe
\J[. Tl n?m •
— I — - J
■po(rK€i(Tdat
'ipvac 7rpo9
I fxo{pa<i, —
TIM. Urn; Biayap to fx), ^x'cv 6VXa, odBk Trpoeypd-
pp ev r<p ^^araXoyor AHM. M^rpca r^ ^epl aavrov
Xeyei,, yfiec, Be axaptarot hv e^fiev df,v7}fiovodvTe^. he
be^Kui pcf>La,xaTa ypdcf^cov kuI avfi^ov\e6cou, Kal arparv-
Kara fvXa,, ^al roc, 8/i^ot, ' IBla, 'Ll Kocvr, •rrda-f
uKpo-rroXec^ Kepavvov iv rfj Be^ul exovra, Kal uKrlva, i^c
TV Ke<pa\r}- Kai arecf>avcbcrac ai^rhv xpvaok <TTe6dvoc<i
eirra, Kai avaKrjpvxdr,vaL Toi>, arecf^dvov, a^^epov Ilovv-
am, rpayfoc, KaivoW {dxBi^va, yhp Bl avrov Bel
rvfiepov ra ^tovCa^a). n-rre r^p yv^b^v ^rjuia, 6
fypTccp, avyyevp, airov dy^carel,, Kal ^^aOyr^T ai^rov
Z' '^"^W P'/To,^ dpccro, ^Tlfxcou, Kal rd dXXa Trdvra
Beaoc^ Kac rov mhv i^ovXa^v dyayelv Japl <r% hv%l
T<p<r<i>ovoiMajil[:iij,a>va^v6ixaKa. ' ^ ' '^^
LuciAN, Timon.
1. ^vvei\ey/jbivo<;. Parse.
2. at povXal ufi(f)6Tepai. Explain, and give a brief
account of each.
. 3. fioc'pa<i. Mention the subdivisions of the Lacedemo-
nian army. vvv*viuu
wpi 'fif '°T''u • ^^'""^ ""^'^ ^^^'^ • How many kinds
lTterature7 "" '°""''''^ ^'^'^ the history of Greek
f^vi'^^^'P^'^'^. J^® .°^°^^ common modes in which adverbs are
formed from adjectives in Greek.
mm^tvms of srovotuo.
A.N N UAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
MATRICULATION.
MATHEMATICS, I.-EUCLID, BB. I -IV.
FOR HONORS.
Examiner: J. B. Chebkiman, M.A.
1. If two triangles have two sides of the one equal to two
sides of the other, each to each, but the ffngle contained by the
two sides of one of them greater than the angle contained by
the two sides equal to them of the other, the base of that which
(Pr'op 24f B^n ^"^^^ '' ^'^^'''' '^'^" '^^ ^^'^ °^ *^^ °^^*'^-
If two triangles have one side and the angle opposite in
each equal respectively, examine in what case fhe greater of
two corresponding angles in each will have the greater side oppo-
site to it> *■'•
anLTilliT^/^^^li"?' which join the extremities of two equal
and parallel straight lines towards the same parts are them-
selves equal and parallel. (Prop. 33, B. I.)
Define a parallelogram, and state what additions to the
definition are sufficient to constitute the figure a squa e an
oblong, and a rhombus respectively. square, an
3. Parallelograms on the same base and between Tthe samn
parallels are equal to one another. (Prop. 35, B. L)
I
i
A B D, A b c df are two parallelograms such that B
lies in A h, and D in ^1 «/; if point E be taken in a h c so
that cL\ AD are i'(|ual, the piiralleloH^ram of which EB, Ed are
adjacent sides will be equal to tlie diflcrencc of the two.
4. If a straight line be divided into any iwoparls, the squares
on the whole line and one of the )iarls are equal to twice the
rectangle conluii;ed by the whole and that part, together with
the square on the other part. (Prop. 7, B. II.)
Slate the geometrical propositions which are equivalent
to the algebraic identities,
(2) {x-i/y=x'+f-2x7/,
(3) (a:+3/)»+(a,— ^)'=2x'4-V-
5. To divide a given straight line into two parts, so that the
rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts may be
equal to the square on the other part. (Prop. 11, B. II.)
The difference between the two parts is double that
between the line joined in Euclid's construction and the given
line.
6. Equal straight lines in a circle are equally distant from
the centre; and those which are equally distant from the centre
are equal to one another. (Prop. 14, B. III.)
If two equal straight lines in a circle cut each other, the
segments of one are respectively equal to those of the other.
7. In equal circles, equal angles stand on equal arcs, whether
they be at the centres or circumferences. (Prop. 26, B. III.)
If two equal circles cut each other, and through one point
of section a line be drawn to cut the circles, the arcs between
the other point of section of the circles and the points of section
made by this line are equal, two and two.
8. From a given circle to cut off a segment containing an
angle equal to a given rectilineal angle. (Prop. 34, B. III.)
Also, to cut ofl such a segment by a line which passes
through a given point.
9. If from any point without a circle two straight lines be
drawn, one of which cuts the circle, and the other touches it ;
the rectangle contained by the whole line which cuts the circle
and the part of it without the circle, is equal to the square on
the line which touches it. (Prop. 36, B. III.)
10. To inscribe a circle
4, B. IV.)
in
a given triangle. (Prop.
If the points of contact be joined, and circles be in-
scribed in the three outer triangles thus formed, the centres will
lie on the circumference of the original circle.
11. To describe an isosceles triangle, having each of the
angles at the base double of the third angle. (Prop. 9, B. IV.)
In what cases can an isosceles triangle be divided by a
straight line into two triangles also isosceles?
12. To inscribe a regular hexagon in a given circle. (Prop.
15, B. IV.)
This hexagon is half the circumscribed equilateral tri-
angle.
fr +
mni\)tvm» of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
MATRICULATION.
MATHEMATICS, II.-ARITHMETIC AND
ALGEBRA.
FOR HONORS.
Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
{Algelraical symbols must not he nsed in the first six questions.)
1. Multiply together 172814412 and 987654321.
(Additional marks will he given if this is done in three lines.)
2. Whence does it appear thata v.ugar fraction may ahvav,
be reduced enher to a terminated or\ circulatinrdec mal
Explam how to determine by inspection which kind of decTm J
any given fraction will produce. Reduce to decimals ^^ t
and express as vulgar fractions in thei. lowest terms'y&Aj'
15'6013789- ^-ViJGi,
3. What is an aliquot part?
Find by " practicn " the value of
(i) 1589 bushels at $3.75 per bushel,
(ii) 1 ton 6 cwt. 2 qrs. 6 lbs. 4 oz. at »17.13 per ton.
4. Explain what is meant by interest and discount.
Find the time for which the discount on a certain sum of
money will be equal to the interest on the same sum for a year,
the rate of interest in both cases being 5 per cent.
5. What is meant by saying that gold is at a premium in the
United States ?
If the premium on gold be 105, find the discount on
American treasury notes.
I purchase in Toronto American silver on which there is
a discount of 4 per cent., and taking it to New York where
gold and silver are both at a premium of 80, I there buy
Americm paper money with the silver; gold falling to 150, I
buy gold with my paper money, and upon my return to Toronto
find that I have made just enough to pay my expenses, which
were 3120 in Canadian currency. What was the sum origi-
nally invested?
6. What is meant by "the Funds?" Explainlwhy the
English funds rose on the birth of the Prince Imperial of
France
A person holds stock in the English 3^ per cents, which
are at 98 to the amount of £1500 sterling. This he transfers
to Canadian Government 6 per cents, which are at 105; find
the alteration in his income in dollars, if £1 sterling is worth
^'[m
'"■'if
m
7. Multiply a;'-7a;+6 by x'+3x^i, and divide the result
by £c' — 3x4-24.
o rr J ... tn n m4-n
». It m and n are positive integers, shew that a ^a ^'a
Q
—p ~z
Establish consistent meaningsTor a , a , a •
9. Shew howj^o extract the square root of a binomial surd of
the form a-\- y/b.
Extract that of 17 + V53 •
10. Solve the following equations
x-ir8 a;+5
-. = 6.
(i)
x-S
X — o
(ii) 5 + 1
a X
n
(iii)
X!' ■
xy
= 481
= 12;-
xy =s 48
! I,
It.
rtain sum of
1 fox a year,
niutn in the
[iscount on
lich there is
fork where
'. there buy
ig to 150, I
I to Toronto
nses, which
I sum origi-
nj why the
Emperial of
3nts. which
he transfers
t 105; find
ig is worth
11. ^ and 5 play a game together for a certain stake- A
wms the game, and then his money is to B's as m to n Ha i
won the game, ^'s money would hav^ been to «'«' !^ ^
find Che ratio of ^', mone/to ^'s at first '^ '"^ ^'
12. SiiC'v that if the squares of two numbers which H«
between 20 and 30 end with the same digit, they wiJI end wi h
the same two digits. '^ ' ^ ^^^ ^^^"^
! the result
n m-\-n
a —a
lial surd of
i, ' i
i
1
t 1
' '<'!
i
' iL,(ii
IP
nni\)nmij Of sroronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
MATRICULATION.
MATHEMATICS, III.
FOR HONORS.
Examiners: f J* ^' -herriman, M a
, Employ ihis pronosiimn ,„? . ' "' '" °"« ""■"her
one-aJ«h\°"="'" '" "^ -»» -g«e„. of a circle are e,„a. ,o
ori6ed?„;"„tb:r:'rrfir,i°", "'= ^-- -"« of u, are <,...
"l«a ; from Ae e.x.remi,e?o,l '."!'"= '"■''' """'"I an. es
Pendicular to ,l,e oppos e ?J "'''' ''""^ "" dra.vn ner
which bisect the internal an/ l"' ' >]""" """ ""^ sets of ImJ:
p"P^ndic„ia. pa.r ™iit^i™.t::i';:f„--„od b°; .i;;::
•™equal'';r,3! ="''«" -'--fe-nce, that -, .0 divide it into
i"t-gl°e''"c',^t!''"^^«'«'"al and equiangular ,ui„decag„n
n
P
1
»
:w-
!
(!■■
.1
Hence inscribe in a circle an isosceles triangle whose ver-
tical angle is (\) thirteen times each of its hase angles, (ii) one
seventh of each of its base angles.
5. The perpendiculars from the angular points of a triangle
ABC upon the opposite sides meet in ; shew that the circle
which passes through the middle points of OA, OB, (9C passes
also through the feet of the perpendiculars, and through the
middle points of the sides.
vi. When gold is at 250 in Wall Street, what further rise
will make a reduction of one cent, in the dollar ?
vii. The value of the old Spanish dollar (which was the unit
of ex'chancre between America and England) was 4s. 6d. ster-
\in<r but <r°old became the standard of the U. S. currency by
the°'acts ''of 1834-7, which made the gold eagle weigh 258
grains, being nine-tenths fino. The English coinage is of metal
22 carats fine, 40lbs. being coined into 1869 sovereigns. With
these data explain why the bank par of exchange hetween New
York and London is said to bo 109J.
viii. Can any meaning be assigned to the algebraic symbol
a" when n is an incommensurable quantity ?
By what reasoning is the truth of propositions, which
have been proved for commensurables, inferred for incommen-
surables also?
ix. Prove that [a-l){b-c)(c-a) is a measure of each of the
quantities
(a'—py+ib'—cJ+Cc'—a'y,
^a-hf + ib-cf + (c.—aj\
Have these any other common measure ?
X. Prove that the greatest common measure of any set of
quantities is the least common multiple of all the common
measures ; and the least common multiple is the greatest com-
mon measure of all the common multiples.
If the greatest common measure of a and h be c, the least
common multiple of
{a^hXa^—l^) and {a~h){a?+V')
a
5— 6«
is
xi. When ^.re throe quantities said to be in arithmetic,
geometric, or harmonic progression ?
If (a h,c) are in arithmetic progression, and so also [x,yfi),
M
3 whose ver-
rles, (ii) one
of a triangle
lat the circle
i, OC passes
through the
further rise
vas the unit
4s. 6d. ster-
currency by
weigh 258
re is of metal
igns. With
letween New
braic symbol
tions, which
r incommen-
if each of the
X
f any set of
the common
[greatest com-
3e c, the least
1 arithmetic,
10 also {xti/fZ),
y
while (axy hi/,cz) are in geometric, and /^,
\a' b
monic, then will
')
in
har-
1--^,
a'c
'Zb
ac
-1,
be in harmonic.
xii. In an arithmetic progression, having given the sum «,
the last term ?, and the 'common difference c/, determine the
limitations to which s, I, d are subject, in order that a real series
may exist.
If only one such series exist, shew that I must be of the
form (p — l)d, where p isa positive integer, and _ must be
d
the square of an integer.
xiii. From the series of odd numbers in order 1, 3, 5, 7, ,
groups are taken, commencing successively with the numbers
next greater than the products 1.2.3, 2 3.4, 3.4.5, , and
embracing 2,3,4,. ... numbers respectively; prove that the
sums of the numbers in these respective groups produce the
fourth powers of the natural numbers in succession.
xiv. E.xplain what is meant by the limit of the sum of a series
of quantities in a decreasing geometric progression, and obtain
an expression for the value of this limit.
Also obtain an expression for the limit of the sum of the
series found by taking the products of every two terms of the
above series.
XV. Solve the equations
/x\x-\-y ?y* x-{-y
xvi.
If
then will
^y
a — b -j- c — d
ac — hd
a — b+c — (/ a — b — c-{- d'
a + 6+ c+ d
ad — be
xvii. There are (n+l) vessels which contain each the same
quantity (a) offiuid. The contents of the first are distributed
equally among all the others ; then those of the second are dis-
tributed in the same way ; then those of the third, and so on.
Prove that when the last vessel has been thus treated, the
quantity of fluid contained then in the r\\\ is
Unlittvms of SForoHto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS. 1864.
MATEICULATION.
ENGLISH-ARTS AND MEDICINE.
HxaminemtV''^,^^^ Wilson, IL.D.
I J. A. Boyd, M.A.
irrL .*^'?i ^^ ;J<"-'vation and meaning of the following
the .'™ stnifi^tioS^tttr'""" "' " ^'y"""°gy." -d
statL^lT^ '!■' ."'"■'''. "'' P™«t"»'ion commonly in use
epithets? °°''"""'="»" "'"' tlie reason of tlie
iniieti„rot:i: t'zi-i '"'''"°"'' -"^ '» ■""' ^-^ ^o
the tendency of the £f 1^ ■"".r'' "' P''"'™' ' ^h^' "
of the chief points of difM-^ff- '" ,""' "'V^ ' State some
grammar ^ distinction hetmen Latin and English
prontrtotoinLVrvi:h?„V'''r"r^'.'™^ 'y>"« «f 'he
the prince hlhZT^wlTihlo,^''''"^ ? P°'^l'?»'' "='
t-y Expose thefaisit;of':^o'th:'<^/r:;rti'oV'"'p""
a ""galar, and some without a plural '^ ""' *""'°"'
,4-
7. The following phrases are in use in conversation and
in literature : many men, many a man, a many men. If
these expressions are all correct, reconcile them in parsing.
If not, point out which are proper, with reasons.
8. What etymological peculiarities do you note in the
words childreuy chickens, songstress, whilom, twain ?
9. Dr. Witherspoon, in his Lectures on Divinity, has this
passage : " What I chiefly mean is to repeat, and endeavour
to bring you to enter into the great and leading view which
you ought to have in your studies, and which I desire to have
still before my eyes in teaching. This may bo expressed in
one sentence : to unite together piety and literature to
shew their relation to, and their influence one upon another
and to guard against any thing that may tend to separate
them, and set them in opposition one to another."
Point out the syntactical faults of the last period, and
re-write it correctly.
ADDITIONAL FOR STUDENTS-AT-LAW.
10. What do you understand by the term " orthographical
expedient ? Give examples thereof.
11. Give examples of what Latham styles the erroneous-
ness and redundancy of the English alphabet.
12. Explain fully the force of the word the in these
phra^ses "^Z^ the more,'' ^^ All the better." How oriei-
nated this pecuharity of employment ?
nnmvniU) of ^Toronto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
MATRICULATION.
ENGLISH.
HONORS.
1,1
UxaminerscI^^^.^^It Wilson, LL.D.
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A.
1. Punctuate, and state reasons for the distinction in the
use of semicolon and colon : —
" God will render to every man according to his deeds to
them that are contentious and do not obey the truth
but obey unrighteousness indignation and wrath
tribulation and anguish upon every soul of man that
doeth evil of the Jew first and also of the Gentile."
2. Re-construct or amend the following, with reasons :—
a. " Buonaparte, as well as Charlemagne and the Fifth
Charles, were re-modellers of Europe." Alison,
h. " He was under no small confusion to find that what
he thought was a new conceit, and had appropri-
ated to his own use, had appeared in print before."
Addison,
c. Human is what every man is, humane is what every
man ought to be ; but he is only rarely found to
combine the two.
8. Write all tense-forms of the verb to strike, and state
how many of them arc, ctymologically, truu tenses ; with
reasons for the answer.
■i
ion in the
(leeda to
tho truth
nd wrath
man that
Gentile."
asons : —
the Fifth
i-lison.
hat what
appropri-
before."
at every
found to
md state
Bs; with
4. "Tho logical dlfTorcnco botwoon a noun nnA „ . / •
less TTjarked than tho «raunnatical one " Zlllhf fV''^ '?
give illustrations. J^xpiain this, and
5. ^<'«^ wo/ is correct French Am .v • . . ,
correct English ? Give reasons. ' '' '' ""'' ' '' *' ^">'»
C. What is indicated in ichitlnn t.^ ,..„ .• .
must fl,.,t ,,,.30 it." Explain ^Zt:^'^.:^:^^ '
womar of Sam i" ?" ' ^ '"^'' "™ •■'
t>. "Prevent m O T ,rrl in ..ii i ■
graeioua .u.-our/' ' ""' ''""'S'' ■■'"' "'J moBt
(?.
This is Flias which was for to come."
i» town b^°.i.^fS"""'"' ""'• '"■' '■■"" S™'' ; f- "- tree
casc:-of";i!l-rt";e™?„! "t'^r Thlr^ -;"..no™„„,,e
tions. ^ -i-xpiam this, and guo illuatra-
10. In tho Latin, hio (this) rofoi-s tn th^ i .
cedent, and ille (thit) to the fii^t' c g ' "'"""^ ^'"'^-
Quocunquo aspicies nihil est nisi pontus et ae.-
Hunndus /.. tnmidus, fluctibus il mZ:^''''n,,cl
e.am^f''' ^--^Ponding rule in English? Give an
11. Define the difference in tho following •-
a. He ]3 a better soldier than scholar. °
6. He IS a better soldier than a scholar
tracS-n^^:::^^^^-^-^ of the English race can be
Wini\t$vms of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
MATRICULATION.
,llli(iti!!!l
I ■'
m
HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY.
Examiners: l?^f ^^ ^^^^on, LL.D.
/ J. A. Boyd, M.A.
ANCIENT HISTORY.
1. Under what circumstances did the Tarentines apply
for aid to Pyrrhus ; and with what results ?
2. Explain the difference between Municipia, Oolonioe,
and FrtBfectura.
3. State the circumstances under which the naval victo-
ries of Salamis, Mylce, and Actium, were gained.
4. What course was pursued by Octavianua after the
assassination of Julius Ctesar ?
5. Sketch the Roman conquests in Britain by Agricola.
BRITISH HISTORY.
1. Sketch the history of the Long Parliament.
2. What order of succession was disturbed by Queen
Anne's accession to the throne ; and with what results ?
3. Name the chief victories of Marlborough ; and define
the terms of the treaty of Utrecht.
4. State the claims, (1) by constitutional right : (2) bv
x, ujr- Huieu tno iiuuuvunan uynasty suc-
her
ceeded to the English throne.
0.
ay.
GEOGRAPHY.
Neva; Volga rinrsVioSd":/ Khone; Elbe; Tagu,;
2. State the boundaries of Wft]1iir.T.;o . -d x , ^
gi»m; Brazil; and the chLf dties of etch.' '"«*'' ^^'-
3. Name the chief colonies of thr^ TJrJfioi, t? •
.D.
sntines apply
pea, ColonioBf
) naval victo-
sd.
Lus after the
by Agricola.
nt.
d by Queen
results ?
; and define
ght ; (2) by
ynasty sue-
^niHeriSfti? of ^otonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
MATRICULATION.
HISTOM-ARTS.
HONORS.
« . f Daniel Wilson, LL.D.
t ■
1
t •
I)
3't
*
f
fe..,.
1. Shew by genealogical tables tho several titles to the
throne of the Houses of Tudor and Stuart respectively.
2. Hamilton says that "Henry VII. endeavoured to
strengthen his family interest by matrimonial alliances vrith
the continent." Specify what marriages were thus con-
tracted, and discuss in how far their ultimate results an-
swered the king's expectations.
3. When did England first exercise an important influ-
ence in European affairs ? Under what circumstances did
this influence arise, and how was it manifested ?
4. What difficulties as to the succession to the throne
arose in Edward VI. 's reign? How were these difficulties
resolved?
5. Sketch the circumstances connected with the disgrace
and death of Sir Walter Raleigh.
6. 5'v.vo some account of the cbrr ictsr and policy of the
v.ar\ n\' : ,rafford.
7. How many Convention Parliaments assembled during
the Tudor and Stuart period, and under what circumstances
were they convoked ?
8. Name and give the position of all the insular colonies
and dependencies of Great Britain. Specify the dates when
each was acquired or established.
TK
:, i
1 'ir*
1 '
■v;v:!
•■
t "
n
]:■:
r
fw
mni^itvniis of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
MATRICULATION.
HISTORY-LAW.
HONORS.
Examiners : ] ?^f ^^ Wilson LL.D.
J J. A. Boyd, M.A.
1. Justify the use of the appellatives, '-Age of Augus-
tus" and " Age of Pericles ; contrast the characteristics of
these two periods.
2. Define the limits of the Periclean era, and mention the
representative men who flourished therein in architecture
sculpture and painting. '
3. Name the most eminent prose-writers of these two
periods and their productions ; point out the distinguishinff
excellences of each Avriter.
4. Sketch the foreign and domestic policy of Pericles.
5. Trace the successive steps whereby Augustus ascended
to the height of power and managed to centralize all authority
in himself. Show by a genealogical table his relationship to
Julius Csesar. ^
6 Describe fully the developements of the drama in the
hands of JEschylus.
"^
$■
SInCberfiifts of STotonto.
AN; L EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
MATRICULATION.
FRENCH .-ARTS AND MEDICINE.
. HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Exp miers'l^^^^^^ Forneui, LL.D.
' \ Robert Sullivan, M.A.
I.
Translate :
On s'dtait adresse ti cette regcnce de Vienne, parce
qu'alors I'empereur d' Allemagne, Charles, Buccesseur de
Joseph ler, dtait en Espagne, ou il disputait la couronne
^ Philippe V. Pendant que I'envoye allemand ex^cutait
't Vienne cette commission, Ic grand vizir envoya trois
bachas au roi do Su^de pour lui signifier qu'il fallait
son h* leur et lui manquer d .c-spect, il les ferait
pendre t( ^ trois sur I'heure. Le ba " !e Salonique, qui
portait irole, ddguisa la duret<j de s j, commission sous
les term* les plus respectueux. Charles finit I'audience
sans daigne^ sculement rdpondre : son chancelier Mul-
lern, qui res vec ces tr is bachas, expliqua en peu de
mot^ •« rt as do son maitie, qu'ils avaient assez con.^ris
par son silence.
jC grand vi«ir no se rcbuta pas ; il ordonna k IsmacK
Baoha, nouveau sdraskier lie Bender, de monacor lo roi
do I'indi^nation du sultan s'il no sodotcrminait passans
ddlai. Co seraskier dtait d'un tcrapi^ramont doux et
d'un esprit conciliant, qui lui avait attird 1r bionveillanco
de Charles et I'junitid do tous Ics Sm^dois. Lo roi entra
on conference avec lui, mais ce fut pour lui dire qu'il no
partirait quo quaiid Achmet lui aurait accordo doux
choses, la punition do son grand vizir, et cent raillo
honimi's pour retourner en Pologno.
VoLTAiKE, Charles XII., o. 6.
1. Oil il disputait. Explain the use and meaning of the
imperfect tenso in this passage.
2. Leur fit d'ahord dire. Explain the meaning of this
phrase.
3. Ltd rien pro^wser. What is the signification of rien
here ?
4. Qui lui avait attir^. What is the antecedent of qui f
5. Lui aurait accordo. When docs the active past parti-
ciple agree with the object of the verb ?
6. When does mille take the mark of the plural ?
GRAMMAR.
1. What is the general rule for the formation of the plural
of substantives ? Give the plurals of chapeau, hiboUy
clou, sou, gouvernail.
2. How many degrees of comparison of adjectives ? How
are they formed ?
3. What is the difference between the superlative relative
and the superlative absolute ?
4. When do vingt and cent take an s in the plural, and
when not ?
5. Where do the personal pronouns generally stand in
relation to the verb ? Mention the exceptions to the general
rule.
6. f^xphin the use o( celui-ci and celui-ld in referrinff to
two or more object*. *
8. Explain the use of tlio word j)er8onne as a pronoun
and as a noun. ^
arler"* '^"^''"^'' ^^'"^ 'mporfcct subjunctive of vendre and
10. What is a neuter verb ? Give an example.
11. Translate into French, " Thin hook is miner
l-t
I-;*..
Wini^itvnit^ df Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
MATRICULATION.
FRENCH-LAW.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
^ . > James Fornert, LL.D.
Uxannners: ^ ^^^^^^ Sullivan, M.A
I.
Translate :
Les patriciens voulant erapecher le retour des rois
clierchcrcnt a augraentur le mouvement, qui etait dana
I'esprit dupeuple; raais ils firent plus qu'ils nc voul-
urent ; a force do lui donner de la haine pour les rois ;
ils lui donnerent un desir imnioddre de la liberie.
Comme Tautoritd royalc avait passe toute entiere entre
les mains des consuls, le peuple sentit que cette libertd
dont on voulaitlui donner tant d'amour, il no I'avait pas:
il chcrcha done a abaisser le consulat, a avoir des magis-
trats pldbeiens ; et Ti partaker avec les nobles les magis-
tratures curules. Les patriciens furent forces de lui
accorder tout ce qu'il demanda ; car dans une ville ou
la pauvrete dtait la vertu publique, oil les richesses, cette
voie sourde pour acquerir la puissance, etaient mepris^es,
la naissance et les dignitds ne pouvaient pas donner de
grands avantages. La puissance devait dune revenir
au plus grand nombre, ct I'aristocratie se changer peu a
peu en un dtat populaire.
Grandeur des Romains, c. viii.
1. Parse chercherent, firent. voulurent.
2. De la haine. Why is the article used I
S. Lui donnireni. What part of speech is lut ?
4. Dont on voulait. What part of speech is dont, and
by what other French words col'M you express the same
meaning ?
5. Oil les richmes. What part of speech is oH, and liow
would you otherwise express the same meaning ?
Q. Be grands avantages. Why is the article not used
here?
7. Se changer. Why is changer in the infinitive mood ?
ar des rois
etait dans
Is ne voul-
ur les rois ;
la liberie,
itiere entre
ette libertd
I'avait pas:
des ma£;is-
5 les magis-
rces de lui
ine ville on
esses, cette
t meprisdes,
5 donner de
jnc revenir
mger peu a
;«, c. viii.
GRAP-IMAR.
1. What is the general rule for the formation of the plural
of substantives ? Give the plurals of chapeau, hibou,
clou, sou, gouvernail.
2. How many degrees of comparison of adjectives ? How
are they formed ?
3. What is the difference between the superlative relative
and the superlative absolute ?
4. When do vingt and cent take an s in the plural, and
when not ?
5. Where do the personal pronouns generally stand in
relation to the verb ? Mention the exceptions to the general
rule. °
6. Explain the use of cclui-ci and oelui-Id in referrintr to
two or more objects. ^
7. Translate into French, " The man of whom you
8. Explain the use of the word personne as a pronoun
and as a noun. *^
9. Go through the imperfect subjunctive of vendre and
parler.
10. What is a neuter verb? Give an example.
11. Translate into French, " This book is mine."
I
i^ni\}tv»ltiit of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS .• 18G4.
MATRICULATION.
NATURAL HISTORY-MEDICINE.
Uxaminers: \ ^^''' P/ofessor Hincks, F.L.S.
I Tiios. J. Cottle, Esq.
BOTANY.
1. Explain the term Monocotylcdonous. In -what other
particulars respecting the structure of the stem, the venation
of the leaves, and the prevailing number of parts in the
floral circles do Monocotyledonous plants differ from others ?
2. Stomata, their structure and probable use, where occur-
ring, and in what number.
8. The difference between definite and indefinite annual
growth, and between deliquescent and excurrent trunks.
4. The exterior two circles of parts forming the flower,
with the terms applied according to their degrees of combi-
nation or separation, regularity and irregularity, compara-
tive development and tendencies in respect to figure.
ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ADDRESSED TO CANDIDATES FOR
HONORS.
5. Chemical composition of plants, their food and the
sources from which it is obtained.
6. The ovule, its structure and parts, varieties in its
position in respect to the carpel. The four kinds of ovule
named and defined.
te annual
unks.
iG flower,
of corabi-
compara-
e.
^ES FOR
and the
7. Modifications of the receptacle or torus, and terms
expressing its relation to the circles of the flower.
E.
I.St
COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY.
9. Name the functions of animal and vegetative life.
10. Describe the process of aeration or respiration and
the pnncipal varieties in the methods bj which it is effected
hat other
i venation
'ts in the
tn others ?
3re occur-
ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ADDRESSED TO CANDIDATES FOR
inlL'^M^Lri^^^^^^^^ ''-'' ^^^^^ -^^ "!> '^^ ^-in
12. Describe the development of medusfn, and the manner
m whicn numerous animals are produced f;om a singTe egg'
13. D ,Mhe gemmiparous and fissiparous re-production.
BS in its
of ovule
ai
mni\^tvuit» of ^ovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FIEST YEAE.
GREEK.
JExaminersJ^^"^- ^^^^^ McCaul, LL.D.
i Thomas Moss, M.A.
I.
Translate :
"Hv yovv roi,9 ^acCKia^ % t«9 alr&v, o'^ep eiBaiao-
vedraroL uvai^ Sokovctiv, ^^co tov d/3e,^al'ov Kai <h^ L^
a^<f>i^o\ov rrj, r^xn^, 'rrXetay tw ^8eayu tA dvcap^
evprjcret ^poaovra avrol,, ^6^ov, koI rapax^^ koX aUrr,
/cat eni^ovXa^ Kac opya<i kuI KoXaxelar rorhoKi y^o
anravre^ ^vveiaiv. e& TreydTj koX v6crov<; kuI irddv iP
icrorcfMia, S^XaBr, apxovra aircov ottov Bk rd ro^rcol
TTovvpa Xoyc^ecrdac Kucpb, ola rk r&v IBccot&p hv dri.
fXcoBovvaoc, oy E/,^^, el-rruv, <Ltcvl ioLKevat fioc
ebo^av ot avdpa>iroL Ka\ o ^io^ dira^ airS^v. A irork
'TTOf.^oXvya, euvBarc eOedaco V7rb Kpovv^ tlvl Kctrapdr-
TovTc avLaraiieva^; raj <f>vaa\iBa^ Xiyco, d<i> d>v Pwa-
ye.perac o ac^po,' eKecvcou rolvvv nvk fih fivKpai elac
Kac avTiKa eKpayetcrac airia^rjaav, ai 8' eVl -rrXiov
diapKovac^ Kai irpoaxyovaiov airac^ rcov dXXcov a{rrac
v7repfva<o^evac e, /Meycarov SyKov atpovrat, etra fikvroL
IZfX ''"'^^'"'' f^'PPVr^^,'^-''^' ov yhp oUv re dXXa^,
yeveatfai. tovto eanv o dvOpdirov ^io<i.
LuciAN, Charon.
2. TOV d^e^aiov. What i«i the construction ?
if
H
i
\
■ :■.-* .
' »*-
iii
yyf , . '
1
^KiitH^
1
1
'
?p
8. Tovrot«. Why in dative ?
4, What are tlie laws regulatinc^ the position of the
circumilex ?
5. olov T€. Explain this form.
II.
Translate :
Tavra en Xeyovcrrjq avTr}<i ov Trepifieu i? ('vw to reXoq
rwv Xoycov dvaara'i d7re(fyr}vd/j,r)v, Kai Tr)v afiu^jbov €Keiv7)v
KoX ipyaTiKrjv uiroKiTrtav fiere^atvoi Trpih. rtjv UaLheiai
fiaKa yeyrjOo)^, kul fidXiara iireC fioi t\ . povv r/ cKvrdXr}
KUL oTL irXrjyd^i ovk 6\Lya<i evdv<i up^oixivtp /xot v^e?
ivejpiy^raro. i) he dTrdXeKpOeicra to /xev irpoyfov 'jyavdKret
Kol TO) %et/)e (TweKporeL koI rov<i ohu-ra^i vveTrpte' reXoi;
Be. Mcnrep ttju ^lo^rjv dKovofiep, eireTrifyei k-oX ek dov
fiere^i^XTjTo. ei Se TrapdSo^a errade, fxif < "■ qre'
OavfiaTOTToiol yap o'l oveipor i) erepa h> pu^ fie
aTTiSovaa, Toiyapovv djueiylrofiai ere, e(f)r}. , rSe t*;?
SiKatO(TvvT}<:, on KaXw<i rrjv Blkt^v ehUau %l eXde
ijSi), iiridrjdt tovtov tov ox^P'aTOf. — Sei^acrd n 0)(7)fia
vtroTTTepaiv 'ittttcov nvtov rep Ilrjyda^ eoiKorwv — 07ra)9
elSfjq, ola Kol TjXiKa fxr) dicoXovdriaa<i ep,ol dyvoijaeiv
efieXXe^.
LuciAN, Vita.
1. Parse dTre(f)r)vdfj.7}v, aTroXiirdiV, yeyr}0(o(;, iverpCy^ajo,
dirdXeLt^Oelaa, eTreTr/jyei, and /nere/Si^XijTo.
2. Te\o9, I. 7. In what case, and why?
3. Nio^Tjv. Write a brief account of Niobe.
4. KaXm. Give the comparative and superlative.
6. Urjyda-o). Write a brief account of Pegasus.
III.
Translate :
"^X2? 0aTO, yrjOrjaev 8e ^orjv dyado<i AiofjbijSrjii.
"E7Y09 fiev KareTrij^ev e-jrl ')(6ovl TvovXv^oreiprf,
Avrap 6 ijLeLXi')(ioL(TL TrpocnjvSa Troifxeva Xacov.
"*H pd vu fioL ^etvo<i 7raTpco'i6<i eaaL 7raXai,6<{'
n?..-..\
t
vj'tfct/'v "/up -iiutc vtu; tt/if^urtx. UL,\/\.cpo(poVT7]V
'p,€Lvia evl fieydpoicriv eeUoaiv rjfiar ipv^U'i.
0/ Be Kol dXXriXot(7V Tropov ^eivrjia KaXd'
Oivev^ fiev ^(aarfjpa BiBov <\)oivi,m (paeivbvf
osltion of the
I? ('yo) TO TeXo9
tfiujj b>ov €Keivr]v
s Tijv Haiheiav
vovv r} (TkutoXt]
^h(p fioL x^^^
'jiyjov i)'^/avdKTei
vveirpte' Te\o9
et Kal eh 6 op
■^ < '^ r)T€'
a S> pos' fie
I)?;, T,,/Se T//9
lOi , at eXOe
^aad rt o^Vfia
OlKOriCV OTTO)?
Ifiol wyvorjaeiv
CIAN, Vita.
?, iverpiyJraTo,
lative.
isus.
reipTi,
'TTjV
2?.
f
^J
BeX\epo<^oinri79 Se ypvceov ^ v, au<hiKwr€\\ov,
>v ta>< "• a<r ep.ot(nv.
IIoMEi Viat?, VI., vv. 213-221.
Kat " ^7a) KariXecTrov iun "'• ao-' ifxoia-iv
p.tv.
1. Aiop,i]87}q. Write a brief account of Diomede.
2. .'arse Kariwrj^ev, irpocrrjvha^ ia-ai, €pv^a<;, tropov, and
3. Derive irovkv^ord , % fieiyixtoitri, tind dpcfyiKvireWov.
4. Give the hiws regulatin? th. uantity of final a.
5. Distinguish the use < .di the genitive, dative,
and accusative.
A V
Translate :
^" AaipovLi], pr'i poi TL Xlr)v uKaxi^eo Oufito-
Ovydp Ti? fM virep alaav dvi]p "AiSt irpold^fL-
Molpavh' ov Ttm </)7//ii irecfivyp^evov "€p,p.€vaL dvBpcov,
Ov KaKov, ovSe pei^ eaOXov, iiryju rd irpcora yev7)Tai.
^AX\' 649 oIkov lovaa rd a avr?}s epya Ko/xi^e,
ItTTov r 't]XaKdT7]v re, Kal dp(f>c7r6Xotai ntXeve
Epyov eTToipaeai. UoXepo^ 8' dvBpeaat peXijaei
^a(Tiv,Jfxol Be p-dXtara, rol 'JX/w eyyeydaaivy
"n? dpa j)Oivr](Ta<i KopvO' eiXero (f)ai8ipo^ "EKTCOp
"iTTTTOvpiv dXo^o<i 8e (f)iXr} oIkovSc ^e/StJKec
'EvrpoTraXi^opevT}, OaXepov Kara SdKov yeovcra.
lUyjra 6 eireiU iKave bopov<i euvaierdovTa'i
"E«Topo9 dv8po(f)6voio,^ Ki^rja-aro S' €v8oOl iroXXd^
AptfuTToXovi, rfjcnv Be yoov Trdarjcnv evcopaev.
Alpev ert ^coov y6<v"EKTopa m d'vl oI'km-
pi/ ydp piv er echai>ro vTroTpoirov eV noXepoLo
"l^eadai, irpod jovra. ptvo^ Kat ;^et/ua9 'AxaiMv.
Homer, Iliad, VI., vv. 486-502.
I'S'^^n^ '^^i>^f^^^ov, yeprjrai^iyyeyc'iaaiv, evcopaev, Uavro,
and t^eadai. r ■> t »
2. ^e^rJKei. What is the force of the tense ?
3. Give the ordinary forms of any dialectic varieties in
this extract.
4. What changes in the Greek alphabet ?
6. State the different opinions, and the grounds thereof,
as to the age of Homer.
.0^,. V> "^^x^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
//
Mil'/ ^^^S^ ^y^Jk
S
1.0
I.I
11.25
■ 50
^ ill
12.2
2.0
1.8
U llllli.6
<^
/A
7
'*> >/
^ ^ '^r ^'^
//
f
'#■
7
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
,\
4?
'^'
\
\
%
.V
^>
™^u-
;\
«r..j«>
rv
-9,^
mmvmti ot ^otonto.
'^u'^^y
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FIEST YEAR.
LATIN.
JSzaminers.'f^^^- John M^q^^j^^ j^j^ j^
i Thomas Moss, M. A.
Translate :
I.
Ecce gubernator sese Palinurus agebat :
gui Libyco nuper cursu, dum sidera servat,
^ixciderat puppi mediis effusus in undis.
Hunc ubi vix multa maestum cognovit in umbra.
Sic prior alloquitur: " Quis te, Palinure, deorum
±iripuit nobis, medioque sub aequore mersit ?
gic age. Namque mihi, fallax baud ante repertus
Hoc uno responso animum delusit Apollo,
Qui fore te ponto incolumem, finesque caJiebat
Venturum Ausonios. En haec promissa fides est ?"
Ille autem : « Neque te Phoebi cortina fefellit,
Dnx Anchisiada, nee me deus sequore mersit.
Kamque gubernaclum multa vi forte revulsum
Cui datus haerebam custos, cursusque regebam,
Prsecipitans traxi mecum. Maria aspera iuro,
Jjon ullum pro me tantum cepisse timorem,
Quam tua ne, spoliata armis, excussa magistro,
Deticeret tantis navis surgentibus undis
Tres notus iiibernas immensa per sequora noctes
Vexit me violentus aqua ; vix lumine quarto
I'rospexi Itaham summa sublimis ab uada.
Paulatim adnabam terroe : jam tuta tenebam;
^1 gens crudehs madida cum veste gravatum,
Prensantemque uncis manibus capita a^pera montis,
i^erro invasisset, praedamque ignara putasset.
Virgil, JEneis vi., 337-361.
2. Anchiaiada. What other form ?
stru'ction! ^''^'''^^'^ oursusque regeham. Explain the con-
Tut; fZ teek™'' ""'"^^ ^' '^' "^''^ ^^^^^^ ^^P^^««^^^ ?
5. iVow ullum cepisse timorem. Give different con-
structions, and translate accordingly. "^nerent con-
6. Ignara putasset. What other reading ?
7- Summd subUmis ah undd. Quote Homeric phrase.
imft'atldT ""^"^ '°'^^'"' ''^''^*'^ ^y ^""'^ '' tM« P^s'^age
9. Give the derivations of 'puppis, prsecipito, maqister
hems, subhmis, tutus, uncus. "^ ^^ * ^ ^ V ''"ff^^^^^y
II.
1. Mention any minor poems of Virgil.
2. How do you account for the fact that in the middle
ages Virgil was considered a wizard ?
8utunTtive%'^''' ^''""' '"^"''' *^' indicative, and when the
4. Explain the terms arsis, thesis and csesura.
Translate :
III.
Ti. Gracchus regnum occupare conatus est, vel
regnavit IS quidem paucos menses. Num quid simile
populus Komanus audierat, aut viderat? Hunc etiam
post mortem secuti amici et propinqui, quid in P.
Scipionem effecerint, sine lacrymia nm an,>n Aio-.. .
autem tribunatu, quTd ^"^^^^^^^^^ ,?« C. Gracchi
semel cc«pit, labi J tt nli^^^?^"^' ^""^
quanta sit facta labes, primo >?' a ■ *^^^P* J"°^ »«te
autem post, C7a.m. 7ide"e iam Tl '^'' ^^'^"'^
senatu disjunctum multitudinisVue arh ? • ' ^^^"^""^ «»
agi. Plures enim discent 2^'.^^^^^^^^
quam quemadmodum his resltXr "o ™ ^""^ ^"*'
Quia sine sociis nemo quLuam fn^I' ^."°''"'° ^«^° ?
endum est igitur bon?s uf ^ • '°"^*"'- ^^*<^'Pi-
ignari casu aliquo i„dder L '" ''^"''^^^^ ^"^^^i^ias
alligatos, ut ab amici n ma ^na ^lln"''^^ ^^* ««
non discedant: improbis S^ ."^"* '^ P'^^^ntib"^
nee vero minor iis mii l! .• P^""? statuenda est :
qui ipsi fuerinl im^ttirdSces""' ^^'"""^^ ^^^^ ->
i>e Amicitia, ch. 12.
fir,t-appt".edt ^"^'^ "■•" "''^'"''anoes were tribm,es
4. m..,. « .oM. Mention variou. V- .«J.««n'..
<^''*»'«i''y- ^tat was the purport of this law?
IV.
neaV^trt:\-'<^^«:ip^^^^^^^^^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
GREEK.
HONORS.
JExaminers : I 5^^' '^^^^ McCaul, LL D
5 Thomas Moss, M.a!
Translate:
. IIAOTT. O^^ ^,1 roOro, & 'Epav ^XV ' '
2i%r^P,- rem ^e^cf>eek'MZ\Toirol^"^''^'
eWor/rw,- 0ear&7' ''^''^'""' '""'■"^^'O" oiSUS6:^Jp
0^09 iTT^n^e Wore ^T' ^^^^«^-o^ra9, oh odSe Khv
'rrepcep^ovrac oiB' airol Zre^Zt^olaa^ ^P^-o^^e,
'rrXovTova-ip. j^TtvovT€<i olfiai on fifj Svap
HAOTT. 'Erepocov rovr' icrrlv & 'Fo -^ ^ . s
TWovTwv airoffreXXei /J>e trap* avrov^ &re TrXotn-oSori;?
KoX fi€yd\68a)po<i kuI auT09 wy 8r)Xol yovv koI to) ovo/xari.
eTreiB^v roivvv fieroLKiaOrivai Sirj fie Trap* erepov tt/so?
cTepov, 6? BiXrop ifjb^a\6pT€<i fie koX KaTaa-rjfnjvdfievot
€7rt/A6\&>9 (f)op7)Bbv dpdfievot fieraKOfii^ouai' koI 6 fiev
V€Kpo<i iv (TKOTeiVM TTOV T^9 OLKiaf TTpOKClTai VTTep T^
yovara iraiXaia rfj odovy aKeirofievo'i, irepifid'^TfTO^ Tat9
yaXal<ij ifie Se oi eVeXTr/cai/Te? ev ttj dyopa Trepifiivoven
K€)(7)v6T€<i &<nT€p TTfv '^eXiBova irpoaTrerofievrjv Terpirfore^
oi veoTToL
LuciAN, Timon.
1. Parse eXeX^f^et?, dirioi, Trpoyr}pdaavTo<}, etrecevy i(r)(i)-
#fOTa9, fieroiKia-drjvai, Kexv^ore^;, T€Tpiy6T€<;.
2. What is the diflference between oTrore and ottotuv ?
3. Explain vaTfKTfy^ and (ndBiov.
4. What is the difference between k&v ovo^ vvrjp^e, and
6vo<i inrrjp^e ?
y 5. ovap. Decline. What is the construction?
6. are. What is the corresponding Latin word ?
7. BeXrov. What ? Why so called ?
8. T^9 olKia<i. Why in genitive ?
11.
1. Give a list of prepositions governing one, two and three
cases.
2. What classes of verbs take a double accusative ?
3. What are the laws for the formation of compounds,
especially as to the vowel ending the first part or beginning
the second ?
4. Explain the use of the moods after conjunctions of
time.
III.
Translate :
' O^p 6 76 TavT eiTovelro iBvlrjau irpatrlBea-CLVf
T6(f)pa 01 iyyvOev ^Xde Bed 0eTt9 dpyvpoire^a.
Tr]V Bk iBe trpofioXovcra X.dpi<; Xi'irapoKpy,Befivo<i
KaX^, T^v (airvie 'irepiicXvTo<i * AfK^uyvrfU^},
i^<r< Trap «m€T« ;^;<jA^e„o„ &.«aXa ^o\XA
Hfe. „„. e,C. ofre ev^&y dv0pZrZ '
AXXa @iTK re koX EdpWu« Icrlv ID • '
O4.P & iy& ^i^a, ,,^,,^„4. ktatti^ar
Homer, Aa^, j^jy^^ ^^ 380-409.
thiL'^Ji;."""'"""^'"™' «f "-o ^-'ectio varieties in
tinf; o^Hlr;''' """ "■" "■■=— ~ -unded i„ the
4. What instances of the nse of ..«,-, ;„ y, ^^^^ ^
5. Where does he admit hiatui ?
• ^\ ^"^ *''« dialectic vari^t;.., „f .1,
">fin.tive and imperative ofX? " P""'^™' indicative,
T. R.p.ain the meaning and use of the suffix ^. „r ^..
o. What indicator- -V 'i. —• , ^
original poem ? ^" '^^ ^^^^^ ^^ additions to the
T]
8ainitiet«f(3? of ^rovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIEST YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: I ^^^- John McCaul, LL.D
I Thomas Moss, M.A.
I.
Translafce :
Haec ubi dicta dedit, solio se tollit ab alto-
Post hinc ad navIsSL^ .„ •''•'"'™'"'-
Quorum de numrro^aut!"' °T,'?™ "■'"«'»!
Ooius ire eq„i.L K„ra7ter '•''^'"'
Turn pater Euandrua d^^tL^ »«paret imago.
Qualis eram, cum Brimlm f„- ^ b ■■ '""«'«'
|ravi ...oJum^nS^^^^^^^ .ub ip.
|pn|o"un^~r^:-^S^^^^^^^^
Horrendum dictu— dederaf fJrrTo
ueaerat, terna arma movenda;
>i
U.'
Ter leto sternendus erat ; cui turn tamon omnia
Abstulit haec animas doxtra, et totidem exuit armis :
Non ego nunc dulci amplexu divellerer asquam,
Nate, tuo ; ncque finitimo Mezentius umquam
Huic capiti insultans tot ferro saeva dedisset
Funera, tam multis viduasset civibus urbem.
JEneid, viii. 541-571.
1. Herculeis. What diflSculty in this reading ? Explain
the reading, Herceis,
2. Lares, Penates. From what sources was their worship
derived ?
3. Propius periclo it timor. Give different explanations.
4. Praeneste. What is tho modern name ? What cele-
brated temple in the town ? Why were the people nick-
named Nuculce?
5. Scutorum. How did the scutum differ in form from
the Clipeus ? What is the corresponding Greek term ?
6. Tyrrhenis. What is supposed to have been the origin
of this people ? Give a brief sketch of their political con-
stitution.
7. Nate. When is the form gnatus inadmissible ?
8. Give the derivations of ara, hesternus^ macto, cetera,
pronus, nuncius, imagot letum, aegnis, acies, sopor.
9. Distinguish between inter csedes Rutulorum and inter
csed^m Rutulorum.
11.
1. Point out differences in epic treatment between the
Iliad and the JEneid.
2. Prove from the 8th Book that interdum dormitat Vir-
gilius.
3. Under what restrictions is the hiatus admitted by
Virgil?
4. Give biographies of Ennius and Livius Andronicus.
III.
Translate:
Age vero, ilia res quantam declarat ejusdem hominis
apud hostes populi Romani auctoritatem quod ex locis
tarn longinquis, tamquo diversis, tarn brevi tempore
omnes uni huic so dediderunt ? quod Cretensium leLti
cumm eorum insula noster imporato- exercitusque esset!
ad tn. lompeium m ultimas propo terras venerunt
eiquese omnes Cretensium civitates dedere vello dixl
erunt ? Quid idem iste Mithridates ? nonnc ad eundem
tn. I ompeium, legatura usquo in Hispaniam misit ?
eum quem Pompeius legatum semper judicavit • ii
quibus semper erat molestum, ati oum potissimum esse
missum, speculatorem, quam legatum judfari maluerunt.
Potestis igitur jam constituere, Quirites, banc auctori-
tatem, multis postea rebus gestis, magnisque vestris
judicus amplificatam, quantum apud illos reges, quantum
apud exteras nationes valituram esse existimetis
^ Reliquum est, ut de felicitate, quam praestare de se
ipso nemo potest, meminisse et commemoraro de altero
possumus, sicut aeauum est homini de potestate deorum
timido et pauca dicamus. Ego enim sic existumo.'
Maximo, Marccllo, Scipioni, Mario, et ceteris magnia
imperatoribus, non solum propter virtutem, sed etiam
propter fortunam, saepius imperia mandata, atque exer-
citus esse commissos. Fuit enim profecto quibusdam
summis viris quaedam ad amplitudinem et gloriam et
ad res magnas bene gerendas dirinitus adjuncta fortuna-
de hujus autem hominis felicitate, quo de nunc agimus*
hac utar moderatione dicendi, non uf in illius potestate
tortunam positam esse dicam, sed ut praeterita memin-
isse, rehqua sperare videamur, ne aut invisa diis
immortahbus oratio nostra, aut ingrata esse videatur.
Cicero, pro leg. Man., c. 16.
1. Cretensium legati. Give the true statement of this
affair.
2. Noster imperator. Who ?
3. What was the exact technical meaning of imperium 2
How only could it be conferred ? ^
4. Usque in Hispaniam. In what was Pompey then en-
gaged ? *^ ''
5. Iste Mithridatesi. Mpnf.ion *^^ »^».;t,-: — i „ •
Which iste is used.
6. Vestris judiciis. Give instances.
* 'llH M
H '
if ,
'* ..*'!
7. Maximo, Scipioni. Write brief notices of these com-
manders.
8. Nunc agimus. Translate agere cum populo,
IV.
1. Who were the principal opponents of the Manilian
law?
2. What was a rogatio ? Explain the formulae with which
it always commenced and terminated. What was adrogatio ?
3. How does Sallust describe the character of Pompey ?
4. Distinguish between the gerund and the gerundive ;
and explain the origin of the latter.
5. Give a sketch of the second Mithridatic war.
nnmvuitp of srotronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
EUCLID.
Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
1. On the same base and on the same side of it there
cannot be two triangles which have their sides which are
terminated in one extremity of the base, equal to one
another, and likewise those which are terminated in the
other extremity.
the^'thtZsidl! ^'^^^ ""^ "" *"''''^^' ^'' *'^'*^'' ^'"^*'' *^^"
nf fe/i??'/''"^ any proposition beyond the first book
of Euclid, that two circles which have not a common centre
cannot cut one another in more points than two.
,2' ^V\*';r^^'? ^^^^ ^''^ angles of the one equal to
two angles of the other, each to each, and have also those
^inl? T '^'''^.^'^ f^J^^ent to equal angles in each, then
hall the other sides be equal, each to each ; and al o the
third angle of the one to the third angle of the other
i> and E are the middle points of AB, AC sides of a ir\
Fd'^ FE^n^o'd " ?^ -^^ produced, any poi^; FVLken ;
^P in ? ^It ^''^ ?•'' •'' ^T '^''^^'^ *'"ough A parallel to
iiC m (x, H respectively; shew that GH is equal to BQ.
4. If a side of a triangle be produced, the exterior angle
LTlf • ^^^ '"'"/'"' ^"^ ^PP*^'^*^ ^"g^«« ; ^nd the
right an iT' """^ ^'"'^ *"''"^^' are equal to two
If from two of the angles of a triangle perpendiculars be
drawn upon the opposite sides, the third angle of the tri-
if
n
'1
it
■J. it
'1
' g''g1
<^f'
it'
ti
angle is equal to the sum of the angles contained bj the side
opposite to it and the two perpendiculars.
5. To divide a straight line into two parts, so that the
rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts may
be equal to the square on the other part.
If a line be thus divided, shew that the rectangle con-
tained by the difference of the parts and the greater part
equals the square on the other part.
6. The angle at the centre of a circle is double of the
angle at the circumference on the same base, that is, on the
same part of the circumference.
Two lines which cut a circle intersect ; shew that the angle
between them equals the semi-sum, or semi-difference of the
angles subtended by the intercepted arcs at the centre of
the circle, according as the point of section falls within or
without the circle.
7. The angles in the same segment of a circle are equal
to one another.
Construct a triangle, having given one angle, the side
opposite to it, and the point in which the bisector of the
given angle meets the given side.
8. If from any point without a circle two straight lines are
drawn, one of which cuts the circle, and the other touches
it; the rectangle contained by the whole line which cuts the
circle, and the part of it without the circle, shall be equal
to the square on the line which touches it.
A straight line BC of given length is intercepted between
two straight lines AB, AC given in position, and two circles
are drawn touching each of the three ; shew that for all posi-
tions of BC, the part of AB intercepted between the points
of contact of the circles is constant.
9. To describe an isosceles triangle, having each of the
angles at the base double of the third angle.
In the figure of this proposition, let the two circles meet
in D and E, and let ABD be the triangle required shew
that if a tangent at A meet BD produced in F, AFD is a
triangle having the required property.
Shew also that if BA bo produced to meet the circle
again in G, and GE be joined and produced to meet BD in
K, GBK is another such triangle.
10. If the vertical angle of a triangle be bisected by a
straight line which also cuts the base, the segments of the
IT.^M! ^T *^' ""V^^'^ ^^^^^ *^« ^*^er sides of the
triangle have to oiv mother.
op^rlt^aSja^^^X; tto^ ^^^ «^^^
ratl^onS^r;!:^^:?,:^^^;^^ ^"^^'^^ ^^ *^^ ^^p"-^^
Through a point in the side of a triangle draw a line
cutting off a quarter of the triangle.
r;in\!; Jfl^ rectangle contained by the diagonals of a quad-
rila eral figure inscribed m a circle is equal to both the rect-
angles contained by its opposite sides.
29nftiev0U|l of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIEST YEAR.
ALGEBRA.
Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A.
1. State the reasoning by which the truth of the following
formulas ia established :
ah = ba; a(p-\-c) — ah + ac ; a^^.a"* = a»H^».
What are the values of the quantities Q >c a,~ . a\ 0" for
different values of a ?
Find the values of
first, when w = ^, a = 0, 6 = 1; second, when w = 1, 6 = — 1.
2. Investigate Horner's method of division, and show how it
may be used in finding the value of /(a), where fix) is any
rational and integral function of x.
Shew that whether we divide /(a;) by aa; +6 or by » + ^,
a
the remainder in either case will be the value of /(— - ).
^ a'
3. Prove the rule for finding the least common multiple of two
or more Algebraic quantities.
If a, 6, c be three quantities, having respectively the factors
a, ^, 7 such that no two have any common measure, and L^, L ^L
be the least common multiples of (6, c), (c, a), (a, h) regnectivelv*
prove ^ ^' \ ' i J 7
«A = /5A=7A'
J* *
4. Shew how the magnitude of a fraction is altered by increasing
or diminishing both its terms by the same quantity.
Show that a j^roper fraction is less diminished by adding the
same quantity to both its terms than it is increased by subtracting
that quantity from each term.
Trace the changes of magnitude of y^j and y-rj as w
changes from 4- CO to — CO.
5. Prove that every quadratic equation has two roots, and
investigate a rule for finding them.
Find the condition that the equation (a -r x) {b — x) = c'
may have its roots equal.
6. If a : 6 :: c : d. then will
pa + qb:ma-{- nh '.: pc ■{■ qd : mc+nd ;
and m» + qab I mab + nb^ :: \ J^ I — f
7. Explain the notation called " Variation."
If a'+i" CO be, and ac vz b\ then -. + _ is invariable.
6" 6
8. When are three quantities said to be in arithmetic, geome-
tric, or harmonic progr'^ssion 1 In each case, given two of the
quantities, show how to find the remaining one.
The equation aa;" + 2 i.c + c = 0, will have its roots real
and unequal, equal, or imaginary, according as «, 6, c are in the
above progressions respectively.
9. Investigate a formula by which the sum of n quantities in
arithmetic progression can be found.
The sum of the successive odd numbers, commencing with
2p + I, and ending with 2q - 1, is q^ - p^-
10. Shew how to find the sum of a series of quantities in
geometric progression ; and tL o limit of this sum when the series
is prolonged indefinitely, the ratio being a pro[)er fraction.
This ratio being — shew that the sum ad inf : can be
bi
relied upon as giving correctly the first n figures for the sum of n
terms, when (-)" > 100 001, (w zeros.)
^a *
11. (a) Multiply together the following :
a' _ 3 a; _ 1, 2a;^ 4- 4a; + I , ■:>? - ^a; - 3 ;
and extract the square root of the product.
\
(0) Divide, by Homer's method
1 + a: + 45x« + 135x' by 1 + 3a; + 4aj»,
and continue the quotient as far as a;", giving the finite remainder
tiien leit.
(y) Find the greatest common measure of
1 — a? + y + « ^xi/ + i/z — zx — xyz,
and '^—x^y — z+xy+yx + zx — xyz;
and shew that their least common multiple is a complete square
if a; = y» + «" — y V.
12. Beduce to lowest terms :
(a;— 1 3:4.3
1-a: 2+a; ^
(^) -7J-, o ., , ^jrr + anal +
13. Solve the equations :
(a) h{x - 1) - Ka? - 2) = \{x - 3) - ^(cr — 4) ;
(/9) (10* - xy + 10*(a:* + 1) «^ a;' + 100000001 ;
(7) (a: + «)(« + *) = (« + c) (6 + c) ;
(8) Va-+6J- v^+^= 7^~r-^^«'.
V a + c
14. Sum
« -(i+|)-(2+!i^')-(3 + !l^%
to w terms;
, f/3) (1+ vi) + i 4- H 1 - ^/D +
to n terms.
w 7f-VI+7l-
to infinity.
15. A pamphlet, when set up in type, is found to contain 2000
lines, and will make a certain number of pages ; but by closing
up the lines so as to get into each page one-fifth more and one
over, the number of pages can be diminished by 20. How many
were there ?
M >'■<'«
^;;j*^
I 4;
WinmvuHsi Of SToronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIKST YEAR.
TRIGONOMETRY.
Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A.
1. State the rule for finding the characteristic of a logarithm
and prove that the maiitissa is unaffected by any chanrof th^
position of the decimal point in the number. ^ ^
characYeiStV^ri "^ u> ' T*"?" °^ logarithms were such that the
cMracteiisticof log 10 is 2, what may the characteristic of lo- 100
be,^and what must be the least value of the base thatlfmay
byyoTCrithm: '" ^"^'^'"^°^ multiplication and involution
Given log 2 and log 3, find the logarithms of
0-5, 60, 0-8, 250, 4-5.
2 «n/n^f.i!°° ^^'^^ " ~ ^°o^' ^' ^^y ^^^« "'^'^ the logarithms of
jS and 0-5 the same mantissa 1 ®
3. Perform the following operations by logarithms:
(«) Multiply 123-45 into 5-4321 ;
(i3) Find the value of (±?^)' '
67059 '
(^> ^'-^-^I- ,
4. Define the trigoaometrieal ratios of an angle less than 90°
900 a^dirtltlsoof "*"'^*'""'^'' '■""'""8"' S'-**^*""^
"Why need not the tables be ext- ^d beyond 90° 1
%\
' "' H'xt
'i;|
'"' i'^'^
'''"$%
^ ' •*' vS
'■ '^*"^''«i
i^^
' "^ ^
'-" N^
Vi.- *
[if "' ■
Write down the five independent relations connecting the
ratios of an angle.
5. Find tan 45^ and sin 30O.
Deduce from them sin 45° and tan Z0°.
Write down the tabular logarithms of these quantities.
Having given the tabular logarithms of the sines of all
angles up to 90°, shew how those of the other ratios of these
angles can be found.
6. State the different cases that arise in the solutions of right-
angled triangles, and solve one of them.
A ladder rests between a wall and the ground at an angle
of 45^; if its foot is moved halfway towards the wall, through what
angle will the ladder have revolved 1 Shew that the top will
have moved ( y/f — 2) times as much as the foot.
7. Prove the formulas :
{a)\ sin {A-{-B) = sin J. cos JB + cos A sin J9;
(j3) ,.. 2 sin'^ = 1 - cos 2 ^ ;
Bin J: 4- sin J? _ tan \ { A-\- B ) .
^^' sin A ^ain H " t^^ {A-B)'
(5) sin -4 cos 2 -S + cos 2 .^ sin B =
sin f (A+B) Cos ^ {B-A) + cos | {A-B) sin I {B-A).
8. How many independent relations connect the six parts of a
triangle ] When three parts are given, in what cases may they
fail to give a distinct triangle ?
If the angle A be obtuse, shew that no triangle can exist
unless "' > --°^---. , where A' is the supplement of A.
h coaB
9. In any triangle, prove the relations :
, . sin A Bin B sin C .
(o) = — f — = ,
^ •' a c
(^) c = 6 cos^ + acosB;
A-B a-b . G .
('y^ *^^-T- = m:6 '°'t'
(8) tan ^ = ^(i^^.^, (. the semiperi-
meter.)
A BO
((£\ cos -^ cos — cos -- (cot A+coi i?+cot C)
___ (a±h+c) (g' +y+c*) ^
Sabo
10. Solve the following triangles :
(o) a = 209-88, 6 = 333-33, C= 122© 26'.
(3) « = 753.09, 6 = 333-33, c = 66666.
(7) A = 57034', a = 54-32]. b = 87-654.
(^) A = 57034', a =: 47-979, b = 54-321.
11. A person coming straight down an incline notes the dia-
tance between two points of his descent. On reaching the foot of
the incline, he walks straight on along the horizontal plane for a
known distance, and then measures the angles of elevation of the
two points. Shew that he is able to calculate the angle of the
inchne, and the heights of the two points above his level.
Num.
Log.
Angle.
Log.
12345
09149
7° 07'
tan
9-09639
15000
17609
13"08
tan
9-36795
20000
30103
15"18
sin
9-42139
20988
32197
21"40
cosec
10-43273
30000
47712
31 "07
tan
9-78077
42755
63099
45"45
tan
10.01137
43269
63618
49"34
sin
9-88148
47979
68105
57"34
sin
9-92635
50000
69897
10.07365
9-73987
54321
73497
61"13
cosec
cot
60000
77815
69"18
cos
9-54836
67059
82646
72"52
sin
9-98029
87654
94277
94105
97361
1.
whicl
Sol
2. I
ber "wi
of 5 ai
J
by th(
that it
is so d
3. ]
tional.
(l+x-
^o""^-
im
tliutievjeifti? of ^oronio.
Annual examinations • i864.
FIRST YEAR.
ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Uxaminer: Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
1. Find by means of indoteminate multipliers the value of z
whicJx satisfies the simultaneous equations,
«i^+*i y+Ci 2r = f/j
Solve the equations :
(i.) {x+a-\-b)* + {x+b+cy + {x+c-\-af
=3 (x+a+b) {z+b+c) (cc+c+a).
2. Shew how to (\-pres3 a given mixed number iu any scale.
Express 7593 7 in the scale whose radix is G. What num-
ber will be expressed by the same two digits in each of the scales
of 5 and 71.
If a number, exppressed in the common scale, be denoted
by the digits p p^,p,^, beginning with the unit digit, shew
that it will be divisible by 12, when Po—2p, +4,(p + p + )
is so divisible. i \i-2 j 3 "-j
3. Investigafo the general term of the expansion of {%-\-a 07+
f?*+ )"' where n is positive or negative, integral or frac-
tional.
If c,Cj, c be the coefficients in the
(l+a;+a;V', tli
en
expansion of
CoCft.-C,6- . + c„c„_„—
+ (-1/ ''^.+iC.-i=J{i-H'"-.}
5s!
r
m
4. If the denominators of the fractions -tS f-S ••• r" have all the
same sign, shew that the fraction ^1+^2+ ••• +^>» Ues between
the greatest and least of the original fractions.
Shew also that if there be n positive quantities, a, hj c, ...
which are not all equal, then
^+^+"+ - > {aba ...f'
5. If A-\-Bx-{-Cz^+ ... = a+bz-{-cx^ -\- ... for all values
of X, shew that A=:a, B—b, <5*c=<j-c. Employ this principle
^ 2a;
(i.) To separate into partial fractions r \8 / 1 o\
(ii.) To sum to n terms the series 1.2+2.3+3.4+ ....
6. State and prove Format's theorem.
n— 1 m— 1
If m and n are prime numbers, shew that m ■\- n — 1 is
divisible by mn.
7. Prove by a geometrical construction that
, . , „> tan A + tan B
tan (A + 5) = i_tanA teO-
Prove also the formula 2 sin -'^ x — vers — ^ 2a;', and shew
that if sin (0— a) sin (0—^9) ~ sin a sin ^, then
tan 6 = tan («+yQ), unless =1 nir.
8. Shew that if be the circular measure of an angle less than
90°, sin ^ < and > — ^ •
Q R ff
Shew that the limit of cos ^. cos ^ ...cos ^,, when m is
sin
infinite, is
e
:f%'> '•
If / (0) be a function of given by the equation / (2^)=
(1 — tan'^)/(0), and if/(0) = m, shew that /(^) = mO cot S-
9. Find a formula which will include all angles having a given
sine'. Solve the equation cos — sin 5fl = cos 3 — sin 3 0.
10 Define the base of the Napierian system of logarithms, and
expand log, (l+») in ascending powers of x.
11. Obtain exponential expressions for the sine and cosine.
From the equivalence of the expansions of
log(i.
■X e
"•'-') + log (i+.7'^')
and log -j 1— a; (2 y/1Il sin + x)l
obtain the expansion of cos 2nB and of sin (2n+l)0 in terms of
powers of sin $.
12. Sum to n terms the series
cosa+cos («+i3)+cos (a+2l3)+ ,
and shew that
sin o+sin 3a+sin 5a -\- .... to w terms = ^^^' ^° .
sino
t'i
centi
pend
ABC
inter
and •
the s
scrib
poini
tions
and i
cube.
Unibtvms ot Zovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST, SECOND, AND THIRD YEARS, AND
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PROBLEMS.
HONORS.
Uxaminers : \ ^' ^' S?\^^™^^ ^'^'
I Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
1 . If a trapezium be inscribed in a circle, the line joining the
centre of the circle with the intersection of its diagonals is per-
pendicular to its parallel sides.
2. The middle points U and F of AB, BC aides of a square
ABCD, being joined with D and A respectively, ED and FA
intersect in G ; shew that a circle may be described about EBFG,
and that the length of a tangent drawn to it from D is equal to
the side of the square.
3. Upon the sides of a triangle as diameters circles are de-
scribed : shew that their three common chords intersect in a
point.
4. If
x^ — y.
2/2 — x^i
X
xyz
tions, is equal to
y
xy
xyz
shew that each of these frac-
111
-, to a; + 2/ + z, and to .—f - + —
xyz xyz
5. Eliminate x, y, z from the equations
ax = c'y + b'z \
by =. a'z ■\- c'x I •
cz = b'x 4- o,'y j
6. If aoi? '+ 3 iaj'' + 3 ca? + t/ contain acc^ -j- ^hx + c as a factor,
and the latter be a complete square, the former will be a complete
cube.
'*8 ■ ».'»|
■J.1
7. If
'it-
S i
, <(»
r.
T?«;
A
X =
6« +
cy
}
2/ =
ex +
az
ay +
bx
prove
/i\
1 «2
1-&2
]-
-C2
(0 •••
a;'^
y^
-ft* V
-b'
+
i '
(ii) ...
V 1 a'
a
c
VI
a' Vl-
'1-
-c"
a
8. In any scale of notation, radix r, the (r — 1) digits are
formed into any number of numbers, oach digit being used once
and only once ; given that the sum of these numbers lies betfl^een
^r and (p+l)r, shew that it is pr-\-s, where s is the number
which must be added to the sum of the digits in the lower limit
to make it divisible by ^ — ]).
9, A train in consequence of meeting with an accident is
obliged to lessen its speed ; had the accident occurred a miles
further back, the train would have been p minutes later than it
was in arriving at the terminus ; and if h miles further on, it
would have been q minutes earlier. Shew that the difference of the
times of ninning a mile before and after the accident is Vj±l
a + h
minutes.
10. Prove,
(i)
(ii)
u y.i8
4- :iL_l.__ 4- ad inf:
9.18.27 "^
1
01
~l . (n-l)(n-2) __ (n-.l)(n-2)0z-3) +
3 ^ 3.4 3.4.5
2
n a positive integer .
11.
m
If '<'!±m}±l)'i:-^j:.^:^^^^^ be denoted by /(«,,.) ,
a,,d ■^(^^-1)(^^-2) lorjactor^ ^^^^^^ ,
prove /(w, 2r) +/(n, 2r— 1)(^(«, 1) +/(7i, 2r— 2) ^ (w, 2) +
= </.(2w, 2/-)4-(^(2w,2r— 2)/(«,l) + ^(2«,2r-4)/(M, 2)+...
12. A number and its ?*th power will end with the same digit
when r is any power of 5.
13. Each person of a given party puts his gloves into a bag,
and a pair is then distributed to each at random ; find the chance,
(1,) that every person gets liis own ; (2,) that a specified indi-
vidual does so.
14. Prove that in any triangle
a + b — c
'^ = anal=
. A . Ji
sin -r sin — ■ cos —
2 2 2
= « 4- J 4- c
ABO
cos -2 cos _ cos --
15. If i?, r, rj, r^, r, be the respective radii of the circum-
scribed, the inscribed, and the three escribed circles of a triangle
shew that tlie area ot the triangle is equal to V^^^T;^ ; also that
the area of the triangle formed by joining the centres of the
escribed circles is equal to
2i2{(6-fc)sin^ 1 +(c4-«)sin^-^- + (a+i)sin^-|- j.
16. A person walking along a road observes that two trees
have their greatest angular elevations a, a' at the same point ;
after walking on a certain distance, he again observes their ele-
vations to be ^, B' respectively ; if A, h' be their respective heights
shew that '
h f cof 13— eot'a \ — |
h' ~ \ cot'W— cot^tt' j
■:'I3'
17. Two circles of radii a, b intersect, 2 h being the lenorth of
their common chord, and c the distance between their centres
shew that the area common to both is equal .to
a'sin— 1
a h
he
18. lip, q^ r ; p', q\ /, be the respective distances from A,B,C,
the angular points of a triangle, of the intersection of the perpen-
diculars from those points on the opposite sides, and of that of
the bisectors of the angles of the triangle ; shew that
pa+qh+rc = 2 (p'q' cos ^ +q' r' cos ^ + r'p' cos -4") *
19. Sum to n terms the series
sin 3 A
cos^Acos'2A
also prove that
tan^a —
+
sin 5 A
+
sin 7^
cos'2^ cos'3^ ' cos'3.4 cosH^
tan*a , tan^a
4-
2
4-
. .i , siu*a ,
= sura 4- ■ +
sin^a
+
both series being continued ad infinitum.
■ i.
nnmvmp of a^oronto;
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
FIRST YEAR.
ENGLISH.
^:r«mm.rs;/?- Wilson, LL.D.
\ J. A. Boyd, M. A.
*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; but
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can be over-
taken within the time.
1. Define and give examples of the relations of English
orthography, 1st, to etymology ; 2nd, to euphonic changes
in compound words.
2. Latham states that the differences between the English
alphabet, and those from which it is derived are referable
to: — (a) ejection, (6) addition, (c) change of power, {d) change
of order. Illustrate each ; and trace the history of the
alphabet in relation to the diverse sources of the English
vocabulary, and its imperfect adaptation to the sounds in
the language.
3. Explain, and illustrate by examples, wherein modern
English differs from the language in its earlier stages, in
the use of prefixes and suflSxes.
4. Explain and give the derivation of metropolitan,
infinitesimal, euphonic, czar, redeemer, contraband, anthro-
pomorphism, parthenogenesis, colophon, rhyme, materialism,
romance, epic.
5. Define clearly the varying shades of the same termina-
tion in the following words : chronology, mythology, theology,
geology.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
1. In what forms and languages did the ecclesiastical and
profane literature of England appear prior to the reign of
Jidward III.? Name examples of each class.
2. Give a concise sketch of the authors and literary works
of the reigns of Edward III. and Richard II.
3. State the era of Caxton, and give a concise account of
the poets of the school of Chaucer, to the date of the
introduction of the printing press.
4. Give an account of English literature of the reign of
Henry VIII.; and specify minutely the characteristic
differences between the writings of the poets of his reign,
and those of the previous era.
5. Give an account of the successive steps in the process
of development from the Miracle Play to the true Elizabethan
Drama.
COMPOSITION.
^ "Letters, which, as ships, pass through the vast seas of
time, and make distant ages participate in the wisdom
illumination, and inventions of the past." '
Bacon.
Illustrate this idea concisely^ writing with care, aa a
specimen of composition.
♦ .
vi
"t;
w ••**>'-*i
f^f*fy ."» ■♦ •V*' 1^5
^^;gj»fe's4';-
mnmvuiis of ^Toronto.
It''*
I/*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
FIllST YEAR.
IIISTOllY.
IT . f D. Wilson, LL.D.
iiu.1
*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
I. Outlines of Ancioat History,
(1.) What led to the Hegemony of Sparta over the rest of
Hellas, and what consequences resulted from this Hegemony?
(2.) Givo some account of tho battle of Marathon, and
estimate its importance.
(3.) Mention tho circumstances connected with tho estab-
lishment and the abolition of the Deccmvirates.
(4.) Give the character and chief incidents of Vespasian's
reign.
(5.) What chief points of distinction existed between the
Germanic conquests of Roman provinces on the continent
and the Saxon invasion of England.
II. British history to Henry VIII.
(1.) Give a summary of the advantages derived by Eng-
land from the Norman conquest.
(2.) Writo brief notes upon the lives and influence of
Wickliffe, Thomas a Becket, and Archbishop Langton.
(8.) "With the reign of Stephen," says Hamilton,
CI0808 the pen. ! which maybe emphatically styled the
era of the conqueBt."
(a) State the reasons from which this conclusion is
drawn.
(J) Trace the lines of descent of the immediate suc-
cessor of Steph n.
(4.) Relate the circumstances connected with the con-
quest of Wales.
(5.) What causes contributed to the extension of royal
prerogative during the reign of Henry VIII ?
letween the
) continent
s
I
Wini\>tvnit!J! of STovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4.
FTllST YEXn.
*' % ■■-'»
ENGLISH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
■p ' f D. Wilson, LL.D.
■^^^^^'^^^^•^•ij.A.BoYD,M.A.
B**
I. Prosody.
(1.) Give an example of " Service metre," and of
" Gay's stanza." Name the measures which we
have borrowed from Italy, and characterize each.
(2.) Give an account of the introduction and naturaliz-
ation of Hexameters as an English measure.
(3.) Analyse the following rhymes, stating which are
perfect and which imperfect, with reasons : —
Aiuay and sway ; made and strayed; go and
flow; light and satellite; remained and land;
path and faith; hosanna and banner.
(4.) Discuss the advantages or disadvantages which
h:\ve accrued to English prosody, owing to the
various verbal and inflexional changes of the
language which have taken place since the time
of Chaucer.
(5.) Sketch the history of the English sonnet.
II. History of the English language,
(1.) Shew, by a table, the relationship which exists
n Encrlish and other lano^uasres '^anoient
bet\
and modern) of the Teutonic Stock.
-Q \-
(2.) Specify some of the chief peculiarities of Chau-
cer's English.
(3.) Classify the various accessions to our vocabulary
from the Latin, and give examples of each class.
(4.) Latham says : " The determination of the amount
of Danish in Engliyh is difficult A few years
back the current opinion was against the doctrine
that there was much Danish in England. At
present, the tendency is rather tlie other way."
Shew wherein consists the diiHculty, and give
reasons in support of the more modern opinion.
(5.) Compare and contrast English prose as exhibited
in the following authors: Hooker, Addison, Swift,
Johnson, Lander and Trench.
* '/' -rf ' *.*ym
' >l i ,. U^JBgW
Unmn'tiitu Of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIEST YEAR.
HISTORY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners
••{
D. Wilson, LL.D.
J. A. Boyd, M.A.
*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
PULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
1. Describe the character of Pope Nicholas V., and the
course pursued by him in relation to Turkish aggression.
2. Trace to their sources the claims of the houses of
Anjou and Aragon on the kingdoms of Sicily and Naples ;
and give a sketch of the proceedings of Charles VIII. of
France in asserting his Italian claims.
3. Describe the character of Pope Leo X., and trace his
personal influence on European History.
4. State the circumstances of the fall of Granada ; and
account for the successful aggression of a Mahommedan
power in tho east of Europe, and the fall of another in the
west, within so brief an interval. Give the two dates.
6. Define the influences at work towards the close of the
16th century, which led to the decline and extinction of the
commercial republics of Italy.
i?A ^' ?r%%^ *^^ genealogical relations of Henry VIII. to
Jidward III., and assign the causes which rendered England
indifferent to the fall of Constantinople. ^
7. Specify the prominent historical events connected
mth J^ ranee and Germany at the commencement of the
loth century.
8. Describe the characters of Cardinals Xavier and
Adrian; and assign to each his share in the development of
the character and the fortunes of Charles V.
9 Compare Constantine XL of the Eastern Empire,
and Boabdil of Granada, in personal character, conduct
and influence on the events which closed the career of each.
10. Describe the personal character of Henry VII.- and
trace his influence on English domestic and foreign policy
and on maritime enterprise. ^ ^*
11. What peculiar circumstances tended to keep alive the
crusading spirit in Spain down to the 15th century, when it
had died out elsewhere throughout Christendom?
TransL
to
nu
In
fei
lOi
if
Transk
Et
M
Je
M
D'
Ls
J'l
Tc
wmmvnits of Eovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS a 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Uxaminera.'ii'''^^^ Forneri, LL D.
(.Robert Sullivan, M.A.
I.
Translate into French :
Fear seizes man in his cradle and accompanies him
to hi8 grave. Scarcely is he born, when he fears his
nurse. As a child he fears him who brings him up.
In his youth he fears his superiors ; in his manhood he
fears a multitude of evils, the reverses of fortune and the
loss of all that is dear to him, sickness, shame, death;
if he IS good he fears the wicked ; if he is bad the laws.
Lastly, in his old age he trembles at eternity.
Translate into English :
Ah? qu'dtait-il sans toi? qu'ai-je aim^ que toi mgme ?
±it qu est-ce auprt:>s de toi que ce vil univers ?
Mon ^me va te suivre au fond de tes deserts*
Je vais seule en cea lieux, ou 1' horreur me consume,
Languir dans les regrets, s^cher dans I'^mertume,
Mourir dans le remords d'avoir trahi ma foi
D'etre au pouvoir d'un autre, et de brfiler pour toi.
i ars, emporte avec toi mon bonheur et ma vie •
LaiBse-moi les horreurs du devoir qui me lie. '
J'ai mon amant ensemble et ma ^loiVfi k sanvor
Tous deux me sont sacr4i; je les veux conserver.
VoLTARiE, Alzire, Act iv., Scene v.
r' ^:i\
mut '
m
f'##'*
1. Qu'^tait-tlfSanstoi? What does i7 refer to ?
2. Qu'ai-je aime que^ ^c. Fill up tho ellipsis.
3. Et qu'eit'CCy 8fc. Destroy the pleonasm in this lino.
4. Auprcs de toi. Give the true force of aupres hero.
5. Oil V horreur me consume^ (j-e. Where ? Explain.
6. D' avoir trahi ma foi. To whom ? and how ?
7. D'Slre au pouvoir d'un autre^ et de brUler pour toi
Explain this line.
8. JDii devoir qui me lie. What duty ?
9. J'ai mon amant. Et ma gloire a sauver. How ?
III.
Translate into English :
Capitaino renard allait de compagnie
Avec son ami bouc des plus haut encornds :
Celui-ci ne voyait pas plus loin que son nez :
L'autre etait passd maitre en fait de tromperie.
La soif les obligea de descendre en un puits :
\A chacun d'eux se d^saltere.
Apr^s qu'abondamment tous deux en eurent pris,
Le renard dit au bouc : Que ferons-nous, compare ?
Ce n'est pas tout de boire, il faut sortir d'ici.
L^ve tes pieds en haut, et tes comes aussi ;
Mets-les centre le mur : le long de ton ^chine
Je grimperai premi^rement ;
Puis, sur tes comes m'^Ievant,
A I'aide de cette machine,
De ce lieu-ci je sortirai,
Apres quoi je t'en tirerai.
Par ma barbe, dit l'autre, il est bon ; et je loue
Les gens bien senses comme toi.
Je n'aurais jamais, quant h moi,
Trouv6 ce secret, je I'avoue.
Le renard sort du puits, laisse son compagnon,
Et vous lui fait un beau sermon
Pour I'exhorter a; patience.
Si le Ciel t'efit, dit-il, donne par excellence
Autant de jugement que de barbe au men ton,
Tu n'aurais pas, d la leg^re,
Descendu dans ce puits. Or, adieu ; j'en suis hers :
Tfi,cho de t'en tirer, et fals toua tea efforts ;
Car pour moi j'ai certaine affaire
Qui ne me permet pas d'arr^ter en chemin.
En toute chose il faut conaiderer la Jin.
LaFontaine, Livre iii., Fable v.
1. Dea plua haul encomia. Form a relative sentence,
and state what part of speech is plua haul ?
2. Plua loin que son nez. Give the force.
3. Toua deux en eurent pris. What does eti refer to ?
4. Ufaut aortir d'ici. Resolve aortir by a conjunction,
tense, and mood.
5. Aprea quoi. Suppress quoi and give the equivalent.
6. Je t'en tirerai. What does Ven refer to ?
7. Par ma barbe. What does this expression mean, or
what part of the speech ?
8. 11 eat bon. Suppress il and give the equivalent.
9. Lea gena bien senaSa comme toi. Form a compara-
tive of equality.
10. Ce aecret. Give the force.
11. Et voua lui fait un beau aermon. What is voua ?
12. Que de barbe au menton. Fill up the ellipsis.
13. Ala legere. Give the force.
14. Tdche de t'en tirer. Suppress en and give the equiv-
alent.
15. Faia toua tea efforta. Add the complement.
16. Qui ne me fermet, ^c. Suppress me^ turn arreter
into a reflective verb, and resolve it by a conjunction,
tense, and mood.
17. lljaut conaiderer la fin. Make it definite.
I
.'wm
\> '
mk
'A
-li
- 1 »
Wk
J. ^
' ' *'w
i
Mfi
>
'■} 1
1'
-f.
*tf
'b
'\
^t,
*
1
1
.L..^1L.
1
1
1
■
1
V
^fr^
V ■ . , ■■
i
^Iniiietfiiita? of Toronto;
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
FRENCH.
Uxaminers'f'^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D.
Ji^xammers, | ^q^^^,j, Sullivan, M.A.
I.
■Translate :
Tous les gens qui avaient eu des projets ambitieux
avaient travaille ^ mettre une esp^ce d'anarchie dans la
republique. Pomp<5e, Crassus et C^sar y r^ussirent k
merveille. lis etablirent une impunitd de tous les
crimes publics; tout ce qui pouvait arrSter la corruption
des moeurs, tout ce qui pouvait faire une bonne police,
ils Fabolirent; et comme les bons le'gislateurs cherchent
k rendre leurs concitoyens meilleurs, ceux-ci travail-
laient a; les rendre pires : ils introduisirent done la
coutume de corrompre le peuple a prix d'argent, et
quand on <?tait accuse de brigues on corrompait aussi
les juges ; ils firent troubler les Sections par toutes
sortes de violences, et quand on 6tait mis en justice on
intiraidait encore les juges; I'autorite m^me du peuple
etait aneantie : temoin Gabinius, qui, apr^s avoir retabli,
malgre le peuple, Ptolomde ii, main arme'e vint froide-
ment demander le triomphe.
Qrandeur et JDScadence des Bomains.
1. Tousles gens. Give the various construction s of ^^ms.
2. Y reussirent. Suppress y^ and give the equivalent.
8. lis Vaholirent. Give the antecedents of ils and V.
What figure do you perceive in V ? Suppress it, and
re-arrange the sentence in regular order.
m
ambltieux
ie dans la
issirent si
tou3 les
lorruption
le police,
cherchent
li travail-
donc la
irgent, et
pait aussi
>ar toutes
justice on
du peuple
lir retabli,
nt froide-
jmains.
3 oi gens.
ivalent.
s and V.
3 it, and
Unif^tvutita of Eovontoi
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
FRENCH.
Examiners .'liZllI'^^''^^'' ^^m\
\ Robert Sullivan, M.A.
I.
Translate :
Tous les gens qui avaient eu des projets ambitieux
avaient travaillc^ a, mettre uno esp6ce d'anarchie dans la
republique. Pompee, Crassus et C^sar y r^ussirent ^
merveille. lis etablirent une impunitd de tous les
crimes publics ; tout ce qui pouvait arrSter la corruption
des moeurs, tout ce qui pouvait faire une bonne police,
ils I'abolirent; et comme les bons le'gislateurs cherchent
k rendre leurs concitoyens meilleurs, ceux-ci travail-
laient d les rendre pires: ils introduisirent done la
coutume de corrompre le peuple a prix d'argent, et
quand on ^tait accuse de brigues on corrompait aussi
les juges ; ils firent troubler les Sections par toutes
sortes de violences, et quand on 6tait mis en justice on
intimidait encore les juges; I'autorite mSme du peuple
etaifc aneantie : temoin Gabinius, qui, apr^s avoir re'tabli,
malgre le peuple, Ptolomee il main armee vint froide-
mcnt demander le triomphe.
Cfrandeur et Decadence des Romaim.
1. Tous les gens. Give the various constructions of ^ews.
2. Y rSussirent. Suppress y, and give the equivalent.
3. lis Vaholirent. Give the antecedents of ils and V.
What figure do you perceive in V ? Suppress it and
re-arrange the sentence in regular order.
4. Ceux'ci travaillaienU What does ceux-ci refer to ?
5. Travaillaient, Why the imperfect ?
6. i?« introduisirent. Why the preterite definite ?
7. (?Mawc? on etait. What sort of pronoun is on. From
what IS It derived ? Give its peculiarities.
8. L'autorite mSme. What part of speech is me'me.
9. Apris avoir r^tdbli. Resolve by tense and mood,
and^v ^^^^ *^^ primitive Um^^oi r6u88ir,pouvoir, corrompre,
ir.
GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS.
1. Before what countries is the definite article omitted ?
2 Name some substantives which are masculine in one
signibcation, and feminine in another.
3. WV ; do proper names of persons take the mark of
the plur r!d vhen not?
4 Mention some of the compound substantives, and state
how they form the plural.
.;v.f ■ T^''""'' '' an adjective placed after two or more substan-
t^ives, to agree wi^h the last only, and when only with the
before ?^^^° ^' ^^^jective or participle past take en
govJ;n7n'FS''^^'''"°"^ ^''' ^ ^"P^^^'^^^^^ ^^^^-^
8. With what verbs are disjunctive pronouns, or pro-
nouns preceded by a preposition, used ?
.vn?' ^T^ '"""^ collective general, and some partitive, and
explain their respective agreement with the verb.
dif^'tn^rj".-'^-^'''*^'^' ^i '?,''^^'^^^ number be an antece-
sentences : ''' "^^ ^'"''''^ ^^^""^*^' '^' *'^"^^^»S
iVbws e^<20«* c7^w3 ?w^ ^<a/m« c?w wjeVwe at,^^ : vou8
■punez comme un homme qui entendez la matiere.
n,.
.'.;.'■
,|•;^^
«
i
1
8
9
1
and
sign
the
how
tivei
first
{
befo
gOV€
nour
expli
IC
poin
dent
senti
4. Oeux-ci travaillaient. What does ceux-ci refer to ?
5. Travaillaient. Why the imperfect ?
6. Il8 introduisirent Why the preterite definite ?
7. Quand on etait. What sort of pronoun is on. From
what IS It derived ? Give its peculiarities.
8. L'autorite mSme. What part of speech is m^me.
9. Apris avoir rStabli. Resolve by tense and mood.
aufieni^.^ *^' ^'™'''''' tensesof /•^Mas^r,i).Mz;,i>, comm;>r.,
II.
GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS.
1. Before what countries is the definite article omitted ?
si JfipfZ' «°"J^/'^^«!^»t!ve3 which are masculine in one
signitication, and femimne in another.
3 When do proper names of persons take the mark of
the plural, and when not ? -lu. ui
4 Mention some of the compound substantives, and state
how they form the plural. '
5. When is an adjective placed after two or more substan-
^ives, to agree with the last U, and when only wiT the
befor'e ?^*''" ^''' ^" '"^J''^''' "' P'^'^^^'P^^ P^^^ *^k« '^
govI;n7n'FSr "'''"'"' '°" ^ ^^P^^^^'^^' -^^^-^
.n„f ; ^'"'^ /if ''^'^' '''^ disjunctive pronouns, or pro-
nouns preceded by a preposition, used ? ^
.^nfnJn^.W^ """' Collective general, and some partitive, and
explam their respective agreement with the verb.
41^'is'owVatr'" " "'^'' *'' "^^""^^" ^'^^^ "^"^
A.lh ^""^ an adjective or cardinal number be an antece-
s^ntL^r^^"^ P""°"" • ^""^*' ^^'^-^^^' ^^^ following
Mus e'tions deux, qui Staient du meme avi. • .,«,
panez comme un homme qui entendez la maUei'l '
■5 1. 1
. .4-1
J
^a
.
''1
ft\ t I tf
ti
m.
r 1
1
^^^^1
ai
g€
K=
Wini\>ttuitp of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIEST YEAR.
ELEMENrARY CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.O.L.
1. What changes accompany chemical action ?
2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides.
3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is
an acid salt i Give instances.
4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids? Give the
general formulas of their salts.
5. Describe the preparation and properties;^of oxygen.
6. In what forms may carbon occur ?
7. Give the general properties of the metals.
8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides.
9. What metals are not acted on by nitric acid ?
Kia'g^si'ie 0=8^ equivalent of bisulphate of potassa:
•" * 'if'
fli^Ei^
MttM^aiMMfli
'■.pt-^}'t ■-'I...
■iji^^B^M
\^-
■ -^^H
E. ■
nM
\-f- ■
'"- m
;: mi
an
gei
1
WLnmtmn of Zovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: Henry Cbopt, D.CL.
1. What changes accompany chemical action ?
2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides.
3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is
an acid salt ? Give instances.
4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids ? Give the
general formulas of their salts.
5. Describe the preparation and properties'of oxygen.
6. In what forms may carbon occur ?
7. Give the general properties of the metals.
8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides.
9. What metals are not acted or by nitric acid ?
10. Calculate the equivalent of bisulphate of potassa:
K=39 S=16 0=8.
BnmvultVi of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIEST YEAR.
ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY.
Examiner : Henry Ckoft,' D.C.L.
1. What changes accompany chemical action ?
2. Explain the nomenclature of the oxides.
3. What is a neutral salt ? Give instances. What is
an acid salt ? Give instances.
4. What are the oxy-acids and hydracids ? Give the
general formulas of their salts.
5. Describe the preparation and properties'of oxygen.
6. In what forms may carbon occur ?
7. Give the general properties of the metals.
8. Give the methods of forming metallic oxides.
9. What metals are not acted on by nitric acid ?
10. Calculate the equivalent of bisulphate of potassa:
K=39 S=16 0=8.
1.
'i'i ■■ ■»
rt
\ .
WLnmvnit^ of Zovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
AK
Examiner: Henr\ CaoF , D.C.L.
1. What is meant by single and double elective affinity ?
Give instances.
2. What circumstances favour chemical action ?
3. Give the laws of combination.
4. Show by formulas the different modes of preparing
oxygen.
5. Give the preparation and properties of hydrosulphuric
acid. How does it act on metallic oxides ?
6. Give the preparation and properties of sulphurous
acid. What is its action on vegetable colours ?
7. Give the sources and properties of boracic acid.
8. Give the preparation and properties of potassium.
9. How does carbonate of lime occur in nature i
10. Mention the principal minerals in which alumina is
found.
11. Give the ores and oxides of lead.
12. Give the ores and oxides of tin. How are the latter
prepared r
". ''K^^t^r:,: ■?^:i*^1
.» .
• *
Wini\}tv&itp of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
ELEMENTARY NATURAL HISTORY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
^^a'niner.l^llZi^^^^T'^-^-'-
i t
1. Sketch of vegetable anatomy, an accosnt of the
elementary parts of plants, with their principal variations.
2. Food of plants, with the means of obtaining it.
3. When a plant is removed from one place to another,
what are the causes of danger, and what are the precau-
tions proper to be employed ?
4. General structure of Lamellibranchiate Mollusks—
points of chief importance as affording useful discriminating
characters. The five orders, with the families under each.
5. Proboscidean Gasteropoda: the families, with their
distinguishing characters.
6. Analysis of Raptorial birds, distinguishing the families
and sub-families, with the habits peculiar to each.
7. Family Magapodidae : their relations with other birds,
and their peculiar habits, especially in respect to the pro-
duction of their young.
* -m
ft.- AT.
c I' l'^?•'!'®® ""i Grallatorial birds, with the sub-families
of the RalhdaB, and their distinguishing habits.
9. What are the characters which have caused the family
Columbidae to be placed among Rasores? What are the
objections to this view ?
10. Insessores : the sub-orders with the families of
Firsirostres, and particulars of their mode of life.
ij:<v: ji-
mnmmitu oe 3:ototfto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864,
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS.
■ * ■<*■ i
■t • :
' -J-
f Tt '
ELEMENTAKY NATUEAL HISTOEY.
r-mfu"^'S ' J ^^^- ^^°^- HlNCKS, F.L.S.
J. Cottle, Esq.
il:^.- '.j-'l.' vV -.'■
1. Give examples of consolidated forms of vegetation.
How are the leaves represented homologically and function-
ally ? To what kind of climate are such plants adapted ?
2. Describe some anomalous forms of leaves, or appen-
dages to leaves.
3. When the outer flowers of a cyme or umbel are
enlarged and barren, what is the explanation ? Give some
examples.
4. What is meant by aestivation ? Name the principal
varieties.
5. Explain the differences in nature between appendages
to the seed for its conveyance through the air, and similar
appendages to the fruit. Give examples of the several kinds.
6. What is the primary element of animn t'ssues ? and
what are the chief varieties under which ther appear ?
7. What is !-•-:? difference of structure 'r^Treen the volun-
tary and invoIuiiUry muscles ? Give ei^s, ipiea of each.
8. Of what different parts does blood consist ? Exnlain
fhesTfact??'* ' ' '=™'='»8ions have been drawn from
nit!'„f,l"""°'P''?','- "'^»"™'''» = gi^e examples from several
parts of the animal kingdom.
b-'-'^^y
1
1 ^.■t
*?:*
ll' ■
, i1
'I •
1*.
V
l., '
' H
If .¥7i;i
1^
i
Wini\)tvuits Of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: IFCI.
B*
i'ixvST YEAR.
METAPHYSICS l^T]^ !^.THICS.
Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D.
fi ft r.i 1 I
3.
4.
5.
PALEY'S NATURAL THEOLOGY.
a. What illustration does Paley employ to shew the
sense in -vvhich rational creatures are the causes
of the existence of their offspring ?
h. In what respect are they not adequate causes, and
what inference do we draw from this fact ?
a. Describe the position and effect " the sartc nus
muscle.
h. How does this bear on ^he general argument it is
inten'l-^d to illustrate '
a. To meet what objection does Buftbn bring forward
his hypothesis of "internal moulds? and how
does he jm^doy it ?
b. What objection to this hypothesis ?
a. Illustrate the relations of aii- to li'i-ht.
b. What is the object " t' ns: those rcl
.'Uis
a. Why was it important that in the Cii^e of the
earth the axis of rotation should be fixeu ?
h. Shew that it is fixed in the best manner, and
point out the !)earing of this fact upon the
general argument.
^' m ^^" ^^^ occasion to d^sci be instruments of tor-
ture, * This engine,' you would say, ♦ is to extend the sinews,
this to dislocate the joints, &c.' "
Explain the object of this illustration, with the connexion
in which it stands.
4
■ ' "V
1.
a.
h.
2. a.
h.
C.
PALEY'S EVIDENCES.
How does the nature of the case afford a strong
proof that the original teachers of Christianity
must have entered upon a new course of life ?
Show from their own and other writers that thev
actually did so? '^
rutheiticu;!""'"" '"'"'"" genuineness and
0^ what Christian writings does Paley think it
necessary to prove both the genuineness and
authenticity, and with what object ?
Give the several heads of proof, classing them
respectively under genuineness and authenticity.
" It :t6 been said that, if the prodigies of Jewish
histcrvhau boon found only in fragments o^f Maltho r
Ber. , we shouM have paid no regard to them "
J es Pal adn t this ? What distinction does he draw
p:Su-stor.:^^---^-^"^^^^^-^^^
^1 ^^r ""r-^ *^® learning and labours of the early Christian
wnters be shown? and what inference is drawn^ fro" Ihe
5. a. Give any particulars ,f the testimony of heathen
wnters to the rapid spread of the gospel.
^' ^otf il!!;^!'''^ f '^' ^ "^Sress of Mahometanism,
oth directly and as comj ared with ( hristianity.
6. Shew that C^ '^^^^nit^ ^s not justly ho^aea hie with fl,.
.er...uing laws .vhich hav'e ' een Lde^in u fupporT
i 1
J-
"■':'n
1
Bni^^tvnitS! of Eovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK.
I Thomas Moss, M.A.
I.
Translate :
'H fiiv (xiv vv/x<pr]v ye virjv KarekelTTOfxev r^fxeh
^Ep'xpfievot TToXefjLovSe' Trai"? 8i ol yv eVt fxa^oi
NT^TTtO?, 09 TTOV VVV 76 jieT UuSpCOV 'li^GL upidflU),
"OX^tor V l^P 'Tov ye Trarijp (f)i\o<i 6\jre7ai iXdwu,
Kal K€Lvo<i Traripa irpoairTv^erai, r) Oefii^ iarlv.
'H h ifirj ovhe irep uto? ivnrXr]a6r]vai cckoiti^
Oi^OaXixolcnv eacre' irdpo'i Se fjue ire^ve Kal avTov.
["A\\o Be TOt epeo), av B' evl (f)peal ^dXXeo a-fjaiv.
Kpv^Srjv, firjS" dva(f>av8a, (jJiXrjv e? TrarpiSa yatav
Nrja KaTca-xefievat, iirel ovKerc irKnh, yvvai^iv.']
AXX aye fioi roBe elire koI drpeKew^i KardXe^ov,
Et irov en ^coovTO'i aKovere 7raiB6<i e/xolo,
' H TTOV €v 'Op-)(Ofiev(p )) ev TlvXto rjfiadoevrt
'H TTOV Trap Mei^eXaro evl ^Trdprr} evpeir)'
Ov ydp TTW redvrjKev e-rrl Xdovl Blof; 'Opecrri;?.'
^ "' n? ejiar, avrap iydo fiLV dfiei^ni.i€vo<; Trpoa-eeiirov'
' 'ArpelBr], rt fie ravra Bielpeai ; ovbe n 618a,
Zcoei oy rf redprjKe' kukov 8' dvep,(oXia /Sd^eiv.''
" Nwt fiev W9 eireeaaLv ofxei/3o/j,ev(o cnvyepo2<nv
"Earaixev d^xyvp^evoi, daXepov Kara BuKpv %eovT69'
H\^e 8* eirl -^v-^^rj YlrjXr^ldBp.')'' ^A')^iXrjo<i
Kat UarpoKXijo^ Kal dphvp^ovos ^AvriKoyoto
AiavTOfi tf , 09 apiaro'i erjv fciOo9 re 8efia<} re
ISiv dXXwv Aava&p /a6t' dp,vficva UrjXeiQiva.
"Eyvco 6e 'fvxn /^e iroBcoKeo^ AcaKiBao,
Kal p oXocpvpofMev)) eirea irrepuevTa Trpoa-TjvSa.
Homer, Odyssey, B. XI., vv. 447-472.
1. Kariaxefievai. Account for the use of the infinitive as
an imperative.
2. Triard. What d'-tlnction in meaning between verbals
in T09 and Teo-i ?
3. el TTov aKovere. Give the force of ttov, and its
Latin equivalent.
4. 'Opxo/Mev(Z, IIvXm. Write notes upon these words.
5. Avrdp. What otlicr form docs Homer use ?
6. AiavTo<;. What two persons of this name in Homer?
7. Tcov aWcov Aavacbv. Notice any peculiarity. Quote
English parallels.
8. Give the derivations of v^7rto<;, a,KoiTi,<;, dva^avBd,
drpeKeca, tJixaOcevri,, d/xvfMcov, vroSw/ceu?.
9. Parse o^erai, vto<;, irc^ve, TedvrjKe, eara/Mev, ejvm,
TTTepoevTa.
II.
1. Explain the terms Biao-Kevaarai, x^copi^ovTS';, and
o^eXi^eiv.
2. Who is said to have collected the Homeric poems ?
3. What is meant by saying that the Homeric form of a
word is dialectic for the ordinary form ?
4. What is the Digamma ? Who finst discovered its use
in the explanation of the Homeric metre ? Give instances
of its occurrence in the middle of a word.
5. What reasons are there for believing Homer to have
been an Asiatic Greek ?
III.
Translate :
Ta fiev Sr) rore TrpaxOe^^Ta ovk dv a\Xw? c^oi' vvv ^
eripov iroke^ov Katpo^ yKet ri^, 81 ov koI 'mpl tovtcov
€fX}n]ad7]v, iva ^r/ ravT'\ 'rr'WrjTe. ri SJ) XPV'^'^I^^^^, ^>
dvBpe^ ^Adrivaloi, tovtm ; el ydp /x?} f-^o'tjO/jGere ttuvtI
crdevet Kara to hvvarov, Oeo.oacrOe ov rpoTrov vfieh earpa-
rTjyrjKora iruvja eaeaOe v-rrep <i>i\L7r7rov. virijpxov
^GXvvdioi BvvafJLiv rtva KeKTrjfxepoc, koX 8ie/cei6' ovtco to.
Trpdy/JbaTa' ovre ^I'tAtTTTro? iOdppet rovTovi ov9' oiiToi
iiv'-i
^CXiTTTTOv.^ eTrpd^afzev r)fieh KUKetvoi irpo^ r)fia^ €ipi]vr}v.
WrcvTO coa-rrep ifnr68iapLdTi rrp ^tXiWw Kai ^vayeph
TToXiv fxcyd\7)u €(f)opfielv rot? iavrou Kaipol^ ScriWay'-
fievTjv 7r/309 77/itt9. €/ciro\€fii](7at 8uv fpofieOa roix} dvOpd}.
TTov^ iK Travrb^ rpoirov koX S iravre^ hdpvXovv riay^
TOVTO ireTrpaKTat vvvl OTrcDaSi^Trore. ri o^u VTroXoi-rrov, &
avbpe^ Mvvaioc, ttXtjv ^o'qdelv ippcofiivco^ Kal 7rpo0t)ua)<;;
67C0 fxev ov^ \opS>' x<opk yhp tt}? irepiardar}^ hv ^lam
atc7^W779 ei KaOvcf^elfieed re rcov irpayfidrcop, ovSk rbv
(Pol^ov, CO avZpe^ AOr^valoi, fiLKpov 6pcb rov rtov uerd
ravra, ^xovr^v fikv 0,9 eVouo-t @rj/3alcov 7)fxip, d7reipr,K6rcop
d€^ Xpr]fiaai fPwKecov, firjBepo^ S' ifiirohwv ovro^ ^Lkiiriroi
ra irapovra KajaarpefafMeva, 7r/>09 ravra iiriKXivai r^
'Trpajfiara.
Olynthiac, III.
1. Xprjcro/xeea rourtp. Supply the ellipsis.
2. eddppet. What is the difference in meaning between
tfappetv riva and Uappetv rivt ?
3. KdKelvoi. When is the iota subscribed where Ka\ is
thus united with another word ?
4. Kal hvaxepk. Explain the construction.
5. icpop/xelv. Give the full force.
6. €0pv\ovv, What other form of this word ?
7. Kaducpeifxeda. Parse.
8. eTTiK^ivai. What is understood ?
9. T»]9 7repL(7rd(Tv^ Up. How is dp used with a participle ?
rv.
r/•^,?f•''^i^^!^^ geographical position of Olynthus. How
did Philip finally succeed in capturing it ?
rev'eniJI?''* ^^^° '^^ princii.4l sources of the Athenian
3. What is meant by the trierarchy ?
4. Who was the real founder of the Athenian democracy?
1 "«
r-f ,i
?•.:; A
Translat
omt
vasi
atqi
est,
sev(
si t(
jura
exic
pen
dub
."aci
rogj
con£
1. Dig
parietes,
2. Qu
What?
3. Gi\
Winii^tvuitS! of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
LATIN.
Examiners .'i^^""' "^Tt^^'^.V^' ^^•^•
\ Thomas Moss, M.A.
=ii
I.
Translate :
Templa Deorum imraortaliura, tecta urbis, vitam
omnium civium, Italiam deniquo totam, ad exitium et
vastitatem vocas. Quarc, quoniam id, quod primum,
atque hujus imperii disciplinccque raajorum proprium
est, facere nondum audeo; faciam id, quod est ad
severitatem lenius, ad communem salutem utilius. Nam
si te interfici jussero, residebit in republica reliqua con-
juratorum manus : sin tu (quod te jumdudum hortor)
exieris, exhaurietur ex urbe tuorum comitum magna et
perniciosa sentina reipublica). Quid est, Catilina ? num
dubitaa id, me imperante, facere, quod jam tua sponte
.aciebas ? Exire ex urbe consul hostem jubet. Inter-
rogas me, num in exilium ? non jubeo ; sed, si me
consulis, suadeo.
Cicero, in Oatilinam^ I., 5.
1. Distinguish templwm and delulrum, muri, mania and
parietes, exilium and relegatio.
2. Quod primum. What is meant? Wi
What?
3. Give list of verbs governing two datives.
Mj.:
■
IP
t:'
hF
i'>i
1
' *''
' -hI
■1
rf. .'-
>* ;"i
?
''.'•
i
1 ij'i
^
bE-^"'
,s ^
Ik
ii4r
r .
II.
Translate :
Ergo illi alienum, quia poeta fuit, post mortem etiam
expetunt : nos bunc vivum, qui et voluntate et legibus
noster est, rcpudiabimus ? prcesertim cum omne olim
studiiinj, atqne omne ingenium contulerit Arcbias ad
populi Romani gloriam Laudemque celcbrandam ? Nam
et Cimbricas res adolescens attigit, et ipsi illi C. Mario,
qui durior ad bscc studia videbatur, jucundus fuit.
Neque eiiim quisquam est tarn aversus a Musis, qui
non mandari versibus ccternum suorum laborum facile
prteconium patiatur. Themistoclem ilium, summum
Athenis virum, dixisse aiunt, cum ex eo qusereretur,
quod acroama, aut cujus vocem libentissime audiret,
ejus, a quo sua virtus optime prsedicaretur.
Cicero, pro ArcJua, 0,
1. On wbat grounds was tbe citizensbip of Archias im-
pugned, and on Avbat defended ?
2. Write brief notices of C. Marius and Themistocles,
introducing dates wbcre you can.
3. Give tbo otlicr degrees of comparison of facile and
libentissime.
III.
Translate :
Diversce voluntatos civium fucrunt, distractrequo sen-
tential Non enim consiliis solum et studiis, sed armis
etiam et castris dissidebamns. Erat auiem obscuritas
quredam, erat certamcn inter clarissimos duces : multi
dubitabant, quid optimum esset ; multi, quid sibi expe-
diret ; multi, quid dcccret : nonnulli etiam, quid liceret.
Perfuncta respubiica est hoc misero ffttalique bello :
vicit is, qui non fortuna inflammarct odium suum, sed
bonitato leniret; ncc qui omncs, quibus iratus esset,
eosdem etiam exilio aut morte dignos judicaret. Arma
ab aliis posita, ab aliis crcpta sunt. Ingratus est,
injustusque civis, qui armorum periculo libcratus, ani-
mum tamen rotinet armatum ; ut etiam illo sit melior,
qui in acie cecidit, qui in causa animum profudit. Quaj
enim pertinacia quibusdam, eadein aliis constantia videri
poteiSt.
Cicero, pro MarcellOf 10.
1. What classes of verbs govern the ablative ?
2. Inflammaret. Why in subjunQtive ?
3. Give examples of nouns used only in the plural.
4. What other extant spoccli ^vas delivered by Cicero in
the same year with that for Mavcellus ?
Translate :
Septimi, Gades aditure mecum ot
Cantabrum indoctum juga ferrc nostra et
liarbaras Syrtes, ubi Maura semper
iEstuat unda ;
Tibur Argeo positum colono
Sit mcae sedes utinam sencctce,
Sit modus lasso maris et viarum
Militiaeque !
Undo si Parcse prohibent iniqujc,
Bulce pellitis ovibus Gala33i
Flumen ct regnata petam Laconi
Rura Phalanto.
Horace, Odes, II., 6.
1. Give scales of the metres.
2. What is the construction o? maris and of ovibus P
3. Write explanatory notes on Omitabrum to nostra, Tibur
to colono, and regnata to Phalanto. ^, -tibur
V.
Translate : * '
Delicta majorum immeritus lues,
Romane, donee templa refeccria'
iEdesque lobcntcs Deorum ct
Focda nigio simulacra fumo.
J) IS te minorcm quod gcris, imporas :
ILnc omne principium, hue refer exitum.
Di muUa /lo^lecti dedorunt
Hesperip;^ mala luctuos!>3.
Jam bis iij. ureses et Pacori manus
Non auspicates contudit impeius
Nostros et adjecisse precdam
■* •-•i-^v.iuuo caI^uis iuniuet.
Horace, Odes, III,, 6.
If*!
>i-
I**
ril
1. Give scales of the metres,
2. Write explanatory notes on Jam bis to nostroSy and
Torquibus exiguis.
3. Give scales of the Epichoriambics found in the odes.
VI.
Translate :
Ne forte credas interitura quse
Longe sonantera natus ad Aufidum
Non ante vulgatas per artes
Verba loquor socianda chordis :
Non, si priores Mseonius tenet
Sedes Honierus, Pindaricse latent
Ceseque ot Alca3i minaces
Stesichorique graves Camense.
Horace, Gdes, IV., 9.
1. Explain natus ad Aufidum^ Mceonius^ and Cese.
2. What were the birth-places of Pindar^ Alaseus^ and
Stesichorus ?
3. Give examples of Grcecisras used by Horace.
4. What were the circumstances of Horace's introduction
to Msecenas ? and what the probable date ?
i. S- i 1' ■. 1
mnmtms ot jKototuo.
J •'nr *
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
^xami7iers : J ^^'^' ^0"^ MgCaul, LL.D
1 Thomas Moss. M a
Moss, M.A.
*.'.«^
.'>■;
n
Translate:
ypd^f^ara; ""Ap^^^.o'" cbX^Pu'ffA ^4^'' ^^
-^ ^^ S.^o.a rco. rare 'AZ^^XTara?! ' " ^^
<pn
I-
:» ^V'
/eii ryevo^!, Kol arlfiov;. rovro 8' ea-rlv ov)( r)v ovrwai Ti?
Siv <j>i](Tec€V uTifMiav rl yap tgj ZeKelrr}, rcou ^Adrjvaicou
Koivoiv el fj,r] fieOe^CLV efieXkev ; a\X' ov tovto \eyei, aXX!
iv Tot? (jjoviKoli; yiypairrai vofioL'i, virep wv av fxr) ciSo)
^ovov BiKaaaadaL, dXV evayk y to diroKTeluai,, " ml
drLfjLo^" (fiTj^rl " redvarco." tovto 8)) \iyei, KaOapov tov
rovToyv tlvcl airoKTeivavTa ehac oukovv evo/xi^ov gkuvol
rr}? TrdvTcov TOiv '¥Jk\i]V(ov a(OTripia<i avToU iTnfieXrjTeov
elvat. ov yap av avToh e/xeXev el rt? iv Ile\o7rovvi](r(p
Tiva<i wveiTaL Ka\ BiacjideipeL, yu,?; touO' vTroXa/x^dvovcnv'
CKoXa^ov S' ovTco Kol eTificopovvTO oi)? aicrOoLVTO wo-re /cat
a-Tr]\LTa<; TTOceiV'
Phillipic, III.
1. Brjirov. Give the full force and Latin equivalent.
2. Translate : (nrovBd^etv 7rpo<? riva and cnrovBd^eLv nrepi
Tiva.
o. ZeXeiTTj?. Where was Zelea ?
4. uTifio^;. How many kinds of aTi/jLia at Athens ?
Mention the consequences of cuch kind. What is meant by
KaOdira^ aTifioq ?
5. Ue\oir6vvT](Tov. Name the principal states of the
Peloponnesus in the time of Demosthenes.
6. "Apdfito^ UvOcouaKTo^. What is the ordinary idiom ?
7. XP^^^°^- ^^'^^ ^ ^'^^ ^^ ^^^^ principal terminations of
diminutives. What is the rule for the accentuation of
diminutives in lov ?
8. i^ovLKoh vo/xoi^. What was necessary to entitle a per-
son who had committed involuntary homicide to a restitution
of his civil rights ?
9. Explain and illustrate the most common usages of
the middle voice.
10. Under what circumstances was the third Philippic
pronounced ? What extant speech does it follow chrono-
logically ?
11. Give the geographical positions of 'Eeppecov, ^opicTKo^^
'Upov opo^, 'Afx^paKia, UopOfio^, and Nrti-VaxTo? ; and men-
tion important historical events connected with any of them.
^«jM
Translate
II.
XO. (O'TToXv^eiuo^ KoX iX€vd6po<i dvdpb^ dei ttot oIko^.
ere rot koX 6 WvOio^i r ".{,pa'; 'A-rrokXcov
i^^iwae vaietv,
erXa Be aolat fM7]\ov6/jLa<i
iv S6fJioi<i 'yeveadai,
ho)(^fiiav Sea kXctvcov
^oaK^/iiaai a-oicrt avpi^eop
7roifiviTa<i vpLevaiovi.
aiiv 8'^ eiToip.aivovro xapa fie\e(Ov /3aXiai re \vyK€<:
e/3a 8e Xiirova "Odpvo<i vdirav XeovTcov
a Ba(f)oivo^ tXa'
Xopevae S' uficf}! aav Ktddpav,
^ol/Se, rrroiKiXodpt^
ve^po^ v-yfriKOfifov irepav
^alvova iXarav acfivpo) Kovcjifo,
Xai'povcr' €V(f}povi /xoXira.
Totyap 7roXvfj,r)XoTdrav
eanav ocKel irapd KaXXlvaov
I Boi^iav XljjLvav dporot'^ Be yvau
/cal ireBiwv BaireBoi^i opov dfi(})l fiev deXiov Kvecjialav
iTTTToaTaaiv aWepa rdv MoXoaaajv riderai
irovTiov S' Acyaicov' irr' dKrdv
d\ip,€vov n.r)Xiov Kparvvet.
Kttt vvv Bofxov dixirerdaa^
Bipro ^elvov vorepm ^Xecfjuprp,
Ta9 ^tXa? KXatcov dX6-)(ov veKvv ev
Bcoixaatv dprtdavyr To 7^^ evyevh eK^f^eperac 'jrph, alBcv.
ev TOL<i^ayaUoi(TL6eiTavr evea-rw (xo({)ia<i.
TT/Jof S' ifia yp-vxa ddpao^ yarac
deoa-e^rj ^cora KeBvd irpd^eiv.
Euripides', Akestis, vv. 5G8-G05.
1. TToXyfetm Kal iXe{,eepo^. On wl.at principle do
these adjectives agree with oIko^ instead of dvBp6^ ?
2. xopevae. When do the tragedians allow the omission
or the augment :
3. irepav. Distinguish between irepav and irepa.
4. aWepa. What peculiarity in the gender of this word ?
f). Derive ^Xov^^ia, -rroifxvira^^ ^dXm. 7rocKiX60pc^,
froKv/MTjXo'i, aXip^evov, uktciv, KeSv6<i'
* I i
i
"1
MR. '•^m
HBP
pt^-- •-? '
nHN^HR9HH
h^^Jk
ppi§l
I^^^^^^He
' .1
t^^^K^
1
I^^^^^^Hh
^I^K'
" ^
^'' gi
tn
-m
\ -f
! ■ ■:•
I'-
vi
(->,
m
I \
I
■ ■•■ »8
6. Parse Bo^^fitaVf /MeXicoVj a/jLTrerdaa^f Be^eroj '^a-rat.
7. Accentuate tlip following words according to their
different significations : oposr, </)ft)9, dWa, oIkoi,, k€i Jt, f^vv.
8. Scan and give the metrical names of the fit six
lines of the extract.
III.
Translate and give different readings of:
(a) ov fjirjv e'joeif 76 fi w? aTCfid^oiv to
yijpwi 6aveu' irpov^coKd ct', ocxTt? alB6(fipo)v
TTpof a rjif fidXta-Ta, kuvtI tmuBb fioi ■)(dpiv
roidvhe koX cv ■)(r) rexova ijWa^drrjv.
(h) XO* 670) fiev oi/K e^ifi &i> ev Xiyeiv Tvyqv'
')(pV B\ ocTTi^ eta-i, Kaprepdv 6eov Soaiv.
HP. el fydp roaaurrju hvvajXLV el-)(ov coaTe ai]v
e? (pco'i TTopevaai vepTepcov ex Bco/xdrcov
ryvvatKa^ Kol aoi rrjvBe Tropcrvvai %a/3ty. *
IV.
1. Howij t'litj partially comic character of this drama
accounted for \*
2. Whai r. 'igious meaning is supposed to be involved
in this legend ?
3. What restriction upon the use of the Iambic
syzygy in choriambics ?
4. When is a verse called dvaK\cofievo<; ?
5. Give instances of lonicisms used by the tragedians.
6. Give a brief biographical sketch of the inventor of
Greek tragedy.
7. Mention any extant specimen of a Greek historical
tragedy. What other is known to have existed ?
8. Quote instances of the sophistry of Euripides.
ttnflif tfiifti^ of SToronto*
At UAL 1 WIINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
vr
Examiners :
LATIN.
HONORS.
T Rev. John McCa
\ Thomas Moss, M
D.
.v^
I.
Translate :
Ergo ipsas qnamvis angiisti terminus SBvi
Excipiat, (neque enim plus septima ducitur sestas),
At genua immortale manot, multosque per annos
Stat fortuna domus, ct avi numerantur avorum.
Praeterea regem non sic iEgyptos et ingens
Lydia, nee populi Parthorum aut Medus Ilydaspes
Observant. Roge incoluini mens omnibus una est ;
Amisso, rupere fidem constructaque mella
Diripuere ipsoc, et crates solvere favorum.
Ille operum custos ; ilium admirantur, ct omnes
Circumstant fremitu dense, stipantque frequentes
Et ssepe attollunt humeris, et c rpora bello
Objectant, pulchramque petnnt per vulnera mortem.
His quidam signis atque oc exempla secuti,
Esse apibus partem divinac mentis et haustus
iEtherios dixere : deum namque ire per omnes
Terrasque tractusque maris coelumque profundura ;
Hinc pecudes, armenta, viros, genus omne ferarum,
Quemque sibi tenues nascentera arcessere vitas ;
Scilicet hue reddi deinde ac resoluta referri
Omnia ; nee morti esse locum, sed viva volare
Sideris in numerum atque alto succedere coelo.
Virgil, Qeorgics, iv., vv. 206-20T.
* ;.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
4.
1.0
L£|2.8
1.4
HmSSSs
IP
I.I
1.25
— 6"
V]
<^
/]
7
>^
(9
/
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
^
Irii'
f w ft
!;*>■
;-^- ■ !«#
1. When is finaU-* long ? When short?
2. P/Ms sf^^ewza ^sto5. What is the construction >
3. Distinguish mdnet and wawef.
4. Distinguish avi, abavi, atavi, and proavl
5. 7/i^.ns Zyc^ea. What is the meaning of the epithet ?
6. 7psa?. What is the force ?
7. Eis signis. In what case, and why ?
thiL^Sr'""^"'' ^'- ^^^'' ^^^*^ ^f philosophers held
II.
Translate :
d,vl*!S?''°'' f ^'''!.' "^^ *"'P" '^*' P^<> fortissimo viro
dicere incipientem, timere; minimeque deceat, cum
1. Annius ipse magis de reipublic^ salute, quam
de sua perturbetur, mead ejus%ausam parem aTm^
magnitudmem afterre non posse; tamen hL novi iud
icii nova forma terret oculos ; qui, quocumque inciderint
veterem consuetudmem fori, et pristinum morem iud !
ciorum requirunt. Non enim corona consessus vester
cinctus est, ut solebat; non usitata frequentia stipati
sumus. Nam illa prjesidia, qu^ pro templis omnrus
ta^n Vf .'T^.r^ ^.o^ocata"^ sunt, non affe un
tamen oratori aliquid; ut in foro etinjudicio, quan-
quam pr^sidiis salutaribus et necessariis septi slu^
tamen ne non timere quidem sine aliquo timore poss !
mus. Qu^ SI opposita Miloni putarem, cederem temper
judices, nee inter tantam vim armorum existimlS'
oratori locum esse. Sed me recreat et refia cT
Pompeii, sapientissimi et justissimi viri. consilium: qui
profecto nee justitiae suae putaret esse, quem reum sen
tentns judicum tradidisset, eundem teli's militum rdere
nee sapient!^ temeritatem concitat^ multitudinis auc-
toritate publica armare. Quamobrem ilia arma cen-
tariones, cohortes, non periculum nobis, sed pr^es dium
denunciant: neque solum, ut quieto, sed etiam^irmaZ
ammo simus, hortantur; neque auxilium mode defen-
sioni meae verum etiam silentium pollicentur. Reliqua
vero multitude, quae quidem est civium, tota nostra est-
neque eorum quisquam, quos undique intuentes ex hoc
ipso loco cernitis, unde aliaua nara fnr,' o.7a«;«; ^^.._.
et hujus exitum ju(3icii expectantes, non cum vlrtuti
M, onis favet, turn de se, de liberis suis, de patria de
fortums, hodierno die decertari putat. ^ '
Cicero, 'pro Milone.
1. Eeec novijudicii nova forma. What is the meaning ?
2. Corona consessm. Explain each of these terms.
3. Tamen to possimus. Give the meaning fully.
plated'^rt tf:S '' ^'^^ P^^"^^^^ circumstances was he
5. Quidem. What is the force ?
6. i)....^.n- What is the effect of de in composition^
n. aldefof cfodiuf """"^ ^' *^^ '''' '' ^^^ before the
8. Discuss the question as to the date of the murder.
m , III.
Translate :
Quando repostum Coecubum ad festas dapes
Victore iaetus Ccesare ^
Tecum sub alta, sic Jovi gratum, domo,
Beate Mascenas, bibam,
Sonante mixtum tibiis carmen lyra
Ilac Dorium, illis barbarum ? '
Ut nuper, actus quum freto Neptunius
JJux funrit ustis Havibus,
Minatus Urbi vincla, qua) dctr.-^xerat
teervis amicus perfidis.
Romanus, eheu, nosteri ncgabitis,
iliraancipatus ferain^
Fert vallum et arma miles et spadonibus
teervire rugosis potest,
Interque signa turpe militaria
Sol adspicit conopiura.
At hoc fremences, vcrterunt bis mille equos
balli, canentes CcGsarem,
liostiliumque navium portu latent
■^ "PPcs sinistrorsura cita3.
lo Trinmr)lip tn mor"T"'- -.i,-.
tarrus et intactas boves ?
» h
i.'
amsimtliiiiiM
L
lo Triumphe, neo Jugurthino parem
Bello reportasti ducem,
Neque Africanum, cui super Carthaginem
Virtus sepulchrum condidit.
Horace, UpodeSj ix.
1. Give a scale of the Iambic Senarian, as used by Horace
in the Epodes.
2. Freto. What ? NeptuniuB dux. Who ?
3. Feminse. In what case, and why ?
4. Potest. Give the corresponding Greek term.
5. Oonopium. What ? Whence derived ?
6. Hoc. In what case, and why ?
7. (}aU{. Who ? Describe the position of their country.
8. Sinistrorsum. What is the meaning ?
», IZ.
Horace
ountry.
' ni
_S*_iAi"* 1_ ..*». j ,
Uni\}tvuitu of ^iToronto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
TRANSLATION INTO LATIN PROSE AND
VERSE.
Examiners • / S^^' "^^"^ McCaul, LL.D.
•^^^'"*"^'^*' \ Thomas Moss, M. A.
I.
I have assisted your commanders with naval forces, so
that not one of your allies can equal me ; I have furnished
supplies by land and and by sea; I have been present at all
the naval I ittles, that have taken place; I have no where
spared my labour or my risk. I have suffered that which is
most wretched in war, a siege, having been shut in at Pergamus
with the utmost danger at once of my life and of my king-
dom. Afterwards having been freed from the siege, I met
your consul with my whole fleet at the Hellespont, that I
might assist him in getting his army over. After your
army had crossed into Asia, I never departed from the
consul ; no Roman soldier was more regular in your camp
than I and my brother. No expedition, no cavalry engage-
ment took place without me.
Navalis copia, ut nemo vester socius ego cequiparo
possum f imperator vester adjuvo; commeatus terra mareque
sUppedito ; navalis proelium, qui jio, omnis adsum ; nee
labor meuSf nee periculum usquam parco. Qui miser sum
in helium^ ohsidio patior, Pergamus includo cum discrimen
ultra simul vita regnum que. Libera deinde obsidio, totus
classis ad Sellespontus consul vester occurro, ut is in trajicio
exercitus adjuvo : postquam in Asia exereitus vester trans-
gredior^ nunquam a consul abscedo : nemo miles Romanus
magis assiduus in castra vester sum, quam ego frater que
meus. Nullus expedition nuUus equestris proelium sine
egofio.
II.
How happy had it been for him to have died in that sick-
ness, when all Italy was putting up vows and prayers for
his safety ! or if he had fallen by the chance of war, on the
plains of Pharsalia, in the defence of his country's liberty,
he had died still glorious, though unfortunate : but as if he
had been reserved for an example of the instability of human
greatness, he who a few. days before commanded kings and
consuls, and all the noblest of Rome, was sentenced to die
by a council of slaves ; murdered by a base deserter ; cast
out naked and headless on the Egyptian strand ; and, when
the whole earth, as Velleius says, had scarce been sufficient
for his victories, could not find a spot upon it at last for a
grave. His body was burnt on the shore by one of his
freedmen, with the planks of an old fishing-boat; and his
ashes being conveyed to Rome, were deposited, privately,
by his wife Cornelia, in a vault of his Alban villa. The
Egyptians, however, raised a monument to him on the place,
and adorned it with figures of brass, which being defaced
afterwards by time, and buried almost in sand and rubbish,
was sought out and restored by the Emperor Hadrian.
III.
The wind, that beats the mountain, blows
More softly round the open wold,
And gently comes the world to those
That are cast in gentler mould.
And me this knowledge bolder made.
Or else I had not dared to flow
In these words toward you, and invade
Even with a verse your holy woe.
'Tis strange that those we lean on most.
Those in whose laps our limbs are nursed,
Fall into shadow, soonest lost :
Those we love first are taken first.
God gives us love. Something to love
He lends us ; but, when love is grown
To ripeness, that on which it throve
Falls off, and love is left alone.
1
UWym
< - '> 5 ••'sSiL
Unmvuitp of STotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
STATICS AND DYNAMICS.
Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B. A.
■f
1. Enunciate the parallelogram of forces, and assuming its
truth as regards the direction of the resultant, prove it for the
magnitude of the resultant.
Also assuming its truth for the magnitude of the resultant
prove it for the direction of the resultant.
2. State and prove the triangle of force.
Two forces act at, a point. Their magnitude and the an»le
made by one of them with a fixed line being given ; shew tbat^in
general equilibrium may be maintained by either of two forces
acting at the point in a direction parallel to the fixed line.
Point out the exceptional cases.
3. Enunciate the condition of equilibrium of a rigid body capa-
ble of turning about a fixed point, when actad on by any forces
in a plane passing through that point.
State the different propositions which must be proved in order
to establish this condition of equilibrium.
A uniform wire is formed into a triangle ABC, right angled at
C, and is suspended from C, ^ is the angle which the side AC
makes with the vertical : shew that tan fl = r • t-^
6 6+c.
4. Shew that every system of heavy particles has one, and only
one centre of gravity.
Investigate the position of the centre of gravity of a triangular
lamina, and shew that it coincides with that of three equal heavy
particles placed at the angular pointa of the triangle.
5. When a rigid body ia suspenJed from a fixed point, shew
thatthe point of suspension and the centre of gravity of the bodv
must lie in the same vovtical line. o j « uuuy
A triangle ABC, light angled at C, is suspended successively
T ft ^""^3 '• 1^' ^ ^t ^^^ .*"«^^« "^^^^ ^y AC, BC respectil.i?
with the vertical in each position ; shew that cot $. cot = 1
ated. ^^'"'^® *^® common steelyard, and shew how it is gradu-
7. Desciibe that system of pullies, in which each hangs bv a
separate string, the last puUy supporting the weight, ^i^d the
relation between P and W for this system, (i.) when the wethte
of^the pulhes are neglected, and (ii.) when\hey are 41^
Shew that if the weight of each of the pullies equals P no
mechanical advantage is gained or lost by the systel ^ '
8. Explain how velocity and acceleration are measured
(1.) when uniform, and (ii.) when variable. "measured
,- ifi'i /?»rT'''^ ''{.^^'^ °^ *^« «y°»^ol« i° the formula
» = «« + */^' ? Prove this formula. 'ormma
9. Two bodies P and Q are connected by an inextensibln .,tr,-r.«
whjch passes over a smooth fixed pully ; U tL acceS^^^^^^
each body, and the tension of the string. acceleration of
JJ'J'^^y tbe range, time of flight, and the greatest elevation
of^a particle projected in any direction from a pit in a W^
Shew that the tangent of the inclination of the direction of
motion to the plane at any time = ^^''^^^al velocity^
Tf fl , , . , , horizontal velocity.
fn!l^' ^.u ?^ ^°^^^^ "^^^^^ ^t^ *lie horizon by the tan«Pnf«
to he path of a projectile at the points P and Q the tLl J ^
aonbmg the arc P Q is proportional to (tan ^ I' tl ^^
I Jihe-rXlr^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^*^^ -^^ ^-- vdocities,
I 4"ai A, moving with the same velocity and in the same
jdirectioD, each move with a velocity u ; shew that §• =. J±ii
lutukstlt^^^ obliquely upon a ball B at rest, their
ffterLpact *^ ^ '' ^^*«^^^«« *^« "Motion of each ball
!
«;«
^ ,
■ 1 , «r »'
.' ' Aid
'i >'|
^ni\^tvuitp of tsotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner: Rev. W. Jones B. A.
y ■
VTVPT
1. Define the locus of an equation. What are the looi of the
following equations 1
(i.) {Ax+ByJrCy+{A'x+B'y^Cy=(i
(ii.) {Ax-irBy^C) {A'x+B'y->rC')=.0
(iii.) /(|) = (iv.) /(0=0 (V.) /((9)=0.
2. Shew how to find the equation to a line which passes
through the intersection of two lines whose equations are given,
and also through another point.
Shew that the lines which pass through the origin, and the
CC 'U »Xj f/
intersection of the line l ^ = 1 with the lines H v = 1
■' * p ah
a
and — + — - = 1 will be at right angles to each other, if
6'
a
3. Find an expression for the area of a triangle in terms of the
polar co-ordinates of its angular points, and deduce the expres-
sion in terms of the rectangular co-ordinates of its angular points.
Shew that the area of the triangle made by the three lines
whose eauations are eriven in Question 2 is
+ h
{
aa'
{h-hj
ah'
•a I
+
a'
a {h'-^y aa (/3-&)
a
'|3~a6'
'- +
ab—aB )
4. Obtain the general equation to the circle in the form
is a fixed point from which any straight line is drawn
meeting a fixed straight line in P ; in OP a point Q is taken such
that the rectangle OP. OQ is constant, shew that the locus of Q ia
a circle, and find its centre and radius.
5. What is the test by which we determine whether the general
equation of the second* degree represents a central curve or net 1
If it represent a central curve and be reduced to the form Ax'-{-
Bf-\-2Cx7/-{-F=0, shew how it may be further reduced to
the form Ax^+B>/^+F=0 by a proper choice of axes.
6. Investigate the equation to the tangent to the ellipse
-7+ -XT = 1 at the point x'?/\ and express it in the form
X coso:,-\.i/ sina - v^o*cosV+6^sin^ •
If two tangents drawn through an external point h, h make with
the major axis the angles a, «', shew that cot a 4- cot a' =
'ihk
~ h'-Ic'.
7. Shew that the points of the intersection of a tangent to an
ellipse with the perpendiculars on it from the foci lie on the cir-
cumferen e of the auxiliary circle.
Hence obtain a geometrical construction for drawing the tan-
gents to an ellipse from an external point.
8. Shew tihat the polar equation to a conic section is 1 = 1
r
+ e cos^, and that the polar equation to its tangent at the point
whose angular co-ordinate is a, is-= co3(^— a) + ccos^.
r
9. Define pole and polar. Shew that the polar of a point x^, y^,
with respect to the ellipse ?! i J^ _ i i« £5a. Vh _ i
If from any point in a line at right angles to an axis of the
ellipse a hne be drawn perpendicular to the polar of the point it
will intersect that axis in a fixed point. '
10. Define conjugate diameters and supplemental chords in an
elhpse, and prove that diameters drawn parallel to a pair of sup-
plemental chords are conjugate.
11. Find the equation to a hyperbola when referred to its
asymptotes as co-ordinate axes.
What is the general equation to a hyperbola having two given
straight hnes as asj^mptotes 1 °
1
i
^i
t'
t^#^!^wH||ii
^-
- -»•.
'vV.^^lli
i^i
'<.
'« ', H
*\
■*-^m
1 . '■■;.A'M
'•. ■• 11-4
* n
. A f'i
•^.>
-> rT^^^^^^^^^En^S^^I
«
" '^^^H^l
itOBSL
'-^^^^H
■
mi
ij^i^L i "i^ji^^^^^^^^^B^^^^^B
• *■-■
*■
V
, '_"
! ^ '
ftf ^^^^^^^^^HSSJ^lnd^^^^^H
I!!'*-;:
2.*
1. Shew
proaches, a
negative or
Defiui
those of lo^
figure that i
2. If y =
Differ
(i:
(iii:
3. Find t
(i)
4. Prove
the conditio]
I^ni^tvuitp ^t SToronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAE.
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B A.
1. Shew that the limiting value to which A -f. 1. )* ap-
proaches, as a; is increased indefinitely, is the same whan x is
negative or fractional as when it is a positive integer.
Define a differential co- efficient. From your definition find
those of log(aa:), and a^ with respect to x. Also find from a
figure that of tan 6 with respect to Q.
2. If y = J\z) and z = <hlx\ find ^L .
dx
Differentiate with respect to x
(i) (tan a;)*''''" ^ , (ii) ^ cosec x,
(iii) log (versa;), (iv) log
!
3. Find the r^ differential co-efficient of
1
(i) eP* Bmqx,
(ii)
d'+x^
4. Prove the formula. ^(^±R = ^!fct:^). st^mc. .Ipn.W
the conditions tinder which it holds.
^s
^ ..r
' 5. Investigate a method o2 determining tte maximum and
minimum values of a function ot ^ne variable.
If a; + 2/ = 2c, shew that x = y makes f{x) X f{y) a
maximum or a minimum, as fie) X /"(c) is less or greater than
\fip)Y'
6. Shew how to find the asymptotes to an algebraic curve
(i) which are parallel to, (ii) which are not parallel to the axes.
Find the asymptotes of the curves
(i) xy {y — xY— ahj = a*,
{vi) a? — xy" + ay^ = 0,
7. Define the circle of curvature at any point of a plane curve,
and prove that if s be the length of the arc measured from a fixed
point, the angle of deflection of the tangent from its initial
position at the fixed point, shew that the radius of curvature
p = T-. Hence deduce the expression for p in rectilinear co-ordi-
nates. J
*8. Define the polar subtangent of a curve r =/(0), and shew
thatitisequaltor''-— .
dr
Shew how to find the rectilinear and circular asymptotes of
a polar curve.
Find the asymptotes of the curve, - = ^ "^- .
9. Shew how to find the envelope of a series of curves given
by the equation y(a;,2/, a) = 0, a being a variable parameter.
Find the envelope of the lines
cos o sin ct
10. ShewthatyJc'*-'! (a+bx^y dx can be immediately integra-
ted, if — be a positive integer, or -^ -f- -^ be a negative in-
n q n
teger.
11. Investigate the formula for integration by parts, and apply
— 1
— 1
it to integrate the functions tan _. , cc sin x.
a
11 Integfate tte following fivictibns :
1 (ii)
(i)
1
0"> Zi
-=_i
ind a formula of reduction for /- — - — „ .
Find
a+6 cosx *
(iv) cos^0. log cos .
dx
i' l-L.^ j,
lit:
^ntt^tvMtip ot Sotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
NEWTON, SECTIONS L, II., III.
Examiner: J. B. Cherriman, M.A.
1. State and prove Lemma 2, Section I.
If the equal bases be each divided into n equal parts, and
on these as bases two series of parallelograms be constructed as in
the Lemma, the difference between these two series will be - of
n
that in the Lemma ; how then can each of the four series have
the same limit 1
2. Define "similar" curvilinear figures, and prove that similar
conterminous arcs, which have their chords coincident, have a
common tangent.
At corresponding points of two similar curves, the tangents
are equally inclined to the radius-vectors, and the curvatures are
proportional.
3. Obtain Newton's expression for the radius of curvature.
If a curve pass through the origin, touching the axis of ?/,
(coordinates rectangular.) the radius of curvature there ==
- Lt : ^ ; or if the curve be referred to polar coordinates, a point
in the curve being pole and the tangent being initial line, the
radius of curvature then = - Lt : - .
2 e
4. Prove Prop, 1, Section XL
If impulses be communicated, as in the proposition, along
parallel and equidistant lines, the timea of the body moving from
«
^ '''"■• J
Jt*
i
1
•Si
i,»U
^p:^
. -,: ..
-L..,^^
:t1
* 1 t'wS
>'<
•,1
one line to tke next are the same,
limit 1
Wliat cloes tills become in the
5. If J^Q be an arc of a plane orbit de.v»ribed by a body in
time T, and QH be the subfense jmrallel to the direction of the
resultant force at P; then, when FQ iind T are diminished
indefinitely,
ForceatP = 2Lt:
ma '
Deduce expressions from which may be found the law of
force tending to a fixed centre by which a given orbit may be
described, and the velocity at any point.
If the whole acceleration at P be resolved into two, one
along the tangent and the other along the normal, and QR be
the perpendicular subtense, shew that the latter component ia
2 Lt : 2? , but the former is not 2 Lt : ^.
6. A body revolves in the circumference of a circle, to find the
law of force by which it is attracted to a given point. (Prop. 7.)
If the centre of force be an external point, what part of the
circle will bo described ?
Deduce the law of force when it acts in parallel lines.
7. A body describes a hyperbola round a centre of force iu
its geometrical centre, to find the law offeree. (Prop. 10.)
In all similar hyperbolas described under the same force
tending to the centre, the times of describing a given angle from
the apse are the same.
8. A body revolves in an ellipse or hyperbola, to find the law
offeree tending to a focus. (Props. 11, 12.)
A particle at an assigned point, moving in a given direction
with given velocity about a fixed centre of force which varies as
I may be describing either of two distinct hyperbolas,
(Dist)"
according as the force is attractive or repulsive ; shew that the
latera recta of these hyperbolas are the same, but the lengtlis of
the transverse axes are not.
9. Obtain an expression for the angular velocity at any point
in a central orbit.
In an ellipse round the focus, excentricity being -— , the
v2
difference between the greatest and least angular velocities h
eight times the mean angular velocity.
10. State Kepler's laws o^che planetary motions, and examine
what inferences can be ft awn therefrom by aid of the propositions
in these sections.
How is tJie third law to be extended so as to include the
cases of parabolic or hyperbolic orbits 1
Shew how the force of gravity at the earth's surface may be
compared with the force, tending to the earth's centre, which
retains the moon in her orbit.
» *
■■ if!
■'". m
1. :
n dim
a
mnfiierfiiftj? of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
SECOND AND THIRD YEARS, AND CANDIDATES
FOR B.A.
PROBLEMS.
HONORS.
ExaminerB: \ i ^' Cherriman, M.A.
I Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
rifs
I
1. If yt«) be a rational and integral function of x of less than
n dimensions, and a, 6, c, .... be w quantities, prove
M. . 1 ,Mi 1
a (a — 6)(a~c) . . ."^ 6 ' (b—a) (A— c) . . .+ ' ' '
a6c. . .
2. In a fixed line AB, any point M is taken, and ^ J/ is
A^'j, ^^ * ^^^^ '^'^^^ ^ ^' tJirough J/ a perpendicular to
^ ^ IS drawn, and in it a point P is taken such that AP + AN
IS constant. Shew that the locus of P is a conic.
3. In a rectangular hyperbola, the length of normal intercepted
by the axes is bisected by the curve, and is equal to the length
ot the corresponding tangent intercepted between the asymptotes.
4. C is the centre of a hyperbola, and C7P, CD are conjugates :
1 n IS produced to cut the axes, and perpendiculars to them are
erected at the points of section. Prove that these perpendiculars
meet the intermediate asymptote in the same point aa the tangent
5. In a central cojiic, (excentricity e, conjugate axis 2 6,) the
■'. ->>J
: n
i f'r.
I:, r .
;■•♦
tangent of the angle betwoou the tangent »t a point (ar,y,) and
the central mdiuB vector, is
. 1 6'
the princii)al axes being axes of co-ordinutcH.
6. If PF be the perpendicuhir dropped from anv jMjint /* of
an ellipse upon the conjugate CD produced, and another oliipse
bo constructtd with F m centre, FP m one Hcnii-axis, and the
other Bemi-axis equal to CD; shew that the two ellipses will cut
off equal chords from any line drawn parallel to CD.
7. Pornbolna are described with the same vertex and all touch-
ing the p;ime straight line ; find the locus of their foci.
8 Through each of two points of a curve a line is drawn
equally inclined in the same sense to the tangent there ; shew
that as one of these lines ajjproaches to coincidence with the
other, their ultimate intersection is the foot of the per{)endicular
drop[)ed on the latter from the centre of curvature at the corres-
ponding point.
9. Find the value for a; = 0, of -j-j- (x cot a); and shew that
dx'
dr
if the value of -j- (x cot .t) for cr = 0, bo denoted by \j^ u^^
then will, for values of n gieater than 1,
2/1-1-1 , ,
— - — u = u u-{-u u +
2 2n 2n— 2 2 2«— 4 4
+ U
n+1
1 ,
+ 2^'
u , (n odd)
n-l
(n even).
10. Two given points A, £, lie outside a circle, (centre C); P
is a point on the circumference such that the path APB is a
minimum : shew that CP produced will bisect the angle APR
1 1 . No parallelogram inscribed in an ellipse can exceed half
the rectangle under the axes.
12. Two similar and equal conies are placed with their
vertices and the direction of their transverse axis coincident, their
concavities being turned in opposite directions : one remains fixed,
and the other rolls ufion it ; sh» w how to find the locus of a
point whose position relative to the rolling curve is fixed.
If the curves are parabolas, shew that the locus of the
focus of the rollinc curve is the directrix of the fixed curve j also
find the locus of the vertex of the rolling < urve.
iff!" -Vf
13. Show how the ^mac^mj, r.=3 2a cos 0—a, in generated by
taking points upon conterminous chordH of a circle, and explain
tjie reason tor its name.
Tract .ae curve completely, and shew that the area between
the Circle and outer branch of the curve exceedei that between
the circle and the inner branch by the area of the circle.
14. Two forces acting at a fixed point are represented by
chorda of a given ellipse, drawn i);irallel to pairs of conjugate
diameters ; show that their resultant is constant in magnitude
aud direction.
15. A lino moves so as a' "ays to form wi*h two fixed straight
lines a triangle of c< tstant rea ; shew t'lat the locus of the
centre of gravity of tht .>u)gi>' is hyperl a.
16. From a pouit in • her ol two confocal ellipses a perfectly
elastic ball is pro/'cted ih a dir' otion which would pass through
one of the foci, and after imi>ingi ' {2n — 1) times on the ellipses
returns to the point of pr^ nction ; shew that the length of its
path is n times the differei f the major-axes of the ellipses.
17. Parabolas in the ^
particles projected from tht
but in different directions
tangent to one of the para
through the point where thu
that the locus of P is a circle.
vertical plane are described by
ame point with the same velocity
P k & point in which the initial
IS meets a vertical which passes
arabola meets a fixed line ; shew
18. If S, R, be two centre, f force round which the same
orbit can be described se[)aratei by a body in the same periodic
tine, and SB meet the tangent u P in T; the duplicate ratio of
the forces at i' in the two cases is
RT*RP: -^.'SP,
i .
*--*..v
I.
«•
H*M
r.
■ 1
1
1
If'' ^
II
• *
SUmtietrttiti? of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864
FACULTY OP LAW, FIRST YEAR.
FACULTY OF ARTS, SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH.
-i&^ar.r../«:/?-W^i«ON,LL.D.
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A.
%*Answer8 to all the questions are not indispensable; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
L He was the bravest that Home sent forth.
He was the first that came.
There is an elliptical form hero, involving ambiguity •
define all possible meanings, and re-construct the
sentences so as clearly to express each.
(a.) " I was never yet once, and commend their resolu-
tions who never marry twice."
Religio Medici.
{b.) "If it were done when 'tis done, then 'twere well
It were done quickly."
Macbeth.
(<?.) " 0, it is monstrous ! monstrous !
Methought, the billows spoke, and told me of it ;
The wmds did sing it to me : and the thnndpi-
That deep and dreadful organ-pipe, pronounced
Ihe name of Prospero."
Ti
'e;
npest.
*t-H;fei
:... "M
i '«
(d.) " After the most straightest sect of our religion, I
lived a Pharisee."
St. Paul.
(e.) " It was prettily devised of -^sop : The fly sate on
the axle-tree of the chariot wheel, and said : What a dust do
I raise ! So are there some vain persons, that, whatsoever
goeth alone, or moveth upon greater means, if they have
never so little hand in it, they think it is they that carry it."
Bacon.
:J
(/) " 0, pardon me, though piece of bleeding earth,
That I am meek and gentle with these butchers !
Thou art the ruins of the noblest man
That ever lived in the tide of times.
Woe to the hand that shed this costly blood !
Over thy wounds now do I prophecy,
Which like dumb mouths, do ope their ruby lips,
To beg the voice and utterance of my tongue."
Julius Ccesar.
{g.) " Not on thy sole, but on thy soul, harsh Jew,
Thou mak'st thy knife keen."
Merchant of Venice.
2. What syntactical peculiarities in «, d, and e ? Is the
structure in accordance with modern usage ?
3. Point out and define all the rhetorical figures used in
the above sentences.
4. Name the author of the '' Uuphues;' and state what
influence it exercised on English literature.
6. Name the works of Sir Phillip Sydney, and describe
their peculiar characteristics.
6. Seeing that the Faerie Queen and the Paradise Loit
are both Epics, define the significance of the term, and point
out wherein the essential differences between the two
consist.
7. To what class of works do the ^'■Shepherd's Calendar,"^
the ''Mape of Lucrece;' ''The Tempest;' ''Lycidas,
^^Qomus" and the ^^Ahsolom and AchitopJietj*' belong?
Give reasons for the classification, and name the author of
each.
8. Composition. — " Bacon's Advancement of Learning^
and his Novum Organum^ have more in them of the spirit
of poetry than of science ; and we should almost as soon
think of fathering modern physical science upon Paradise
Lost as upon them."
Craih.
Maintain^ or refute this, concisely ; writing with care, as
a specimen of correct composition.
f JH
■Hi
^MVn
'T'^fHwi
':'^l
^r'isM
'Jl
'':h ^^,i
8
is
-P^^^H
' 9
•
^ *^^^l
"'-^^1
'fl
if]^^
.,;,. . ,;'^
< t . #^ >^^|
h^'-3j1
1
gH^il
ffill
j. .'W
3'3f'' •J.'i
»
^ ■■<■
s.. ,.••*
Cttsaawuu^Eii. JT*bi%jn
jiH
It i '
Unititv^ittjf of tElotontn.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
HISTORY,
Examiners • i ^' Wilson, LL.D.
*^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
I. Outlines of Mediaeval History.
(1.) What events mark the beginning and the close of
Mediaeval History ? Apportion and characterize the periods
into which it may be divided.
(2.) What causes contributed to the extinction of feudal-
ism ? Explain generally how it was that thereafter a free
constitution was established in England, but absolute
monarchies arose on the continent.
(3.) Describe the character and historical importance of
Gregory VII.
(4.) Sketch the establishment and progress of the Swiss
confederacy, and the manner in which it maintained its
independence.
(5.) Sketch the history of the Hanseatic League.
II. British History, from Henry VIII. to the Revolution.
(1.) Contrast briefly the Reformation in England and
Scotland, as regards its introduction, progress, and results.
(2.) State the circumstances which led to the downfall of
the Earl of Essex, in Elizabeth's reign.
(3.) "When Elizabeth came to the throne," says Lingard,
"England ranked only among the secondary kingdoms;
before her death it had risen to a level with the first nations
of Europe." Detail the chief causes whereby this was
effected.
(4.) What differences of opinion existed as to Elizabeth's
successor, and what considerations ultimately prevailed ?
(5.) When and by whom was the " Declaration of Rights "
drawn up and confirmed? What are its most important
provisions?
:: T'-n i r/i-.i v<:
k
'• I » 'f
. * 'in
11
■"'■'•-■ ^ ''^
• an
t "i«S- *
fc-f :
-vf'» ?'
Winii)tvniti!! of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIKST YEAE. (In Law.)
HISTORY.
Examiners • / ^' Wilson, LL.D.
■^^'^^^"''^^•tj. A. BoYD,M.A.
' . f«
"^^^ Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
I. British history, Charles I. to William III.
(1.) Trace the descent of Charles I. from the house of
Tudor.
(2.) When and by whom was the Declaration of Rights
drawn up and confirmed? What are its most important
provisions ?
(3.) What great constitutional principle was settled by
raising William III. to the throne? Give some account of
the parliamentary discussions which preceded this event.
(4.) What do you understand by the " Act of Settlement "?
Set forth its most important enactments.
II. Salic law and Feudal system.
(1.) What contributed to the extinction of feudalism?
Explain how it was that thereafter a free constitution ws
established iu England, but absolute monarchies arose on
the continent.
(2) Whit was the c lef object of the Salic Law ? Why
so called ? In what manner was its observance established
as a constitutional principle in Franco ?
(3.) In what respects did feudalism, as it obtained in
England, differ from continental feudalism? State the
causes of this difference.
(4.) Give some account of the feudal incidents of escheats,
aids, and wardship.
Vf' I
•M
« . * 'i'.
i'.'^mir A
USBit?
^^ >M
-iil
11
1^
Wini\^tvnitt}! of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
[t5Sf- '•* '
IT . > D. Wilson, LL.D.
Jbxavuners : j j^ j^ ^^^^^ ^^ j^
■«5:,
" Merchajit of Venice ;" Etymology a?id Synonyms.
(1.) Set forth the peculiarities of structure in this play,
and give the sources ^herefrom the plot was dra^vn.
(2.) Describe and contrast the characters of Antonio
and Shylock, of Portia and Jessica.
(3.) Cite passages which refer or allude to circumstances
of English history contemporaneous with the date
of the play.
(4.) Give the origin and meaning of the following
((
(5.)
OS-
words: "vailing," '' eanlings," " sonties,
tent," "peize," "tranect," "patines."
" Lor. The moon shines bright. — In such a night
as this,
When the sweet wind did gently kiss the trees,
And they did make no noise ; in such a night,
Troilus, methinks, mounted the Trojan walls.
And sighed his soul toward the Grecian tents,
Where Cressid lay that night.
Jes. In such a night
Did Thisbe fearfully o'crtrip the dew ;
And saw the lion's shadow ere himself,
And ran dismayed away,
r
Lor. In such a night,
Stood Dido, with a willow in her hand.
Upon the wild sea-banks, and waved her love
To come again to Carthago.
Jes. In such a niglit
Medea gathered the enchanted herbs
That did renew old iEson."
(a.) Point out all the figures (syntactical and
rhetorical) in the foregoing passage.
(6.) From what sources did Shakspeare draw his
classical references therein ? Mention the vari-
ations made by Shakspeare upon his originals.
{c.) G ive an epitome of the classic stories referred to.
{d.) Give groups of synonyms for the italicised
words, distinguishing between the shades of
meaning of the words in each group.
(6.) Give the derivations of, and where applicable, the
transmutations of meaning in the following words:
"JoMw/cer," '^anon," '^ renowned suitors," '' r)<^-
gan," ''usance," ''bankrupt," " Jcnave," " un-
bated" "rnoiety," " shreivd" and " gossip "
(7.) Parse the following phrases : —
''He falls straight a capering."
" I do know a many fools."
" I scant this breathing courtesy."
■•ill
••■ ' 'c
.; i'f in-jl; iliai
■ T. -, » '
fit
/I
^ ,
-5',
i
^
iM'
\i *•*
■
1
ffcV
Uni\}tvniW of STotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4.
SECOND YEAR.
HISTORY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
ET . ID. Wilson, LL.D.
^xa7mner8:jjj^^ Boyi, M.A.
*i^.* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
1. Define the territorial sovereignty of Charles V., and
the basis of his claims in each case ; and compare the
political sub-divisions of Europe at his abdication, with those
at the death of Louis XIV.
2. Taylor says: 'Two monarchs contemporary with
Charles V. were almost equally bound by their interests
to check the preponderance of the house of Austria."
Name them ; define the obligations of interest in each case ;
and show how far each accomplished the object.
3. The results of the battle of Pavia are said to have
" made Charles V. master of Italy, and arbiter of Europe."
Show the grounds of this statement ; and the causes which
deprived the emperor of any substantial advantages from it.
4. Trace the causes which led the Guise party of France,
and the Catholic party of England, to favour Mary Stuart's
"''-tim'm^
;j» T
claims to the English throne ; and define, and account for
the policy of Philip IT. and Catherine do Medici in reference
to this.
5. State the parties in the struggle, and the principles
involved, which were settled by the peace of Westphalia.
6. Construct a genealogical tree, showing the descent of
George I. from Ilonry VII. ; and point out every interme-
diate departure from the regular succession to the English
throne, with the causes.
7. Trace t? . means by which Prussia was raised to the
rank of a monarchy ; and define its acquisitions of territory
under Frederick the Great.
8. Compare in detail the influential relations of England
to continental powers, under Cromwell, Charles 11. and
William III.
9. Specify the parties and the terms of agreement of the
Peace of Ryswick, and of Utrecht ; and trace the influence
of each on subsequent European history.
10. Trace the causes, and results, of the rivalry of Peter
the Great and Charles XII. of Sweden.
'. J
» 5 Jl'S
•i
"1
61,^.14
1
i ■
V^ 31
i[
lHll
■
'-' <■ t 1, S'l. )
ar;i
■im
.¥
, ^-i
'#*»
••'11
*» i
■•i^ '-Vi.,- , 7<
«M6i<»nir«.i^ Brail iSiIarfci'iaiia
ml
i* ;* i„ *
' M
II
limi
1, ,•: ...; - . '%
pHhir
1
w\
li 1' . .f '.
Vt ,
<!Knfber0ftj^ of SToronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
FIRST YEAH (LAW.)
HISTORY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
^xamtner8'i^' Wilson, LL.D.
^*'*'"*"^'^*-tJ. A. Boyd, M. A.
*^*An8iver8 to all the questions are not indispensable; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can be over-
taken within the time.
1. What three kingdoms became predominant in the
Saxon Heptarcliy prior to the fusion of the whole into one
kingdom ?
2. Hallam says : " It was the glory of Alfred to rescue
the Anglo-Saxon monarchy, yet he never subdued the Dane?.
nor became master of the whole kingdom." Explain aii
that is implied in those statements.
3. Explain the rank and privileges of Thanes and
Ceorls, and the nature of the Witenagemot.
4. What was the law of frank-pledge, and what succes-
sive stages did it pass through ?
5. What public burdens affected the tenure of the free-
hold lands of England prior to the conquest; and T\rhat
Tenures?
by the introduction of Feudal
Iff ' »
0. Give the history, and deHno the object and character
of the Domesday Book. What is the object and meaninjr of
its name? *
7. ITallam says of the accession of William of Normandy
to the English throne, " The state of the country induced
'Jlf'^'^i not j"«tify, the mcusuro of tendering the crown to
William, which he had a pretext or title to claim." Explain
all that is implied in those statements.
8. " Five kings out of the seven that followed William
the Conqueror were usurpers, according to modern notions."
bet forth the grounds of this statement of Ilallam, and trace
out the establishment of the hereditary right of succession.
9. Give the history of Magna Charta, and state the
most important rights guaranteed by it.
10. Explain the nature of Baronial Tenure, and its
relation to the English parliamentary system, and trace the
origin and progress of parliamentary representation.
11. Explain the nature of charters of incorporation, and
the influence of the growth of burgal privileges on the
development of free institutions in England.
12. State the proceedings of parliament, temp. Richard
n., against the Chancellor, Michael de la Pole, Earl of
Suffolk, and trace their influence on the development of the
resource of parliamentary im[.eachment.
13. Construct a genealogical tree, showing the relations
ot the rival claimants to the Crown from Edward III. to
Richard III.
■PpI
;v^5
' ♦
'^nm
.%,i'
k-
^ ^^m^.
^Unftietsfti) of STovontd.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801.
FliiST YEAH. (LAW.)
ENCLTSH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
XT . f D. Wilson, LL.D.
Examiners :< t * n-,„J at a
!_ J. A. Boyd, M.A.
'■'■ Henry K.;" Etumoloijij and Synonifms.
(1.) AVhat are the peculiarities of i^tructurc in this play,
and for what purposes ;ii o they employed ?
(2.) Give an analysis of Henry V.'s character as de-
picted by Shakspeare.
(3,) State the causes which Shakspearc assigns for the
French wars of Henry V., and discuss in how far
he is confirmed by history.
(4.) Give the meaning and derivation of the italicised
words in the following passages of Henry V. :
" We fear the main intendment of the Scot ;"
" Do but think you stand upon ihe'rivage ;"
" Grapple your minds to sternage of this navy;"
" Let it pry through the portage of tho head ;"
*' Whose blood h fet from fathers of Avar-proof ;"
"Willing to march on without impeachment ;''
" Such a hilding foe ;"
" Soaked in mercenary blood ;"
" Deracinate such savagery ;"
^ "IH
'til
(5.) " K. Hen. And what art thou, thou idol ceremony ?
* * * K. "^
' Tis not the halm, the sceptre, and the ball,
The sword, the mace, the croivn imperial.
The inter-tissued robe of gold and pearl.
The farced title running ' fore the king.
The throne he sits on, nor the tide of pomp
That beats upon the high shore of this world,
No, not all these, thrice-//or</fOM« ceremony^
Not all these, laid in bed majestical,
Can sleep so soundly as the wretclied slave ;
Who, with a hody Jllkd, and vacant mind,
Gets him to rest, crammed with distressful bread ;
Never sees horrid night, the child of hell ;
But, like a lackey, from the rise to set.
Sweats in the eye of Phoebus, and all night
Sleeps in Elysium."
{a.) Point out and name all the figures, rhetorical
and syntactical, in this extract.
(6.) What is the meaning of the 5th line ?
{e.) Paraphrase the last six lines, so as to exhibit
their meaning in ordinary prose.
(d.) Collier proposes to read ''distasteful for
'' disiressfuV in the 12th line; discuss the
propriety of this " emendation."
{e.) Give one or more synonyms for the words in
italics.
(6.) Show the connection which exists between this
and other dramas of the same author. '
^■m
I*;
Translate
In
thoui
from
thirt
leagi
artill
whicl
he re
happ
dang
on ai
with^
to ha
were
1. Wha
and how c
2. T
in j
is the plac
i^ni\^tvuitp of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
h.
■ %
FRENCH.
' ij
Examiners • \ "^^^^^ Forneri, L.L.D.
* I Robert Sullivan, M.A.
I.
Translate into French :
In 1589, Henry the IV. who had only five or six
thousand men, was attacked at Arques, a village not far
from Dieppe, hy the Duke of M who had ahout
thirty thousand. That prince, suspecting that the
leaguers would turn their principal efforts against his
artillery, placed there the Swiss regiment of Glaris upon
which he relied much, and Colonel Galaty upon whom
he relied still more. What he had foreseen having
happened, he flew, according to his custom, where the
danger was greatest, "my comrade," said he to Galaty
on arriving there, "I come to die or to acquire honour
with you ' ' These words had the success they were meant
to have, they decided the fate of the battle, the leaguers
were repelled on all sides, and completely beaten.
II.
GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION.
1. What do you understand by grammatical construction,
and how does it differ from syntax ?
2. In sentences briefly interrogative-affirmative, where
is the place of the subject, be it a noun or pronoun ?
r-i
> nil
■C-Lj 1 .1 * m
I
MR?7^^^^
n
^
Elil ; IL^iss
yyii
pv^inpi
^
M\: •.,
TI^Hl
3. Where is the verb and where arc the pronouns placed
in phrases imperative-affirmative, and in the negative ?
4. What is the order of the words in sentences expositive-
affirmative ? In what do negative sentences differ ?
5. Illustrate each answer by an example.
III.
GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS.
1. What difference between elle a gardS le lit and elle a
garde son lit ?
2. Explain the use of the possessive pronouns in French,
when connected with any part of the body, or physical and
intellectual faculties.
3. In what case or cases can the relative bo separated
from the antecedent ?
4. When is
distributive ?
5. When d^Ly .d Vun nt I'antre govern the verb in the
singular, and when in the plural ? Give examples?
6. When are sortir, demeurer and perir conjugated in
the compound tenses with the verb avoir and when with the
verb Stre ? Give ex ^^os ?
7. When does si c on, take the future and when
the present tense ?
8. Give some examples in which the suppression of pas
and point is obligatory ?
9. What participles past are never declined in the feminine.
10. Name some of the prepositions always repeated, and
state the difference between en and dans in point of time ?
IV.
Translate :
Tel autre fait la satire de ces gens qui s'engagent par
inquietude ou par curiosity dans de long voyages ; qui
ne font ni memoires, ni relations ; qui ne portent point
de tablettes ; qui vont pour voir, et qui ne voient pas,
ou qui oubiient ce qu'iis ont vu; qui desirent seulement
de connaitre do nouvelles tours ou de nouveaux clochers,
et de passer des rivieres qu'on n'uppclle ni la Seine, ni
la Loire ; qui sortont do lour patrio pour y retourner,
qui aiment a etro absents, qui vculcnt un jour gtro
rcvenus do loin : et co satiriquo parle juste, et so fait
dcouter.
1. Tel autre. What part of the speech is tel, can it be
used for quelque que ?
2. De ces gena. Give the various constructions of gens ?
3. Ni menoires ni relations, wliy not an article ?
4. Point de tablettes, why not des tablettcs ?
5. Nouvellea tours, nouveaux clochers, what difrorence in
meaning if nouvelles, nouveaux are placed after the substan-
tives ?
6. What is the antecedent of the various qui in this
extract ?
V.
• French Literature to the 17th century. (Sismondi's.)
1. When was the first establishment formed in Paris to
amuse the people by regular entertainments, and by whom?
2. By what name was the company formed of that es-
tablishment called ?
3. Which is the most ancient dramatic work of modern
Europe ?
4. To whom are we indebted for the invention of the
comedy, and how did the comedy originate ?
5. What era is assigned for the commencement of the
French literature?
^
rrf?
-Ci
K,
.<»#r f'l
fl
^1
hm
L
' . 5* ■ nffli
tUnmvms^ ot tRotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
U^i
*«)..
i
Examiners: ] i^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D.
3 Robert Sullivan, M.A.
Translate into English :
Vous ne d6mentez point une race funeste;
Uui, vous etes le sang d'Atrde et de Thyeste •
Bourreau de votre fille, il ne vous roste enfin '
Que d en faire a sa mere un horrible festin.
Barbare ! c'est done la cet heureux sacrifice
Que vos soins preparaient avec tant d'artifice !
yuoi ! 1 horreur de souscriro a cet ordre inhumain
^ a pas, en le tra^ant arr^te votre main '
Pourquoi feindre a nosyeux uno fatisse tristresse ?
±^ensez-vous par des pleurs prouver votre tendresse ?
uu sont-ils ces combats que vous avez reudus ?
Que s flots de sang pour elle avez-vous rdpandus ?
Quel debris parle ici de votre resistance ?
Quel champ couvert de morts m.^ condamne au silence?
Voila par quels temoms il fallait me prouver,
^ruel ! que votre amour a voulu la sauver.
; •i<viy%,niQ^ ^xut, IV., ocene iv.
*iii':maisaamB
^:IM'
2. :En faire d sa mire. What does en refer to ?
3. C'est done Id. Give the force, especially of Id.
4. A cet ordre inhumain. Explain what ordre.
5. Un le tragant. Resolve by a conjunction, tense, and
mood.
6. Pourguoi feindre. Prefix a verb to feindre.
7. Rendusy repandus. Why declined ?
8. Voild. Resolve it by the demonstrative verb c'est, Avith
temoins as subject, and followed by the relative quels.
9. 11 fallait me prouver. Resolve me prouver into a de-
finite idea.
10. Que voire amour a voulu la sauver. Point out the
very words of Agamemnon to which these are an answer.
(Read the foregoing speech.)
Translate :
Monsieur...
II.
ALCESTE.
K *-^ '' '
ORONTE.
L'dtat n'a ricn qui ne soit au-dessous
Du m^rite eclatant que Ton decouvre en vous.
ALCESTE.
Monsieur...
ORONTE.
Oui, de ma part je voua tiens pr^f^rable
A tout ce que j'y vois de plus considerable.
ALCESTE.
Monsieur...
ORONTE.
Sois-je du ciel ecrasd si je mens !
Et, pour vous confirmer ici mes sentiments,
Souflfrez qu'^ coeur ouvert, monsieur, je vous embrasse,
Et qu'en votre amitife je vous demande place.
Touchez la, s'il vous plait. Vous me la prometez,
Votre amiti6 ?
ALCESTE.
Monsieur...
ORONTE.
Quoil vous y r6sistezj
i.. ,1 iJi 'if
, Viitli
ALCESTE.
Monsieur, c'est trop d'honneur que vous me voulez faire ;
Mais I'amitie demande un peu plus de mystere,
Et c'est assurement en profaner le nom
Que de vouloir le mettre a toute occasion.
Avec lumitire et choix cette union veut naitre ;
Avani que nous lior, il faut nous mieux connaitro ;
Et nous pourrions avoir telles complexions),
Que tous deux du marchd nous nons repentirions.)
L'MrsANTiiROPE, acte i., scene ii.
1. A tout ce que fi/ vois. What does y refer to ?
2. Sois-je du del eerase. Turn it into an active verb,
governed by pouvoir.
3. Pour vous cofijirmer ici. Eesolve confirmer by a
conjunction, tense, and mood.
4. Touchez Id. Explain.
5. Vous me la prometez, voire amitie. What figure ?
6. Quoi ! vous y resistez ? What does y refer to ?
7. Un peu plus de mystdre. Give the force.
8. M c'est aisur^mentj ^o. Destroy the pleonasm, re-
arrange the sentence in a regular construction, and give the
equivalent of ew.
9. Avant que nous lier^ il faut nous mieux connattre.
Resolve both Her and connaUre by conjunctions, tenses, and
moods.
10. Et nous pourrions avoir. Change et into a causal
conjunction, and give the term of condition.
11. Du mareh6. Gi/e the force.
12. Nous nons repentirions. Turn it into an infinitive
with a preposition, suppressing que.
13. Point out the two most strikmg inversions.
»■
'^\
4'i
,'4- y >■-■,'•
■J}
.^» 1^
E,
Translate ir
Inl
sand m
Dieppe
thousai
League
artiller
which i
he reli(
happen
danger
Galaty,
honour
were n
battle.
complet
Translate in'
Monsiei
L*]
Dumer
(■Ijyaiijiiiit'
Uni\}tvmp ot Sovdnto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR, (LAW.)
FRENCH.
HONORS.
1
i
1
III
i
-• '':,
k%
' \
1
t
a
' .• ''!
'■■i
V '
i
Examiners: [i^^'"^^ Forneri, LL D
( Robert Sullivan, M.A.
Translate into French :
I.
In 1589, Henry IV., who had only five or six thou-
sand men, was attacked at A , a village not far from
Dieppe, by the Duke of M , who had about thirty
thousand men. That prince suspecting, that the
Leaguers would turn their principal efforts against his
artillery, placed there the Swiss regiment de Glaris upon
which he relied much, and Colonel Galaty upon whom
he relied still more. What he had foreseen having
happened, he flew, according to his custom, where the
danger was greatest. "My comrade," said he to
Galaty, on arriving there, " I come to die or to acquire
honour with you." These words had the success they
were meant to have; they decided the fate of the
battle. The Leaguers were repelled on all sides and
completely beaten.
Translate into English :
Monsieur...
11.
ALCESTE.
ORONTE.
L'Etat n'a rien qui ne soit au-dessou3 ^
Du merite eclatant que Ton ddcouvre en vous.
■e'-^i
li.'
•,»ti
' !
mil
4i
*!
Monsieur...
ALOESXti.
ORONTE.
Oui, de ma part, je vous tiens preferable
A tout ce que j'y voia de plus considerable.
ALCESTE.
Monsieur...
ORONTE.
Sois-je du ciel dcrase, si je mens !
Et, pour vous confirmer ici roes sentiments,
Souffrez qu'a cocur ouvert, monsieur, je vous embrasse,
Et qu'en votre amiti^ je vous demande place.
Touchez la, s'il vous plait. Vous me la promettez,
Votre amitie ?
Monsieur.
ALCESTE.
, ORONTE.
Quoi ! VOUS y r^sistez }
ALCESTE.
Monsieur, c'est trop d'honneur que vous me voulez faire;
Mais I'amitie demande un peu plus de myst^re ;
Et c'est assurdment en profaner le nom
Qne de vouloir le mettre a touto occasion.
Avec lumiere et choix cette union veut naitre ;
Avant que nous Her, il faut nous mieux connaitre ;
Et nous pourrions avoir telles complexions, ^
Que tons deux du marchd nous nous repentirions.
MOLIERE, Le Misanthrope, Act i.. Scene ii.
1. Que py vois. What does y refer to ?
2. Sois-je du ciel eerase. Turn it into an active verb
governed hj pouvoir.
3. Pour vous confirmer. Resolve confirmer by conjunc-
tion, tense, and mood.
4. Touchez Id. Explain what he means.
5. Vous me la promettez, votre amiti6. What figure ?
6. Quoi! vous y r^sisiez. Give the equivalent oiy.
W.' Ail
7. Vn peu phi de myithe. Oive tlie force.
8. Et o'ett asaurementf ^c. Destroy the pleonasm, re-
arrange the sentence into a regular order, and give tho
equivalent of en.
9. Avant que nous lievy il faut nous mieux connattre.
Resolve both Her and connattre by conjunction, tense, and
mood.
10. M noua pourriona avoir. Turn et into a causal con-
junction, and give the term of condition.
11. Du marc1i6. Give the force.
12. Nous noua repentmons. Turn it into an infinitive
with a preposition, suppressing que.
13. Point out the two most striking inversions.
,'f'
M
• • » * -il
■i ,M2mfii
? "j;
^'^:
mw
mnih(Vf$its rit Eoiont0.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS. 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
GERMAN.
\ Robert Sullivan, M. A.
Translate :
I.
Qintx ot>et bcr 51 n be re.
^ 3ur 3ett ^cimidf^ IV., mnlo,^ yon gfranfrcfc^, rttt
etnmal etn S3ducrlcin vonfctncm 3)orfe nac^ faxi^, ^i6)t
nic()r mit ^on ter ®tabt ki^ecinctc cr etncm flamfdjeit
3ficitcr. Q^ mx tcr mnic^. ©em ©cfolge war abftd;tltd^
m cmtficr Gntfcrnung (^cbliebeit. „2Bo!)er m SSeg^, metit
greunb V Jpaht t()r C^kfc^ciftc ju ^artg r
//3a/' antwortcte bcr 33uuer; ,,aurf) miJd[)te td; gent einmal
unfcrn gutcn ^iJntg fcbcit/ bcr fcin ^Colt fo jartltd^ ^'fbt."
3)er ^^am'.q ladjcUc unb fagtc: ,/2)aju fann u4 Dlatb
werbcn."
/'^ber ttjciin id) nur waffte, njelc^cr e^^ tft unter ben
»ielcn ^(Jflingcn, »on bencn er umgeben fetn loirb."
j,3)ag tt)tU trf) md) fai^en: 3^r biirft nur M)imc^ gekn,
wclct)cr ben ^ut auf bem ^opfc be^a en wtrb, wann aik
allc 5(nbern ftcl; e^rerbiettg raerben entbiapt ^aben."
m\^ rtuen fte mtt etnanber tn ^art^ l)min, unb ..vflr
bag ^auerlem auf bcr retc|)ten @ette beg OliJnt'ag: benn was
bie itebe ixinfalt, eg fei mi't M\id)t ober burd) 3ufalC
llngcfc^tcftcg t^un fann, bag t^ut [tc.
Adlei,, p. 46.
1. Koniga von Franhreich. Tn what relation ?
W"'i:
2. JRiV^ einmal. Give the infinitive and participle past
of ritt.
3. J57m Bduerlein. What do c^ew and lein denote at
the end of a noun ; and why is lein here employed ?
4. Begegnete er. Give the antecedent of er.
5. Einem stattUehen Reiter.. What case and why?
6. Cfeblieben. Give the infinitive and imperfect.
Woher des Wegs. Fill up the ellipsis.
7. Bazu kann euch Rath werden. What is the aubject
of hann ? Give the force.
8. Aher wenn ich nur wilsste. Give the infinitive and
participle past of ivUsste.
9. Welcher es ist. Give the various constructions of es.
10. Ihr dilrft. Give the infinitive of durftj imperfect
and participle past.
11. Benn was. Set all this sentence in a regular con-
struction, taking in zwar^ and making it emphatic.
12. Bie liele Einfalt. What is liehe., what is its meaning,
and in what sense is it here employed ?
13. Ungeschicktes. Turn it into a relative sentence.
II.
GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS.
1. When is of omitted, and by what preposition is it
rendered when expressing locality or tendency ?
2. What preposition do adjectives take referring only
to a part of the whole ? Translate, the bird has beautiful
feathers.
3. When a relative pronoun refers to a whole sentence,
what gender does it take ?
4. What is the peculiarity of zu after the verb to be ?
6. How ia the English participle present rendered after
the word kommen ?
6. Name some verbs which require the genitive case, and
some which govern two accusatives.
t ' >
7. By -what verb ia rendered to he before an infinitive ?
8. What participles past are turned into infinitive when
they govern an infinitive ?
9. By what verb is would rendered in the sense of used ?
Translate thus he would sit and talk for hours.
10. What case does the impersonal gehen govern ? and
when is the participle past worden and when geworden used ?
11. When are iiber durch wieder urn separable and
when inseparable ? and what verbs must take an impersonal
form in their passive voice ?
Til.
HISTORY OP GERMAN LITERATURE, PERIODS 1, 2, 3, AND
4, (GOSTICK'S)
1. Why did Ulphilas in his translation of the Scriptures
into the Gothic language omit the book of Kings ?
2. What remains now of this translation ?
3. What do you perceive in the work of Ulphilas with
regard to the German tongue ?
4. Give the character of the German language.
5. What does the 1st period comprehend, and how
far does it extend ?
6. How far does the 2nd period extend, and what does it
contain ?
7. What title can you give to the 4th period, and how
far does it extend ?
8. What character did Luther impress on the literature
of the 16th century?
9. How far is Germany indebted to Luther with regard
to the German tongue ?
10. What difference can you draw between the literature
of the north and that of the south of Germany ?
m
J- 11
4
I
V . ''»S'
■^WBDJI^:
*"
Tranglate :
Tw<
pond ■'
the ic
where
from 1
and W
were e
Byde,
he waj
breaks
too bri
conseq
love fc
M\tx unb f
3flmmer»on
Die er oft u
^kx mfci) t)
^tegt bfe txf\
2infli(tfiiit|? of ^Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
GERMAN.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
SJxaminers.'f ^-^^^^ Forneri, LL D.
\ Robert Sullivan, M.A.
I.
Tranglate into German.
Two boys went together, one winter morning, on a
pond which was frozen. Many people were skating on
the ice. At the end of the pond there was a place
where the ice did not bear. Every body stood aloof
from this place in order not to be drowned. Charles
and William (these were the names of the two boys)
were scarcely ta the ice when they hastened to slide.
By degrees W. always came nearer the dangerous spot ;
he was too thoughtless to ob'^erve it. Suddenly the ice
breaks under him ; Charles lii to his assistance ; he
too breaks in, and both are ned — the former in
consequence of his thoughtlessness, the latter out of
love for his friend.
II.
^If m{(| bag m&t^tn txUidtt, fo trat fic ben ^ferben flelaJTcn
mtx unb fofltc ju mtr: 9?tc|t I'mmer mx eg mtt xim fo
3ammer»oH, dg 3t)r ung Ijeut' anf bi'efen mc^m crbltcfct.
|o(| ni^t bin i6) flewofjnt, um 3remben bte @ak ju I^etfil^cn,
2)te er oft unflcrn m^i, urn log ju werben ben 5(rmen;
^m rnicl) bvancjet bie moil) ju rcben. ^ter auf bem etvo()c
Vtegt blc erft entbunbenc grau beg retd)en 53cftijerg,
'- ' 3J
-H
'^^^'
^ ^ 'rl
T)k id) mil (Sttcrcn unb 2Bfl(^ctt noc| U\m, b(c fc^njancjrc, ^crettet.
Spiit nur fpmmeu mx md), itub faum ta^ Seben cr^ielt fie.
9^un Itcgt, ncui-jcborcn, ba^ ^inb tt)r nacfcnb tm 5lrme,
Hub mif Sentflcm nur »ennOgm btc Unfcrn p f)elfen!
®cnn wix tm nad)ftcn Dorf, wo wix l)eute ju vaftcn j^cbcnfen,
5lud; ftc ftnbcn, wtewel)l tc^ fuvd)tc, fte [inb fd)on ijorubcr.
2Bar Gud) trqenb you SciniDanb nur wag gntbef)rltd)cg, wcnn 3^r
.^tcv aug bcr" ^ladjbarfdjaft [epb, fo [penbct'g flfittg ben 5lrmen.
Goethe's Herman und Dorothea^ pages 16 & 17.
1. ^0 irat sie. Explain the discordance of sie.
2. Den Pferden. What case, and why ?
3. G-elassen. What is it?
4. Nicht immer so jammervoU. Give the force.
5. Als Ihr. What difference in meaning between Ik
and ihr?
6. Die er oft ungern giebt. Give the antecedents of
die and er ; and state what case geben, when impersonal,
governs.
7. Um los zu werden. Give the force of lo8 zu werden;
and state what cases it governs.
8. Den Armen. What case, and why so ? Would de«
Armen, or der Armen be good German ? Why spelt with
a capital ?
9. Aher mid drdnget die JSFoth. Why the subject after
the verb?
10. ffier auf dem Stroke Uegt, &c. Why avf with the
dative here ?
11. Die erst entbundene Frau. Give the force of ent
and turn entbundene Frau into a relative sentence.
12. Die schwangre gerettet. With what word, and in what
relation does die schwangre stand ? Fill up the ellipsis.
13. Spat nur kommen wir nach. What is nach here?
14. Das Leben erhielt sie. Give the antecedent of sie;
and point out the subject of erhielt.
15. 2hr im Arrne. Explain the rule affecting these
words.
16. Liegt neugehoren, das Kind naekend, &c. Turn
neugeboren and nackend into adjectives, qualifying dfas kindf
and re-arrange the words.
17. Die Unsern. Who are they ?
18. Wenn wir, &c. Suppress ivenn, and re-arrange the
sentence.
19. Schon Voriiler. Fill up the ellipsis.
20. War' euch, &c, Prefix wenn, and re-arrange ; but
turn war into an active verb, with euch as a subject.
21. Was Enthehrliches. What does was stand for?
Turn Enthehrliches into a relative sentence, and state by
what is von Leinwand governed.
^-if't^fciMfaTCi!.. .1., - ' ■'^■^*-. IM
Xi
Wini\^tvuit^ of ^ovonto.
'H
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR
EXPERIMENTAL CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L.
'.■m
1. Describe the construction of a mercurial thermometer.
What is its range ?
2. Bj what means may the conducting power of bodies
be determined ?
3. How may the radiation of heat be proved ?
4. What is meant by a magnetic meridian ?
6. Describe a galvanometer and its action.
6. Describe the diflferent frictional electrical machines.
7. Give the preparation of ozone, iodine, bromine, chloric
acid and hydrofluoric acid, with their general properties.
8. Give the principal ores of silver, arsenic, mercury,
copper and platinum, and the formulas of their oxides.
9. Give the general principles of organic analysis, and
the general composition of natural organic bodies.
10. Give the preparation, properties and formulas of
acetic acid, cyanide and ferrocyanide of potassium and
fultaiuating mercury.
g ,#^5t>.
U5
Am
*
>• n
Kf
M
/fg
1 -'S
-i'laiSi
-f-is
1>-'>.W,"
.1 **
nni\}tvnit^ of vonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
EXPERIMENTAL CHEMISTRY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner: Hent Croft, D.C.L.
t
- « •
#
1. Describe the principles and construction of the com-
pensating pendulum, and of Breguet's thermometer.
2.^ V is meant by thcrmometric equilibrium? and
explain ma bu-called radiation of cold.
J. Whnt is the law of the diffusion of gases? How
a&oertaiD "
4. Menuoi e relative powers of lamp black and pol-
ish' d silver as regards absorption, radiation and reflection
of heat.
5. What is meant by 'ho magnetic equator, ^ ^y
isoclinal lines.
6. Describe an inductioi joil, and explain the effect o»
introducing a coil of wire in- o tl o circuit of a weak battery.
7. E. plain the action of a Ticyden jar, and show how
several can be charged n*
S. Give tl preparation of proto. anl binoxideof
nitrogen, phosplmretted h iogei! cijfi gas and ter-
9. Give the preparation of arsenic acid, chromic acid,
permanganate of potassa, binoxide of tin, and corrosive
sublimate.
10. Give the sources and preparation of light carluretted
hydrogen, methylic and cetylic alcohols, formic and pal-
mitic acids.
11. Give the sources and preparation of benzole, and
mention the substances obtained from it by the action of
i.itri'" acid, giving formulas.
12. In what substances are fibrine, albumine and caseine
found ? What are their characters.
ll
'ih
'.•11
■< i^^Kf ^Jt^
•ii
* f A"
■\
f
*
s
uni\^tvmtt of STotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
MmERALOGY AND GEOLOGY,
Examiner: T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S.
1. Explain briefly the scale of hardness, and give the
hardness of albite, of epidote, and of galena on the scale of
Mohs.
2. By what chemical and physical characters would you
distinguish fluor-spar from apatite ?
3. Give the mineralogical characters and composition of
the constituent minerals of syenite.
4. Describe the four most important ores of iron.
5. Describe the sulphuretted ores of copper, and their
composition. ,
6. Name the mineral species corresponding to t\iG fol-
lowing characters:
(a) Vitreous lustre; hardness 7, gravity 3.35, color
pale green; monoclinic.
(6) Vitreous lustre; hardness 4, gravity 3.16, color
yellow; monometric.
(c) Metallic lustre; hardness 3, gravity 11.10, '^olor
white; monometric.
7. Muiilion some of the characteristic genera of the ani-
mals in the Devonian period.
f^n^ I I'l
8. By what marks may deep-water deposits be distin-
guished from those of shallow seas ?
9. Give the sub-divisions of the tertiary system in
Europe, and Lyell's names for them.
10. Explain what is meant by unconformable stratification.
11. Mention the prominent facts in the history of fossil
fishes.
12. Describe common and magnesian limestones, and give
some of the peculiar characters of the latter.
'*!»
4
i
'i ■
rfll
■"■■■ ;Vik#
'ull
Uni\^tvniip of ^otonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAK.
GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
HONORS.
Examiner : T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S.
1. Explain what is meant by hemlhedrism, and illustrate
it by monometric and hexagonal forms.
2. Describe the cleavages of calcite, and those of chlorite,
and show how they are in both cases related to the hexagonal
prism. °
3. What are the chemical and mineraloglcal differences
between hornblende and pyroxene ?
4. What are the principal silicious minerals found in
granitic veins ?
5. Describe the miner«.logical differences of arragonite and
calcite. and give other examples of dimorphism.
6. in what form Ho/iS does coal occur, and what are the
conditions of its production ?
7. What are the principal genera of crustaceans and bra-
chiopods in the Lower Silurian rocks ?
8. What are most remarkable geological and mineralo-
gical characters of the Salt-bearing rocks.
9. What are the differences between granite, trachyte, and
and gneiss, and vrhat their geological relations ?
10. State the principal phenomena presented by volcanic
mountains.
*■■■
il
'm
.»-.ii
■■
1 '' .«
1
•
H
HilHHH
flfflKlffll^^^l^H
■■
l^ffl^^^^B
^M^^^H
H
m':
■1
Winl\)ttuits of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
■ ■ ! ♦
Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray.
WAYLAND AND LOCKE.
1. a. In what two senses may the term law be employed?
b. In which of these is it employed in ethics ?
2. How would you prove that our notion of the moral
quality of actions is derived neither {a) from an act of judg-
ment, nor {h) from association, nor ic) from the idea of the
greatest amount of happiness ?
3. What answer would you give to the arguments against
the existence of a moral faculty, founded on the difference
in the moral judgment of the diiferent nations?
4. a. What is meant by self-love^ and what is the rank
which it holds in relation to passion on the one hand
and to conscience oh the other ?
5. a. What are the two general divisions under which
the duties to man are arranged by Wayland ?
h. What are the main classes into which these gene-
ral divisions are subdivided ?
6. In what sense is the word idea used by Locke ?
7. a. From what two sources does Locke derive all our
ideas ?
^ *a
h. Which of these does he regard as the source of our
first ideas ?
8. a. What does Locke mean by a simple, what by a com-
plex idea ?
b. Mention some of the simple ideas which he derives
in the first place from each of the sources separately,
and in the second from both conjointly.
9. How does Locke explain the origin of our ideas (a) of
space and [b) of time ?
10. State and criticise Locke's account of what constitutes
personal identity ?
m
K '
;,' w^
^'M
11
I p- p^ ,,. .
:\j
fXh !
*.*
KisVivW
*^:i
M
mil
•^* "J^
^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
/.^
1.0
I.I
1.25
■ so "^^
'^ US.
1.4
2.5
2.2
20
1.8
1.6
^
V]
^;.
"s
y^
'/
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716)872-4503
Winmvm^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
MURRAINS LOGIC.
Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray.
a. Explain the fi7e predicables.
a? w"»
l>-''^
3.
4.
b.
a.
h.
c.
a.
h.
c.
a.
h.
Illustrate the five predicables, by giving an exam-
ple of each as a predicate to the subject hone.
What is meant by the quantity, what by the
quality of a proposition ?
Hov^ many species of propositions are there,
divided according to both quantity and quality?
By what symbols are these species severally
denoted ?
What is meant by the conversion of a proposition?
Explain the three modes of conversion.
Convert the following propositions, and state by
which of the three modes each is converted.
All negative propositions distribute to the pre-
dicate.
No aflSrmative propositions distribute the pre-
dicate.
Some propositions are true.
Some propositions are not true.
What is the difference between the opposition of
contradictories and that of contraries P
Of A, E, I, 0, state which are contraries, which
coatradigtories ?
5. a. What constitutes the figure of a syllogism ?
b. How many figures are there, and by what are
they distinguished from each other ?
6. Why are (a) only negative conclusions possible in the
second figure, (6) only particular conclusions in the third ?
7. In hypothetical syllogisms what are the two legitimate,
what the two illegitimate modes of drawing a conclusion ?
8. State to which of the figures Cameatres, Featino.
dmmi8, Bramantip belong, and explain the meaning of
their symbolic letters. °
9. Throw into Felapton the following argument, and
reduce it to its corresponding mood of the first figure •
"Some animals have not the power of locomotion, for
sponges are animals."
10. Name and point out the fallacy of the following
arguments : °
a. Whatever is universally believed is true.
The existence of God is not universally believed •
Therefore it is not true.
b. What one troweth is not eternal and unchangeable;
Truth is what one troweth ;
Therefore truth is not eternal and unchangeable.
, ' !
,'■<*.))
1 5^
. »
. ~ ' ti
'
'"A
-ftpt^j^plfl
«»•';
''-4
UniMtvnit^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
If
I*
i ;
^■SV'
ft ■
iff .
it
Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray.
1. a. What was the earliest school of philosophy in
Greece ?
h. What is the problem with which the specula-
tions of that school began ?
<?. What is common to all their solutions of that
problem ?
2. a. State the main principle of the Eleatics, and
point out its antagonism to the earliest philosophy
of Greece ?
h. What philosopher of the Eleatic school was cele-
brated for his demonstration of the impossibility
of motion ?
3. a. What are the three parts into which Epicurus
divided philosophy ?
h. Explain the relation J^in which he placed these to
each other.
4. a. Into what two schools is the Academy usually
divided ?
h. By what character was the later school distin-
guished ?
5. a. What waa the other Platonio school, which arose
in Alexajidria ?
b. What were the general tendency of its specula-
tions, and the influences by which that tendency
was determined ?
6. What is the difference between Cartesian doubt and
scepticism ?
7. What is the fact which, according to Descartes, must
be accepted in doubting every other ?
8. What is the sense in which Descartes uses cogitatio
[pensee, thought) ?
9. a. On what ground does Descartes deem it necessary
to prove the existence of God in order to the
possibility of being certain with regard to any-
thing else ?
h. State explicitly any of his arguments for the
existence of God.
10. a. What does Descartes regard as constituting the
essence of mind and that of matter respectively ?
h. On what does he found his belief iu the existence
of material things ?
■■-'■^
M
^nii^tvnitti of ^otonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
LOGIC.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
.rtz
1 1
Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray.
1. What is meant by the extension, what by the intension
of a conception ; and what is the law of their relation ?
2. What are the two logical processes by which the exten-
sion and intension of a conception are severally resolved ?
3. Into what classes are judgments divided (a) as to quan-
tity, (b) as to quality, (c) as to relation ?
4. a. What are the six classes of judgments recognised
by Thompson ?
In what respects does this classification of judg-
ments differ from that of the older logicians ?
What are the two judgments recognised by Ham-
ilton in addition to those of Thomson ?
On what grounds does Thomson reject these two
additional judgments?
6. Explain the judgment, man is mortal, according to its
(a) extension, (b) intension and (c) denomination.
6. On what ground is the fourth figure of the Byllogism
rejected by Thomson, as only an indirect mode of the first ?
h.
c.
d.
• is-'
,*r-l
jillit*;;
E,
Translate
M<
iraaa
fiera
KaKOl
Ipa, 7,
^eada
airoSi
ovpd,
Trepac
hepoL
fievov
fjbvpcd
oe e<Y)
Kara
"JToWt
yap fi
XWov
Biica t
al TTU/
eavTQ.
'/I paf.
mmt^tvuits of Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
GREEK.
THIRD YEAR.
\ Thos. Moss, M.A.
i.'li
Translate :
I.
Mexpi^ fiev vvv 'Pafifivlrov ^aaCkio^ ehac iv Alyvirro)
iraaavevvoiiirjv eXeyov, kuI eWjivieiv AtVyTrro- ue^d'xm*
fiera Se tovtov, ^aaCkevaavra a(f)6(ov Xeoira, 'is^ iraaav
mfcoTTjra iXdaai. KaTa/cXrjtcravTa ydp fiiv irdvra ra
ipa,rrrp(OTa fiev <7(f>ea^ Bvaiiwv ciirep^ar /j^era Se, ipyd-
^ecreatJQjvTa) KeXeveiv irdvTa^ Alyvrrrcov^. rotai fieu Sh
UTToSeSexOai, €k t&v XiOoToixiewv t&v kv too 'Apaj3ico
ovpei, €K rovrewv eXKCiv \idov<i fxexpi rov NeiXov Sia-
TTe^atoidevra^ U top iroTap^hv r-\oioi<n roix} XWov^
eTcpoiai kra^e eKhUeaeai. koX 'irp>^ to AijSvkov KaXev-
fievovopo<i, 7r/jo9 rovro 'dXKeiv. ipryd^ovTO Bk /caret BeKa
fivpiaha^^ avBpcoTTcov aid r^v rpifirjvov kKdarriv. 'Xp6vov
he eryevea0at rpL^ofiivrp rw Xarp, BiKa fih hea rn^ oSov
Kara rrjv cIXkov roixj XlOov?, ttjv eZetfiav epyov ihv ov
TToXXo) rem €Xa<T<7ov rrj^ irvpafxiho^, w? ipioi hoKeeiv (rm
yap fir^Ko^ fj^kv el<TL irkyTe ardScor etfpo^: Bk, Bifca opyviaC-
vfo^ be,Trf v^TfXordr'n iarl avr^ icovrrj^, dKToy opyvial-
A£6/oy re ^ecrroy Kal ^o>wv iyyeyXvfifiivfov) Ta{,Tr) re B^ rh
teKa erea yeveadai, Kal rwv eTrl rov X6cf)ov, eV odiaracn
at TTvpafiiBe^^ rdv inrbyrjv olK^fidrav. r^^ eiroiiero e/]Ka<:
e(ovT(pev vrjam, Suopvxa rov NetXou eaarvarycov. t« B^
''" P^f^^^'' ^^'^V XP^^ov yeveaBuL eeUoai erea TroievfLevr)'
" / ^
ft'.:
^.^j ^^'-
'■.H-'-
T»)<j ean iravraK ) fiirioTrov ^Kaa-rov OKTta rrXiupa, iov(Tr}<;
T€Tpaya)Vov, koI v^lfo<i tcroV \l6ov he. ^earov re Kal apfioa-
fiivov rh fidXia-Ta' ovBtU t&v 'KiOwv Tpi,i]KovTa irohm
iKdaaav.
Herodotus, B. II., c. 124.
1. Give the Attic for the Ionic forms in this extract.
2. Kara BUa fivptdSaf;. Explain this use of kut^, and
give other examples.
3. ^^/aovovS^ to eSei/xav. Translate literally and explain
the construction.
4. w? ifiol hoKeeiv. What is the construction ?
6. (TTuBioi, op^vLoi, TfXkdpa. Explain these measures.
6. jr) v^'kordTT) eVrl avTrj €(0VTrj<i. What is the con-
struction ?
7. Whence did Herodotus ohtain his information relative
to Egypt ? At what time was he there ?
8. What other ancient authorities for its history ?
9. Give instances of the confirmation or correction of the
statements of Herodotus by modern investigations.
10. Point out peculiarities of the dialect of Herodotus, as
regards apostrophe, crasis, the rough breathing, the augment,
and the difference of vowels and consonants.
II.
Translate :
01. Kov fif) crr€pr]6^<i j e? too-ovtov eKTriBoyv
ifiov ^e^<oTO<i. TO) yap av Kol fiel^ovi
Xi^aifjb av rj aol La Tw%i/9 TOiaah' leov ;
c/JLol Trarrjp H'^v HoXv/So? ?V KopivSto?, ^
firjT'np 8e MepoTTTj AwpiV riyofiriV 8'^ dvrjp
daT&v fiiyia-TO^i rS)V eKel, irpiv fioi rvxv
T0ta8' iirkcTT), dav/jidaai fxev d^ia,
CTTTOuS?)? ye fjbivTOL Tf;<? e/u,?)? ovk d^ia.
dvrjp yap iv SeiTTfot? fi virepirXTjadeh fieOr)
KaXei Trap oivto, TrXao-To^ m e'lTjv irarpL
KaycD ^apvvdei<i ti)v fiev ovaav rjfiepav
/xoXt9 Karea-xoV ddrkpa 8' iuiv TreXa?
firjTpo^ irarpof r i'^Xeyyov ol Se 8u<j06pa)9
vovvcioo^ Tiyov tus fiivs.v~i TOP Xoyov.
Sophocles, (Edipus Bexy vv. 771-784.
1. Give a scale of the metro.
2. iXiriBcov. Why in genitive ?
^. T^ ycLp &if Kal fiel^ovi. Explnin. BaTipa. Whatcrasis?
4. oi Bk Bv<T(f)6pm to 'Koyou. What ia the construction ?
r>. Give a list of Greek Tragic authors, introducing dates
where you can.
III.
Translate :
Beivov 8' diia-a^, &><? vcprfynTov Ttfo?,
-TTuXat? SiTrXai? kvr'jkaT' €k Be TrvOfiivcav
€K\ive KOiXa K\j}9paj KufnrUTei aTeyO'
oh Br) KpefiaaTTjV jr)v yvvaiK eaelBofxev,
TrXcKTak ioopai^ efnreTrXeyfievrjv 6 Be
OTTW? opa viv, Beiva ^pvxriGe\<i raXa^,
va\a icpefiaaT7)V apTavrjv. eVet Be yjj^
eKCiTo TXrjfioiv, Belva B" ^v TavBivB' opav.
aTTocnrdfTa^ yap elp^aTOiV ')(pvariXarov<i
Trepova^ air avTrj<i, alaiv e^eareXXeTo,
dpa'i eiraicrev apOpa twv avrov kvkXwv,
avB5)v roLav6\ oOovuck ovk oy^oivTo viv
ovO' 61 eiraa'xev ovff oiroV ehpa kuko,,
aX\' iv a-KOTW to Xolttov ot)<i fiev ovk eBet
oyfroiaff, ov<i expvi^v ov yvcoaolaTo.
ToiavT ecfyvfiv&v 7roXXdKi<i re kov)(^ aira^
r^paaa eiraipoiv ^Xe<l>apa. (boiviac 8' ofiov
yXi)vai yeveC ereyyov, ou8' avieaav
i^ovov ixvB(i>aa<i crarfova^, dXh! ofjLov p,eXa<i
' 6/Jb^po^ yaXaXjui & alfiaTovaa ireyyeTO.
Sophocles, (Edipus Rex, vv. 1260-1279.
1. StTrXat?. What is the meaning? Ilepom?. What?
2. odovveK to yvaxTolaro. Translate literally and explain
the meaning.
3. V. 1279. Give an account of this reading.
4. Give scales of Tragic Trochaics, and Anapsestics.
5. Describe the places set apart in the theatres for the
actors, chorus, and audience, and give their designations in
Greek.
- ".^lllPI
■'d
m
^•^'^^r
k
- ; »
i
'n
' * .
■"-li
,?
g
•■ i
Wk^*-
Wl'.v
- ' ' t
,^K"sr
'-■ *
l^pt,'
:. J
^^sT"
. -,^
.' <t
:4
Transli
Demitt
Quum i
"Si be
NonV;
Aut cil
Molliuf
Interpi
Cognal
Omnes
Confic(
Quod I
Hunc ]
Nee la
Garrul
ISi sapi
Ventui
Praetei
Debeb
"Si me
Aut vi
Et pro
"Tem
mmttvuit^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
JExaminers:
LATIN.
Rev. John McCaul, LL.D.
Thomas Moss, M.A.
I.
Translate :
Demitto auriculas, ut iniquse mentis asellus,
Quum gravius dorso subiit onus. Incipit ille :
" Si bene me novi, non Viscum pluris amicum,
Non Varium facies ; nam quis me scribere plures
Aut citius possit versus ? quis membra movere
Mollius? Invideat quod et llermogenes, ego canto."
Interpellandi locus hie erat : " Est tibi mater,
Cognati, quis te salvo est opus ? "— " Hand mihi quisquam.
Omnes composui."— " Felices ! nunc ego resto.
Confice ; namque instat fatum mihi triste, Sabella
Quod puero cecinit divina mota anus urna :
Hunc neque dira venena nee hosticus auferet ensis
Nee laterum dolor aut tussis nee tarda podagra ;
Garrulus hunc quando consumet cunque ; loquaces,
ISi sapiat, vitet, simul atquo adoleverit aetas."^
Ventum erat ad Vesta), quarta jam parte diei
Prseterita ; et casu tunc respondere vadato
Debebat, quod ni fecisset, perdere litem.
"Si me amas," inquit, "paullum hie ades." "Inteream, si
Aut valeo stare aut novi civilia jura ;
Et propero quo scis.'' "Dubius sum, quid faciam," inquit,
" Tene relinquam, an rem." " Me, sodes."
Horace, Sat I., 9, vv= 2041,
?' I'A
Ml
WMi.wi>^i.^'d
- :. ^
1. Quum gravius dorso suhiit onus. Give the construc-
tion.
2. Membra movere. Give different explanations.
8. Invideat quod, ^c. What is the construction of quodf
4. Quarta jam parte, ^c. What hour of the day?
5. Caau. Give different explanations.
6. Notice any metrical peculiarities in the p'',ssage.
7. Sodes. Whence derived?
8. Distinoruish between agnati and cognati, dolor and
luctus, perdere and amittere, amare and diligere, properare
and festinare.
II.
Translate :
Quis tamen exiguos elegos emiserit auctor,
Grammatici certant et adhuc sub judice lis est.
Archilochum proprio rabies armavit iarabo ;
Hunc socci cepere pedem grandosquo cothurni,
Alternis aptum sermonibus et populares
Vincentein strepitus et natum rebus agcndis.
Musa dedit fidibus dives puerosque Deorum,
Et pugilem victorem et equura certamine primum
Et juvenum curas et libera vina refer-e.
Descriptas servare vices operumque colores
Cur ego si nequeo ignoroque poeta salutor ?
Cur nescire pudens prave quam discere male ?
Versibus exponi tragicis res comica non vult ;
Indignatur item privatis ac props socco
Dignis carminibus narrari cocna ThyestfB.
Singula quaeque locum teneant sortita decenter.
Interdum tamen et vocem comocdia tollit,
Iratusque Chromes tumido delitigat ore ;
Et tragicus plerumque dolot scrmono pedcstri
Telephus <?t Peleus, quum pauper et exsul uterque
Projicit ampullas et sesquipcdalia verba.
Si curat cor spectantis tetigisse querela.
HoRAC3, Ad Pisones, vv. 77-98.
1. Exiguos. Discuss the meaning of this epithet.
2. Auetor. Mention different poets to whom the inven-
tion has been ascribed.
ff
3. Proprio. Give different explanations.
4. Socci — cothurni. '\ what do they respectively
refer ?
5. Populares vincentem strepitus. Explain.
6. N'atum rebus. Cite other instances of the use of
natus in this sense.
7. Nequeo ignoroque. Give the force of each.
8. Ccena Thyestse. To what particular play has this
been supposed to refer ?
9. Sesquipedalia. Give the derivation.
10. Distinguish between Greek satyra and Roman satira.
III.
Translate :
^ Veiis interim non animi tantum in dies sed etiam
vires crescebant nee Romanis eo convenientibus ex
agris, qui aut proelio adverse aut clade captse urbis
palati fuerant, sed etiam ex Latio voluntariis confluen-
tibus, ut in parte prsedae essent. Maturum jam videbatur
repeti patriam eripique ex hostium manibus, sed corpori
valido caput deerat. Locus ipse admonebat Camilli, et
magna pars militum erat qui ductu auspicioque ejus res
prospere gesserant: et Caedicius negare se commissurum,
cur sibi aut deorum aut hominum quisquam imperium
finiret potius, quam ipse memor ordinis sui posceret
imperatorem. Consensu omnium placui. ab Ardea
Camillum acciri, sed antea consulto senatu qui Romse
esset: adeo regebat omnia pudor, discriminaque rerum
prope perditis rebus servabant. Ingenti periculo trans-
eundum per hostium custodias erat : ad earn rem Pontius
Cominius impiger juvenis operam pollicitus incubans
cortici secundo Tiberi ad urbem defertur : inde, qua
proximum fuit a ripa, per proeruptum eoque neglectum
hostium custodijB saxum in Capitolium evadit, et ad
magistratus ductus mandata exercitus edit.
LiVY, v., ch. 46.
1. Give (ierivations of maturus, auspicium, polliceor, and
secundus.
2. M Cadicius negare se, ^c. Turn this into direct
narration.
iti-
t.
W^'-*^!'}!'
.1
"V? i,'* vV*
3. Senatus. Trace the changes in the constitution of
the Senate
4. Consultum. What was the difference between aenatus
eonsultum and decretum plebis ?
5. Pontius Cominius. Why do sc \e editors read Cominus?
6. Explain the Roman system of naming. How was the
circumstance of adoption denoted ?
7. What defects have been attributed to Livy as a his-
torian ?
8. What is meant by Patavinitas ?
mni\)tvuitp of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
THIRD YEAR.
GREEK.
HONORS.
Examiners: l^^^' ^^"^ McGaul, LL.D.
/Thomas Moss, M.A.
S«r
■ V •'k'
f- ' ... :
I.
XO. CTevco a-€ Td<; ovXofiivaf Tvxa^, Upofirjeev. arp. a-
SmpvaiaraKTov avr oaawv pahivS)v[h' ei^ofieva] peo^ irapeikv
vorioL<i erey^a irayah-
aixeyapra yap rdSe. Zeu? 8' l8ioi<: vofioi^ Kparvvtov
vireprjijiavov deol^ rot? irdpo^ ipBeUvvaiv atx/Jidv.
irpoiraaa 8' ijSTj arovoev XeXa/ce x^pf^i ^vt. a.
fieyaXoa-xwovd r dpxaioTrpem) [SaKpyKxieq (xrevovaa
Tav aav
^ ^wofiaifiovwv re rifiav,
OTToaoi T eiroiKov dyva^ "Kala^ eSo? ve/LLOVTai,
fieyaXoaruvcia-c a-ol<: irruxaa-t a-vyKufivova-t OvaroL
iEscHYLUS, Prometheus Vinctus, vv. 405-421.
1. Give the different readings and translate accordingly.
2. Arrange this strophe and antistrophe, so that all the
verses except the last, shall be dimeters, and scan according
to both arrangements. What readings and arrangement
ao you prefer, and why ? fa « »<
3. Give scales of Glyconics Antispastic and Choriambic.
iichi^rh''^ ^^^ meaning oi scazon, meiurus, anaolomenus,
i:
'':i\
^-'.•'•ffi»Hify»
-. ' .. . ^ i'
it
1'?"^
iiw.%-
1^
6. How many actors wore employed in the performance
of this Tragedy ? Explain your answer.
<>. Give an account of tho duties of the choraguSy the
author, and tho judges in dramatic contests.
II.
Translate :
'jre/nTrTr} 8' air ainov yevva irevrrjKomaTrai'i
TTuXiv Trpo<i "Apyofj ov^ eKovtr eXevaeraL
OijXvairopo'i, (j)evyov(Ta avyyeinj ydfiov
ave\ln6}V' ol 8' eirTOtjfievoi <f>peva^,
KipKoi Trekeiow ov ixaKpav XeXeifjLfMevoi,
i'l^ovai OijpcvaoVTe^; cv drjpaa'iixov^
rydfjbov<;, ^Oovov he crcofxaTOiv e^ei 0eo'i'
lleXaajia Be Be^erai, drjXvKTovM
"Apet BafievTMV vvKTi^povm]r(p Opdaei'
ryvin] yap civhp eKacTTOV atMvo<i arepet,
BWqKTOP ev atpayalat ^dylraaa ^i(f)0^.
ToidS" eV ex^^povii TOV<i e/Aou? e\9oi KuTrpt?.
fxiau Be iraiBwv Yfiepof: OeX^ei to //.j;
Krelvai ^vvevvov, dX}C dtrajx^XwO^cTeraL
yv(t)/xT]v' Bvolv Be Odrepop jiovXtjo-eTaty
kXv€IV dvdXKi<i fidXXov i) fitai(f)6vo^'
avrrj Kar "A/070? ^aatXiKov re^et yevo<i- —
jxaKpov Xoyov Bti tuvt etre^eXQelv ropm' —
a7ropd<i ye firjv e/c jijaBe ^vaerai 0pa(TV<i,
ro^ouTi KXeivb^, 09 irovwv eK twi/S' e'/te
\i;cret. ToiovBe ^(pTjafMov 1) iTdXaiy€vi]<t
/x^TTjp ifiol BtrjXde TnavU ©e'/xt?'
OTToi'i Be %w7r7;, ravra Bel /xaKpov Xuyov
elirelv, av r ovBev iKfxaOovaa KepBaveU.
iEscuYLUS, PromctJieiisVinctus, vv. 872-81*7.
1. Trifxirrr) yevva. Explain.
2. 6t]Xvkt6vm to dpdaet. Give different readings ami
translate accordingly.
3. ^iav. Give the name, and cite the illustrative passages
from Horace and Ovid.
4. KXveiv. In what sense ? Give similar examples in
Latin and English.
5. <nropd<: e« rrja-Be. Trace this genealogy.
6. Explain the principles of the Porsonian canons relative
to the third, fourth and fifth feet.
- 1 ' n?i
.. III.
Translate :
To fih fjirj ayavaKTCip, & dv^pe'i ^AOrjvaiot, iirt rovrtfi
TW yeyovoTiy on fiov KaTeylrr]<f)i(Taa6€, dWa re fioi iroWa
^vfi^dWerai, koI ovk dveXTriarov /xoi yiyove to yeyovot
rovTO, dWcL TToXu fidWov Oavfid^oi) eKarepwv TOiV y^iq^cov
lov yeyovoTa dpidfiov. ov yap atfnjv e^wye ovTOi Trap
oKiyov eaeaOaii dWd irapd ttoXv. vvu Be, to? eoiKev, el
rpel<i fiovai ixereTreaov twv ylrijcjicov, diro'Tre^evyri dv. Me-
Xt/toi/ ixev oTiv, tu? ifiol Sokm, kuI vvv uTroTre^evya. Koi
ov fiouov aTTOTre^evya, dXKd iravrl ^yXov rovro ye, on
ei /MT} dve^T} "Ai/uto? koI Avkmv KaTijyop^o-cvre^ ifiov, Kdv
S)^\e ^tX^a? hpa^d^, ov p^eraka^oiv to ire^iirrov fJLepo<i
Plato, Apolof/y, xxv.
1. Write notes on to fir) dyavamelv, eKarepuiv tmv y^r'jt^oiVy
trap oKiyov, rpeh fiovai fiereTreaov, dTTOTre^evyr], and Kav toc^Xe
to -y^ri^wv.
2. Explain the meaning of the judicial terms : nvaKpiai<i,
vTrwfioa-la, irapaKUTa^oXr], eirw/SeXia, dywud dTi/jLi]Toi, diraai
Tifiav fiaKpav.
3. Give a brief account of the Sophists, introducing names
and dates.
4. "What were the peculiarities of the Socratic philosophy,
as compared with the teachings of his predecessors ?
■i
lijiiiBilihifei
.^
^^■l III
' ■ ^m
1 • ' H
IV.
Translate :
212. XKoirei rocvvv, w X(t)KpaT€<;, <f)aZev dv tcro)? oi
vofMoi, ei r)fiei<i tuvtu d\r}6rj Xeyofjuev, on, ov BUaia rjfid^
eTTLx^ipel'i Bpdv a vvv eTrixetpeU' rjfiek yap ae. yevvi]-
(Tavre^, eKQpe^avTe'^^ TraiBevaavre'!:, fieTaB6vT€<i dirdvrwv
Q)V oloi T Tjixev KoXSiV crol Tol<i dWoi<i irdat TroXiTat?,
o/AW? wpoayopevofxev tm i^ovalav ireTvoiy^Kevai AdTjvaicov
no fiovXofievcp, iiretBdv BoKifxaa-dfj koX iBrj rd ev rf} iroXei
'rrpdyp.ara koX 7)fid<i T0v<i vo/xovi, m dv firj upeaKWfiev
rjfiei^, i^eivai, Xa^ovra Ta avrov dvievat otroi dv ^ov-
Xr]rai. koX ovheh rjfiwv rwv vofjLwv ifiTroB^v eanv ovB'
dirayopeveL, edv re n<i ^ovXrjTai vfiMv ek diroiKiav
UvoA, el f.ir] dpia-icoLfiev 'qp.eh re Kol rj ttoXi'?, eav re
fxeroiKeiv dXXoae rroi eXdJav, Uvai eKeiae, ottoi dv ^ovXtj-
rai, e^ovra rd avrov. o? 8' dv vfi&v TrapafMelvrj, 6p<av
ov rpoTTOV rjfieh rd<i rs 8tAca9 BiKu^ofiev Koi rdXXa rr]v
• -U
i,ii
. i^
■j"«^4*- ^i- 1-
!• ■ ',1 ♦
iV>*. .
yoXt^'^ SiotKovfxev, ijSr} (f)afi€U tovtov wfioXoyrjKevai epym
rifuv a av rjfiel^i KeXevcofxev Tronfjaeiv tuvtu, koL rhu
fiV Treidofievov rfjixfi (pa/xiv dSiKelv, ort re jevv7]Tai^
qZ(tiv f]iilv ov 'jre'idcrai, koI otl jpo^evat, kuI on 6/jlo-
\o<yrjaa<i 7) fxf)v ireiOeadai ome neiOet rjfia^, el fif) /caXw?
TiTTOtov/xev, 7rpoTi6evTa)vri/j.MV, Kol ouK dypico^i eirtjar-
TovTwv TTOielv o, uv KeXevcoficv, dXXa iipievTwv Sueiv
Odrepa, rj TreiOeiv Vf^d'i, rj iroielv, roinwv ovSerepa irnm,
Plato, Crito^ xiii.
1. What peculiarities in the Attic use of augments ?
2. What are the rules for the place of the augment in
compound verbs ?
3. What peculiarities in the Attic use of reduplication ?
4. Explain the use of koX By Kal, ov ya»> aXXa, Kaiirep,
KULTOi, dfieXei, ryviKU.
5. Give an account of BoKiixaaia ek avhpa^.
6. State briefly what you know of Athenian colonies.
mni\)tvult» of ^otonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G1.
THIRD YEAR.
LATIN.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners • i ^^^- ^^^^ McCaul, LL.D.
I.
Translate :
Nominatse jam antea consulibus provincise erant, turn
sortiri jussi : Cornelio Hispania, Sempronio Africa cum
Sicilia ovenit. Sex in eum annum decretse legiones et
socium quantum ipsis videretur, et classis quanta parari
posset. Quatuor et viginti peditum Romanorum millia
sunt scripta et mille octingenti equites, sociorum qua-
draginta millia peditum, quatuor millia et quadringenti
equites : naves ducentse, viginti quinqueremes, celoces
viginti deductse. Latum inde ad populum, vellent
juberent populo Carthaginiensi bellum indici : ejusque
belli causa supplicatio per urbem habita atque adorati
dii, ut bene ac feliciter eveniret quod bellum populua
Romanus jussisset. Inter consules ita copiae divisae :
Sempronio datae legiones duse — ea quaterna millia erant
peditum et treceni equites — et sociorum sedecim millia
peditum, equites mille octiugenti, naves longse centum
sexaginta, celoces duodecim : cum his terrestribus ma-
H ritimisque copiis Tib. Sempronius missus in Siciliam,
ita in Africam transmissurus, si ad arcendum Italia Pae-
num consul alter satis esset : Cornelio minus copiarum
datum, quia L. Manlius praetor et i" cum haud inva-
■: '^m
4' .
p5 " --• ' -' ''■ {.'
<h
^■'.*
V ' ' ", ■
lido prcesidio in Galliam mittebatur: navium maxime
Cornelio numcrus deminutus : sexagintia quinqucremes
datac — ncquo enira mari vcnturum ant ca parte belli
dimicaturum hostem crcdebant — et dune Romana) le-
giones cum suo justo equitatu et quatuordecltn millibus
bociorum pcditum, equitibus millo sexcentis. Duas
Icgiones Romanas ct decern millia sociorum peditum,
mille equitcs socios, sexcentos Romanes Gallia pro-
vincia oodcm versa in Punicum bcllum habuit.
LiVY, B. xxi., c. 17.
1. Provinicce. What was the first Roman province?
Into what two classes were the provinces divided under the
emperors ? Describe the form of government of each.
2. Socium. What general class of 'nouns of the second
declension take this form of the genitive plural ?
3. Ipsis. Explain.
4. Socii. Explain the phrase socii 7iomen Latinum.
5. Supplicato. For what two different reasons might one
be decreed ?
6. Praetor. Explain the distinction between proetor and
proprcetor ? When there were two praetors, what were they
respectively designated ?
7. Ju%to equitatu. Explain.
8. Duas legiones: Jiahuit. Give different interpre-
tations.
9. Expand the numerals : IC, IqC, CIq, Iqq. What is
the rule for the case of the objects specified, where smaller
numbers follow millia ?
Km
II.
Translate :
Romam tantus terror ex hac clade perlatus est, ut
jam ad urbera Romanam crederent infestis signis hos-
tem venturum, nee quicquam spei aut auxilii esse, qua
portis moenibusque vim arcerent : uno consule ad Tici-
num victo, altero ex Sicilia revocato duobus consulibus
duobus Gonsularibu.s exercitibus victia — nuos alios duces,
quas alias legiones esse quae arcessantur ? ita territis
Sempronius consul advenit, ingenti periculo per eflfusos
passim ad praedandum hostium equites, audacia ma-
gia quam consilio aut spc fallondi rcsistcmlive, si non
fallcret, trangressus. Iil quod unum maxinio in praj-
sentia desidcrabatur, comitiis consularibus habitia in
hibcrna rcdiit: crcati consulcs Cn. Servilius ct. C.
Flaminius.
Caeterum no hibcrna quidcm Romanis quieta crant,
vagantibus passim Numidis cquitlbus ct, quicquo iis im-
pcditiora crant, Celtibcris Lusitanisquc : omnes igitur
undiquo clausi eommcatus crant nisi quoa Pado naves
subveherent. Emporium propo Placentium fuit et
opere magno munitum ct valido firmatuiri pr;x!sidio :
ejus castelli cxpugnandi spc cum cquitibus ac lovi
armatura profectus Hannibal, quum plurimum in ce-
lando inccpto ad effcctum spei liabuissct, nocto adortus
non fcfellit vigiles : tantus repente clamor est sublatus
ut Placcntioc quoquc audiretur : itaquc sub lucom cum
equitatu consul adcrat jussis quadrato agmine legio-
nibus scqui.
LiVY, B. xxi., c. 57.
1. Give the derivations of: clades, -infestus^ siffnum,
passim, fallo, comitia, commeatus, vigil, sequor.
2. Write notes upon : infestis signis — qui a portis — uno
consule — Ticinum — com itiis consularibus — quxque iia —
quadrato agmine — Placentia.
m
> ■
=- 1
.1!
, r.i
■ ^1
III.
1. From whom did Livy borrow most of his account of the
passage of the Alps ?
2. Who composed the so-called supplements to the books
of Livy ? Characterise them.
3. Who was the first Roman historian ? In what language
did he write ? IIow is he connected Avith the subject of the
21st book of Livy ?
IV.
Translate :
Postremo, promptis jam et aliis seditionis ministris,
velut contionabundus interrogabat :
Cur paucis centurionibus,, paucioribus tribunis, in
modum servorum obedirent ? quando ausnros exnoscere
remedia, nisi novum et nutantem adhuc principem pre-
cibus vel armis adirent V satis per tot annos ignavia
peccatum, quod tricena aut quadragena stipendia senes,
^1
1
1 vl
.^i ■ )-i'
ct I truncato ex vulnoribua cornoro, tolerent :
^% diuiissi quidem finern <?8so rnilitino, sea apnd vexillura
r^tontos alio V'ouabulo cosdein iabovcs pcrferre. Ac si
quia tot casus vita yupcraveiit, tra'a adhuo divorsas in
tprrns, ubi per iiomcn agrorum uligincs paludum vol
iuculta montium m 'ipiant. Enimvero inilitiam ipsam
Ifravetn, infructuosaiii ; dcnin in diem assibus aniinain
i4 co)p'J3 tv^dtimari : liinc vest, n, arum, tcntoria, hinc
sajvitiaij ccnturionum et vacationes inuncruni redirai.
At herculo verbera et vulncra, duram hiemcm, exercitag
it'statcs, belliim atrox aut stcrilcm paccni scmpiterna ;
ncc aliud Icvamcntuiii quam si ccrtis sub logibus militia
inirctur, ut singulos dcuarios mercrcnt, sextns decumus
stipendii annus fincm aflferret ; no ultra sub vcxillis
tcnerentur, scd iisdcm in castris premium pccunia sol-
veretur. An prretorias coliortos, quaj binos denarioa
acceperint, qua) post sedccim annos pcnatibus suis rcd-
dantur, plus pcriculoruni suscipere ? Non obtrcctari a
86 urbanas oxcubias: sibi tamcn apud horridas gentese
contuberniis hostcm aspici.
Taoitus, Annahy B. I., c. 17.
1. Write brief notes upon : 2^^omptia Jam et aim —
ausuros — stipendla — alio vocabulo — singulos denarios —
prsetorias cohortes— contuberniis.
V.
1. What works of Tacitus have been preserved to modern
times ?
2. Who first gave the name of " annals" to that from
which the preceding passages arc selected ? Discuss the
appropriateness of the term.
3. Give the names of other authorities for the history of
the early emperors with particulars of each.
4. Mention peculiarities of Tacitus in the syntax offinoi,
potiri, adipisci, and praeaidere.
5. Give peculiar modes adopted by him of writing : quo-
tidie, epi -ola, soevum, toties, decimus, transmittere, and
inclitus.
r^Mf;
. 31
Pi]
(nnfbetofti; of rototito*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS . 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
GREEK AND LATIN.
HONORS.
4'
« _ . f Rev. John McCaul, LL.D.
■^^^'^^^^^^-tTiioMAsMoss, M.A.
.' *
pi
I.
XO. o<TTt9 Tov rrXeovo^ fiipovt
XPV^^^ T^oO /xerpiov irapeU
fcoetv, (TKaioavvav ^vKaaarwv
iv €/xol Kardhrfko^ ecrrai.
eirel ttoWo, fxev al /xaKpal
afxepai KariOevro Br)
XuTra? eyyvTepo), ra rip-
irovra 8' ovk av thov^ ottov,
orav ri<; i<i ifKeov rrrear)
TOV 6ekovTo<i' 6 8' eirlKovpo^ laoTeXearo'i,
"AtSo? oTe Mot/j' dvvfiivaio'i
a\v/309 a-)(ppo^ dva'7recl>7}V6,
0avaTO<s e? reXevTav.
Sophocles, (Edip. Colon., vv. 1211-1223.
1. Mark the quantity of each syllable, scan, and give
the metrical name of each verse.
2. Notice different readings, and translate accordingly.
3. Explain the construction of tov fieTpiov irapeh ^(oetVf
anc^ « TjrXeov Tricrrj tov deXovTO^,
.;
■,r\
' n
:;,iJ^^^^^B
^ J__
■ 1- ' *t- ., ■' ^, ,'
j'"*^^^^^B
mii
■■■H^
'i- ''flH^B
1'
s - -
'si^^^H
4. What are the arrangements denominated EpodicA,
Meaodica, Proodiea, Periodica, Palinodiea^ koto, TrepiKoirr^v
avofjboio/xeprj, and d-rroKeXvfj^iva ?
6. Give examples of words differing in quantity in the
Epic and the Attic writers.
6. What are the metres called JEolic, Logaoedic, P'-osodiac,
and Anacreontic ?
li^iiii.
II.
Translate :
AN. alai, ecTLV ecri vwv Bfj
ov TO fXev, dXko Be firji Trarpof; efi^vrov
aXacrrov al^a Bvar/Jiopoiv arevd^eiv,
(Ltlvl tov itoKvv
aXkore jxev ttovov efiireBov elypiiev,
ev Trvfidro) 8' d\6yLara nrapoiaofiev
ihovre kol TraOovaa.
XO. Tt 8' €(TTiv ; An. ecxTiv fiev eiKaaaL, (ptXoi,
XO- l3i^r)Kev;
AN. CO? fidXicT av el irodm \d^oi<i>
Tt 'fdp, OT(p fir)T "Apr)';
firjTe ir6vT0<i dvreKvpaev^
ddKOTTOi he ifkdKe^ efjbap>^av
ev d^aveZ tivl fiopw ^epofievov.
rdXatva' vwv 8' oKedpia
vii^ eV ofji/jLacriv ^i^uKe.
TTw? fydp r/ riv diriav ydv
7} TTOVTiov kXvScov d\u}fievai l^lov
BvaoiaTOV e^o/xev rpoijydv :
l2. ou KdroiBa. Kara [xe ^ovio^s
'AtiSa9 e\oL Trarpl
rdXatvaV 009 efMoiy 6 fiiWwv /3to9 ov ^i(OTO<i.
XO. CO BiBvfJia reKvcov dpicrra,
TO <f)epov eK Oeov koKw^
in}Bev dyav (fyXiyeaOuV ov tol Kard/jbeTrr e^tjTov,
AN. 7r66o<? KOL KttKWV dp* rjv Tt<i.
Kol yap b firjBafid Brj to (piXov, (jjiXoW
oTTOTe 76 Kot rov ev %e/30ty Ka7el')(pv.
<o Trdrep, w ^iaov,
w Toy del Kara yd<i (tkotov elfJieuo<i'
ovB^ yap (OV d(j)l\r]ro<; ifiot irore
Kal raBe fir) Kvpri<Trj<i.
Sophocles, (Edip, Colon., vv. 1670-1703.
- ■■^'■m*i?-^
1. pistinguish Oolonus Hippius and Colonus AgoraeuSy
and give an account of each.
2. Write notes on Ihovre koI iradovaai eanv /xev iiKcicrai,
0)9 jiakKTT dv elf aniav ydv, e^rjTOV.
3. Distinguish d7rd\oyela9ac and aTroXoyi^earOat,, dpn and
aoTimi arifiovTai and ari/j,d^€Tai, 'ivhov and ecrci), ipcoTr]at<;,
irev(Ti<;, and dvdKpicn<i, Kaipo<i and ■^^povo'i, oXlyov and iiticpbv.
4. Give examples of Synseresis and Sijnaloeplie, dis-
tinguishing crasis, eethlipsiSf and aphecresis. Wiiat reasons
for believing that there is no essential difference between
gynseresi^ and synaloaphe ? On what grounds has the rule
of Person and Dawes relative to the subscription and
omission of the iota in certain cases been impugned ?
5. State briefly what you know of any dramas that
were represented before the time of iEschylus, introdu-
cing names and dates where you can.
6. Explain the meaning of inOovyia, avrocr'xeBida-fiaTa,
hucdhov, (TTaaifiov, i/xfJieXtia, CKorKeva, and vTroKoXiria.
III.
Translate ?
Ph. Itane patris ais conspectum veritum hinc abi-
isse ? Ge. Admodum.
Ph. Phanium relictara solam ? Ge. Sic. Ph. Et
iratum senem ?
Ge. Oppido. Pn. Ad to summa solum, Phormio,
rerum redit.
Tute hoc intristi: tibi omne est exe^endum. Ac-
cingere.
Ge. Obsecro te. Ph. Si rogabit. Ge. In te spes est.
Ph. Eccere ;
quid si reddet ? Ge. Tuimpulisti. Ph. Sic opinor.
Ge. Subveni.
Ph. Cede senem: jam instructa. sunt mihi corde
consilia omnia.
Ge. Quid ages? Ph. Quid vis? nisi uti maneat
Phanium : atque ex crimine hoc
Antiphonem eripiam: atque in me omnem iram de-
rivem senia ?
Ge. vir fortis atque amicus. Verum hoc saepe,
Phormio,
nique. Ph. Ah,
i'.*
pf
liOn ita est : factum e8t periclum, jam fpedum vi-
sast via.
Quot me censes homines iam deverberasse usque ad
necem,
hospites, tum cives ? quo magis novi, tanto sae
pius.
Cedodum, en unquam injuriarum audisti mihi scrip
tam dicam ?
Ge. Qui istun ? Ph. Quia non rete accipitri tendi
tur neque miluo,
qui male faciunt nobis: illis qui nil faciunt, ten
ditur :
quia enim in illis fructus est, in istis opera lu
ditur.
Aliis aliunde est periclum, unde aliquid abradi po
test;
mihi sciunt nil esse. Dices, ducent damnatum do
mum.
Terence, Phormio, Act II., Scene 2.
If.
••'•
m ■
'1
1. Write brief notes upon the following words and
phrases: Admodum ; summa rerum ; intristi; eccere; si
reddet ; iram derivem ; nervum ; scriptam dicam ; ducent
damnatum domum; cedodum.
IV.
Translate':
•
An. Quid hie coeptat, aut quo evadet hodie? Ge.
An legibus
daturum poenas dices, si illam ejecerit ?
Iam id exploratumst. Heja, sudabis satis,
si cum illo inceptas homine : ea eloquentia est.
Verum pono esse victum cum : at tandem tamen
non capitis ejus res agitur, sed pecuniae.
Postquam hominem his verbis sentio mollirier ;
soli sumus nunc hie, inquam ; eho, quid vis dari
tibi in manura, ut herus his desistat litibus :
haec hinc facessat, tu molostus ne sies.
An. Satin illi di sunt propitii ? Ge. Nam sat scio,
si tu aliquam partem aequi bonique dixeris,
ut est ille bonus vir, tria non comrautabitis
verba hodie inter vos. De. Quis te istaec jussit
loqui ?
Oh. Immo non potuit melius pervenirier
eo quo no3 volumus. An. Occidi. Ch. Perge eloqui.
GrE. A primo homo insanibat. t)E. Cedo, quid po-
stulat ?
Ge. Quid ? nimium. Ch. Quantum libuit, die. Ge.
Siquis daret
talentum magnum. De. Immo malum hercle : ut nil
pudet !
Terence, PhormiOj Act IV., Scene 3.
1. Heja. Whence derived?
2. Verum pono. What other readii^g ?
3. Talentum. Why called magnum ? Give ita sub-
divisions.
4. Explain : fl Plaudite ; Calliopius recensui.
5. Mention the principal varieties of Trochaic verse used
by Terence.
6. What do you consider the true explanation of the
so-called eomio licenses in the Terentian metres ?
7. State any reason for supposing that the Phormio was
familiar to the Roman public before it was placed on the
stage by Terence.
8. Explain fdbulse prcetextatse, togatse, planipedes and
Atellana.
9. Translate and explain : Modos fecit tibizs paribus
dextris et sinistris. What were the tibise dextroi and tibise
sinistra^ also called ?
10. What Avriters of the New Comedy does Terence prin-
cipally imitate ? Give instances.
11. Compare and contrast the styles of Plautus and
Terence.
■ * %4
I .
'H\H
■ ' t rijlft-iiir'ftiv 1^
ii
1 1 ff -^Ip
1
ai;4is.i/.;,.[;:|,s
Unii^tvmn of Sovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4.
THIRD YEAR
HYDROSTATICS AiNl) OPTICS,
Examiner: Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
, Sft i.'" -*ij
1. Define a fluid and shew from your definition that the
pressure of a fluid upon a rigid surface in contact with it is
entirely normal to the surface. What is meant by the pressure
at a point in a fluid ? How is it measured ?
2. Define specific gravity, and explain the meaning of the
symbols in the equation IF^SF. What is the unit of weight
implied in this equation ?
Find the weight of a cubical block of iron whose edge is
10 inches, having given the specific gravity of iron 7.844, and
the weight of a cubic foot of water 1000 ounces.
3. Investigate an expression for the total normal pr< ssure on
a plane surface immersed in a fluid.
A rectangle immersed in a fluid, with one side in tiie surface,
is divided by horizontal lines into 7i such parts that the pressures
upon them are all equal ; shew that the breadth of the r^^ i^
to that of the (r+l)tb part as ^JZ. yj'r-l is to y/V-yi—^r .
4. State Boyle's law regarding the pressure of an elastic
fluid, and describe an experiment by which it is verified.
A cylinder is placed with its axis horizontal, and a
closely fitting piston is in equilibrium at a distance a from the
bottom of the cylinder. A certain force will pull it out through
a distance i; find how far the same force acting the other way
would push it in.
5. Describe and explain the working of Smealon's air-pump.
Shew that if A, B be the respective volumes of the
receiver and of the cylinder, and h the height of the latter, the
- (
listance
/>
}.
valve, supposerl weightless, will open during the (n-|-l)t'»
stroke, when the piston has nscencied through u di
{'-(if^)"
6. Upon what property of bodies docs the principle of the
thermometer depend ? Describe how Fahrenheit's thermome-
ter is filled and graduated.
If F, C, R indicate the same temperature on Fahrenheit'tJ,
the centigrade, and Reaumur's thermometers respectively.
shew that — =_- = — .
9 5 4
If a certain temperature be indicated on the centigrade
and Fahrenheit's thermometers respectively by numbers in the
ratio of 1 : 2 ; find the number which indicates it on Reau-
mur's thermometer.
7. Distinguish between physical and geometrical optics.
State the laws of reflection and refraction of light.
A circle which reflects lighi from its inner surface has two
holes in it ; determine the course of a ray, which, entering at
one hole, after four reflections passes out at the other.
8. A luminous point is placed between two parallel plane
mirrors; find the distances from it of its successive images.
Ifi^be the point, -Pj. ^^,, /*,... its successive images,
shevv thai l\l\ = Fl\, 1\F^ = I\P^ , 1\1\ = PJ\ . . .
9. What is meant by the critical angle of a medium ? Define
the refracting angle of a prism.
Shew that a ray refracted through a prism denser than the
surrounding medium, in a plane perpendicular lo its edge, will be
turned towards the thicker part of the prism.
If the refracting angle of a prism be equal to the critical
angle of the medium of which it is formed ; prove that an inci-
dent ray nearly parallel to one face will pass out of the prism at
right angles to the other face.
10. Find the geometrical focus of a pencil of rays directly
incident upon a concave mirror.
Shew that the conjugate foci move in opposite directions.
11. Describe the Astronomical Telescope, and trace the course
of a pencil of rays through it.
12 Explain the formation of the primary rainbow.
How must a person be situated m order to see it ] She \V
that the order of colours in tlie secondary bow is the reverse of
that in the primary bow.
i-'-J
: . *l
. ■^1
■^1
•" ' ,' h' >
' l|
>,
. «4
■X
IM
'4
1. Stat
couples,
directions
two direci
and tlie oi
2. Fine
rigid syst(
couple. ]
z) be all
shew that
single for(
and in caa
3. Inve
system is
Iftl
be paralle'
Und
at rest ?
4. Slie\
the centre
density at
point Iron
5. Whe
given fore
any point
Wini\)tvuit» of Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIKD YEAE.
m
i;il
STATICS AND DYNAMICS.
HONORS.
Examiner: J. B. Cherkiman, M.A.
1. State and prove the principle of the parallelogram of
couples. Having given the components of a couple in two
directions, at right angles to each other, find the components in
two directions, one of which coincides with one of the former,
and the other is inclined at a given angle to this.
2. Find the conditions that a given set of forces acting on a
rigid system may be reducible (1) to a single force (2) to a single
couple. If the forces (of which the type is i^ at the point Xy y,
2) be all parallel to the line whose direction cosines are /, w, n,
shew that in case (1) the equations to the line of action of the
single force are
and in case (2), find the moment of the resultant couple.
3. Investigate the conditions of equilibrium when a rigid
system is kept at rest by assigned forces.
If three forces keep a rigid system at rest, they must either
be parallel, or pass through the same point.
Under what circumstances will three couples keep a system
at rest? ^
4. Shew how to find the centre of gravity of any body. Find
the centre of gravity of a circular oblique cone, in which the
density at any point varies as some power of the distance of the
point from the base.
5. When a flexible string is kept at rest under the action of
given forces in one plane, obtain an expression for the tension at
any point
■| :
^■''/•'^.a
.it 1
Kl
■^
iJt:?'^
If the forces be all parallel, and t be the tension at a point
where the tangent makes an angle yjr with the direction of the
forces, prove that t sin -x^ id the same throtighout.
G. Show how to find the increase of length in an elastic
string, when sti-etched by any forces in direction of its length.
A string which is slightly extensible (X, the constant of
.Hooke's law, being small) is kept upon a smooth plane curve,
being fastened at one point of it, by a uniform force / acting at
each point along the tangent, shew that the pressure of the string
upon the curve at a point where the radius of curvature is p,
and 8 is the length of the arc measured from the free end of the
string, is
- (A + h^f^')
7. When one body rests upon another fixed, having a point of
their surfaces in contact, and the surfaces being sufficiently
rough to prevent sliding, shew how to find whether the equili-
brium is stable or unstable.
A segment of a uniform paraboloid of revolution, cut ofi"
by a plane at right angles to the axis, and at a distance from the
vertex equal to -j latus-rectum, rests (vertex downwards, and
axis vertical) within a fixed spherical bowl whose radius is equal
to the latus-rectum. Determine the nature of the equilibrium.
8. Find the attraction of a uniform circular arc on a point
situated in its median line, the law of attraction being that of
the inverse square of the distance.
If a particle move freely under this attraction from the
centre of the circle to the chord of the arc, find the velocity
acquired.
9. A particle describing a plane orbit, obtain expressions for
the velocities and accelerations of velocities along the radius-
vector, and perpendicularly to it.
If the acceleration perpendicular to the radius-vector lo
always proportional to the velocity in that direction, the areas
swept out will increase in a geometric progression as the timefi
increase in an arithmetic.
10. Force varying as the distance from a fixed point, determine
the position and dimensions of the orbit when the circumstances
of motion at an assigned point are given.
If e be the excentricity, /a the absolute force, t the time of
moving between two points where the directions of motion are at
right angles, and for which the vectorial angles mea.sured from
the apse-line are a, /3, shew that
imQ — tana = e^ V 1 — s'- tan ( v'/T 0-
11. I'orce to centre varying as (distance) —*, find the orbit
where the velocity at an apse ia e(inal to (1), the velocity in a
circle at that distance ; (2), die velocity which would be acquired
by falling freely from an infinite distance Lat point under the
action of the force.
'"12. A particle moves on a smooth fixed plane curve under
given forces, determine the velocity at any point, and the pressure
on the curve.
A rigid parabola is fixed in a vertical plane, with its axis
vertical, and vertex upwards, 4 m being its latus-rectum. A
particle is projected from the vertex along the curve, and acted
on by gravity ; shew that it will not leave the curve, whether it
be moving on the upper or on the under side, if the height due
to the velocity of projection lie between ^3 wi and ^m.
^r.i
i^-S^^.<~''
an
Bniiitv&iti} of STotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR
HYDROSTATICS AND OPTICS-
HONORS.
Examiner : J. B. Ciierriman, M.A.
1. Investigate an expression for the pressure at any point of a
fluid kept at rest by given forces.
A sphere is filled with a heavy incompressible fluid which
is acted on by a reinilsivc force tending from the centre and vaiy-
ing as any function of the distance, as well as by gravity ; shew
that if the pi-essure at the highest point be equal to the weight
of a column of fluid whose height is equal to the radius, the pres-
sures upon the upper and lower halves of the sphere are as 3 to 5.
2. Obtain the co-ordinates of the centre of pressure of a plane
surface exposed to a heavy incompressible fluid.
How could it be ascertained whether a curved surface has
a centre of pressure 1
If a hemispherical surface be just submerged with a tangent
to its base in the surface of the fluid, the normal at the centre of
pressure makes an angle cos ~^ l with the base.
3. Obtain the conditions of eipiilibi-ium when a body floats in
a fluid (1) freely, (2) under constraint.
A thin uniform rod (length, 2a) supported by a string at
one end floats in a heavy fluid where the density varies as the
nth power of the depth, the rod being inclined to the vertical at
an angle Q and having its centre in the surface of the fluid.
Shew that if the rod floated freely in a vertical position, the
length immersed would be
a cos d
1
n+l
+
1 \-L
n
+ 2
n+l.
■v ■
iitii
"9
^^ffi
■'".*'■ . , •-'
■ --'t '' '
i ■_ • '.
1
v;^^H
1
f';M
II
1
4H •
U n"^^
4. Explain accurately -what is meant by the »neiacew<re, and
stew how the nature of the equilibnum depends on its position.
An clli])tic lamina floats vertically in a fluid of double its
density, And the character of the equilibrium in its two positions.
5. Investigate the relation
p = kp(l-\-at)
stating accurately the nature of the constants involved ; and if
the values of k, a for a certain gas be given with reference to the
centigrade thermometer, determine their values for Fahrenheit's.
Given volumes (T, V) of two gases at different tempera-
tures and i)reasures are put into a closed vessel (V-{- V), and the
tt'.mi)eratui*e is then reduced to ; determine the pressure of the
mixture.
6. When a pencil of light is incident directly on a spherical
reflector, determine where the extreme ray cuts the axis after
reflection.
If the pencil consist of parallel rays, and its breadth be 2y,
which is small comijared with the radius (r), shew that the longi-
tudinal and lateral aberrations are
^-- and -^ .
7. When a small oblique pencil is incident on a plane refracting
surface, explain the formation of the focal lines.
If a straight line, below the sui'face of water and parallel to it,
is viewed by an eye above the surface somewhere in the vertical
plane containing the line, find the form of the image constituted
by secondary foci.
8. Find the position of the focal lines Avhen a small pencil is
obliquely refracted through a i)rism, the axis being near to the
edge, and shew under what circumstances the foci will coincide.
What is the bearing of this latter observation upon New-
ton's experiment 1
If i be the angle of the prism, yu- the refractive index for
mean rays, dfi the difference of fx for the extreme rays, and a ray
pass with minimum deviation, shew that the whole dispersion of
the ray is
V { co^ec' |_;x» I
9. Investigate the position of the geometrical focus of a pencil
after direct passage through a thin lens.
When a convex huj, is used as a simple microscope, having
given the least distance of distinct vision, find the greatest angle
under which a given straight line can be seen.
10. State the different conditions which require to be fulfilled
in forming an achromatic combination according aa it is to be
employed as an object-glass or an eye-glass in a telescope.
Find the distance between two given lenses on the same axis
which will render the pair achromatic in the two cases respectively,
retaining only first powers of the differences of refractive index,
and supposing the incident rays to be parallel to the axis. Shev/
that in the first case the two lenses cannot be of the same name ;
and in the second case, both cannot be concave, but they may be
convex unless they are of the same substance and of equal focal
length.
11. In the common astronomical telescope, find the angular
magnitude of the field of view when the ragged edge is stopped
out.
For a short-sighted person, will thjs field be larger or smaller t
12. When a full pencil of parallel rays falls on a refracting
sphere and emerges after any number of internal reflections,
shew that there are two rays which undergo a minimum deviation.
Shew how this result is applied in the explanation of the
rainbow, and having given the magnitude of this deviation, and
assuming that it is least for the red and greatest for the violet
rays, shew how to determine which color is nearest the sun.
^"". a
t~
'il
~ 41" .4 *' .• »
mm.
EOl
1. :
of an
2. ]
how i
functi
equati
(i
("
(iii
3.
1
4.
equat:
auxili
satisii
the gi
mnmvuits of SToronto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
EQUATIONS, INTEGRAL CALCULUS, AND
GEOMETRY,
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner : Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
,i !»•.:■
1. Investigate the relations between the coefficients and roots
of an equation.
Find the sum of the cubes of the roots of the equation
cc' — ;?x* -{■ qx — r = 0.
2. Having given a, b, c the roots of an equation, explain
how to obtain an equation whose roots are given symmetrical
functions of a,b, c
The equation a^+qx+r—o has roots a, b, c ; form the
equations whose roots are
(i.) be, ca, ab ;
be ac ab
(iii.) a»+6'-a6, A^+c'-Jc, c'-irO^-ca.
3. Resolve a;^"— 2 a;« cos 0+-1 into its quadratic factors.
2 TT
Hence shew that (x'»-l)'=(x-l)x(x'-2a;cos - + 1)
X(x'-2a:cos-+l) (a;»-2a;.cos — ^^+ 1/
4. Describe fully Sturm's method of separating the roots of au
equation. Shew how the process will be simplified if one of the
auxiliary functions have no real root. What condition must be
satisfied by the series of functions in order that all the roots of
the given equation may be real 1
m
■*' ^^i-*
5;?!-:
W^
*'9^^^^^E
r'^^^H
^
^-. J
H
^^'Miu ^^^1
has.
Find how many real roots the equation a*— Sx'+Sa+l-o
5. Integrate the following functions
vJ :r-r-i-~z-» v."-; -, (m.)
(ii \ tancB ... N cos 'x
a + bcoH X '' ./ 1 a. „an if* ^ '"^ 1 + rt sin x *
•v/ 1 + sec a;
and find a formula of reduction for the integration of ^^^ "^
^ cos »"^ •
6. Shew how to change the variables in a double integral.
Cha nge th e order of integration in the expression
V Vdxdy; also change the variables to r and i
in the expression ^ J V dx dy, having given a« + yj=j.
and ?^= t.
a;
/2a /»«
/(a;) dx^2j f (x) dx, or = 0, according
M/(2a-.a:) = ±/(x).
8. Prove the following
(i.) J ^ log (sin x)dx = ^ log ^,
/OO aaj 5
c sin bx dx = ^rpj,
/OO — » n
c a; f^a: = L!i.
9. Find the equation to the plane diametral to the chords
a* 1J 2
parallel to the line _. ^ i- = for a surface of the second
I m n
degree.
Find it when the surface is the ellipsoid — + ?^ -|- _* =1.
d^ b* c*
Find also the direction of the chords of this ellipsoid which are
bisected by the plane Ix + wiy + nz = 0.
10. Describe a method of finding the equation to a cylindrical
surface which has its axis parallel to a given line, and which
envelopes a given surface of the second degree.
Shew that the equation to the cylindrical surface whose
axis is parallel to the line, and which envelopes the surface, whose
equations are gaven in question 9, is
11. If p, p,' and H be the respective radii of curvature of the
principal and normal sections of a surface, shew that
i =-i cos' e + --, sin' 9,
Ji p p'
where is the angle between the planes of one of the
principal and of the normal section.
Define a line of curvature of a surface, and investigate the
differential equation to the lines of curvature.
(^VdW^WdV) dx=(WdU-^UdW) dy^iXJdY-^ VdU) dz.
\ ,
hA
> * k '
* '■■.
il
'm
'^#11
s ■
^!
'■'Iff*
iinibetrfiifti? of ^ovonta.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR
1 r»
i Rl
CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY AND DIFFEREN-
TIAL CALCULUS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner : J. B. Cherriman, M.A.
1. Shew how to find the centre and axes of the curve repre-
sented by the general equation of the second order between rect-
angular co-ordinates. Examine the geometrical signification of
the conditions under which a parabola, a circle, or a rectangular
hyperbola may be represented liy the equation
&+D(J-i-o+(^■■I) (!'+!■ -o=«-
2. Explain the method of expressing the eqiiation to a straight
line in trilinear co-ordinates, and find the condition that two lines
whose equations are given may be parallel.
3. Investigate the harmonic projierties of a complete quadrila-
teral. If a conic be described having the third diagonal for the
chord of contact to the other two as tangents, shew that the points
of intersection of this conic with two o})posite sides of the quad-
rilateral lie, two and two, on lines which meet in the intersection of
the other opposite sides.
4. If a, /3, 7, be trilinear co-ordinates of any point in a line,
and a', B', 7', be those of another ])oiiit in the line at distance
T from the former, shew tliat
^-«' ^ ^^z^ ^ 7-7' ^ J. ^
t m n
h w, n being constants connected by a certain relation.
'A
»'
.'
I
^4¥
!
t»-
1
t4
^ i
\
'■»;
1
^
*.
»-
*• '->'-.H.
VT,
.m
Find the intersections of this line with the conic whose equa-
tion is ^ (« j3, %) = 0, being a homogeneous function of the
second order, and shew that the centre of the conic is given by
]_dp 1 dtp _ }_ d<l>
a da ~ b (^ ^ ~c~ d-y '
where a, h, c, are the sides of the triangle of reference.
5. State Lagrange's Theorem, and deduce Laplace's.
Expand x in ascending powers ofy from the equation
i/:^x{A+Bi/+Cf+Df+ )
6. If a plane curve roll on a fixed straight line, shew how to find,
(1.) The locus of any given point in its plane.
(2.) The envelope of any given straight line in its plane.
The rolling curve being a circle, find the above when the
given point is on the circumference, and the given line is a
diameter of the circle.
7. To find the maxima and minima values of a function of
several variables.
Find when xi/z is a maximum or minimum, where
i-^r + ii-r + (f )- = '•
Is there any way of ascertaining in this case or in the
general one whether the value determined is a maximum or a
minimum 1
8. Find the angle between two planes whose equations are
given in rectangular co-ordinates.
Find the equation to a plane containing the two sti'aight lines,
/ on n
(ii)^x+Sy-f-a=0.
A'x+B'j/+az=.0.
9. Find the general functional and the differential equation to
cylindrical surfaces.
A. thin wire in the form of a helix is laid on the ground
with its axis due north and south ; find the form of its shadow
at noon.
10. Trace the form of the hyperboloid,
Shew that through any point of it two straight lines can
be drawn wholly coinciding with the surface, and find the locus
of the points where these two Hi
other.
are at right angles to each
i ,'tl ■
11. Find the locus of the middle jwlnts of chords In an ellipsoid
which pass tlirougli a jfiven j)olnt, and the locus of the centres of
the sections made by planes ])asHiug througli a given line.
12. Shew how to discriminate the species of the surface repre-
sented by the general equation of the second degree between three
rectangular co-ordinates.
Examine the surface
Ml
r fc'I
'
(t
♦
. S\f.\
.!•,
•5 ■
%
u
! 1
'l
I
:\l
V
• -'.f
1 ^*
• •'» '4
;C
V,
, '
\ri
Mi
asyi
of ii
beti
refe
thai
froc
whe
the
the
COIT
froD
bes
C%nfiiet0ft|? of rovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
THIRD YEAR, AND CANDIDATE8 FOR B.A.
PROBLEMS.
\ Rev. W. Jones, R.A.
• •».
i,ifi
1. The axes of a hyperbola are given in direction, and its
asymptotes revolve about two fixed points ; prove that the locus
of its centre is a rectangular hyperbola whose centre is midway
between the two fixed points.
2. If a circle and a rectangular hyperbola be described, with
reference to which an assigned triangle is self-conjugate, shew
that the centre of the circle is at 1 .,, rsection of perpendiculars
from the angles on the sides of yi« triangle, and the centre of the
hyperbola is on the circumHcribing circle of the triangle.
3. It is said that there will be a point of ii/'exion in a spiral
^^^^ dr ~^ ^^ °° ^^^^^ changes sign. Shew that such is not
the case at the j)ole wlien the spiral passes through it.
For instance, take the spiral of Archimedes, r=a0.
4. If r, 2c be the radius- vector and chord of curvature flu ough
the pole at any point of a spiral, and r', 2c' be the same for the
correspondmg point in the locus of the foot of the perpendicular
from the pole on the tangent, prove that
5+^ = 2.
r d
5. Every equation of the form x*+2pa?+qx''-\-rx+s=i0 can
be solved by mftflns nf a nnnrlra+i'^ oniio+i/^r. if /«3 „,„ I A ..--1
6. On the surface of a sphere n equal particles are placed so
•m
II" ,:
that their centre of gravity is the centre of the sphere; ii a he
the angle subtended at the centre by the chord joining any two of
them, prove that
S cos a = "~ o •
7. A smooth surface of revolution standing with its axis
vertical, find its form in order that a heavy elastic ring may be at
rest when placed round any horizontal section of it.
8. The centre of the circle, radius r, inscribed in a triangle
ABC is an origin of light; a ray of light after reflection at the
sides '^i?, ^C returns again to the origin; shew that the length
of its path is 4 r cos A.
2
9. Li"ht admitted into a darkened room through a very
small hole in the shutter is received upon a vertical screen ;
examine the nature of the curves which bound the illummated
portions of the screen when it is placed (i.) perpendicular, (u.)
obliquely to the window.
10 A luminous point aS' in the side ^i? of a triangle ABC
equally illuminates the other two sides; HAS, BS subtend at C
the angles 0, (p respectively, shew that
sin (^— ^) = cos J. sin 0— cos B sin 6.
11 The respective specific gravities of two fluids, and of the
atmosphere are <r„ o",, and /o; a body floats in the first fluid with
1 *^ and in the second withl- *^ of its volume immersed; shew
n
m
that wio-j— w<Tj=(m— w)/>.
12 If a plane area be totally immersed vertically in a heavy
incompressible fluid, and X, x be the depths of its centre of
pressure and centre of gravity below the surface, and P the
pressure on the surface; shew that when the area is made to
descend without rotation through a small distance c, the mcrease
of pressure will be P -, and its centre of pressure will descend
X
through a distance
2c c .
X
13 A cylindrical diving bell descends in water ; the heights of
a water barometer in the bell are h, h', before immersion and
when the top of the bell is just Mubmerged, respectively ; shew
that the length of the bell is
'/ {h' - h) .
» » 'j.'l !-
14. A uniform paraboloid terminated by a plane perpendicular
to its axis, rests with its vertex on a rougb fixed plane in neutral
equilibrium ; shew that the equilibrium will also be neutral if
the paraboloid be scooped out into a thin shell, and filled with a
heavy fluid to the same depth of axis, the weight of the fluid
being half the weight of the shell, and the centre of gravity of
the shell being at the focus.
15. A cone floating freely (axis vertical and vertex downwards)
in a fluid has an elastic string (without weight) attached to its
vertex, the other end being attached to the centre of gravity of
a flat disk, (also without weight,) which is lying in close contact
with the horizontal base of the vessel containing the fluid, the
string being in its natural state and vertical. Prove that (if the
area of the disk lie between certain limits) when the level of the
fluid is raised by the addition of fluid, there is a position where
the length of the ^tring will not be altered by a small change of
level, and determine in the general case the depth of the fluid
when the disk will be lifted, if it ever will be.
16 Prove that
{I + ,'(.)}»«=.-*'.(!)».
u.
17. A parabola (latus-rectum 4a,) is described under two
accelerations, one to the focus, and the other along the tangent,
their respective values at focal distance r being / and F; prove
that
^+¥= j:
dr r 'sjr^—ar
18. Shew that the cycloid is tautochronous when the resistance
of the medium is constant, and the successive heights to which
the oscillating particle rises, are in arithmetical progression.
19. At all points of an ellipsoid which are equidistant from the
centre, the sum of the curvatures in two perpendicular normal
sections varies as the perpendicular from the centre on the tan-
gent.
, ■ 1!
1 $•*■
***]
kixif$tvuit^ of ^orotfio*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY.
Uxaminers : ] ?' f ^^^ON, LL D.
5 J. A. Boyd, M.A.
*** Answers to all the questions are not indispensable • hut
riTLL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
I. Outlines of modern history.
(1.) Enumerate the events which mark the commence-
nf^J °^°^?X^,^story ; and contrast the characteristics
of modern, with those of mediaeval and ancient history.
1 P.i} ^^' ^'■''^^^ f-y' •* " ^^^ undoubted tendency of the
last three centuries has been to consolidate what were once
separate states or kingdoms into one great nation." Men-
tion the most important changes, in chronological order
which serve to confirm this statement. '
nnJtl ^^^^""^ fi^ ^^'^' P;°g^ess and termination of the
contest between the Girondists and Jacobins.
^ ^(^O Oi^ejome^ account of the war that began in 1812
uesween ine umteU states and England.
-^M
It British history from the reyolutiou to the present time.
(1.) What historical importance attaches to the career of
John Wilkes ?
(2.) What led to the impeachment of Dr. Sacheverel ?
What were its results, political and constitutional ?
(3.) Enumerate those historical facts which shew the
great personal influence of George III. in determining the
course of events during his reign.
(4.) Give some account of the prosecution of Home
Tooke, and its results.
(5.) When, and how, arose the influence of the periodical
press ? Trace its developement to the end of the eighteenth
century.
(6.) Sketch the career of the Duke of Wellington as a
statesman.
.': m
' i»
Itf^,
S?'^ ^ l"^
. 'A -
IS -14. •. * I
- , *
^rm
-«j-:g£*fr-i.
■M
yl<''>, 1'.
i ■ ■ ' ■ .' ■■■;■■ '
I
r^ii
T5^
ittfi'S
Unibtvmt} of ^ovomo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
-Examiners :f^- ^ii-SON, LL.D.
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A.
"JULIUS CiESAR;" ETYMOLOGY & SYNONYMS.
(1.) From what sources did Shakspeare draw the materials
lor this drama i Discuss the questions as to its hero,
and the object with which it was written.
(2.) What ^ anachronisms and deviations from historical
accuracy do you note in the play ?
(3.) '^Metellus Most high, most mighty and most
puissant Cjesar,
Metellus Cimber throws before thy seat
An humble heart. —
CfBsar. I must prevent thee, Cimber,
These coucUngs and these lowly courtesies'
Might fire the blood of ordinary men ;
And turn pre-ordinance anH first decree
Into the law of children. Be not fond
To think that Caisar bears such rebel blood
That will be thawed from the true quality
With that which melteth fools ; I mean, sweet words.
Low-crook' d curt'sies and base, spaniel fawning.
Thy brother by decree is banished ;
If thou dost bend, and pray, and fawn for him,
I spurn thee like a cur out of my way.
Know Cscsar doth not wrong ; nor without cause
Will he be satisfied."
(a.) Point out all the figures, rhetorical and syn-
tactical, which occur in this extract.
(6.) "Prevent," "ordinary," "quality," "satisfied:"
Give groups of synonyms for each of these words,
and distinguish between the shades of meaning
of the words in each group.
{c.) What is the derivation of these words :
"Courtesies," "decree," "thawed," "banish-
ed,'' "wrong."
{d.) Discuss the various readings proposed in respect
of the words in italics in the above passage.
(«.) Paraphrase in ordinary language the first nine
lines of Caesar's speech, so as to exhibit the
meaning of the author.
(/.) How were the last two lines of Caesar's speech
originally written ? To what celebrated criticism
did they then give rise? What is their meaning
as they now stand ?
(4.) Give the origin and transmutations of meaning and
application of the words in italics in the following
passages : —
" What you would work me to, I have some aim."
" The repealing of my banished brother."
" To be resolved if Brutus so unkindly knocked.''
* " Be content; speak your grief softly."
" Every nice offence should bear his comment."
" Such rascal counters."
" Old men, fools, and children calculate."
" Upon my knees, I charin you."
(5.) Elucidate the force of the following phrases :—
''Conned by rote;" "our wildness shall no whit
appear;" "7W2/ life is run his compass;" ''take
thought^ and die for CjBsar."
(6.) Craik says : "It is evident that the characteristics of
Julius Coesar and his history had taken a deep hold
of Shakspeare's imagination."
Is this a correct or incorrect position ? Give reasons
for your answer.
« 1
f ' . .
• *'• , ' .4.
't » •"'I
■■tl}A i*tX%--
.'.,V
": ) -*
^1 W,."'',-k
'l-^k't^i^ -I
.mm
i.l*
h:l
!■
anftiersftj? of Eotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY AND ETHNOLOGY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: J ^' iJ^^^soN, LL D.
\ J. A. Boyd, M.A.
'^^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
ki \ x?®^1® ^^^ *^® causes, direct and indirect, which ena-
bled Napoleon to establish the empire on the ruins of the
trench republic.
2. State the gains and losses, material and moral, of
prance and England, from the struggle terminated by the
Treaty of Amiens. ^
3. D. Hamilton says of the war of England against
France, begun m 1793, " In one aspect thiJ was a war of
principles ; m another, it was a war of self-defence ; but in
both It was just and inevitable." Define what is implied in
each of those assertions; illustrate them by reference to
details of the war ; and assign reasons for maintaining or
rejecting the conclusions stated.
4. Name the leaders, and compare the circumstances and
results, of the victories of Corunna and Toulouse.
ETHNOLOGY.
1. Define the system of classification of Retzius ; and
explain what is implied by designating the Anglo-Saxons :
orthof/nathioldolieocephalce.
2. Explain the terms : aptotic, j^aurosf/Uabic, pohjsi/n-
thetic, amalgamate and agfjhitinate, as applied to languages ;
and specify an example of each.
3. Max Muller says : " We know that grammatical termi-
nations, as they are now en led, were originally independent
words, and had their own ]) irposo and meaning." Explain
this, and illustrate it from English examples.
4. Schlegel asserts, as a fnnd on al proposition, that
"Names of things and terms o^ e ipres' " )n are transitory ;
but the system of grammatical 30i'!itruc m is permanent."
How far is this compatible with ^hc ch...ages the English
language has undergone from its v igmal condition as an
inflexional language ?
5. The theory of a Pelasgic stock conntituting the prehis-
toric occupants of all Italy, has been maintained by assuming
that the Tyraeni of the north were Pelagi, on whom llhoctian
Rasena intruded ; and that the CEnotrii in the south were
also Pcla^^gi, on whom the Hellenes intruded. Define what
is implied in this theory, and discuss it in all its bearings.
6. Define the ethnological changes implied in the adoption
of the names France, England, 'Wales and Scotland, for
those applicable to the same countries when first invaded by
the Romans.
7. Indicate the changes on the commercial and political
institutions of Italy, subsequent to the dismemberment of the
Roman empire ; and show to what extent they are traceable
to ethnological changes.
8. Trace all the ethnological changes which the Iberiam
peninsula has undergone ; and sliow the inlluence of those
changes on subsequent history.
9. Give the derivation and strict meaning of the terms :
aborigines, autochthones, prehistoric, primitive, allophylian,
primeval.
10. Define and illustrate the difference between ethnologi-
cal absorption and extinction.
r:
4 1
M!
- \ i .
w( ...
Subi
Trai
1.
inde
2.
3.
Trai
unii$tvuiitj! of STotonto;
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH.
Examiners : | J^^^^ Forneri, LL.D.
( Robert Sullivan, M. A.
I.
Subject for French composition: "Education and culture of
the mind, necessary to women."
II.
Translate :
Un effroyable cri, sorti du fond des flots,
Des airs en ce moment a trouble le repos ;
Et, du sein de la terre, une voix formidable
Rdpond en gdmissant k ce cri redoubtable.
Jusqu'au fond de nos coeurs notre sang s'est glac^ •
Des coursiers attentifs le crin s'est herisse. '
Racine's Phedre, Act V., Scene VI.
1. Why no longer was the imperfect, but the preterite
mdetinite employed by the poet ?
2. How many inversions ? Point them out.
3. How many hiatHs; specify their effect.
III.
Translate :
JOAD.
Jdhu, qu'avoit choisi sa sagesse profonde,
Jehu, sur qui je vols que votre espoir se fonde,
' i J f > .,
■HHr
^ 1
'nI
< 4 v/ ,^^H
'» N ' tiii^^l
.^^BHnl^H
D'un oubli trop ingrat a payd ses bienfaita:
J^hu laisse d'Achab I'affreuse fille en paix,
Suit des rois d'Israel les profanes exemples,
Du vil dieu de I'Egypte a conserve les temples ;
J^hu, sur les hauts lieux enfin osant offrir
Un temeraire encens que Dieu ne peut souffrir,
N'a pour servir sa cause et venger ses injures
Ni le coeur assez droit, ni les mains assez pures.
Non, non : c'est d Dieu seul qu'il faut nous attacher
Montrons Eliacin ; et, loin de le cacher, '
Que du bandeau royal sa t^te soit ornee :
Je veux mSme avancer I'heure determinde,
Avant que de Mathan le complot soit form^.
Racine, Athalie, Act III., Scene VI.
1. Jehu. Who was he ?
2. Sa sagesse j^rofonde. Give the antecedent of sa.
3. Sur qui je vols. When is qui exclusively said of
persons ? ''
4. D'Aehah Vaffreme fille. Name her.
5. Suit des rois d'Israel. How?
6. Bu vil dieu de VEgypte. Name him.
7. Siir les hauts lieux. Explain.
8. Qu'il faut nous attacher. Give a more definite form
and destroy the pleonasm. '
9. Point out the two most striking inversions.
IV.
Mais ce qu^unsagc g<^neral doit le mieux connaitre, c'est sos
soldats et ses chefs ; car de hi vient ce parfait concert qui fait
a^r les armies comme un seul corps, ou, pour parler avec
TEcriture, " comme un seul homme :" Egressus est Israel
tanquam vir unus. Pourquoi comme en seul homme?
Parce que sous un meme chef, qui connait ct les soldats et les
chefs comme ses bras et ses mains, tout est egalement vif et
mesure'. C'est ce qui donne la victoire; ct j'ai oui dire ^
notre grand prince qu'a la journde de Nordlingue, ce qui
I'assurait du succ^s, c'est qu'il connaissait M. de Turenne
dont I'habiletd consomm^e n'avait besoin d'aucun ordre pour
faire tout ce qu'il fallait. Celui^ci publiait de son gOte qu'il
agissait sans inquie'tude, parce qu'il connaissait le prince, et
ses ordres toujours surs. C'est ainsi qu'ils se donnaient
mutuellement un repos qui Ics appliquait chacun tout entier
b. son action : ainsi finit heurousement la bataille la plus
hasardeuse et la plus disputde qui fut jamais.
BossuET Oraison Funehre de Louis de Bourbon.
1. O'est ses soldats et ses chefs. When is the demonstrative
ce repeated before est f Why not ce sont ?
2. Car de Id. Suppress de Id^ and give the words
referred to.
3. Fait agir. Resolve by a conjunction into a tense and
mood. When is it that faire cannot be followed by an
infinitive ?
4. J'ai ou'i dire d notre grand prince. Under what
grammatical rule is this expression ? Explain.
b. Pour faire. Resolve into a (?e/?m*fe form.
6. Et ses ordres *ouj^urs surs. Fill up the ellipsis.
7. Qui les appliquait. Give the antecedent of ?e«.
8. Qui fut Jamais. Why in the indicative, after i super-
lative relative ?
V.
History of the French literature in the 17th century
(Chouquet's.) ^
1. Give a biographical sketch of Fontenelle, and state what
are his true titles to literary glory.
2. Who has been surnamed, on account of his manly
eIo(iuence, the Bossuet of the Protestant chair? Charac-
tense his style.
3. Write a short biographical notice of D'Aguesseau, and
state in what he can be fully compared to Cicero. Give the
character of his style.
4 When and where was for the first time played
L Mourdi, and le B6pit Amoureux, de Moliere, and what
are his best chefs d'oeuvre ?
ip
m
m
- '1
*',
"' - '■ 'li
'ipf
fi'. i
lilt
iiil'
liijl
i.i.l
i
Trai
of
Btn
ii^nmvmv^ of sTotottto.
I
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
FRENCH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
— . ( Jambs Fornbri, LL.D.
Hxammers : I rqbert Sullivan, M.A.
Translate :
ladislas.
S'il est temps de patir, mon Sme est tonte prSte.
VENCB8LAS.
L'^chafaud Test aussi ; portez-y votre tete :
Plus condamn^ que vous, mon coeur vous y suivra ;
Je mourrai, plus que vous, du coup qui vous t^ra,
Mes larmes vous en sont une preuve assez ample :
Mais d I'etat, enfin, je dois ce grand exemple ;
A ma propre vertu, ce gdn^reux efFort ;
Cette grande victime, a votre frbre mort.
J'ai craint de prononcer, autant que vous d'entendre
L'arr^t qu'ils demandaient, et que j'ai dil leur rendre.
Pour ne vous perdre pas, j'ai long-temps combattu;
Mais, ou I'art de rdgner n'est plus une^ vertu,
Et c'est une chimere, aux rois, que la justice ;
Ou regnant, si I'^tat je dois ce sacrifice.
RoTiiON, VenceslaSj act v., scene vi.
of quite ia declined and when not. Explain also its con-
struction before gens.
'4"
■J 1
s hi
i
2. Plus cor damns que vous. Fill up the ellipsis.
3. VousyBuivra. Give the antecedent of y.
4. Fill U:) .ijc ellipses in verses 3, 6, 7, 8.
equivalent" " ""' ''''' P''""''' ^^"PP^^^ ^^ -cl give the
in t^ £Lbf' ^^^^ *^^ P-*-P^- past not decided
7. Zewr rew(^re. What does Uur refer to ?
8 Que la justice. What is this que crilpd ? T^.-^
the pleonasm in this line. ^ ^ * ^^'^^^^
^^^9. Megnant Resolve it by a conjunction, t..se, and
10. Je dots ce mcriflce. Give the force.
Translate :
Le theatre, fe^^jle en censeurs pointilleux
Chez nou. pour .e produiro est un champ ptrilleux
Un auteur n> fait pas de faciles conqugL • '
II trouve a le siffler des benches toujours prates •
Chacun lo peut traiter de fat et d 'igiorant *
C est un droit qu'a la porte on achfte en entrant
11 faut qu'en cent facons nour nln,v^ ;i *^"^'^*,!?^-
«.. en nobles sentiments il soit partout fdoond •
Olir^^f' '°"''^' "g^-^^ble/profond;
Que Je traits surprenants sans cesse il nous rfiveill^-
Et „ irr.'^™' ^?^™''' ^^ "erveilleen merveU le '
Et que tout ce qu',1 dit, facile a retenir "™"° '
i>e son ouvrage en nous laisse un lon» souvenir
Amsi la trag,idie agit, marche, et s'expUqne ''
reMVe^Tntocr """"™ ^'"■'"«-- ^"n it into a
aco^juilrn!'-^'''""''"''- «^'»'^-'i"'<". definite sensory
3. Un auteur n-yfaitpa,. Give the antecedent of u.
'^''" "" *""• S W^^^s ce, and give the equivi^.i.
5. Qu'd, la parte on aohete. Give the force.
6. B faut. Explain by examples the five constructions
of this verb.
7. Pourplaire. Resolve it in a definite sense by a
conjunction.
8. II 86 replic. Give the force.
9. Que tantdt il s'^leve. Destroy all the ellipses up to
the last verse.
10. Ainai la tragSdie. Introduce a pleonasm.
im.
Wif
3F7-6
Tra
moo
and
of a
the,]
lowe
heca:
' ' '1
l^ntt^trnitu of ^Toronto*
.?j
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
GERMAN.
Examiners :ii''''^' Forneri, LL D.
\ Robert Sullivan, M.A.
'{^
I.
Translate into German :
The celebrated Doerfling, the son of a Bohemian
peasant, learned in his youth the business of a tailor ;
he afterwards changed the needle for the sword, and
entered the service of several heroes, and was appointed
at last, by the grand elector, who knew how to appreciate
and reward merit of any kind, whatever, Major-General
and Governor of the Duchy of Ulterior Pomerania.
GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS.
1. Mention the peculiarity of the auxiliary verbs of
mood, and give an example.
2. Explain the difference between German intransitive
and neuter verbs ? Give examples.
3. By what case do you express the state or condition
of a neuter verb, and the action of an intransitive verb ?
4. What auxiliary does an intransitive verb take when
the manner of moving is expressed ?
6. What does da combined with a preposition and fol-
lowed by dass represent ? Translate, by reading muck he
became learned.
%
m
6. "When aro halb, gam to bo declined awl •wliennot?
7. How is tho passive voice of neuter verbs expressed in
German ?
8. Translate, he 18 feared , the child 18 dressedf ^am-
plifying both the passive and nen*'cv vi^rbs.
9. Exphiin Oratio ohUqda, and ;. natructio ad sensum, by
examples.
III.
SET INTO ailAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION THE FOLLOWING
LINES.
Translate :
3ufl. Sltnn* ctu pcvfcftcr Sciufcr tft tv, bag ifl c^mi^.
SBcnn il^m Ux |)crr fiinfjtf; ®d;rittc i>ou\ah, fo fonntc cr t^n
mtt j'cincm Initcn ^mux nid)t cin^olcn. gr(l) ^inj^cgen
fcinu tern ©alflcn taufenb ®d;rtttc i^ovj^ckn, unb td; bette
nicin Sebcn, cv l)olt t^n cin.
IV.
Translate
3)cr Stvtl). .<:at c5 3I)r trt^ cjnabfi^c gvauleiit ntd;t
crjo^lt ? — %l^ id) 8ie, inctn fd;i5nc^ ^tnb, iinten fu tcr
^itd;c »ciTicp, [o fain trf; ypit ungcfa{)i mcHx l)icr tn ten
@aal —
granci^fa. 53on unQefaI)iv in bcr 5H)[td;t, em wcr 'i 511
l^ovd)cn.
3)cr SBtrtI). (St, mei'n ^inb, jvfe faitn (3tc bad yon intv
bcufcn? (Smem 2QirtI)c (a{;'t nirfUiS uMciv Id 9?cu(iiicrbe—
3d) ivar ntd)t lanc^c l)ier, ■> pvcKt.' mif imil t^ Xt)ure
bci bcm pcibtijcn graulcin auf. 2)cv a}ta;or ftiivjte Ijcraitd,
tad gmulctn i\)m nad; ; bcttc in ciner 33cn)cflun(;i, mit
SSlicfcn, m emcr (SteUung- iV wad la|3t ftd; nur^fl^m.
®tc crgviff t^n ; cr rip ftd; lod ; ftc cn^rtif tl)n nnebcv.
Stdlljeim! — grciulem! laffen etc mid)! — ?Po^tnV ©o
jog cv fie W an tie J.cppc? SOiiv wax [ibon knge, cr
tt)urt>c ftc mit l^tnabreipcn. %kx cr n^ ib ftd noc^ lod.
Lessing, Minna von J irh n, p. 62.
1. Unten in der KUche vcrliess. What part of the
speech is unten P
2. Von ungefahr in der absicht. Give a synonym of
in der absicht and j&Ii up the ellipsis.
3. Paavonmir denkenP Suppn daa and give tnd
equivalewt.
4. Mnem Wirthe Idast, ^c. Give a synonym to
lUsst.
6. Ich war nicht lange hier, add a verb,
6. Das Frdulein ihm nach, fill up the ellipsis,
7. Beide in einer Bewegung, mit BUckerif in einer
Stellung. Add the complement.
8. So was lasst sich nur sehen. Give the force.
9. Ur ri»s sich los. What case or cases does lo% as
adjective govern ?
10. Wohin V Add a verb.
11. Mir war schon hanqe. ^ivc a synonym of this
expression by a single word.
12. Er wUrde sie mit. Add the regimen to mit.
V.
GERMAN LITERATURE, (GOSTICK'S.)
1. Wlnt -w- '9 the 5th period \yith respect to poetry ?
2. Wlm error does Lcssing expose in his "Lackoon" ?
3 ,/hat production was once esteemed as the German
" VLar of ^' efic i " and by whom was it written ?
4. Wlio ^^..a nsidered the greatest writer of the 6th
period ? Name some of his best works.
i
m^^-.
Subj
Witl
smiuetttUi^ oc 3:oironto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864.
Tirmn year.
GERMAN.
FOR HONORS.
-, . f James Founeri, LL.D.
•^^^^»'»^^« • \ Robert Sullivan, M.A.
T.
Subject for German composition :
" The Horse."
Within thirty lines at least.
II.
Unb eilcnfciJ cjingcu fcic Slbbcritcn I;in, uub mad)ten m
(SJefel): bap fc(u'3lttcntcn[ol)u Ijinfovt wcitcraliSH^ nnbcn
^^ormtl){fd)cn 3ftl)mu^, Kiiuicv fit^ cin 3af)r, wnb anfccrsJ
aliJ untcr ber 2tuf[icl)t turn bcial)itcii i)ofmciftcvg »on 511=
tafcbmti[d)cv 3lbfunft, 3)cutavt uub Zittt, [oUtc vcifcn burfen.
„3uncic .^cutc milficu jwav bic 3BcU [cl)cn, frtj^ic bci^ 3)ccret :
abcr cbcn barum [oUcu fie ftcl) an jcbcin £)vtc ntdjt langev
aufl)alten, al^ W fie aUc^, m& mil %nc\tn ba ju fel^cn ift,
gcfc^cn l)aben. 33cfunbcr^ foU bcv .<^ofmctftcv <^cnau bemcrfcn,
m^ filr (^5aft()iJfc fie aiu^tvoffcn, wie fie Ciccjcffcn, uub mt
m\ fie bci^l;lcu milffeu ; camit t(;ve SOUtbiirocr fid) in bcv
golge biefe cvfprte§Itd)en ®c{)eimnad;rtd)tcn ju nu^e mad;en
!5nncn. gerner foil (wie bc^ T ■ vet ivettev facjt), ju (Jvfpavung
bcr Unfoften cinc^ allju lanf^cn 5tufentl)alt<J an ginem £)vte,
bev ^ofmciftcv baljin fel)en, bajj bev jungc 5l0bcvit '\\\ feinc
^(i^i^(<tj\i(icn S^cfanntfcl^aftcn ycrmicfclt itscvbc*
Wieland's Cf^esohichte der Abdei'iten, chap. ix.
*
W
A
' ^1
'^' '.^1
-l\{ijjy
^1
' l^Xm^^Ki
1^1
.;.H|
{^^^^1
^iw^^^^^l
1. ^in aesetz. Add a relative and a verb, on which
the following Dass may depend.
2. Solltereisen dilrfen. State what rule is applicable
to these words. ^^
3. Aher ehen darunu Suppress danm and give the
4. Da zu sehen ist. Explain the rule.
d.J'nfi' ''''^flfT \'v ''' Oege^'^n. Give the anteco-
dent ot ue and fill the ellipses.
5. Zu nutze machen. Compress it into a verb.
7. Ferncr soil With what infinitive can sollen be used
elliptically? I shall do it, ich soil es thun ; is it 3
German ? If not correct it. ^
8. Daliin sehen. What does dahin refer to ' What
figure do you perceive in this word ?
9. Verwiclelt werde. What tense and what mood k
10. Eill up all the ellipses not mentioned before.
III.
Translate :
Orcfl. *
^cnn fic bcm S}?cnfd;cn frcl^ Z{}Ci{ ficfd;crcn,
2;a§ cr cm Unl)dl mm t^nx ecincn n?cntct
2)a{;' cr [ctn W\^) ycnncbrt, tic 0rcn,n'n ftrijcrt,
lint) flltc ^cmtc falfcii otcr f(tc()ii ;
Jamt inai] cr tanfctU tcim tl)in l;at ctn @ott
4;c^ i?cbcn^ crftc, IctUc I'uft qci]i)mu.
a)hif) (;aku ftcsinn ^d)larf)tcr^auiicrforcn,
3um 9)?ort>cr mctncr bod) ycicl)ftcii iDhittev
Utib etnc @d)anttl;at fd;aublicf; rad;cn^ jjiicfi
2)itrd; tl^rcn Stnf ,^u Wmnb' ncrt\t)tc.\ ©Uu&c,
(£ic l)aben ci3 auf XaiUal'i^ .*^au^ ncrirf;t.'t '
Unt tc^, ttr Scj^te, [oU iild)t [d)u(HW, m
vl\i)i el;ren»oU »ergct)n.
Goethe's IpMgenie auf Tauris, Act ii., Scene i.
1.^ Wenn sie dern Menschen, &c. Give the anteceden
of ilr
2. Fill up all the ellipses of this extract.*
3. Von den Semen. Suppress the capital initial S in
tSeinen and add a noun.
4. Dann mag er danJcen. Dankcn, whom ?
5. Bann denn. Compare.
6. Zum SoJddchter auserkoren. Give the rule applicable
to this expression.
7. ScMndlich rachend. Express the adverbial idea of
^ehandhchhy Weise, and resolve rachend by a conjunction.
8. Ich, der Letztc. Turn it into a relative sentence.
L 4|
iiiij
-^ii?'«
^1
ei
9'
no
/»
WitiititvuitSf of ^otonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
•* r ,.w';s
ITALIAN.
IS .
Examiners • \ ^^^^^ Forneri, LL.D.
■ \ Robert Sullivan, M.A.
I.
GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS.
1. In what are the verbs fare and stare idiomatically
employed ?
2. Translate, 1 am neither tJiirsty nor hungry.
3. When is il che used ?
4. Point out the difference between questi, cotesti, and
quegli.
5. When is the definite article omitted ?
6. What is the plural of milk and thai of cento ?
7. What numbers are employed for the date of the
month ?
8. Translate, It was last week that I spoJce to your
friend.
9. W.^en is mezzo invariable ?
10. How * ' ago expressed ?
II.
Translate into English:
GiA. Che strepito h questo ? Che piazzate son queste ?
Leo. Signora, le piazzate, non le fo io : le fanno quelli
che si burlano de' galant' uomini, che mancano di parola,
che tradiscono suUa bwona fede.
GiA. Chi ^ il rec ? Chi ^ il mancatore ? (Con caricatura.)
FuL. Parlate voi. {A FiHppo.)
FiL. Favoritemi di principiar voi. [A Fulgemio.)
FuL. Orsii, ci va del mio in quest' afFare. Poich^ il dia-
volb mi ci ha fatto entrare, a tacere ci va del mio, e se non
sa parlare il signore Filippo, parlerd io. Si, signora : ha
ragione il signor Leonardo di laraentarsi. Dopo avergli
dato parola che il signor Guglielmo non sarebbe venuto con
voi, mancargli, farlo venire condurlo in villa, ^ un' azion'e
poco buona, e un trattamento incivile
GiA. Che dite voi, signor padre ?
FiL. Ha parlato con voi rispondete voi.
GlA. Favorisca in grazia, signor fulgenzio : con qud
autoritcl pretende il signor Leonardo di comandare in casa
degli altri ?
Leo. Con quell' autorita che un amante...
GlA. Pordoni, ora non parlo con lei. [A Leonardo.) Mi
risponda il signor Fulgenzio. Come ardisce il signor Leo-
nardo pretendere da mio padre e da me che non si tratti chi
pare a noi, e non si conduca in campagna chi a lui non
piace ?
Leo. Voi sapete bcnissirao...
GiA. Non dico a lei ; mi risponda il signor Fulgenzio.
FiL. (Oh ! non S3va vero dcgli amorctti, non ijurlercbbe
cosi.)
FuL. Poiche volete che dica io, diro io. II signor Leo-
nardo non direbbe niente, non ^)retenderebbe niente se non
avcssc intenzione di pigliai vi per moglie.
GiA. Come il signor Leonardo ha intenzione di volermi in
ipposa? {A Fulgenzio.)
Leo. Possible che vi giunga nuovo ?
GiA. Perdoni. Mi lasci parlar col signor Fulgenzio. {A
Leonardo.) Dite, signore, con qual fondamento potete voi
asserirlo ? {A Fulgenzio.)
FuL. Col fondamento che io medesimo, per commissione
uci Signor xiconaruQ, ne ho avanzata testu a vostro padre la
proposizione.
Leo. Maveggendomi si maltrattato...
d-iA. t>i grazia s* accheti. Ora tion tocca a lei ; parleri
quando tocchera a lei. {A Leonardo.) Che dice su di cio
il signer padre ?
GOLDONI, La Villeggiatura, Atto iii., Scena xiv.
1. Che piazzate. Give the force.
2. Favoritemi di principiar voi. Turn favoritemi into a
deprecatory adverb, and principiar into an imperative.
3. Orsil. Give a synonym in French.
4. Ci va del mio in quest' affare. Translate it into
French, adding a noun to mio.
5. Mi ci ha fatto entrare. Suppress ci and give the
equivalent.
6. A tacere. Resolve it by a conditional conjunction,
tense, and mood.
7. Dopo avergli dato parola. Resolve by a conjunction,
tense and mood, adding the subject.
8. Che un amante. Supply the reticence.
9. Da mio padre. Why not dal 7nio padre ?
10. Non si tmtti chi. Resolve chi.
11. Ohi a lui non piace ? What does a lui refer to ?
12. Begli amoretti. Prefix a governinj;, word.
13. Dicay dird. Change dire into parlare^ and conjugate.
14. In isposa. Why in isposa and not sposa ?
15. Possibile che, S^c. Supply verb and subject.
"iZ. Asserirlo. Suppress lo and add the equivalent.
17. Ne lio avanzata, ^c. What does ne refer to ?
18. Ora non to.-'ui a lei. Give the force and translate it
into French.
'-' ' '• ft'. I
^ ^U
' '►'•■a
Bni^tt:uitp of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
APPLIED CHEMISTRY.
r-::%^i
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.G.L.
3 sl^i-ai
•nx
1. How may the presence of organic matt#r in the air
be detected ?
2. What salts of lime can be easily removed from ffater,
and how ?
3. Explain the ciir.:eiice between spring, river, and
rain water.
4. Give the preparation of nitric rcid. How is the
residue utilised ?
5. Give the preparation of aluiii-, aoL-i its uses.
6. Describe the manufacture of giae, and the uses of the
residue.
7. Describe the extraction of lead from galena.
8. Describe the manufacture of shot.
9. Describe the process of alkalimetry.
10. What are the uses of chlorine in the arts, and in what
forms is it employed ?
•i !
sp
an
ac
ar
H.
ca
pe
Bni^tvHitp of Eovonto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
APPLIED CHEMISTRY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L.
^ . t
#1
1. Describe the preparation of common salt from brine
springs, and from sea water. What other salts are obtained,
and how ?
2. Describe the manufacture of gunpowder, and its
action.
3. What salts of barium and strontium are used in the
arts ? How are they prepared ?
4. Describe the method of refining sugar.
5. What proporty renders copper ineligible for castings ?
How is the objection obviated.
6. Mention the economical uses of coal tar.
7. Describe the manufacture of candles of all kinds.
8. Describe the process of block printing as applied to
calico.
9. Give the diflFerent methods of preserving food, and
the principles on which they depend.
10. Give an outline of the processes by which gutta
percha is utilised.
'"^hr
i, I
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
Y
m
/.
/.
^
^A'
5/ ^ ^^ i^^^
t/j
^
1.0
I.I
^4i 12.8
1^ 1^ IIIIIM
2.5
1.8
1.25 1.4 1.6
^ 6"
►
Hiotographic
Sdences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
<b
[ I
Unmvuits of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
NATPRAL HISTORY.
IIxaminers:(^^\' S^^^- Hinoks, F.L.S.
i r. J. Cottle, Esq.
f'
lit
1. Or what parts does an endogenous vascular hiinHl«
consist, and m what order do they occur in reference tn^^^^^^
centre and circumference of the stem ? ^^^^'^^^^^ to the
.r.A^' w *^!i,«'®°^ ?f a vine what does the tendril renresent
ZitZ r ''' "^^ ^^*"" ^' ^^^' wears to iThe S
3. Give some account of the laws of Phyllotaxis.
fln ^' ^^^A '® *^®.'"®*^ explanation of the organs of the
flower called nectaries by the Linnean botanists ?
5. Order Orchidaceae, its characters, examples of con
Sr e'air '' '''' --*ry-P-vailing habit's o" tfopTcal
ampL?'"^"' I-obeliace^, character, properties, native ex-
fl,A \.fvT ^\?T^^ i agreement and difference between
the Palhobranchiate and Lamellibranchiate Mollusks the
means by which these animals procure food, and tb't;.!,'
SrWng oTatntr" '' ^^^^^^^^^ '^^^ which .em;:t
8. Give a sketch of the arrangement of the class Arach-
nida, especially of the family Arancidse. What characters
are specially important in discriminating them ?
9. Give an account of the structure and mode of arange-
ment of the class Pisces.
10. Reptilia Ord: Chelonia — the general structure, the
families, with their peculiar habits.
11. Fissirostres. What are the characteristic distinctions
of this division of birds ? Enumerate the families.
12. Mammalia. Arrange the class, giving the principal
structural characters.
ii: j.j
f 1
Wi ii
1:
— T .
/
(
T
29nfiier0ft|? at STorouto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
I !•
NATURAL HISTORY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Uxaminert.'i^^^r ??°^' ^inoks, F.L.S.
(T. J. Cottle, Esq.
1. The vegetable cell, its substance, its natural figure its
T^T.tf ^" ' living active state/causes which iffince
Its figure difference between cells and vessels and the degree
ot importance attached to it, principal contents of cells in
their more advanced state. ^-eus in
2. How may the divisions called sub-kingdoms — well
known m the animal kingdom-be applied with advantage
to the vegetable kingdom ? Name the three proposed suf
lowfst!""'' """^ ^'' '^' '^""''"'^ ^^^^"^^«' andUersIn ?he
3. Order Zantiioxylaceae— characters, and affinities, nro-
perties-representation in North Americi. ' ^
tinn' J'J?"^'"^^'^'" Protozoa, its characteristics. Examina-
tW th^' '•'• '^°' ^^/ suppressing it. The classes and fur-
ther sub-divisions as far as well established.
CWrJJ^y^u^ °^ 1*^? ^^*'' Crustacea : special account of
tural /pnn?' *v '' 'ft^'T '9 ''^'' ^'^^tL^, their struc
Serb;':Ss Sr'^-^ ^^-^^^^^^^ *^^ ^^^-*-- -
r„t„7^^-V' ?^ distinguishing character of the great family
Curcuhonidae ? How are their larvae frequently very dis-
i u
tructive? Give examples. What circumstance connects
them with the family Longicornes? What objection may
justly be made to the common practice of placing Coleoptera
at the head of the class Insecta ?
7. Describe the structural peculiarities of the genus Ap-
teryx in the family Struthionidae.
8. "Various applications of the mammalian structure to ani-
mals inhabiting water. Distinguish the Cetacea — the family
of the seals — the otters, shewing the peculiarities of each.
'■•'"i\M
'^
L
^
f
■ ' ' t '3
' J I
m^-:,'^
i
Ill
1
i
1 1
' 1
^'^i
i! !
ii
-f
vw
i'l:
' ill
Winifitvuits of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864
THIRD YEAR.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
Exnminer: Rev. Professor Murray.
REID'S INTELLECTUAL POWERS, STEWART'S
MORAL & ACTIVE POWERS.
1. Explain the terms sensation, perception and conscious-
nesa, in the distinctive senses in which they are emploved
by Reid. ^ "^
2. What is the theory of perception which Reid regarded
as the common doctriiie of philosophers, and which he made
it the chief aim of his own philosophy to overthrow ?
3. State and criticise Reid's account of Plato's theory of
perception. *^
What is the doctrine which Berkeley intended
to establish in his New Theory of Vision ? '
State briefly Berkeley's general theory with
regard to the knowledge and the existence of
matter.
5. What does Reid understand by common sense ?
6. a. State any of the grounds on which Reid con-
siders it impossible to prove from induction the
principle, that whatever begins to exist must
have a cause if its existence.
I, By whom was this principle questioned ?
4.
a.
h.
7. a. What three phenomena does Stewart mention as
characteristic of appetites ?
b. What are the three propensities to which he
gives the name of appetites ?
c. What other propensities does he mention as pos-
sessing similar characteristics to those of the
appetites ?
8. a. What is the distinction between emulation and
envi/ ?
h. By whom was this distinction overlooked ?
9. What are the several theories of Hobbes, Cudworth
and Hutcheson with regard to our consciousness of ri<yht
and wrong ? *
10. State explicitly the opposite doctrines of thoso who
maintain and of those who deny the liberty of the will, men-
tioning some of the grounds on which each is supported.
'^ 11, ^''
I
I :!i
I,
i:
i: i
:|l
•SI
lilil ili
mmtitvm^ of Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
Examiner : Rev. James Beaven, D.D.
SENIOR.
«J'-i?'?"!^rf'''"''''v '"'"'''"' ^"'^ commodities, and explain
and illustrate the application of those terms. ^
3. " The fourth class of monopolies exists where produc
ion must be assisted bj natural agents, limited n rumber
and varying in power, re-paying with le s and less Stive
assistance every increase in'the%mount of the kbou Ind
abstinence bestowed on them." ^«t"uur ana
mo^n^'ii; if la'^d!" ''' '^^""^^^^ '' *^^*« ^^^^^^ ^^ the
4 State the nature of rent and explain the causes on
which Its proportionate amount depends.
5. Discuss the effects, pecuniary and moral, of the absence
of an English landlord from his estate. aosence
difficulty of learning the^artulJrud^^^f """ '"""'""
iil
BURLAMAQUI.
^ 1. Give the primary notion of rigid, and its definition in
Its more general cense ; and exhibit the process by which
Burlamaqm passes from one to the other, and shews that man
is capable q2 right.
2. State those grounds of the right of sovereignty which
B. regards as inadequate, with his reasons; and establish,
after him, the true grounds of that right.
3. State, after B., the essential distinction between con-
stramt and obligation.
4. What functions does B. respectively attribute to the
moral sense and to reason in the discovery of right and
wrong ? What other name does he give to the first of these,
flnd why? Compare his opinions with those of other
writers on this subject.
5. How does B. deitxmine the question, whether there is
an absolute right and wrong, independent of the will of God ?
Give his grounds and compare his views with those of other
writers.
What does B. understand by the sanction of
laws ? And why does he consider it necessary?
What two sanctions does he suppose to be attached
to the laws of nature? Why does he consider
the first insufficient? And on what grounds
does he rest the second ?
6.
a.
h.
I * r * s
r ■
•i
■v ?'
fN-
». ill
4 4
• i» ■' ' 1 i'\.
■i'm
:i>^-^^\
C», '
IP II
Wini\ittuitu of CEToronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4.
iHlRD YEAR.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner: Rev. Professor Murray.
TENNEMANN'S HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY
AND STEWART'S DISSERTATION.
1. a. After whom were the Thomists and Scotists
respectively named?
b. In what century did the founder of these sects
flourish ?
2. a. About what time and at what university did
William of Occam teach ?
b. What logical principle did he bring into prom-
inence
c.
Which side did he take in the controversy
between the Realists and Nominalists, and what
was his doctrine with regard to the foundation
of morality?
3. a. To what country and to what century did
Giordano Bruno belong ?
b. State the general nature of his philosophy.
c. Of what ancient systems may it be considered
as a refined reproduction ?
4. a. State any thing you know with regard to the
life and personal character of Spinoza.
5.
b. Give a brief account of the system expounded in
his Ethics.
a. What arc the thrc3 parts into which Hegel
divides philosophy ?
b. What are the two schools into which the Hegel-
ians separated after their master's death ?
c. State some of the questions on which the two
schools separated and the side taken by each.
a. State the doctrine of Hobbes with regard to the
origin of society.
7. b. Mention some of the circumstances of his time
which may have influenced the development of
that doctrine.
e. On what points can his influence on Locke's sys-
tem be recognised ?
6.
State and criticise
existence of God.
Clarke's demonstration of the
8. a. What was Hartley's theory with regard to the
action of matter on mind ?
b. On what single principle did he attempt to
explain all the mental phenomena ?
9. a. From what English philosopher did Condillac
derive the main principle of his theory ?
b. Point out the connection of the English philoso-
pher's system with that to which it was reduced
by Condillac; and defend your answer to the
question, whether the reduction is logical.
10. State and criticise Stewart's estimate of Kant.
'i V ^
X.:
*^-^^ t'l!?
> i
< .
m$
.rTv?
-.:^.
Zitnfb(t0ltj^ of ^Totonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Uxaminers.'f^ll' i'""^' ^'""T' ^'^'
\ Rev. Pjrofessor Murray.
MACKINTOSH.
1. State the radical distinction between physical and
moral sciences.
2. Explain from Grotius the general principles of morals
which prevailed immediately after the close of the scholastic
period.
3. What was the speculative question which formed the
ground of dispute between Fenelon and Bossuet, and what
views did each hold? Give the opinions of any other
writers on the same subject.
4. Give some account of the views of Jonathan Edwards,
and note his coincidences with other philosophers.
5. What is the relation of Hutcheson to Scottish specu-
lative philosophy ?
6. Give M.'s character of Paley, and state what principle
M. borrowed from him,
7. " Which last form of expression has so close a resem-
blance to the language of Kant, that it should have protected
the latter from the imputation of writing jargon." Explain.
8. Explain Brown's objection to the use of the word
Association in reference to ideas, and show the more general
principle on which the objection is founded.
9. Notice the leading points on which M. may be regarded
as having added to moral philosophy.
LOCKE I., WITH COUSIN'S CRITIQUE.
1. What is the objection, which Cousin urges, against
beginning an enquiry into the human understanding with
the question discussed in the first book of Locke's Essay ?
2. a. What docs Locke rctrard as the chief argument
for the existence of innate principles ?
b. By what considerations docs he answer this argu-
ment with reference to the two speculative prin-
ciples, whatever is, is, and, it is impossible for
the same thing to be and not to be.
3. State Locke's argument to prove that the idea of God
is not innate.
4. a. What is the distinction, on which Cousin insists,
between the logical and the chronological order
of our ideas ?
b. Illustrate this distinction with reference to the
idea of space.
5. Defend your answer to the question, whether Locke's
system may be logically reduced to sensualism.
'-:! 1%:
^ ' 'I
,'-. \
: • * ■..,
1. a.
prof
sciei
b.
rule
2. "I
Political
•\ She
continual
4. « Ii
tion of th
assertion.
5. Sho
charat^ter
6. Ex}
Political :
Winiii^tvuitxt of ^otonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
THIRD YEAR.
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D.
WHATELEY.
1. a. Explain and illustrate "Whateley's views as to the
propriety of appealing to scripture as a criterion of
scientific truth.
b. Give an instance in which ho has observed this
rule.
2. "I wish for my own part there was no such thine as
Political Economy." Why?
^. Shew the influence of emulation in the promotion of
continual improvement.
4. " In fact there is no good reason for calling the condi-
tion of the rudest savages a state of nature." Support this
assertion.
5. Show how differences of religion may affect national
character and prosperity.
6. Explain the special necessity and use of definitions in
Political Economy.
' i ^.» t' i' >yi
« ' f .
•\^4
'4
T
mnii^ttma of Sotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GREEK.
JSxamtnerA' J ^^^' ^^^^ McCaul, LL.D.
* .
I.
Translate :
AI. TToXXwy ^KWTi T'^vSe aoi 8ovvai xapiv,
^vvai, irpodvixo'i eifii, 'frpwra fikv dewv,
CTTetTa iraihcov wv €7rayyiWei yovd^.
e? TOVTO yap 8r) (f)povBik el/iL Tra? iyw.
ovTcoS' ex^i fioi' aov /xeu eX0ouar)<i ydova,
TretpdaofiaL aov irpo^evelv 8iKaio^ 6>v.
ToaovSe fievToc ctol irpoarjfiaivw^ yvvuL'
ex rrja-Be fiev yr}^ ov a ayeiv ^ovXija-o/jLuif
auTT) 8' idvirep el<i ifiovf} eXOjj^ B6/j,ov<i,
fieveU acruXo9, kov ae /Mr] fiedw rivt.
CK rrja-Be S" avrrj 7^9 dtraWdcraQV iroha'
dvaiTLo^ yap koI ^evoi<; elvai deXw.
MH. ecrrat raB • aXXa iricrri'i el yivoiro fioi
rovTwv, exoLfM av irdvia irpo'i aidev KaXm.
AI. fiwv ov ireiroLOa'i ; fj ri aot ro Bvayepe'i ;
MH. TreTToiOa' lleXiov B' iyOpo^ iart fjLoi Bofiof
Kpe(ov re. tovtoi^ S' opKioia-i fiev ^vy€i<i
ayovcTiv ov fiedeh av e/c yaia'i efie,
x6yoi<; Be avfj,^a<i kuI Oewv ev(ofioro<i
^tXo9 yevoc av KdiriKrjpvKevfiaai,
ovK av irldoLo' rajxh fA,h yap da-Oevfj,
T0t9 8' o\/3o9 iarrl kuI S0/A09 Tvpavvifc6<i.
.0
Vf
■"h:
.t ■ ■,( i.\t
Al. TToWrju ^Xe^a?, w yuvai, Trpo/xrjdlav
dXK el coKei croi Bpdu raS', ovk d<f>[(TTa/xai>
ifioi T€ ^ap rdS* icrlv iKT^aXeaTara,
(Tfcijyjriv riv e^Opolf frot'i c^^ovTaSeiKVUvai,
TO (TOP T dpape fiaXXov e^rjyov 0€QV<i.
EuiupiDKs, 3Jedea, 720-745.
1. Oeihv. What is tlio construction ?
2. TTalBcov oiv.
To wliiit limitations is the attraction of
the rehitive subject ?
3. By what parts of the verb must jv fit) be followed ?
With what diftorcnco in si<^nifioation ?
4. avTi). Give the force. Quote a passage in which
«jose is similarly used.
5. aTTaWdaa-ov TroSa. What is the construction ?
6. Give different readings of line : liyovaiv ov, &c.
7 iva)fJiOTo<i OVK dvrriOoio. Give a different reading,
and translate accordingly.
8. i^ijjov. Give corresponding Latin phrase.
9. What idea did the Greeks connect Avith TvpavvQ<i ?
II.
1. What extant specimen of a complete trilogy ?
2. Explain the terms :^ 'yopov Bih6vai, eKKVKXrjfia, irapaa-
KTjvia, e^apxof, dv/xiXrj, ovBev irpo'i Aiovvcrov.
3. Give a scale of the Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic.
4. What is meant by the qnasi-c(C8ura ?
5. Account for the popularity of Euripides in the middle
ages.
III.
Translate :
"H re Twv iTrnrjBeioiv TrapaKOfiiBrj ck t^? Eu/3o/a9,
irporepoviK rov 'Q-pwirov nard yrjv Bed r^? Ae^eXeta?
Odaaov ovaa, Trepl ^ovvlov Kara OdXaaaav 7ro\uT€\^«?
iyiyvero- rwv re irdvrwv o/xoico^ iiraKrcav iBecro rj ttoXi^,
Kaldvrl roy rroXi^ elvai (fipoupiov Karia-rr]. Trpo? yap ry
irrdX^ei ri]v fiev rjfiipay Kara BiaBoxrjv ol 'A67)vaio(,
(pvXdaaoirre';, t>ju Ot i/vktu Kal ^vfiiravre'i irXrjv rm
I'mricoVy ol fih ij> ottXok ttov, oi S' M rov relxpv<i, Koi
6ipov<i KoX x^tfi^vo'i iraXaLTrtopovvTO. fi&Kiara 8' aifrov<{
iirie^ev on hvo iroX^fiov^ afia elyov, kuI ^9 <f>i\ovetKlai>
KaOia-Taa-av roiavrrjv tju rrplv yevecrOai rjiricTTqaev dv 749
aKoyaa<i. ro yhp avTov<{ 7ro\iopKovfx,€vov<; iTrlTCLxia-fMi^
VTTO UeXoTrovvrja-ifov fi7]8^ W9 aTroaTrjvai e/c 2t/ce\(a9.
aXXd CKCt XupaKova-aij toj avro) rpoTrrp avmroXLopKav,
TToXiv ovSh eXdaata avrrjv <ye Ka& auTfjv Trjq 'KdrjvaitaVy
Kol rov irapdXoyov roaovTOv Troiya-ai rot? "EXXr)(n rfit
hvvdiiem koX roXfi7]<i, oaov kut' apx^^ rov iroXefiov ol
fihiviavrov, oi hk hvo, oi 8e rpicov -ye erwj/, ovBeU irXeio)
Xpovov, iuo/Mi^ov Trepioiaeiv avrov^, el oi UeXoTrovvijfTioi
€<T^dXoieu 69 Tr;y x^P^^^ ^'^'^^ eret eTnaKaiBeKaTfp fier/i
rr}v TrpMTrjv €afioXr]v riXOov e9 ^iKeXlav, rjBr) rrp TroXefitp
Karh irdvra Terpvxo>fiivoi, koX TroXefiov ovBev iXdaaco
nrpocravelXovTO rov irpoTepov v7rdpxovTo<i iK IleXo-
'7ropi/i]aov.
TiiucYDiDES, B. "VII., ch. 28.
1. ^DpayTTov. State its geographical position.
2. Karct 7?}9. What other reading ?
3. i(f) o7rAof9, &c. What is the construction ?
4. Distinguish the meanings of eVt according to the case
it governs.
5. Parse Kadearaaav, d-TrocTTrjvat, iXdtra-a, irepLolaeiv,
irpoaaveCXovTo.
6. AeKeX€la<i. What peculiar privilege was accorded to
the Deceleans during the Peloponnesian war ? For what
reason ?
-t I
■;i.^-
>j^
IV.
1. Give the names of the five parts of Syracuse. By
what Roman general was it taken?
2. What incident is sciid to have inspired Thucydides
with the desire of becoming a historian ?
3. Why was he banished ?
^>. ;
Tra
fen
nn\\)tvuit^} of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
,» * *
LATIN.
Examiners:
J Rev. John McCaul, LL.D.
X Thomas Moss, M.A.
'■«r
I.
Translate :
Da testem Romae tam sanctum, quara fuit hospes
Numinis Idsei ; procedat vel Numa vel qui
Servavit trepidam flagranti ex redo Minervam :
Protinus ad censum, de moribus ultima fiet
Qugestio : " quot pascit servos ? quot possidet agri
Jugera? quam multa magnaque paropside coenat?"
Quantum quisque sua nummorum servat in area,
Tantum habet ct fidei. Jures licet et Samothracum
Et nostrorum aras ; contemnere fulmina pauper
Creditur atque Deos, Dis ignoscentibus ipsis.
Quid ? quod matcriam prsebet causasque jocorum
Omnibus hie idem, si foeda et scissa lacerna.
Si toga sordidula est et rupta calceus alter
Pelle patet : vel si, consuto vulnere, crassum
Atque recens linum ostendit non una cicatrix.
Nil habet infelix paupertas durius in ee,
Quam quod ridiculos homines facit.
Juvenal, Sat. 111., 137-153.
1. Write explanatory notes on hospes Numinis Idcei^ oui
servavit to Minervam^ and et Samothracum to aras.
i i'l
i ii
ti; ;:,
V •:!
2. Jures. Why in subjunctive? Distinguish (Bde and
cedibua, sordida and sordidula, alter and alius.
3. Give a list of Latin authors of Epic, Dramatic, Lyric,
and Satiric poetry, introducing dates where you can.
IL
Translate :
Consumptls opibus vocem, Damasippc, locasti
Sipario, clamosuin agcros ut Phasiua Catulli.
Laurcolum vclox ctiam bene Lcntulus cgit,
Judice me dignus vera cruce. Ncc taiiicn ipsi
Ignoscas populo : populi frons durior hujus,
Qui scdct ct spcctat triscurria patriciorum,
Planipcdcs audit Fables, ridcrc potest qui
Mamercorum alapas. Quanti sua funera vendant,
Quldrcfort? Vonduut nullo cogonte Nerone,
[Noc dubitant colsi pr;\!foris venderc ludis.]
Finge tamen gladios indo, atquo bine pulpita pone :
Quid satins ? jNIortoin sic quisquam cxliorruit, ut sit
Zclotypus Thymcles, stupidi colloga Corintlii?
Ecs baud niira tamcii, citharcTodo Principe, mimus
Nobilis. IT:\}c ultra quid crit, nisi ludus? Et illud
Dcdecus urbis babes: iico niirmillonis in arinis,
Ncc clypeo Gracchum pugnantcm aut falce supina.
Juvenal, Sat. VIIL, 185-201.
Write explanatory notes on sipario, FJiasma Catulli,
Laureolum, 2^l<-^nipcdes, pra'toris liulis, pulpita, citharaido
Principe, hcne ultra quid erit, nisi ludus, mirmillonis and
falce supina.
III.
Translate :
Nullas Gormanorum populis urbes babitari satis no-
tum est ; ne pati quidcm inter se junctas sedes. Colunt
discreti ac divcrsi, ut fons, ut campus, ut nemus placuit.
Vicos locant non in nostrum morcm, eonnexis ct coliaj-
rentibus redificiis : suam quisquo domum spatio circum-
dat, sive adversus casus ignis remcdium, sive inscitia
jedificandi. No cremcntorum quidcm apud illos aut
tegularum usus : materia ad omnia utuntur informi, et
citra speclem aut dulcctatioiiem. Quiedam loca dili-
gentius illinunt terra ita pura ac splendentc, ut picturam
ac lineamenta colorum imitentur. Solent ct subterraneos
: i
specus aperiro, oosque raulto insuper fimo onerant, suf-
fugium liiemi ct rcccptaculum frugibus,'^quia rigorem
frigorum cjusmodi locis molliunt. Et si quando hostis
advcnit, apcrta populiitnr, abdita autcm ot defossa aut
ignorantur, aut eo ipso fallunt quod quocrenda sunt.
Tacitus, Germania, ch. 16.
1. Gcrmanorum popuUs. Give the names of some, and
state their positions.
2. Fail. Why in infinitive ? Inscitla. In what case ?
Citra. What is the meaning? SiiffiKjlum. What is the
construction ?
3. Give the names of Latin historians after Tacitus.
IV.
Translate :
Ipsi Britanni delcctum ac tributa ct injuncta im-
perii muncra impigrc obeunt, si injuria) absint: has
{K?gro tolerant, jam domiti ut parcant, nondum ut ser-
vianfc. Igitur primus omnium Romanorum divus Ju-
lius cuin exercitu Britanniam ingressus, quanquam pro-
spera pugna terruerit incolas ac litore potitus sit, potest
vidori ostendisso posteris, non tradidisse. Mox bella
civil ia, et in rem publicam versa princioum arma, ac
longa oblivio Britannioc otiam in pace. ' Consilium' id
divus Augustus vocabat, Tiberius procceptum. Agitasse
Caium Ca3sarem do intranda Britannia satis constat, ni
velox ingenio, mobilis pocnitentia), et ingontes adver'sus
Germaniam conatus frustra fuissent. Divus Claudius
auctor operis, transvectis Icgionibus auxiliisque et as-
sumpto in partem rerum Vespasiano ; quod initium
venturo3 mox fortune fuit. Domita) gentes, capti ref^es
et monstratus fatis Vespasianus. '^ '
Tacitus, Agrieola, ch. 13.
TV
To
1. In what years did Julius Caesar invade Britain ?
what part of it were his operations limited ?
2. What relationship existed between Julius Caesar and
Augustus, and what between Augustus and Tiberius ? Wh
was Caius Ca3sar ? IIow was he related to Tiberius and
how to Claudius ? What other Roman Emperors, besides
Claudius, were in Britain ?
3. Give examples of the government of the genitive bv
adjectives, verbs, and adverbs.
k i'Sf
^ v-nr
m
Tram
mni\>tvms! of Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GREEK.
HONORS.
"* :t!!
Examiners : \ S^^' ^""'Z McCaul, LL.D.
) Thomas Moss, M.A.
I-
Translate :
TO irav 8' a^' 'EWaSo? aXa^ avvopfiivoiq
irevOeia rXi](nKdp8Lo<i
oofiwv eKeia-Tov irpeirei,
rnroWa yoOv Oiyiydvet Trpo? ^irap-
ot><; /Jt,ev yap Ti<i eirefiylrev
olBev dprl Bk (fxor&v
rev^T} KoX cnroho^ ek eKciarov B6fwv<: d<f>iKV€iTat.
o 'XpvaafiotjSo^i S' "Apr}<i aco/iidTCOv
teal ra\avrovxo<i iv fid')(rj 8opo<:
irvpcddev ef 'IXt'oy
<j)i\ot,<TL Trefiirei j3apv
y^yjxa SvaSdKpvTov dv-
rrjvopot; cnroSov ye/jil-
^(ov \e^r)Ta<; evOerov^.
(Trevovai 8' ev Xejovre^ avZpa top fiev w?
fidxv^ iBpiq' rov 8' iv (J3oval<i /caXw? ireaovr
aWorpia^: 8tal yvvaiKo^. rdBe atyd ti<; fiaO-
Kei. J>eovephv 8' inr' dXyo^ ^p^rei irpoBUoL^ 'ArpetSa/?.
OL b avTov irepl rel)(p<i
urjKa^ 'I\ta3o9 yd<;
ePfiopjfiot^ Karixovaiv iyOpd 8' '^-xovra^, ^Knvirev^
^apela 8' daTcop (^dri<i ^vp kotw ''
8r)fioKpdvrov 8' dpd^ ripei xp^o^'
iEsoHiLus, Affammnon, vv. 429-457.
> .11
11
! I
is;
■ *
■■' *
■ ..I
1. TO Trdv. What is the construction ? Give the Latin
equivalent. In what other sense does iEschylus use the
phrase ?
2. diyydveo. Of what Latin word the probable root ?
8. revxv* Give different translations.
4. ^apu. (Line 441.) What other reading ?
5. Xe^rjTa^ €v0eTov<;. Mention another reading. Which
do you prefer, and why ?
6. When do the tragedians use a masculine adjective or
participle with a feminine noun ?
7. Scan and give the metrical names of the first seven
and the last three lines.
IL
Translate :
dW' ifjLov eK TovB^ €pvo<i aepdev,
Tr)v TroXvKXaurrjVT Icfyiyiveiav,
a^ia hpd(Ta<i d^ia Trdaywv
[irjiZev iv"AiZov fieyaXav)(€LT(o,
^l(f)0Br]\7)Tfp
OavuTcp Tlara<i airep rjp^ev.
-^scHYLUS, Agamemnon, vv. 1525-1530.
1. re. What is the force ? What distinction between the
use of re and Kai as copulatives by the poets ?
2. Tjp^ev. Discuss the etymology of this word.
IIL
Translate :
aWa T et) Bpav <j>7]aiv, vfxa<i S' ovk ayeiv Ta<; '^fiepaq'
ovBev op6(o<i, aW av(o re koX Karco KvBotBorrav'
(oar dnreiXelv (f)r]cnv avrff roix} 6eov<i iKaaroTe
-qviK av y^evadSiai Belirvov, KaTriwaiv otKaBe,
Trj'i eoprrji; /mtj rv^^ovres Kara Xoyov twv rjp,epSiV.
Kad' OTav Oveiv Berj, arpe^Xovre koI BiKatere'
TToXXaKL^ 8' rj/jLwv dyovrojv rwv Oewv diTaariav,
r^VLK av 'irev6o)p,ev rj rov Mejivov rj 'S.apirTjBova,
a-irevBed' vpieU koX yeXar' dvO' Siv Xa^^cDv 'Tirep^oXo^i
T«Tec L€onLLvnunvf7.v. ifnnreiff iit^ 'nuMv t'^«" "'^rTsM
rov (TTeipavov d(f)r}pedT]' /moXXov yap ovtiv^ elaerai
Karb. aeXrivrjv m dyeiv XPV "''0^ ^lov Ta<i ij/juipaij.
• Aristophanes, JSuhes, vv. 614-626
i I ,'
1. Explain the following terms in the Athenian calendar :
IJLrjve<i irXripeUi firjve'^ kolXoi, firjv €/M^o\ifiaio<iy hevrepa lara-
fiivov, kvveaKaiSeKaeTTjpi^;, evq koL vea,
2. Give the rule for reducing a date given in Olympiads
to the year B. C.
3. i€poixvi]ixove<i. State what you know of their functions
and duties.
4. T^<? eopTi]^ Tvxovre'i. On what principle is the genitive
here used ?
5. Translate and write notes upon —
2TP. Kol firjv odev ye Trpwrov rjp^djxeaOa XoiZopelaOai
iyoi <}>pdaoi' VetSr^ yap elaTKOfieO' , wairep tore,
irpoiTov fiisv avTov ttjv \vpav Xa^ovr iycb ^fceXevaa
daat ^ificovlBov fiiXa, rov KpLov, &)<? iTreyOr).
o 8' evOiwi dpyalov elv €(f)a(TKe rb KiOapi^eiv
aBeiv re irlvovO , warrepel Ka^pvij yvvalic dXoxxrav.
ARisTOpnANES. 1353-1358.
IV.
1. What were the modes of effecting a change of scenery
on the Greek stage ?
2. What are monodies in Greek plays ?
3. Give a scale of the Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic.
4. What proofs are there that the language of ^schylus
was affected by his residence in Sicily ?
5. Explain the proverbial phrase : ovhe ra rpia Xrija-i-
yppov ytyvcoaKei^.
6. Who is conjectured to have been represented by X6705
dBiKd ? On 'what ground ?
7. When must the fifth foot of the Tragic Trimeter
Acat. be an Iambus ?
8. What verses are called EpicKoriamhie ? What
Prosodiac ?
9. Where is dv placed in the apodosis of a sentence ?
10. What prepositions are used after comparatives to ex-
press (1) a preference in general ; (2) a choice ; (3) excess ?
11. Discuss the question : Was the middle comedy a dis-
tinct species ?
.'dtCSl
■M
[
■(I
s|i
.'if
i
V.
Translate :
Tlepl hk Trpo^rjfidr^v koX Xvcrecov, iK irSatov re Kal
TToicou &v ecScov ecv, ^8e eecopova, y^votr' &v <f>avep6v.
t^irel yap eart fi,.fivr>l^ o ttoitjt,)^, &airep hv ,) K^ypLo^
rov apc0p,ov, eu re deL m yhp ola ,}., r) ^larJ^ old ^aa,
Kac BoKec .; ola ehac Bee- TaOra 8' e^ayy^XXerL xJec, ^
Kal yXcorruKi KaifxeracfiopaU. Kal TroXXd miOv -n/? xhed
e(Tri.Ac8o,xepydpravra rol, irotr^ral,. Upb^ S^ roOroc,
ov^ ,/ avrvopeorv<i earc rPi, 'jroXcrcKp),^ Kal rP), TroirjriKrj^.
Ayry, Be r^^ 7roir,TiK>),8nr) .) dpapiia. ^ p.kv ydp Kad'
avr^jv, ,jBe Kard crvfx^e^rj.^^,' EJ ^^.^ ^^ 7rpoec\,ro
fiiM^aadai Kar uBvvafxuiv. alrfj^ ,) dfiaprla. el Bi r6
TrpoeXeaeac p,r, opOcb,, dXXd rhv X-rrirov dfi<pco rd BePid
irpo^e^X^Kora, ^ rh jcaff Udarr,, ri^vvv dfj^prrjU,
olovro Kara carpcKrjv ^ dXX^v ri^vv^, ^ dBvv.zra ^eiroin
rac onoLaovp, ov KaO eavrtjv. "Hare Bel rd ^'^r.rLfirjaara
ev Tot? -rrpo^Xijfiaa-iv €k rovrtov eTnaKOTrovrra X{,eiv
npcorov fxevyap, av rd TrpS^ avr'rjv r^v reyvr^v dB<>vara
Treiroirjrai, i^ixaprrjrai. 'AW ipOm evot. el rv^ydvoc
rov reXov, rov a{,rf T6ydp reXo^ ecpnrar eloiirco,
eKTrXrjKriKcorepoi^y ayro 7) dXXo ttoioc fiipo,. UapdBayaa
V rov E,Kropo, Buo^c,. El p^hroi rh reXo, ^ p^dXXov^
Vrrov epeBexero virapyeiv, Kal r.rd r^v irepl ro{,rJv
rexvii}v tjfiaprtjraif ovk opOw^.
Aristotle, Poetics, ch. 25.
1. T% vtroKpLriKij^. What other readino- ?
• 2. oirotaovv. What is the Latin equivalent ?
3. What is Aristotle's idea of the proper function of the
chorus { Quote the opinion of Horace upon this subject.
^ 4. Explain the terms : K^fip.o'i—ardtTipov-^'jrepnTheia-
avayv(api(n<i — 'yPP'^l'-"' — o^Sftsi.
5. What objection to Aristotle's derivation of /cw/^^Sra ?
<Siini\i(ViOiUj,) of ^oronta
M
ANNUAF, KXAMINATIONS: 18(iJ.
CANDIDATKS FOll li.A.
GREEK.
IIONOUS.
TT, . f IJ.HV. JOH?
Examiners ; •( n, . , a
\ THOMAS j>
N MoCaul, LL.D.
Mors, M.A.
1.
Translate.
Zrp- 7
e7re(f)ui ol avv a\\nXo(f)ovia 7e'i^os' upijiov
\€i(f>Oq Be Hepa-avBf)o<; epnrevTi IloXweiKei, veoL<i iv aiOXoL^i
iv fid)(^ai<i Te TroXefiov
Ti/X(OfjLevo'i, ^A^paari^tw 6d\o<^ upw^ov hufioi^.
o9ev cnrepfiaTO'i ey(oi>ri pt'^av. Trpiirei rov AlvijcnSd/jLou
ijKoy/xloiV le jxeXkwv Xvpav t<? rvyy^aucfiev.
*0Xv/jb7ria fjiev <ydp avro^ 'Aj/r. 7'*
^epa<i eSeKTo, TIvOmul S' 6fiuK\apov e? u8eX(f)eou
^ladjxol re kolvoX X.dpiTe<i uvOea TeOpiTTTrcov BvcoBeKaBpoficov
dfyayov. to Be tv)(cIv
TreipdapLevov dya)via<; TrapaXvei Bvcr^povav.
6 fxav 7rXovTO<; uperal^ BeBatBaX/xeuof (pepei tw-v re koX twv
Kaipov, (Sadelav v'Ke-)(Uiv /xepi/xvav uyporepav,
dartip dpl^riXo<;, t-TUfxcoraTov 'Ett. 7'.
uvBpl (peyyo^' ev Be pav e^wv ri<i olBev ro /neXXov,
on OavovTcov puev ivOdK avri'i uirdXapiVot c^pevc^
irotva<i eriaav, ra S" iv raBe Ato? dp^a
dXirpa Kara >yd<i BiKd^et, Tt? €)(j9pa
\6yov (f>pd(raL<i uvdyKO..
Xcrov Be vvKTeaaiv alel., "Zrp. B\
Xaa 8' ev dfMepaL<; deXiov e)(^ovTe<i aTrovearepov
iaXol BeKovrat /Blotov, ov ')(d6va rapd(TaovTe<i iv xep6<i dicfjLa
ovBe irovrtov vZwp
K€ivav irapa Blanav' aWa irapa fxev Ti/xioi^
' I
t> .11
•m
'I
II"
'jflH
I'ii
1
Be&Vf oiTiV€<{ eyaipov evopKlaii;^ aBaKpw vlfiovrdt
alwva' rot 8' inrpocroparov oK^eovri rrrovov.
oaoL 8' eTuXfiaaav €<TTpl<t Avr, S*.
eKarepcodt fieivavTa inro Trd^trav aZUwv e-)(€iv
y\rv)((iv, treiKav ^io<i ohov irapa KpovovTvpaiV ^vda (lUKapoiv
vdcrofi (CKt-aviSe^
avpai •wepiTTveoKTiv, avOe^o, hk 'x^pvaov ^Xeyei,
TU fiev ')(^p(To6ev air dyXaMU SevSpeiov, vBuip 8' liWa (^ep^ei,
on/xoiai TMV %fc'pa? dvaTrXeKovn koX Ke(f}aXa<i
pouXat? ei' opOalcTL 'Pa8afJ.uv0uo<i, 'J'jTT. S'.
ov Traji]p H')((£i Kp6vo<i eroifMov nvroy TrdpeSpov,
TToai^ 6 TrdvTMU 'Pea? vrreprarov k'^oiaa'^s Opovov.
Pindar, Olymp. II., vv. 41-77.
1. epirrevTL. P;irsc. What other roiuling ? Give the
perfect passive.
2. iv p.d-)(aL^. Explain the allusion.
3. odev. Quote a passage in which undc is similarly used.
4. exovri. What part of the verb ? AVhat other reading?
5. Koival Xaptre?. Give diftcrent interpretations.
6. dpi^TJXoq. What is Buttman's theory as to the root of
this word ?
7. e5 Be fjiiv e^cou. Mention another reading. With
what word in the sentence would you couple ev, and why?
8. iarph eKarepwO. From what source is Pindar sup-
posed to have borrowed this idea ?
II.
1. Quote Horace's criticism on Pindar's style.
2. What is the Schema Pindaricum ? To what case is
its use in Attic Greek restricted ?
3. Explain Pindar's use of different dialectical forms of
the same word.
4. Classify the odes according to the musical mode for
which they are best adapted.
5. How does Pindar's treatment of the ancient myths
differ from that of the tragedians .-*
6. Who introduced the present division of the odes ?
111.
Translate i
Ov fii)V aXX* ^-rfX Tr;y Kpartcrrr^v fintpav ^nix^i rwv
liWcov TO 'jrpoiTov. xeyo) Se ro /j.e'ya\()(f>vt-^, XPV unvraiiffa,
Kol el B(opr}Toi/ TO Trpay/xa paWov t) kttjtov, 6fi(o<! Kad
oaov olov re, Tav '»/^t»;^a'» avarpe^eiv •npo'i to. fieyeOi), Kal
tixTirep eyKV/j,ova<; uel iroieiv yevvaUw irapaar/ifiaTO^.
rtra, ^ryo-fts', rpuirov ; yey pa(f)d 'Jtvv koX CTepwOi to
roiomov vyjro'i fieya\o^poavvi)<i a7r>;;^r;/ia. oOev koX (f)omi<{
hiva Oavfid^eTai irore ylriXij Kaif eavrijv »; evvoia hi avrb
ro fi€ya\6<f)pov, ox??/ tou AinvTO<i eV NeKvia aKorri) p-eya
Kal rravru^ vyp-ifKorepov \oyov. TrptoTov ovv ro e^ ov
ylverai, rrpovTroriOeaOai rrdvrw^ dvayKoluv, W9 e^eiu Bet
rov u\7)6f} pyropa f.u) raire^vov (f)p6v7jfia Kal uyevve<i.
ovhe yap olov re, fiiKoa Kal BovXoTrpeTrf) (f)povovvra^ Kal
eTrirrjBevovra'i irap hikov rov Biov 6avfiaar6u rt Kal rov
'jravrb'i alo)uo<i l-^eveyKelv ci^iov fieydXoi Be ol \6yoi
rovTCOv, Kara ro eUb^, (ov uv efi^piOeU Sicnv al evvoiai.
ravrp Kal ek roi/^ fidXiara (ppovqfiaria'i ifiTriTrrei ra
VTrepcfivd' 6 yap rro llapfievuovi, (f)i)cravri, ,,''7''^ H'^^
ypKeaSrjv [et 'AXe|aTyS/3osM'//i*?''/' Kr47co vrj Aui,"
eiiTOiv^ " el llap/jieviQ)V yfirj''" to avrov fieya\6(f)pov BeU-
vvcnv w? Kal rb ^Ofirjpov Trapopil^ei ijLeya\o(f)ve<; kv ri^t
Ovpavip iari'ipi^e Kdprj Kal enl y^Oovl /QatVei.]
TO eV ovpavbv dirb y?)<i Buinrrjfia' Kal rovr av
ecTTot Tt9 ov fidXXov rTj'i "E()i8o<i ?/ 'Ofjbypov fierpov. «S
uvofiotov ye rb 'llaioBeiov tVt t»}s" 'A'xXvoi;, eXye 'llaibBov
Kai rijv 'Acr7ri'8a Oereov
rtj^ e/c ixev pivuv fiv^ai peov
oil ydp Beivbv iirolrjae rb e'iB(o\ov, dXXd fiiarjrov.
LONGINUS, S. IX.
1. 'H toO Al'avro^} (Tiaymfj. Quote other instances of
sublimity of the same kind.
2. Teypa(f)d rrov, &c. Mention different explanations of
the syntax of this passage. Which do you prefer?
3. ovBe ydp olov re [iiKpd. Cite parallel passages.
4. TOt? roiovTOiq eXaTTcofiaariv hTri-)(eip(fiv o/nojii avroOev
6 K.ai,KiXio<i ev Tot<f vrrep Av<tiov avyypajifiaaLV dired-
apprjcre rcZ rravrl Avaiav dfieivo) YlXdroiVOf dTro(f)rjvaa6ai, *
Bvc7t rrddeaL '^^prjadfievo^i uKplroi'i' <f)iX(bi/ ydp rbv Avaiav
0)9 ovB^ avrb<i avrbv 6/j.q)<; p^aXXov fiiael rut rravri IlXa-
rwva t) Avaiav (piXel'
Translate and give another reading of this passage.
f«|
'.*.:!
f
i
sWa
IV.
1. What objection is there to the form of the name
Donysiiig Longinus ?
2. When should an orator, accoraing to Longinus, imitate
Demosthenes, and ^vhon Cicero ?
3. Explain the terms: " epanaphora," "litotes," " me-
tonymia," "polyptoton."
V.
Translate :
Tf A. yfravco jxev eywye,
XaOiTTovov 8' oSvvCiv ovT evBodev ovre Ovpadev
eari /not e^avvcrai /3iotop. roiavra vefxei Zeu?.
IIP.
W TVat TTOV TOT et
(TTp. y .
TaBe fie 7n8e ixe irp6a\aBe KovAcora'i.
6 e, 10) 10) caLfjLOV.
OpcoTKeL 8' nv, OpcoaKct BeiXaia avr. 3.
BioXova i}ixa<i
a7roTL/3aTO<i dypt'a voao^.
0) IlrtXX«<f IIrt\Aa?, ToSe pi! av Xfo/Bdrai' iod iral
rov ^VTop OLKTe'ipn'q dveTrl^Bovov elpvaov eyyo^,
iralcrov epd<i vtto KXfjSo<i- ukov 8' a%o?, m //,' e^oXcoaev
<Ta fidrrjp dOeof, rdv wS' eirlBoip^i ireaovcrav
ainco'i, coB' aihox, co^ p' M\ea€v. S) y\vKV<i"AiBa<i,
(h Aio'i av6aip,ani, dvr. y'
evvaaov evvaa-ov wKVirera txopw
TOP p.e\€()P (pdiaa'i.
XO. k\vov(t t(l>pi^a ruaSe (7vp(f)opd^, (jjiXai,,
dpatcTO'i, oia<i olo<i mp iXavperai.
HP. (0 TToXXd B)) KoX Oeppd kov Xoyrp kuku
KOI, X^pai KoX putroLcn p,o)^0)j(Ta<i eyco'
Kovrra) tolovtov out dKOiTi<i i) Ai6<i
7rpovdi]K€P ovd' aTvypo'i XivpvaOev^ ipol^
olop ToK i) BoXM7n<i OtVew? Koprj
KaOijyjrev copioU 'Epipvcop
vcpaPTOP dp,(f)i/3Xi]aTpov, (o Bi6XXvp,tu.
Sophocles, TraoInmeB, vv. 1021-1052.
nni\}tvuit^ of s:otonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
CANDIDATES FOR JB.A.
GREEK.
HONORS.
/Thomas Moss, MA.
--'■tr ^1
I
Translate :
Toiydproi r'l rwv aveKTrlarm' kol inrpoaBo/o'/Tm' tV/)'
yficov^ ou jeyovcv ; ov <yap /3lov ye 'ij/jieU avOpoainvnp
(3e^i(t)Kafiev, aXV et'v TrapaSo^oXoylav rots; eaofievoi^ fied'
t}fia<; €(f}VfJ,cv' Ovx 6 fiev rwv lUpaMV ^aaCkeu^, 6 rov
Ada) Biopv^a^, 6 TOP 'FXKrjcnrovrov ^tv^aq, 6 yrjv koI
vSap Toix; "EX\')]va<; uItmu, 6 roKfiwv iv rah eTriaToXalf
ypd^eiv, on heaTTorti'; ecrriv diravroav dvOpdirrcov dj>
yXjov dvi6vro(; /xixpt Svofxivov, vvv ov irepX rov KvpLOf
erepwv elvat Siaycovl^erat, aXX' i^Sr} irepl tj}? rov (Tcof/,aro<i
cr(ori]pia(; ; koI rov<i avrov<i opM/xev rfj<; re So|j7? ravrr]<i.
KoX ri}<i eVi rou IJipatjv 7]y6/xoma^ rj^Kofievovii, oi koX to
ev Ae\0Oi9 lepbv r/XevOipwaav ; ^P)/3ai Se Sf/^ai, ttoXk;
darvyeircov, fxeO' i)fjLepav (jlluv etc yu-eo-r/? riy? 'EXXaSo?
dv^piraarac, el Kot Slkulox;, rrepl rcou oXwv ouSev opOaxi
^ovXevadfievoi, dXXa njv ye Oeo^Xd^eiav kuI rrjv d(f)po-
(TVV7]v ovK dv6pQ)'7rivco<i dXXa Bta/jiovlco^ Krija-d/xevot ;
AaKeoacfidviOL Be ol raXaiTrwpot, irpoaaylrd/juevot fiovov
rovrwv rwv irpayfidrwv e| dpxr]<i rrepl rrjv rov lepov Kara-
Xrjyjriv, ol rcov EXXtjvwv rrore d^Lovvre<i r]yeii6ve<i elvai,
vvv 6fi7]peva-ovre<; koI t/)? avfK^opd^ eTrtSet^tv TroLTjaofievot,
fieXXovcTiv to? AXe^avBpov dvaTrifnreadat, rovro ireKTo-
fievoL Kol avrol koX rj irarph. 6 re dv eKCtvco BoPm koX ev
rrt rov §enn.TnilVTn^ Ifm. rrrnnm^itf/nna-tinf iii^'wr\i,-,'^r"r' ■"%</J~5-r«
fxevoi.
iEsoHiNES, Contra Ctea,
i*".' *i4' *
1.1
1. 6 rwv Uepatov ^a(TiK€v<i, Who ?
2. AeX<;f)ot?, Mention any other celebrated oracles of
antiquity.
3. €K nea'qq. Distingnisli the meanings of of ira^ and
//eo-09, acoording to the position of tho article. What is the
meaning ot fieao<; TroXtr?;??
4. hatfioviw^. AVhat position did the haifiove^ occupy in
the Greek mythology.
5. ireiaofievoL. Parse.
G. TrepX Ti)v rov lepov KardXrjylnv. Explain tlie allusion.
7. Kpi9r]a6fievot. Mention and discuss another readino-.
II.
Translate :
BovXofiaL ro'ivvv ^iraveXOew e0' a rovrwv e^/)? eVo-
XiTevofiijv. KoX (TKoiretre iv tovtol<s ttuXlv a5, rL to rrj
TToXei ^eXri(TTov yv. 'Opwv yap m avSp€<; 'AOyvaloi,
TO vavTCKov vficoif KaraXvofievnv, koI rov'i fiev TrXovaiovi
areXet'i utto fiiKpcou dvaXwp.drwv ytyvoi-ievov^, toi»9 he.
fX€Tpia rjjiLKpa KeKjrjfievov^ twv ttoXitcov to, ovra diroX-
XvvTa<;, €Ti S' varepi^ovaav €K tovtcov ttjv ttoXiv twp
KaipMV, eOrjKa vdfiov KaO' ov tov<} fiev to, SUaia iroieiv
yvdyKuaa, rov^ 7rXovcriov<;, toi»? Be 7revr}Ta<i "Trava
dSiKovfiivovi, jfi TToXei S' o-rrep yv ;)^p?;crt/ift)TaTOi/, iv Kaipm
yiyveadat Td<i Trapacy/cevd'i eTrolyaa. Kal <ypa(f)€k rov
dycova tovtov ek v/J>a<; elcrTjkdov Kal direc^vyov, Kal to
fi€po<; TMV yjn'icfjfov 6 Buokcov ovk eXa^cv. Kalrot iroaa
XP^aia TOv<i ■))ye/ji6va<; twv crvfifiopiMv r/ tou? BevTepov^
Kal TpiTov<i oieadi fioi BiBdvat, toare /xaXiara fiev p)
Belvai rov vo/xov tovtov, el Be /i?;, Kara^aXovra edv cV
vTTcopoaia ; roaavr, m avBpe'f ^AOyvaloi, oaa oKvycraip!
tiv TTpof; vfid<i eliretv. Kal ram eiKOTo)^ eirparrov eKelvoi.
Demosthenes, p. 30.
1. Write notes upon: dreXeh—rMv KatpMV—ypa^ek—
TO fiepof; — yfr7)^a)V — (TVfipLopitov — p.dXiaTa p-ev — KarajSdX
Xovra — VTToypoaria.
2. Explain the phrases : dvBpidvra eKBiBovac Kara avyypa-
(f)r/v — •TTCptdvat XPW"''^"- ''"'? — ^i](f>ov^ riOtvai — evOvvwi tTnarj-
fxaivecrdai — dp^dfievo'i diro rivo<f.
III.
Translate :
KaiTot TauTr]<; rPj'i fie\€T7)<j /cal rr;? e7nfie\€ia<;. Ala-
XiVT), etvep tK '^vxv'i 8iicaia<i eyiryvero ml ra Tt]<i irarplho'i
GVfXfjiepovTa irporjprj/xii'rjt;, tov^ Kapirov^ eBet yevvaiov^
KaiKaXovg Kal wacnv ro^eX/'/xou? elvuL, (rviJ,fxaxM<i nrokediv,
iropov<i XPVf^"''roiv, e/jLTTopiou KaraaKevrjv, vofKov avfi<f>€-
povrwv deaei<i^ Toi<i airoheixOelcnv i^Ppoh ivavTico/jLara.
TovTwv yap uTravrcov ijv iv roh avM xpovoi<i efeTao-t?,
Kal e8a)K€v 6 irapekOwv XPovo<i 7roXXa<i /i7ro8ei^eL<i avBpl
koXm re KuyaOo), iv oh ovha^iov cri) cf^av/jaei yeyovox;, ov
7rpwT09, ov SevTcpo^i, ov rpiro^, ov rerapro^i, ov Tre/ATrro?,
ovx'cKTo'i, ovx oTToaroaovv. ov/cow eirl y oh r] iraTph
Tfv^dveTO. Th yap av/xfiaxia a-ov Trpd^avTO'i yiyove tt}
voXei ; T/'9 Be ^orjOeia 7) Krrja-i'i evvoLa<; rj Bo^rj^ ; rh Be
irpea^eia ; t/? BiaKovla cV 7)v t] iroXfi evTifiorepa ; ri
rS)V GLKeiwv rj rwv 'EWrjviKMV /cal ^eviKWV, oh eVecTTT;?,
€7r7)V(cp8(OTai ; irolai rpi/jpeiq ; irola ^ikij ; vrotot vecoa-
OLKoi ; rh eTria-Kevr] reix^v ; irolov lttttlkov , ti twv
diruvTuw (TV XPWtP'O^ el ; rh tj roh evvopoi'i r} Toh diro-
poL^ TToXiTiKi) Kal Koivt) /3o7]0eia xPVH'f^Tf^v ; ovBefiia.
Aw , 6) rdv, el fiTjBev tovtcov, evvotd ye Kal irpoOvfiia ;
Demosthenes, De. Cor.
1. e^era(n<;. Whence derived ? Explain tlic force.
2. ov irpano'i, ^e. Of what is this thouglit to be an imita-
tion ?
3. What is the general rule for the use of the negatives
ov and ^r; in objective sentences ?
4. When can w? be used for eh ?
5. w rav. Discuss the etymology.
IV.
1. On what grounds was the accusation of Ctesiphon based ?
2. Describe and distinguish elcrayyeXia and 7rpo^o\7].
3. Explain the meaning of Seisactlieia.
4. What was the Syracusan term for Ostracism ? AVhat
securities were there against the abuse of this system ?
5. Describe the duties and powers of the vofioOerai.
<•• ' • ■ '\
■■ii
^' Z\
m
W M 1
6. What is the broad distinction in meaning between the
present and aorist ? Illustrate by paraphrasing jpd^e and
ypaylrov.
7. What is the only word in which the temporal augment
is omitted in Attic prose ?
8. Give brief sketches of the political career and oratori-
cal characteristics of iEschines, Demades, Lycurgus and
Hyperides.
V.
Write in ordinary Greek, and translate :
ArA@HITTXHI
TONAAMnPOTATONAN0TnATON
THSEAAAAOSP0YfJ»IONctlIvTON
KAIAPEOriArEITHNIIEHAPIOT
llArOTBOTAHKAIIIBOTAHTnN
TP] AKOSiriNK AIOAHMOVOA©H
NAinNETNOUSENEKAKAIETEP
rESIASTIi:i;riEPITHNnOAINANE
iiTlISENIIPONOIAcMABIOTnOM
AAAOYXOTTOTAIAi'HMOTATOTKAI
ATIOKOMrmN.
Cinibevfiiitp of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Examiners • / ^^^- '^^^^ McCaul,
■^^'^^''^^^^•t Thomas Moss, M.A.
LL.D.
I.
His superioribusque illis equi adempti, qui publi-
cum equum liabebant, tribuque moti SBrarii omnes
facti. Neque senatu modo aut equestri ordine
regendo cura se censorum tenuit, nomina omnium
ex juniorum tabulis excerpserunt qui quadriennio
non militassent, quibus neque vacatio justa militiae
neque morbus causa fuisset : et ea supra duo millia
nominum in serarios relata tribuque omnes moti :
additumque tam tristi censorise notse triste senatua
consultum, ut ii omnes, quos censores notassent, pedi-
bus mererent mitterenturque in Siciliam ad Cannensis
exercitus reliquias, cui militum generi non prius quam
pulsus Italia hostis esset finitum stipendiorum tempus
erat. Quum censores ob inopiam serarii se jam loca-
tionibus abstinerent sedium sacrarum tuendarum curu-
liumque equorum proebendorura ac similium bis rerum,
convenere ad eos frequentes qui hastse hujus generis
adsueverant, hortarique censores ut omnia perinde
agerent locarent ac si pecunia in gerario esst : neminem
nisi bello confecto pecuniam ab serario petiturum esse.
Convenere deinde domini eorum, quos Tib. Sempro-
nius ad Beneventum manu emiserat, arcessitosque se
ab triumviris mensariis esse dixerunt ut pretia ser-
vorum acciperent : cseterum non ante quam bello con-
1^
i
iiiii I
11 i
i li
iKiilji !
fecto accepturos esse. Quum hsec incHnatio animorum
plebis ad sustinendam inopiam cerarii fieret, pecunige
quoque pupillarcs primo deinde viduarum coeptse con-
ferri, nusquam eas tutius sanctiusque deponere cre-
dentibus qui deferebant quam in publica fide. Inde
si quid emptum paratumque pupiliis ac viduis foret
a qusestore perscribebatur.
LiVY, xxiv., 18.
Write explanatory notes on publieum equum^ tribu
moti, cerarii, juniorum tabulis, lacatio, pedibus merer-
ent, Tiastse adsueverant, triumviris mensarm, peeunice
pupillares, a quceatore perscribebatur.
II.
Translate to potentiores :
Prseposuerat prsetorianis Publium Sabinum, a prse-
fectura cohortis, Julium Priscura turn centurionem:
Priscus Valentis, Sabinus Csecinse gratia pollebant.
Inter discordes Yitellio nihil auctoritatis. Munia
imperii Csecina ac Valens obibant, dim anxii odiis,
quse bello et castris male dissimulata pravitas amicorum
et fecunda gignendis inimicitiis civitas auxerat, dum
ambitu, comitatu, et immensis salutantiura agminibus
contendunt comparanturque, variis in hunc aut ilium
Vitellii inclinationibus. Nee unquam satis fida potentia,
ubi nimia est. Simul ipsum Vitellium, subitis offensis
aut intempestivis blanditiis mutabilem, contemnebant
metuebantque. Nee eo segnius invaserant domos, hor-
tos, opesque imperii, cum flebilis et egens nobiiium
turba, quos ipsos liberosque patriae Galba reddiderat,
nulla principis misericordia juvarentur. Gratum prim-
oribus civitatis etiam plebs approbavit, quod raversis
ab exilio jura libertorum concessisset, quanquam id
omni modo servilia ingenia corrumpebant, abditis
pecuniis per occultos aut ambitiosos sinus, et quidam in
^ domum Caesaris transgressi, atque ipsis dominis poten-
tiores.
Sed miles, plenis castris redundante mululudine,
in porticibus aut delubris et urbe tota vagus, non prin-
cipia noscere, non servare vigilias, neque labore
firmari : per illecebras urbis et inhgnesta dictu, corpus
otio, animum libidinibus imminuebant. Postremo, ne
salutis quidcm cura, mfamibus Vaticani locis magna
pars tetendit; unde crebrse in vulgus mortes. Et
adjacente Tiberi, Germanorum Gallorumque obnoxia
s, non priD-
morbis corpora fluminis aviditas et sestus impatientia
labefecit. Insuper confusus pravitate vel ambitu ordo
militise. Sedecira prsetorige, quatuor urbanse cohortes
scribebantur, quia singula millia inessent.
Tacitus, Hist, ii., 92-93.
1. Prsefectura cohortia. Explain.
2. Jura libertorum. What? Explain the remainder
of the sentence.
3. Principia. What ? Tetendit. What is the meaning >
4. Give an account of the cohortes prcetorice^ cohortes
urhancBy and cohortes vigilum.
6, Fluminis aviditas. Explain.
III.
Translate :
Tertio die inducta cognitio est, multis sermonibus et
vario rumore iactata, de lulii Tironis codicillis, quos
ex parte veros esse constabat, ex parte falsi dicebantur.
Substituebantur crimini Sempronius Senecio, eques
Roraanus, et Eurythmus, Caesaris libertus et procu-
rator. Heredes, quum Caesar esset in Dacia, com-
muniter epistola scripta, petierant, ut susciperet
cognitionem. Susceperat. Reversus diem dixerat :
et, quum ex heredibus quidam, quasi reverentia Eu-
rythmi, remitterent accusationem, pulcherrime dixerat
Nee ille Polycletus est, nee ego Nero. Indulserat
tamen petentibus dilationem ; cuius tempore exacto,
consederat auditurus. A parte heredum intraverunt
duo ; omnino postularunt, ut omncs heredes agere
cogerentur, quum detulissent omnes, aut sibi quoque
desistere permitteretur. Loquutus est Caesar summa
gravitate, summa moderatione: quumque advocatus
Senecionis et Eurythmi dixisset, suspicionibus relinqui
reos,_ nisi audirentur, Non cuo, inquit, an isti
suspicionibus relinquantur : ego relinquor. Dein, con-
versus ad nos : 'ETTiWao-^e, quid facere deheamus? Isti
enim queri volunt, quod sibi licuerit non accusare.
Tum ex consilii sententia iussit denuntiari heredibus
omnibus, aut agerent, aut singuli approbarent caussas
non agendi, alioqui se vel de calumnia pronuntiaturum.
Videsj quam honesti, quam severi dies, quos iucun-
dissimae remissiones sequebantur. Adhibebamur quo-
tidie coenae: erat modica, si principem cogites. In-
terdum aKpod/xaTa audiebamus: interdum incundis-
!^ '
.» :!
IP
liil
gimia sermonibus nox ducebatur. Summo die abe-
untibus nobis (tarn diligens in Cassare humanitas fuit),
xcnia sunt missa.
Pliny, EpiBt. vi., 81.
1. Explain the meaning of the passages in italics.
2. What were uKpoufiara ? What xenia ?
3. Compare the styles of Livy, Tacitus, and Pliny ; and
illustrate your statements by examples.
4. Draw up a short synopsis of the principal changes
made by the emperors, to the time of Hadrian, relative
to the senate, the consuls, the provinces, the taxes, and the
army.
IV.
Expand :
M'STATIOM-F-CL-PRISOO
LICINIOITALICO'LEGATOAVGVSTORVM
PR-PR-PROVCAPPADOCIAELEGAVGG.
PRPRPROV-BRITTANNIAE-LEGAVGG
PR-PRPROV-MOESIAESVPERCVRATORI
ALVEI-TIBERISETCLOACARVM-VRBISCOS
LEG-AVGPROV-DACIAELEG-LEG-XIII-GP.F.LEG-
LEG
XliriGEM-MARTIAEVICTRICIS-SACERDOTI-
TrriALI
FLAVIALI-PR-INTER-CIVESET-PEREGRINOS-TR-
PL-QVAEST
PROC-AVG-XX'IIEREDITATIVM-PROVNARBO-
NENSET AQVITAN
PR-EQ-ALAE- 1 PRC-RTRMIL LEG- 1 ADIYTR-P-F
ET-LEG XGPF
ET-LEG-IIII-GALLICAEPRAEFCOHlin-LIN-
GONVM-VEXILLOMIL
DONATOA-DIVOIIADRIANO-IN-EXPEDITIONE
IVDAICA
QCASSIVSDOMITIVS-PALVMBVS.
1. Distinguish AVG, AVGG, and AVGGG.
2. Explain SVPER.
3. What were the four great collegia sacerdotum ?
4. Explain TITIALI and FLAVIALI. Give other simi-
lar designations.
5. Write notes on XX'HEREDITATIVM and EXPEDI-
TION E'lVDAICA.
SUnCUevsfti) of ^Tovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18C4.
OANDJ DATES FOE B.A.
LATIN.
HONORS.
Examiners :i^Z'J''M ^'^m\' ^^'^^
\ Thomas Moss, M.A.
. -'1
I.
Translate :
Eu. lam quidcm licrcle te ad praetorem rapiam et
tibi scribam dicam,
nisi refers. Ly. Quid tibi ego referam ? Eu. Quod
subripuisti meum.
Ly. Subripui ego tuom ? unde? aut quid id est?
Eu. Ita to amabit lupitcr,
ut tu nescis. Ly. Nisi quidcm tu mihi, quid quaeras,
dixcris.
Eu. Aulam auri, inquam, te reposco, quam tu con-
fcssus's mihi
te abstulisse. Ly. Ncque edepol ego dixi, neque
feci. Eu. Negas ?
Ly. Pernego imo : nam neque ego aurum, neque
istaec aula quae siet,
scio nee novi. Eu. Illam, ex Silvani luco quam
abstuleras, cede!
I, refer ! dimidiam tecum potius partem dividam.
Tametsi fur mihi es : molestus non ero. Fur. I, refer.
Ly. Sanua tu non eSj qui furem mo voces - co te
EucliO)
t
J*
•
•'
r
ii ni
de alia ro roscisse ccnsui, quod ad mcd attinet.
Magna est [res], quam ego tecum otiose, si otium eat
cupio loqui. '
Eu. Die bona fide: tu id aurum non subripuisti?
Ly. Bona.
Eu. Nequo scis, quis id abstulcrit? Ly. Istuc quo-
quo bona. Eu. Atque id si scies,
qui abstulcrit, mihi indicabis ? Ly. Faciam. Eu.
Nequo partem tibi
ab 00, qui(iui est, indo posccs, nequo furcm cxcipies ?
Ly. Ita.
Eu. Quid, sifallis? Ly. Turn mo faclat, quod volt,
magnus lupiter !
Tlautus, AuMaria, iv., 10.
1. In what metro ? Give a scale of it. Scan first ten
verses. What other metres, besides Iambic and Trochaic,
are found in Plautus ? What was the Saturnian measure ?
What examples of it? On what grounds has its existence,
as a species of metre, been denied ?
2. Explain the use of d paragogic; give examples of
peculiarities of elision, of the contraction of dissyllables, and
trisyllables, of dincrosis, and of quantity, exceptional with
reference to rules and the usage of other authors.
3. Draw up an account of Roman comedies, with refer-
ence to the varieties of such compositions, the occasions on
which they were represented, the actors, the music, the time,
and the place, especially the peculiarities of tho Roman
theatre as compared with the Grecian, and give a list of
authorities on tho general subject.
II.
Translate ;
Posterius res inventast aurumque reportum.
Quod facile ct validis et pulchris dempsit honorem :
Divitioris enim sectam plorumque secuntur
Quamlubet et fortes et pulchro corpore creti.
Quod siquis vera vitam ratione gubernet,
Divitiao graudcs homini sunt vivere parce
Aequo animo : nequo enim est umquam penuria parvi.
At claros homines voluerunt so atque potentes,
Ut fundam-ento stabili fortuna maneret
Et placidam possent opulcnti dcgere vitam,
Nequiquam, quoniam ad summum snccctlero honorcm
Ccrtantcs iter infcstum focoro viai,
Et tamcn o summo, quasi fulmcn, clolcit ictos
Invidia intcrdum contcmptira in Tartara tactra ;
Ut satius multo iam sit parero quictura
Quam rcgcro impcrio res vello ot re^na tencro.
I'roindc sine in cassum dcfessi sangiiinc sudent,
Angustum per iter luctantes ambitionis ;
Quandoquidom sapiunt alicno ex ore petuntquo
Res ex auditis potius qnam sensihus ipsis,
Nee magis id nunc est ncquo crit mox quam fuit ante,
Invidia quoniam, ceu fulmine, summa vaporant
Plorumquo et quae sunt aliis magis edita cumque.
LUCUKTIUS, V. 1111-1133.
1. To wliat cause do you ascribe the uncommon variety of
readings in Lucretius ? What are the theories of Eiclistaedt
and Forbigcr V What doubts as to the orthography that
sliould be adopted in his poem ? How is this question affec-
ted by the consideration of the ago in -which ho lived ?
Give examples of archaisms that have been admitted in the
best editions.
2. State briefly what you know of the most ancient extant
specimens of the Latin language, and give examples of their
peculiarities in declension, inflexion, and use of consonants
and vowels.
3. Give an outline of the life of Lucretius, citing authori-
ties ; and state his views as to creation, sensation, disease
and death. What are the Epicurean tenets as to the exis-
tence of the Gods, divine providence, religion, and true
piety ? What was the Atomic theory, and whence derived ?
III.
Translate :
Nempo hicc assidue : jam clarum mane fenestras
Intrat et angustas extendit lumine rimas,
Stertimus, indomitum quod dcspumarc Falernum
Sufficiat quinta dum linea tangitur umbra.
" En quid agis ? siccas insana Canicula messes
Jamdudum coquit, et patula pecus oranc sub ulmo est. 'v.
Unus ait comitum. "VerumneV itane ? ocius adsit
Hue aliquis ! nemon' ?" Turgoseit vitrca bilis,
Finditur, Arcadise pecuaria rudere dicas.
I:
•'I
'■-11
.„> -♦
, w
is I
Jam liber ot bicolor positia mcmbrana caplllis,
Inquo manus chartro nodoaaquo vonit arundo.
Tunc qucritur, crassus calamo quod pcndcat humor,
Nigra quod infusa vancscat sopia lyinpha;
Dilutas quoritur gcuunet quod fistula guttas.
O miser ! inquo dies ultra miser, huccino rorum
Venimus? at cur non potius, tencroquo columbo
Et similis regum pucris, papparo niinutura
Poscis, ct iratus mamm:c lallare recusas ?
" An tali studoam calamo ?" Cui verba ? quid istas
Succinis ambages ? tibi luditur ; cflluis amens.
Contemncrc : sonat vitium pcrcussa, maligne
Respondot viridi non cocta fidclia limo.
Udum et mollc lutum oa, nunc, nunc properandus ot acri
Fingendus sine fine rota.
Persius, Sat. 111., V. 1-24.
1. What was the Roman division of the day and night?
How was the period of noon determined before the use of
dial i ? To whom has the introduction of dials at Rome been
ascribed ? What other mode of measuring time ? What
hour is indicated by quinta umbra ? IIow many linece wore
there ? In what two senses may quinta hora bo taken ?
Which do you prefer, and why ?
2. Write notes on liber, mcmbrana, cliartce, arundo, and
sepia ; and give an ticcount of other writing materials used
by the Romans. Illustrate parts of this extract by parallels
from Horace.
3. Explain the terms sonat vitium pcrcussa, non cocta,
fidelia, olla, amphora, urceus, udiuii lutum, acri rota.
What was an obba? What was opus doliaret Expand
EX'OF'FIG. Describe Sumian ware.
Wini\$ttuii^ of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
HONORS.
LATIN.
E, . / Rev. John MoCaul, LL.D.
I.
Translate :
Tibi haec cruenta serta texuntur manu,
Novena quae serpens ligat :
Tibi har lyphoeus membra quae discors tulit,
Qui rogna concussit lovis.
Vectoris istic perfidi sanguis inest,
Quem Nessus expirans d .dit.
Oetaeus isto cinere defecit rogus,
Qui virus Herculeum bibit.
Piae sororis, impiae matris, facem
Ultricis Althaeae vides.
Reliquit istas invio plumas specu
Harpyia, dum Zeten fugit.
His adico pennas sauciae Stymphalidos,
Lernaea passae spicula.
Sonuistis, arae ! Tripodas agnosco meos,
Favente commotos dea '
Video Triviae currus agiles,
Non quos pleno lucida vultu
Pernox agitat ;
Sed quos facie luri da moesta,
Cum, Thessalicis vexata minis,
Coelum freno propiore legit.
:!^i^
sigt»
m-'
■ S .'■
fPPx.-
■■ • .
»^
• .
.._..'
{, >,*
■ *!-;■
■ ' ■>
—
...-■-.^a
* *.■
'''*■.
'■ ^-^1
T ^H
-;' ^^!^H
kift
\ «■
d
m
1
'5;
Mi
«# '4
!
Sic face tristem pallida lucem
Funde per auras !
Horrore novo terre populos ;
Inquo auxilium, Dictynna, tuum
Pretiosa sonent aera Corinthi !
Tibi sanguineo cespite sacrum
Solcmno daraus !
Tibi de medio rapta sepulcro
Fax nocturnos sustulit ignes ;
Tibi raota caput
Flexa voces cervice dcdi ;
Tibi funereo de more iacens
Passes cingit vitta capillos ;
Tibi iactatur
Tristis Stygia ramus ab unda;
Tibi nudato pectore, Maenas,
Sacro feriara brachia cultro.
Manet noster sanguis ad aras !
Seneca, Medea, vv. 771-811.
1. Write notes on Phoebe, novena, vectoris, sanguis, pise
sororis, Stymphalidos, freno propiore, sera Corinthi, mota
caput.
2. Discuss the question as to the authorship of Seneca's
tragedies.
3. Give scales of the metres used by Seneca, and point
out peculiarities. Distinguish the changes of metre in the
foregoing extract.
4. Mention ancient authorities on Latin metre.
II.
Translate :
Poeraat&s draraatici vol activi genera sunt quattuor :
apud Grsecos tragica, comica, satyrica, mimica ; apud
Roraanos, prretextata, tabernaria, Atellana, planipes.
Exegetici vel enarrativi species sunt tres, angeltice,
historico, didascalice. Angeltice est, qua sententise
scribuntur, ut est Theognidis liber, item chriae. His-
torice est, qua narrationes et genealogige componuntur,
ut est ilesiodi TvvaiKcav KaTaXoyo<i, et similia. Didas-
calice est, qua comprehenditur pliilosophia Empedoclis
et Lucretii, item astrologia, ut ^aivojMeva Arati et
Ciceronis, et Georgica Virgilii, et his similia.
"'"wbw
Koivov vel communis poematos species prima est
heroica, ut est Iliados et -^neidos : secunda lyrica
ut est Archilochi et Horatii.
DiOMEDES.
Write noSes on satt/rioa, mimioa, prsetextata, taherna-
na, Atellanci.planipes, chrise, didascalice, heroica, and lyrica^
introducing the names of authors where you can.
Translate :
III.
Cujus vis fieri, libelle, munus ?
Festina tibi vindicem parare,
Ne nigram cito raptus in culinam
Cordyllas madida tegas papyro,
Vel thuris piperisque sis cucullus.
Faustini fugis in sinum ! sapisti.
Cedro nunc licet ambules perunctus,
Et frontis gemino dcccns honore
Pictis luxurieris umbilicis ;
Et te purpura delicata velet,
Et cocco rubeat superbus index :
Illo vindice nee Probum timeto.
Martial, Epig. iii., 2.
1. Give a scale of the metre.
2. Cite passages from Catullus, Horace, Persius, and Ovid,
iu illustration of portions of the first seven verses.
^ 3. Compare the account of a book in vv. 8-11 with those
given by Tibullus and Ovid, and describe a lloman volume.
4. Give an account of the lihrarii and hihliopolse.
5. Of what ages are the most ancient manuscripts of the
Greek and Latin Classics ?
6. Give the names of the principal collectors of manu-
scripts, teachers, scholars, editors and printers of the 15th
century.
I
It.
1
;;iii:
1%"
J .1*
^nibtvuitu of ffiiovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
TRANSLATION INTO GREEK PROSE AND
VERSE.
Uxaminers: \ S^^* "^^^^ McCaul, LL.D.
I Thomas Moss, M.A.
I.
Cleon, though master of impudence which nothing could
abash, seems to have been not wholly unconscious of his
own emptiness and incapacity; and he strove to cover his
intrinsic feebleness by a show of energy, which cost him no
effort, and was exerted at the expense or the risk of the
state. He wished to be known as the blunt and straight-
forward man, of resolute counsels, and strong measures-
who kept the good of the people steadily in view, and who
would always take the shortest course to arrive at it He
thus gained credit for plain good sense and honest patriot-
ism, while he watched every turn of the popular inclination,
that he might anticipate or go beyond it. It belonged to
the policy of Cleon to treat the allies of the commonwealth
With despotic harshness, as subjects who had no rights that
could be allowed to interfere with the will of their sovereign
a_nd were bound to submit without a murmur to all his exac-
tions. Probably, indeed, he had private motives, besides
the affectation of patriotic zeal, for taking the most violent
side on every question which arose between Athens and her
confederates. The more he was dreaded as an advocate of
stern measures, the more important it was to retain or silence
mm. He barked, as well as fawned, for food.
II.
Sure I am, 'tis madness,
Inhuman madness, thus from half the world
To drain its blood and treasure, to neglect
Each art of peace, each care of government j
And all for what ? By spreading desolation,
Rapine, and slaughter o'er the other half,
To gain a conquest we can never hold.
I venerate this land. Those sacred hills,
Those vales, those cities, trod by saints and prophets,
By God himself, the scenes of heavenly wonders
Inspire me with a certain awful joy.
But the same God, my friend, pervades, sustains,
Surrounds and fills this universal frame ;
And every land, where spreads his vital presence.
His all-enlivening breath, to me is holy.
• .1I
'.ipPf
1
A It'll
iM^^^MMHwi ' 1 Mil
!i I
C > '
^ItfCbetfiiitj^ of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ASTRONOMY AND ACOUSTICS.
Examiner: J. B. Cherriman, M.A.
1. Describe the nature of the apparent motion of the fixed
stars as seen from a given place on the earth.
Describe tlie points of similarity and diflerence at two places
according as they have the latitude or the same longitude.
3. Show how the latitude of a place may be found from the
meridian altitude of a known star.
If two stars have the same altitude in crossing the meridian
of a place in north latitude on opposite sides of the zenith,
prove that either the sum of their declinations is double the
latitude, or the difference double the co-latitude.
3. What is the nature of the sun's apparent path in the celes-
tial sphere as seen from the earth's centre ?
What are the zones? Account for the changes in the length
of day and night at places in the different zones.
4. Menti'on the instruments essential to an astronomical ob-
servatory, and the nature of the observations each is designed
to make.
How is the sidereal clock adjusted ?
5. Distinguish between sidereal and solar lime.
What time does a common watch show ?
How can the watch be checked by a sun-dial ?
6. What is the nature o( the earth's patli about the sun and
the law of her motion therein?
How is this ascertained, and how are the actual dimensions
of this orbit determined ?
^ Shew that this motion will account for the change of seasons.
Can the four seasons be equal in length?
7. Describe and explain the moon's phases.
What is the age of the moon when she rises about noon, and
what about midnight?
' «
8. Explain solar and lunar eclipses.
Why does not an eclipse happen every time the moon is in
conjunction or opposition?
9. Mention the chief points which distinguish a planet from
a fixed star and from a comet.
10. Define an undulation, and give examples of diflferent
kinds of undulations that may occur in the production of sound.
On what elements of the undulation do the pitch, intensity,
and quality of a musical note depend ?
11. Describe the modeof vibration of the air in a pipe closed
at both ends, when sounding its fundamental note or its har-
monics.
What is the lowest note that can be produced by such a pipe
of given length ?
12. Describe the formation of the diatonic and chromatic
scales in music. Why is it necessary to temper, and what is the
scale of equal temperament, ?
If a person ascend from a note by perfect fifths and alter-
nately descend by perfect thirds, how near can he come to the
octave ?
r.-hk'i
f^n
Wini\}tvfiit!i of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
RIGID DYNAMICS AND HYDRODYNAMICS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
i
Examiner: J. B. Ciierriman, M.A.
■f» !„l|
1. Demonstrate the existence of ii set of principal axes of
moments of inertia at every point of a body ; trnd shew that if
the moments are known about one set of principal axes, that
about any line whatever can bo found from them.
If parallel lines be ttikcn, shew tliat the locus of those
which have the same moment of inertia aboiit them is a circular
right cylinder.
2. When a rigid body moves about a fixed horizontal axis, find
the time of a small oscillation.
A thin circular arc oscillates about a horizontal axis which
is perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passes through one
end of the chord drawn through its centre of gravity parallel to
its base ; the length of the simple isochronous pendulum is equal
to this chord.
3. Enunciate the steps of the proof that the motion of a rigid
body about a fixed point, when no forces act on it, can be repre-
sented by the rolling of the central ellipsoid on a fixed plane.
If a plane disk be thus moving about a point in its own
plane such tli.it the principal moments of inertia in that plane
are equal, and at any instant the angular velocity be w about an
axis which makes equal angles with the principal axes, shew that
the normal to the di^k coiiiplcles n revolution in the time - ,
i '!»'".
!l,i>*''^
h
4. Exi)lHin accurately what Ih meant by baying that the motion
of a froo rigid body is reducible to one of rotation and one of
translation.
Rotations about parallel axes being simultaneously impressed
on a firo rigid body at rest, shew that the resultant motion is
either ono of nttation or one of translation, and detennino it in
each caso.
5. A free rigid body at rest is struck by given impulses, deter
mine the initial instantaneous motion.
If the lni])ulscs consist of a single blow (X, 1', Z) at the
centre of Ljravity (the i)rincipal axes there being axes of co-ordi-
nates, iitid A, Ji, C the ]>rincipal moments of inertia) and a
single couple (//, At, N), shew that in order that the initial
motion may be one of rotation,
LX ^ JlfV^ ^ XZ
I 1 1 __l "^ J_ ~~1 •
B V C A A B
6. State and prove the principle of the conservation of areds.
Comparing this with the principle of vis viva, state what forces
will disappear in the equations formed by aid of one of these
principles, which would aj)pear in those formed from the other.
Two heavy balls are cfuinected by a weightless rod which is
set in motion about the centre of gravity of the balls as a iixed
point, detei'mine the angular velocities of the rod.
7. When a fluid rotates in relative equilibrium about a fixed
axis nnder the action of assigned forces, determine the pressure
at any point,
A thin hollow tube, forming a rectilineal angle, contains
water, and is made to revolve with a given angular velocity (w)
about a vertical axis through its vertex inclined at given angles
(a, /3) to the legs. If I bo the length of the fluid-filament, shew
that it may separate at the lowest point if
cos j3 \
U)'
2.7 /cos a
+
sin'yQ
8. Having given the impressed force at a point of a fluid in
direction of its motion at that point, investigate the relation
between the pressure and velocity.
What further considerations must be introduced, before the
pressure and velocity can be actually ascertained 1
9. To find the time of emptying a vessel through a small orifice.
Point out the various assumptions made in your investi-
gation.
If the vessel be the surface formed by the revolution of the
curve ^* CC a** about the axia of x (which is vertical, the vertex
•out a fixed
le pressure
l»eing ilownwiirds,) hUcw tliat the volumes discharged during the
former and latter halves of the time of emptying it are in the
n+ 2
ratio 2 " — 1 to 1 .
10. To determine the resistance on the anterior surface of a
solid of revolution moving in the direction of its axis through a
quiescent fluid.
What circumsUvuces vitiate the common theory of resis-
tances'!
A small bubble of ^dass filled with hydrogen ascends in the
air (supposed of uniform temperature,) thf wind l)lowing horizon-
tally, obtain expressions for the horizontal and vertical accoleca-
tions of the bubble in any position.
11. luvestigate the differential cquatioi. which expi'esses ho,
motion in a coluinnof air (supposed to retain the same temperature)
arising from a hiupII disturbance excited in it, and assuming the
solution of thr qnaiion, examine in what cases two waves or
only one will '-d ;)rop:if ted.
If the u:«(t'irbu,nct be exjiressed by c sin Jl (at — x), find
\
the length of the .. ave, and if two such waves be super-imposed,
find the period of the beats.
11
nail orifice,
ur investi-
/
.-**^;-.i
£|d
''^ffiH
jjJM
^'^^l
Kffn
mnmtuiip of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOE B.A.
SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY AND
ASTRONOMY.
HONORS.
Examiner : J. B. Ciierriman, M.A.
1, Investigate the properties of the polar triangle.
If one side of a triangle be a quadrant, the three angles nmst
be each less than a right angle, or each greater tlian a right angle.
2. Shew how to find the area of a spherical triangle.
'If A' be the s'pherical excess in a triangle where (7 is 90°'
a
tan i 2?= tan
tan -—
3. Prove the following formulas in a triangle,
(i.) cose = cosa cosi + sina sin?j cosC;
(ii.) cota sini = cot.4. sinC -f cosi cosC;
(iii.) tuu I (A-B) = "" \ <"7^j cot I a
(iv.) smB sin (7 — sin6 sine
== cos5 cos C cosa + cost cose cosil.
Deduce others from these by aid of the polar triangle.
4. In a triangle, having given a, h, A, solve it, finding e directly
either by a subsidiary angle or a gomnetrical construction, and
shew how the ambiguity appears in this solution.
Discuss fully the ca.so where A > 90°, h > 90", and deduce
the corresponding case when A, i?, a, are given.
5. Prove Legendre's Theorem, and shew how it may be em-
ployed to obtain an approximate solution of the triangle in the
previous question, when the sides are small compared with the
radius of the sphere.
6. Prove that there can be only five regular solids.
If F, S, E, be the number of faces, solid angles, and edges
in one of these, shew that ^pFS = ^E\ where p is 3, 4, or 5.
7. Find the local times of sunrise and sunset for a given day at
any place, and shew that their sum is nearly 12 hours.
Find the correction to the time of sunrise at a place to adapt
it to another of nearly the same latitude.
8. Describe the errors of adjustment to which a transit instru-
ment is liable.
Determine the error of deviation by the method of high and
low stars.
9. To find the position of, the ecliptic in^ the heavens at any
time with reference to the meridian and horizon of any place.
Describe the changes of inclination of the ecliptic and hori-
zon in consequence of the diurnal rotation, and find when this
inclination increases fastest.
How is it ascertained when tho fii'st point of Aries is on the
meridian 1
10. Describe the nature of the correction called parallax.
Find the errors thence arising in the hour angle and declin-
ation of a body, computed from an observed zenith distance.
At what time of the day should the observation be made in
order that the former of these errors may be the least possible 1
11. Calculate the moon's phase, supposing her to move in the
ecliptic ; and when her angle of elongation is 60°, compare the
apparent areas of the dark and bright parts.
Retaining the same supposition, explain the changes of in-
clination to the horizon of the line joining her horns.
12. To determine when a stiperior planet will be a morning
or evening star.
•f
•ij 'ii
W^:*:*-- .■i'-iJ
K/^-. .I^^^^^^^^^lj
^S?
^?^^^^^^^^^^^B
V ■ ' .*.
' -'-^I^^^H
^'^^^^^^^1^1
. i.
.in^^^^H
!. * ■
'' H'^l^^^^l
iiiMl.
t> • .
m
i. Exa
terms wli
circulatin
In(
In (!
In(;
the circU
previous <
2. Giv(
and fractii
Ifc,
taken 1, i
(i.) H
(ii) 1. c
(iii)
il%ni\^tvuitt^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
PURE MATHEMATICS.
Examiners: / ^ ^' S?\^^^^^?J ^•'^•
) Rev. W. Jones, B.A.
iM
.M
>A !■*¥.
i. Examine the forms of the proper fraction - in its lowest
6
terms when it is reducible to (1) a terminating, (2) a mixed
circulating, (3) a pure circulating decimal.
In (1), find the number of decimal places ;
In (2), find the number of places before the circle ;
In (3), if a remainder b — a occur, the remaining figurea of
the circle can be found by subtracting from 9 each of the
previous ones in order.
2. Give Euler's proof of the Binomial Theorem for negative
and fractional indices.
If c^c^c^ be the number of combinations of n things
taken 1, 2, 3, together, shew that
(i.) l+c,»+c,>+ +c„'=..^''
[n j^
_ [2n
(iii)
n
( — 1) . ^r \ n — r .
i/i*.,'j,,
i
'tif'lf !..•
ill. Obtain tho exponential value of x from the |equi\tion
a5 + = 2 coa (? .
X
If in any triangle 2 cos A = x -|- , 2 coa B =r y 4- - ,
prove 2 co.i C
( rw -|- — ), and slicw thai the twtvvaluea
^ • xy '
of 6x+'ii/ »i*'o c and c + 4 ■/— T _ .
4* Invostiirate cxpreasitJiKi for the riulii of tho inacribod and
ciroiuuscrihctl cjrolcs of ii trianjik!. AIho ox])rcss tlso area of a
triangle as a symmotrical fsiuctinn of lUo sidos anil angles.
If < V y O^ bo the contrea of tlu> osorihod cirohs of a triangle
which louclv the .sidoa «, 6, c, rosju'ci ivoly, and 0^0^ — a', Ofi^z=b\
0,0^rzT.c' show that tho area 0^0./)^ eciualb
(() /rtd'see -f. 66' sec -- + cc' soc - j .
(ii) -, (a'h' sin -^ -f t'c' sin - ^^ + c'o.' sin — ) .
5. State how to transfinnn an oquuiion whose roots are a, 6, c,
into four other e(i[uaiioiis, the tirst of which has roots — a,
— b ; tho second 7)ia, mb ; tlie third a+A, 6-|-/i,
and the fourth _ , -
a
Prove the second and fourth cases.
If the sides of a triangle bo the roots of the equation
di (x) =a;'+ 2/) j;'+ (? ^ — r = 0, show that the radii of tho four circles
which touch the sides of tho triangle are given by the equation
where A is the area of the triangle, and/(x) = x^(x).
vi. Investigate the geometrical properties which are implied
in the terms pole and polar in a conic, and shew that any line is
cut liarmonically by the curve, the pole, and polar.
Having given the locus of the pole, shew how to find the
curve "Iways touched by the polar with reference to a given conic,
and take for example the case wher. ti ) conic is an ellipse, and
the locus of the pole is a parabola v/hicii has the same focus and
latuiv. rectum.
7. Define a differential co-etlj/^.ictiit, and give a geometrical inter-
pretation of it. Hence, or in any ^ther -way, shew that if the
t , '«,
difforential co-cfliciont of a fimctiou bo positive, the function
increuscH as the vuriiil)l(j incroasoH.
Verify trio tlicorcni - — , — - — _
dx.dy dy.dx
—1x4- v'
(\) WIk^u u= tun — X ■'■ (ii) wIioiiM
xV
8. Intc^'rate tlio following functions :
(i) tan X (ii) hcc'^x log tan x,
—1 /5" /• A l—x coH a
(tan ^f_ IV) , , o - , ,
^ ' y (^ l+2a; CCS a-f-x'
and find a ionnula of reduction for/siu^O. coh"0<W.
ix. In any si)iral, ^t = -_ =/(fy), prove the formulas
where <?> ia the angle made by p with a fixed line.
If at a point where r is finite, '^^ = and change sign.
there is an ajwe ; if
dd
00, and cliange sign, there is a
cusp; if ^ ^ or 03 and do not change aign, there is a point
of inflexion.
Draw the foruiH at the polo of the curves
r'*^-a% r-aO\ r^aQ.
X. State and prove Newton's Lemma iv., Section 1 .
In a spiral given by the equation r' <x p''4.c\ p being the
perpendicular from the pole on the tangent, the vectorial area
swept out by r is always proportional to that swept out by p.
11 If (a I3,y) = ^ ho a homogeneous erpiation of two dimen-
sions in a,3,7, the tiilinear co-ordinates of a point, shew that the
equation of the tangent at a',/3',7', to the conic section it repre-
sents is
da' ^ dS'^^ dy'
Hence find the condition that the straight line I a ■{- m 15
+ n Y = ^^y touch the conic section — + -g- '^~;r' ~^-
>:m
.( IV-
I
. n
Hir ' i
j.^oJ^roi!:r;nirzf^".r-Tui^^^^
ntimvuiiiJ! of SToironto,
AIJNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1804.
CANDIDATES FOE B.A.
NATURAL PHILOSOPHY,
HONORS.
„ . . f J. B. ClIERRIMAN, M.A.
JExammersj-l^j^^^^ W. Jones, B.A.
i. State the seuses in wLicli the term rcmliant is used with refer-
ence to a set of forces, mentioning any thvcrema involved in
such use.
Prove that the algebraic sum of the moments of two
forces, in the same plane, about any point in it, is equal to the
moment of their resultant about that point, and examme what
this means when the two forces are equal, parallel, and acting in
oppoaite senses.
If three forces in one plane are not reducible to a single
resultant force, shew that there is a point in the plane about
which their moments are equal.
2. Investigate formulas to find the centre of gravity of any
solid by means of polar co-ordinates.
Apply them to find the centre of gravity of a hemisphere
whose density is constant along any radius, but varies aa the
angular distance of the radius from the axis of the solid.
iii. Find the attraction of a uniform thin rod, every point of
which attracts inversely as the square of the distance, on a point
situated in the perpendicular bisecting it.
Three such rods form a triangle, and a particle is placed at
the centre of the circumscribing circle ; shew that it will not
remain at rest unless the triangle be equilateral
4 A particle of elasticity e is projected from a given point
with a given velocity t; in a direction inclined at a given angle to
the horizon; shew that it wiU describe a series of parabolic arcs.
'^1
It ' '"
' !i|
i I
i;;;;
i^ind the sum f the parabolic areas which it will describe.
V. A ])articlo descends a smooth inclined plane • fin,1 iU
velocity acquired, and th,. time of descent. ^ ' ^ '^'
Tf an inelastic particle drscend successively down a s^r;«. r
n such planes each being incli, cd to the previous cZJ.T "^
angle « and h bo the vertical height do cendecl // tt / '''"r
the L ....hts du. to the several obcities at the endf of tl T "^
2<7(A — ZTsin'a)-
of a medium wl-i 1. i-™i,t8 ,n if™ i " "^"f .°" "'" '"''"'')'
» uniform frictiou ;„ Z "l"'^' ''^ «"»"1«"-S *» eilcot of
periodic timo. ^ ^ *'"' '^""^ "'l"' '" '1"! «>m"
disfanoo to tt aomi.lr,L/„r "" '" *'"= ''»"° "' ""^ ^""^
p^^"S:»:!';o*f:^SdSt^^ltr'- *'«
/l -1
man J?' "''"' " ''''''•' ^''^" '^"■''''''^S Auia -4 in like
9. Find the pr
oblique refraction rou, a plate of tL aess ?
distanffrlttro";!^/;;Ul ^eVtTat^t^^^T ^ ^^"^"^
6 u ux iijjuc, snew tiiat the angle of iucidmce
of the axis of the pencil is sin~^ Vgw^p?".
2 d secondary f i of a en. >encil after
•f WlNV
n„f ;i^TJ'^* ^""l ■*.' """^ Casfiegraln's telescopes, and point
out the defects 1/ the image formed by each. ^
Shew that in the former the aberrations produced by the
mirrors ave m the same direction, while in the latter they partly,
but cannot wholly, counteract each other. ^ ^'
xi. Investigate the formulas by which the position of the
bowl7 ""^ ""^ ' """"^ "^^"^ *^^* the breadth of the
IJ&)^>^ ■
2
where S^ is the difference of refractive index for the extreme
rays. What circumstance would cause the breadth of the bow
to bo actually greater than this 1
ifsl
•■'•'ll
."«<(ii.; P:
m
COS.
mni\}tvtiitt} df Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: lRfi4.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
rUllE AND MIXED MATHEMATICS.
HONORS.
w • r J- B. ClIERRIMAN, M.A.
■^^^""'^^^^•Irev. W.Jones, B.A.
i. An event, of wlucli|tho a priori probability is p, is aflSrmeil
by two independent witnesses whoso veracities are v, v\ deterniino
tlio probability of the event from this evidence.
Suppose the affirmation to be that a specified ticket was
drawn from a bag known to contain n different tickets.
Shew also that in this case, the j)robabiIity of a specified
ticket having been drawn, as derived from the testimony of a
single individual whose veracity is wholly unknown and is
equally likely to be anything from to 1, is
1 j {n-l)]os(n^l) - (n-2) J,
if n be different from 2.
Also find it when n = 2.
ii. If 71 be a prime number, the powers (from 1 to ?i— 1 inclu-
sive) of any one of the imaginarA roots will ])roduce the other
imaginary roots of the equation tc" — 1 =0.
How must this statnment be modified if oi be not a prime
number ?
Shew that the roots of xM — 1=0, where p, q are primes,
are given by th') formula
Uhl +V-1 sin 2^) (cos ^J^ +v/-isin 1^1)
where a, /3 are the positive integral solution of pyS + ^a = any
integer from to (jpq — 1) inclusive.
1*1
, i 'l
-,,
1
<
1 ■• •*■
V
iii !fe
i
ill. Exninino tJio relation in wliJcli tho conic ia'+ma'+m'^i\
stands to tlie triar.glo of rcfcrcnco ABO.
Show that it represents a circle, if
_ J __ _ ^>' _ n
sin 2 A sin i}yy sin W '
and a roctang; ^ir hyperbola, if
I -\- m ■{- n = .
4. Shew that the .symbols of diffc-rentiation nn* -ovcrned bv tho
1_ £
[c sm w.r) = c ^ sin(wix+sino),
where tan a = ^* .
n1.,t V''''^ n T'l'* ^^^ .^^"^ "'*'''»«'"'^ ^n"^<^io» to a curve ? Ex
phun the method ot trac.ng a curve froln its intrinsic e.'uJtion
Trace the curves (i) . =, „ ^in 3 <^. (ii) , ^ „ ,^3 , ^^
(iii) = sin — .
a
vi. Trove that /7(.^),/,^ ^
wheroy(:£) denotes the nth derivative of f{x).
J^nid / f"'' </•'•, and obtain con vcrginjj series for Z*'^ " ,
both when « is > and < J, y/^.
section of^ 'r,'V*' ^let,o,mino the general nature of the curve of
section ot a surface of the second order by a plane.
If tho section of the surface J^ + -l£ 4, ^-V _> 1
by the plane /:. + niy ^ ,^. = ^, ^^ a rectangular hyperbola,
shew that .. .. j_ _^ 4. 1 _ n
8. Obtain an equation to determine tho tension at anv mint of
a uniform flexible string, when acted on by any cenLScT
■ A \uutoYm string wtiicli oooAiploH ono half of an elUptio tul)o
bounded by tlui major axiw, is attructiid by two (^qual controH of
force ( -j , one in each focua ; .show that tho tcriHiou at any
point P is
' ^0' ISP. IIP J
9. A particln is projoctfid witli a voloolty n, in a direction
making an an«I<! a with tlio axis o\' x, and is act(.d on by a oon-
Htant forco / parallel to the axis of y; if th(, r.-sistnnee =
k (velocity)' ahew that the diflereutial ecpiation to its path is
Another particle is projectiul with the same velocity in a
d.reetam n.ehned at an an;,de ft to the axis of x ; shew that when
c(|t.al len^4hH ot tlu'ir paths have b.«en described by the two
partieUis their (breetioiis are parallel.
_ X. The central force varyin^r us distance, determine the dimen-
sions and position of the orbit from the circumstanc(!s of motion
at an assigiuid point.
If at any point a small chan-e (ga) be made in the direction
ot motion, 1>M<1 the cnsecpient cliang(,s in the ax<.s of the orbit •
rectmirthiif '''''"^" ^'''^' ^'^^''' '''^ '"' extremity of a latus-
2b, ^i, e being the minor axis, absolute forco, and cxcentricity.
11. What is the condition that the deviation of a ray refracted
hrough .a prism in a ,,rincipal plane may be a minimum?
Obtain a formula from which the refractive index of a substance
Shew that rays must be incident upon a prism within an
angulnr distance sin-i | '-^S^^- } , in order that they may
be refracted thiough the prism in a principal plane, i bein^
the i;efracting angle of the prism, and a the critiod angle of the
medium. & ' •'"<-
xii. When assigned forces act on any system, explain what is
understood by the '-work done" by them, and examine in wha
cases It will be measured by the change of vis viva of the system.
^ (rk6 cliambei* of au air-gitn forms part of the ban*el (which
IS of iiniform boro) and contains air of pressure p, the length
occni)ie<l being a. If the bullet be resisted by a uniform friction
/, find the "work done" during the discharge, and shew that it
will bo the greatest possible when the length of the barrel is
P
I
il!i
[which
length
notion
that it
rrel is
li^mw
^V'i.
i ':'■ ''I
ilitnflievfiifti^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
NEWTON, SECTIONS IX- & XL, AND
LUNAR THEORY,
HONORS.
Examiner : IIev. W. Jones, B.A.
w i
III Hi
1. The orbit in which a body moves revolves round the
centre of force with an angular velocity, which always bears
a fixed ratio to that of the body ; s.'iew that the body may be
made to move in the revolving orbit in the same manner as in
the orbit at rest by the action of a force tending to the same
centre.
What modification must be made in the proof, if the motion
of the orbit be retrograde, and the angular velocity of the orbit
be (i) greater and (ii) less than that of the body moving in it?
Draw the figure of the proposition in each of these cases.
If the polar equation to VP be given, shew hcv to find
that to Vp'.
orbit nearly circular und(>r
2. A body moves in
an
action of a force = ~^f{r) at a distance r,
shew that
the
th('
apsidal r igle of the ovbit
where a is the great-
ij'{a)
est value of r.
Conversely having given the apsidal angle, find the law
of force.
3. Two bodies ^ and P revolve a thi id 2' so that P describes
an orbit much interior to that of S; explain what is meant
by the disturbing force on F relatively to 2\ and fiind expres-
sions for (i) the tangential disturbing force on F, (ii) the cen^
trai disturbing force on F, and (iii) the whole gravitation of x"
to T.
nd the law
4. The moon is at P in her orbit supposed elliptic, and a
I ngent PY is drawn in the direction of her motion ; shew
that the angle TPY'\^ acute when she is moving from apogee
to perigee, and obtuse when from perigee to apogee.
Examine tli'o effect of the central disturbing force on the
motion of the moon's apsides, when the apsidal line is in
quadrature.
5. Examine the effect of the nblatitious force on the inclina
tion of P^s orbit to that of ^S^, when the node lies between
quadrature and farther syzygy.
Under what circumstances will the inclination be tlie
least possible ?
6. Investigate the differential equation of the moon's radius
vector
-<ll • If i
7. Given ^* + « = .
+ G cos(p^+A)4- . . .
integrate the equation, and shew that this term will fall in the
integration by one order, if p is nearly equal 1.
State the different cases in wliich terms of a higher order
than that required must be retained in the differential equations.
8. Having given
-2 "' "^"^ l(2-2>»)e-2j8i]
T 3
^^ = - .j»a'sin{{2-2m),^-2/3t+3m»esinj (2 - 2m - c)9
-2^+af,
find u to the 2nd order.
9. Explain the physical meaning of the term
— JAi'sin 2(gpt—r/)
in the expression for the moon's longitude.
10. Define mean place, and shew that as the sun moves from
per"; *n apogee, the moon's true place is behind her mean
pi.c.
11. Shew that the moon's orbit is everywhere concave to
the sun.
Draw a diagram shewing her path about the sun during
a year.
'.-i.
'' - 5 , I
mnmvniiai! of 9:otonl;o«
ANNUAL KXAMINATIONd : 1804.
CANDIDATES FOR H.A.
PROBLEMS.
HONORS.
^mminers.'fi' ^- CH^f^i^^AN, M.A.
( Rkv. W. J
Jones, B.A.
1?'^ ''ii ^li
1. Two jmiiiU, C I) aro taken m a givon line A li, f:ad tho moan
lengtli of (J I).
2. If the arcs wliicli bisect the anjfleH /f, 6', of a nplierical
triangle A BC, meet in ; then will
-^,1 \ (7 cos ylOC + cos 1 // coa /f Oi? = - cos | yl.
3. From the crxo's ^,J9, of any diunuiter of a given small circle
on a sphere, arc • are drawn ,>erpendicular to a gWen great circle ;
prove that the ,sr;ni .f their sii^-'s is invariable,
4. The base and ar..;i./f a s}>herioal triangl*; are given ; prove
that the arc joining tic nuudle points of its sides is of given
length.
5. A quadrant of a circle describes a hemisi»}iere by revolving
uniformly about one of its bounding radii, while a point traces out
a spiral by moving uniformly along the quadrant irom one end to
the other ; shew that the surface of the hemisphc^i-e is divided into
two equal portiouvS by the contour formed by the spiral and the
quadrant in its fii-st j)osition.
G. Determine the longest and shortest durations of twilight at
a given place.
7. Having given the ratio of tlie measurements from N. to S.,
T^au iivii-. iij. it.T TT ., ui \jiL\i prujuciiun oii iviercaiors cnartoi asmaii
circular island, find its latitude.
'1^
8. The loss of weight in a body at the earth's equator, In con-
sequence of the diurnal rotfition, is ^ggth part of its apparent
weight. If by an increase of this rotation, bodies at the equator
ceased to have weight, in what ratio would the sidereal day be
altered in length 1
9. In an ellipse described under force to focus, determine the
points where the following changes in the body's motion could
respectively be made without altering the direction of the apse-
line :
(a), a small change in velocity without change of direction ;
(8), a small change in direction without change of velocity ;
(y), a change in both velocity and direction by a small impulse
directed towards the centre of force.
10. In a plane lamina whoso form is a regular polygon of n
sides, r is the radius of the inscribed circle : prove that for the
moment of inertia (Mk"^) about any line in its plane which passes
through the centre,
12^
k'
tan'
11'
11. A hollow vertical cylinder of length ?, open at top, stands
in the atmosphere. A tight smooth piston (without weight)
being inserted and forced down to any depth, water is poured in
above it so as to fill up the cylinder when equilibrium is attained.
If a small hole be now opened in the surface of the cylinder
above the ])iston at a distance h from the base, shew that the
piston may be brought jiermanently to rest in either of two
positions, provided
h > //, and (A + llf > 4///,
where H is the height of the water-barometer at the time.
12. Any uniform rigid body, whose figure is symmetrical with
regard to an axis which is supposed to be rigidly connected witli
it, is allowed to foil under the action of gravity from rest in a
position where this axis is horizontal, a point in this axis being
fixed. Shew that the angle which the axis has described when
the vertical pressure on the point is equal to the weight of the
body, is the same in all cases.
13. A heavy rigid body, of which G^ is the centre of gravity, is
supported at two fixed points -4, 7i, in the same horizontal 2:>lane ;
if .«(, s' be the segments into which A B is divided by the vertical
through G^ z be the distance of G from A B, h the radius of
gyration about a horizontal line through G perpendicular to A S,
shew that when one of the points is suddenly set free, the vertical
pressure on the other will be initiallv unaltered if
ss'
■.z'+k''.
.. I* (
14. A rigid rod is balancing horizontally about its centre of
gravity fixed, and a ball drojKS vertically upon it at such a distance
from its centre that tlie moments of inertia of the ball at impact
iiiid the rod about this centre are equal. Examine whether under
any circumstances the ball can begin to ascend after the impact.
If an ela'^^^-'nity could exist for which such would bo the
ciiHC, and the i. x c impact of ball and rod occun*ed at the same
j)(»int of the rod, prove that tlie latter would then remain at rest.
15. A solid uniform right circular cylinder, whose length is I
and radius r, is freely movable about its axis which is fixed
vertically. A smooth groove is cut in its surfoce in the form of
a helix v/liich is everywhere inclined to the horizon at an angle a,
and a heavy particle runs through the groove, starting from the
top, and passing out at the lower end ; shew that the angular
velocity (to) acquired by the cylinder is given by
coV ( 1 + ^) (tan^a+ ^ secVt) = 2^/?,
where X is the ratio of the masses of the cylinder and particle.
IG. A thin straight tiibe is bent at a right angle, and one end is
closed. The closed branch is })laced horizontally, and the other
vertically, being exposed to the atmosphere ; mercury is now
poured in so as to fill the vertical branch and occupy also lialf the
horizontal branch (of which tlie length is J) and the tube is made
to revolve about a vertical axis througli its closed end with an
angular velocity o), so that when the state of relative equilibrium
is attained, the horizontal braiich is just clear of mercuiy ; shew
that
rl
i» ;,."i|
le
2k
w
= !/J
I 2k
e dr,
where k is the ratio of pressure to density in air, and e is the
Napierian base.
1
1
8
n
.,;■■.*
I
(
'E.f
/
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)
&
/.
.</
y.
fA
&
^
1.0
I.I
11.25
U£|Z8 |2.5
£ US i2.C
1.8
IM. IM
Photographic
Sdences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, NY 14580
(716) 872-4S03
m
iV
<-
%
V
^
»,
6^
<^
«^
<1>
mnmvms of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
PRINCE OF WALES' PRIZE.
HISTORY AND ETHNOLOGY.
^2:amm.r«;/?' Wilson, LL.p.
(. J. A. Boyd, M. A.
1. How was Sparta affected by the battle of Mantinea.
B. C. 418.
2. In what respects did the battle of Chaeroneia decide the
fate of Greece ?
8. Describe the origin and nature of the privileges en-
joyed by the Latin colonies of Italy, and trace the°causes
and results of the social war, B. C. 90-88.
4. Trace the influence of Charlemagne on the political
and ecclesiastical institutions of medieval Europe.
5. Construct a genealogical tree showing the Anglo-Saxon,
Danish, and Norman relation by blood and marriage, of
Edward the Confessor, Harold II., and William the Con-
queror.
6. Trace the grounds of Edward III.'s claim to the French
throne, and discuss its merits.
ETHNOLOGY.
1. Agassiz says : " The boundaries within which the dif-
ferent naturt combinations of animals are known to be
circumscribed upon the surface of our earth, coincide with
the natural ranao nf HiHtinnf: firnpa nf rnon " "^V^-f ?a -V
plied in this theory ? Discuss its value.
2. Herodotus calls the Dorians a Hellenic, and the lonians
a I'elasgian people. He also refers to the iEolians as Pel-
asgian. Discuss the ethnological deductions which this
suggests, in connexion with the final adoption of the name
Hellenes for the whole people of Greece ; and define the
bearings of the traditions relative to Cecrops, Cadmus.
Danaus, and Pelops. ^ * "umuo,
3. Classify ethnologically, with reasons : the Oscans, the
babmes, the Etruscans, the Carthaginians, the Basques,
the Belgge, the Spanish Moors, and the Majiars.
4. Trace the origin and development of the Romance
languages; and discuss their bearing on the general question
of the ethnical significance of philological evidence.
5. Seeing that Gaul and Britain were both occupied by
Celtic nations when conquered by the Romans, and were
subjected to similar influences by their conquerors : account for
the fact that the former exchanged its Celtic for a Romance
language, and the latter for a Germanic one.
6. Max Muller asks " What is grammar, after all, but
declension and conjugation?" Define what is implied in
this ; and consider its significance in relation to the different
theon.es of the origin of language.
7. Define the specific bearings of philological evidence on
ethnological researches ; and state in what respects physical
and philological evidence supplement each other.
- .^1
I. Shal
f(l.)
(2.)
(3.)
(4.)
(^
mnmvnitS! ot Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ENGLISH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
i7a:amm.r«;/?-f^iS0N,LL.D.
\ J. A. Boyd, M. A.
I. Shakspeare's Henry IV., parts 1 and 2.
f(l.) What characters and circumstances connect these
plays with Richard II. and Henry V. i
(2.) Note the anachronisms which occur in Henry
IV., and give grounds of justification for Shak-
speare's use of anachronisms.
(3.) What references to contemporary authors and
literature does Shakspeare make in these dramas ?
What were his prohable objects in these refer-
ences ?
(4.) (1.) " The skipping king, he ambled up and down
(2.) With shallow jesters, and rash bavin wits,
(3.) Sooe kindled and sooe burned ; carded his
state ;
(4.) Mingled his royalty with carping fools ;
(5.) Had his great name profaned with their
scorns ;
(6.) And gave his countenance, against his name,
(7.) To laugh at gibing boys, and st&nd the push
(8.) Of every beardless, vain comparative;
(9.^ Grew a companion to the common streets,
(10.) Enfeoffed himself to popularity ;
m
1
' L hi
(11.) That being daily swallowed by men's eyes
(12.) They surfeited with honey; and began *
(13.) To loathe the taste of swcotnc.ss, whereof a
little
(14.) More than a little is by much too much."
* 1 lien. IV., Act 1, scene 2.
(a.) Point out and name all tlie figures, rhetori-
cal and syntactical, in this passage.
{l>.) Discuss the various readings proposed
instead of '• bavin," " carping," and
" carded."
(«'.) ^yhat is the meaning of " comparative "f
Exemplify Slinkspcare's use of the word
by another passage from this play.
{d.) State accurately the force of the 6th,
7th, 8th, and 10th lines.
{e.) Give groups of synonyms for the words
in italics, and distinguish between the
shades of meaning of the words in each
group.
(5.) In these plays occur the following words:—
" Younhe.r," '' mammets" " corrival," " kick-
shaws," ''gossip," ''curry," {i.e., curry favour.)
Give the derivation and transmutations of mean-
ing of each.
II. Milton, Spencer, Pope and Cowper.
(1.) Give an account of the origin and history of the
English sonnet.
(2.) Detail the laws of the sonnet in its strictness ;
mention the modifications in form and matter
which it received from Milton.
(3.) Shew in what manner the Spenserian stanza was
compounded from earlier forms of verse ; give
the laws of the closing line, its name, and why
80 called.
(4.) State fully the advantages and disadvantages of
this measure as used by Spenser; and also the
influence which it had upon his language.
(5.) Analyse Pope's rhyming couplet with reference
to its metrical character, and compare it with the
same mcaiuire as used by Keats.
(6.) Contrast the influence of Tope and Cowper on
English poetry. State briefly the benefits ren-
dered by each to the cause of poetical literature.
(7.) " Concord she deeped was in common reed.
* * * *
By her the heaven is in ht8 course contained,
And all the world in state unmoved stands.
As their Almightie Maker first ordained,
And bound them with inviolable bands ;
Else would the waters overflow ihe lands
And fire dcvoure the ayre, and hell them quight.
But that she holds them with her blessed hands.
She is the nourse of pleasure and delight.
And unto Venus grace the gate doth open right.
By her I entring half dismay d was ;
But she in gentle wise me entertayned
And twixt her selfe and Love did let me pas ;
But Hatred would my entrance have restrayned,
. And with his ;lub mo threatned to have brayned,
Had not the Ladie with her powrefull speach
Him from his wicked will uneath refrayned;
And th'other eke his malice did empeach.
Till I was throughly past the perill of his reach.
Faerie Queene, B. 4, C. 10.
(a.) Indicate all the figures, rhetorical and syn-
tactical, in this passage.
(b.) Give the derivation and signification of the
words in italics.
(c.) *• Hell them quight." Give the various read-
ings as to these words, and the changes of
meaning resulting therefrom.
(d.) Point out any peculiarities in the prosody or
rhythm.
^ t
H»,
'' ' ■ , ■!
ii
\
■1
J!^ni\}ttuitu of 2!:oronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES, FOR B.A.
ENGLISH.
TP . f D. Wilson, LL.D.
-I
*;^* Answers to all the questions are not indispensable ; hut
FULL ANSWERS are required to as many as can he over-
taken within the time.
" To begin, then, with Shakspeare. He was the man
who, of all modern, and perhaps ancient poets, had the
largest and most comprehensive soul. All the images of
nature were still present to him, and he drew them not
laboriously, but luckily. When he describes any thing, you
more than see it, you feel it too. Those that accuse him to
have wanted learning give him the greater commendation.
He was naturally learned : ho needed not the spectacles of
books to read nature ; he looked inward and found her
there. I cannot say he is every where alike ; were he so, I
should do him injustice to compare him with the greatest of
mankind. He is many times flat, insipid ; his comic wit
degenerating into clinches, his serious swelling into bombast.
But he is always great when some great occasion is presented
to him ; no man can say he ever had a fit subject for his
wits and did not raise himself as high above the rest of the
poets." John Dryden.
1. Give the derivation of all words of Latin and
French origin in this sentence.
2. Point out all examples of obsolete structure, and
reconstruct them according to present usage, with reasons.
T'T't.
3. Point out all archaic terms, and words used in a
different sense from their present value ; and replace them
by their modern equivalents.
4. What is implied in the fact that forms of construction,
and uses of terms, which were correct in tlio 17th century
are no longer admissible in English composition.
5. When the Romans conquered Gaul and Britain, the
languages of both countries were Celtic; the result in France
has been tho substitution of a Neo-Latin or Romance lan-
guage ; whereas that of England is Germanic. Account for
this.
6. Fowler says of tho present tendencies of the English
language : " The distinction between the subjunctive and
the indicative mode, and that between the participle passive
and tho past tense, are likely to pass away." Explain and
illustrate each.
7. Point out all the sources from which the Latin element
has been introduced into the English language ; and define
the relative importance of each.
8. " The Saxon element is much more expressive than
the Latin part of the language." {Fowler.) Assign reasons
for adopting or rejecting this opinion.
5. " The English of the 9th century is one language, and
the English of the 19th century another. They differ at least
as much as the Italian differs from the German." {Oraik.)
Explain vhat is meant, and account for the fact.
10. Define the rank of Goldsmith as a poet and dr: .atist,
in reference to his immediate predecessors, contemp jraries,
and successors.
11. Craik says, "In all that constitutes artistic character
the poetry of Coleridge is a contrast to that of Wordsworth."
Discuss the significance and accuracy of this criticism.
12. Define the terms objective and subjective^ as applied
to discriminate between Shakspeare and Byron.
■1!
m
5
1
1. Sub
Translate
L(
assez
Ses ^
gloir
licen
etait
confi
les ci
politi
bien
nait
dulit<
ne s'l
cette
Bes SI
eux 1
rellei
rMi
i^nmvm^ of ^otwto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
FRENCH.
JS^a:awmm;H^^^s Fornbri, LL.D.
\ Robert Sullivan, A.M.
I.
1. Subject for French composition: "Humility rare in
victory."
11.
Translate :
Le grand malheur de Frederic fut de n'avoir point
assez do respect pour la religion ni pour les moeurs.
Ses gouts 6taient cyniques. Bien que I'amour de la
gloiro ait donne do I'dMvation a ses pens^es, sa mani^re
licencieuse de s'exprimer sur les objets les plus sacr^s
etait cause que ses vertus mgmes n'inspiraient pas de
confiance : on en jouissait, on les approuvait, mais on
les croyait un calcul. Tout semblaic devoir 6tre de la
politique dans Frederic ; ainsi done, co qu'il faisait de
bien rendait I'etat du pays meilleur, mais ne perfection-
nait pas la morality de la nation. II affichait I'incredu-
duhtd et se moquait de la vertu des femmes ; et rien
ne s'accordait moins avec le caract^re allemand que
cette maniere de penser. Frederic, en affranchissant
ses sujets de ce qu'il apnelait les prejugeSj fetei^nait en
eux le' patriotisme : carj pour s'attache'r aux pays natu-
rellement sombres et steriles, il faut qu'il y r^gne des
i^-; S
An-,
;i..
1 it. , ti ^
opinions et dea principes d'une grande s6v6rit^. Dans
ces contr^ea sablonneuses, o^ la terre ne produit que dea
sapins ec^ des bruyeres, la force de I'homme consiste
dans son arne ; et si vous lui otez ce qui fait la vie de
cette lime, les sentiments religieux, il n'aura plus que
du degoiit pour sa triste patrie.
Mmme. de Stael, De VAllemagne.
1. Bien que. Give a synonym.
2. On en jouissait. What does eii refer to ?
3. Mais on leg croyait. What is the antecedent of les?
Give the force of un calcul.
4. Tout semhlait devoir. Turn semhlait into an imper-
sonal verb, and resolve devoir into tense and mood, with
tout as subject.
5. I^tre de la politique. Give the force.
6. Itendait meilleur. Turn it into a single word.
7. En affranchissant. Resolve by a conjunction, tense
and mood.
8. Pour s'attacher. Make it definite.
Ill-
Translate :
CHIMENE.
Pour moi ! mon ennemi ! I'objet de ma colore !
L'auteur de mes malheurs ! I'assassin de mon p^re !
De ma juste poursuite on fait si peu de cas
Qu'on me croit obliger en ne m'ecoutant pas !
Puisque vous refusez la justice k mes larmes,
Sire, permittez-moi de recourir aux armes ;
C'est par la seulement qu'il a su m'outrager,
Et c'est aussi par 1^ que je me dois venger.
A tons vos cavaliers je demande sa t6te ;
Oui, qu'un d'eux me I'apporte, et je suis sa conquSte ;
Qu'ils le combattent, sire ; et, le combat fini,
J'^pouse le vainqueur, si Rodrigue est puni.
Sous votre autorit6 souffrez qu'on le public.
CoRNEiLLE, Act iv., Sccne v.
1. Pour moi! mon ennemi! Fill up the ellipsis, and
connect this and following line with the preceding one.
h" i"d>
2. On fait sipeu de cas. Give the force.
3. Qu'on me croit ohliger. What are this and preceding
lines an answer to, and what the two on refer to ?
4. O'eat par Id. Destroy the pleonasm in this and follow-
ing verse, and give the force o? par Id.
5. Si Rodrigue est puni. When does the conjunction si
govern the present, and when the future tense, and when is
it turned into que with the subjunctive. Give an example
for each case.
IV.
History of French literature, from the 18th century to the
present time (Chouquet's.)
1. What work is considered the masterpiece of the French
stage, and by whom was it written ?
2. Name the founders of the Biographie UniverseUe, and
give the character of the work.
3. What are the works which place F. Arago among the
most distinguished literary men of our age ?
4. Give a biographical sketch of E. Sue, and state what
sort of romance he is the creator of.
5. To whom is Franco indebted for Eistoire de Dix
ans, and what is its character ?
•I ,l!l
Hi 1\
Translate
Pai
fait le
et la
et la
votro
pour ^
Oua
choses
Tais
pas a 1
Je V
it !
d'autre
est un (
WLnit^tvuiti^ otmx^uo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
FRENCH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: J i^^^^ Forneri, LL.D.
i Robert Sullivan, M.A.
Translate into English :
JACQUELINE.
Par ma fi, monsieu, ceti^ci fera justement ce qu'anfc
ll I Ti- ' "^ff'^'?^ q«e ce sera queussi queumi
et la meileure mddecame quo Fan pourrait bailler ^
votro fi le ce serait, selon moi, un biau et bon mari
pour qui alle eiit de Tamiqute. '
gerontb.
Ouais ! nourrice ma mie, vous vous mglea de bien des
cboses !
LUCAS.
Taisez-vous, notre minag^re Jacquelaine: ce n'est
pas a vous a bouter U votre nez. « » ce n est
JACQUELINE.
L .1.1 .^uo ae 1 lau uiaire; que votre fiiie a besoin
d autre chose que do rhibarbe et de s^n^, et qu^ln mad
est un empiatre qui garit tous les maux des filled
•ii
i • ,
GERONTE.
Est-elle en 6tat maintenant qu'on s'en vouliit charger
avec rinfirmitS qu'elle a ? Et lorsque j'ai 6te dans le
dessein de la marier, ne s'est-elle pas opposde k mes
volont^s?
JACQUELINE.
Je le crois bian ; vous li vouliez bailler eun homme
qu'alle R'aime point. Que ne preniais-vous ce monsieur
Liandre, qui li touchait au cocur ? Alle aurait ete fort
obcissante ; et je m'en vas gager qu'il la prendrait, li,
comme alle est, si vous la li vouillais donner.
MoLiERE, Le Medecin Malgre lui, Act ii., Scene ii.
1. Les autres. Add the noun.
2. Queussi queumi. Give the force.
8. Taisez-vous. Compare se taire, taire etfaire taire.
4. Ce w' est pas a vous a bouter Id voire nez. Give the force
of a bouter Id voire nez, especially of Id. State what differ-
ence between c'est d vous de, and e'est d vous d.
5. N'y feront rian que de I'iau claire. Give the force.
What does y refer to ?
6. Que ne preniais-vous, ^c. For what does que stand
here?
7. Li, comme alle est. Give the force.
8. Turn all incorrect words and expressions into good
modern French.
II.
Translate into English :
Mais, pour punir enfin nos maitres §. leur tour
Dieu fit choix do Cyrus avant qu'il vit le jour,
L'appela par son nom, le promit k la terre,
Le fit naltre, et soudain I'arma de son tonnerre,
Brisa les fiers remparts et les portes d'airain,
Mit des superbes rois la depouille en sa main,
De son temple ddtruit vengea sur eux I'injure :
Babylone paya nos pleurs avec usure.
Cyrus, par lui vainqueur, publia ses bienfaits,
Regarda notre peuple avec dcs ycux de paix,
Nous rendit et nos lois et nos f ^tes divines ;
Et le temple d^ja sortoit de ses mines.
--i
,'9
Mais, de ce roi si sage, h^ritier insens^,
Son fils interrompit I'ouvrage commence,
Fut sourd a nos douleurs : Dieu rejeta sa race,
Le retrancha lui-meme et vous mit en sa place.
Racine, EatheVy Act iii., Scene iv.
1. Nob maitrea. Name them.
1. Dieu fit choix de Cyru9. Explain the prophecy con-
cerning Cyrus and name the prophet.
3. Avant qu'il vit le jour. Give the force or give a
synonym.
4. Le fit nattre. Explain the peculiarity of faire when
followed by an infinitive without preposition, and compare
ne faire que with ne faire que de.
5. Bahylone — aveo usure. Give the force aveo usure.
6. Son file interrompit. Who is he ?
7. L'ouvrage commence. Name it.
8. Point out the two most striking inversions, and state
what figure you perceive in the lines from " Dieu fit choix
de Oyrui*' up to Cyrus, ^c.
''[.'
"'1
' r p;
,t ; * I
* \l
hpl
.*
HI
■l
:i;i
^^H
m
mH'
ifi-
Ih
■^ <■ *
a: *': 'M '. ' riiia.
CInCiif Vfiiftj? of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS I 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
FRENCH.
HONORS AND SCIIOLAIISIIIPS.
I KOBERT Sullivan, M.A.
POETRY OF THE TROUBADOURS AND TROUVERES COMPARED
AND RENDERED INTO FRENCH PROSE.
Translate into modern French :
Aquelles mans que james perdonaren
Han ja romput lo fill tenint la vida
De vos, qui son do aquest mon exida
Segons los fats en secret ordenaren.
Tot quant yo veig: e sent dolor me torna
Cant me recort de vos que tant amava.
En ma dolor, si prim e bel cercava
Si trobara que 'n dclit se contorna.
Donchs durara, puix t6 qui la sosting.
Car sens delit dolor cresch nos reting.
En cor gentil amor per mort no passa,
Mas en aquell qui sol lo vici tira ;
La quantitat d' amor durar no mira.
La qualitat d' amor bona no s'lassa.
Quant r uU no veu e lo toch no pratica
Mor lo voler que tot por el so guanya
Qui 'n tal punt el dolor sent molt estranya
Mas dura poch qui 'n passau testifica.
Amor honest los^sancts amant fa colre
D' aquest vos am, et mort nol me pot tolre.
SiSMONDi, Langue d' Oc, page 160.
1. AqucUea mans, &c. Whose mans ?
2. Tenint. llcsolvo it into a tcnso and mood.
3. Scgons losfata. Fill up tho ellipsis.
4. Tot quant, llesolvo quant.
5. .SV trohara que 'n ddit, kc. Trcfix the antecedent
to que.
0. Puix te. Fill up tho ellipsis.
7. La sostint/. What docs la refer to ?
8. Dolor creseh nos retimj. Resolve cresch and
analyse nos. ' •
9. Mas en aquellqui. Fill up the ellipsis.
10. La quantitat \l amor La qualitat, &c Ev
plain tho antithesis. i <■• m-
11. No mira. Prefix the subject.
12. For el. What does el refer to ?
13. Qui. Give tho antecedent.
of Ma-^^''''^"'*'' ^''^' '^"'' '^'" ^^^'"'^ '"' *^'^ '-antecedent
15. En passau tcstifica. Give tho force, as well ns of
sancts amantfa colre. ' ^ ^*
II.
Translate into modern French :
Oimi amors si dure departio
Me convendra fairo do la moillor
Qui oncques fust amee no servie.
Dex mo ramoint a lut por sa doucor
fei voirement que j'cn part tl dolor.
i)ex ! qu ai-ja dit, je no m'en part jo mie :
be li cors va servir notre seignor,
Tout li miens cuers remaint en sa baillie.
SiSMONDi, Langue d' Oil, page 209.
1. 3Ie convendra faire. Prefix tho subject. Give a
synonym of cmvendra ; suppress mc, and' resolve faire
into a tense and mood. ^
•'^. Que fen part d dolor. Wliat Joes en refer to ?
4. Qu'ai-Ja dit J Introduce a pleonasm.
from t^m"/ T ""J- 'A '•"'''' ''''''^•'^ '''^^° P''»«««'^ unaltered
trom tl.o Xr ,yyw6' nl 0. into any of the modern tongues and
all those winch have p,,HHed from tho Languc d^o'lZl
modern French without any modifications.
7. Name all words, or expressions, which under tho same
polling bear a different meaning in any of the modem
languages. *' ""uutia
8. Translate into modern French:
Tenmt, sajon^, ^uix, creHch, ulL-{Lancim d' Oc.)
Moillor, 07icques, hit, and cucrH.—{Lanijuc d' Oil.)
9. To what class of composition do the two stanzas above
belong; what inspired them ; and who arc tho authors?
III.
ORiaiN AND FORMATION OF TIIR ROMANCE LANGUAGES,
(By Sir 0. CoiiNWAi.r, Lewis.)
1. How many conjugations has the Provencal Ian -rua^re •
a,m7.^';!"'° ''™^'«'^«"-'->'« »J the gerund of each
3. How did the Provencal use its gerund?
vertf^""''^''^"'"''^ '\ '^'"''''^ '^''' ^" conjunction with
T). Name two words in each languairo Italian Sn^ni.T.
and French, derived from the Teutonic.^ ' ' ^ '^'
G. What sense did ab and a take in the Provengal ?
muUitrd^e'? ''''"'^'' ^''^ '^'" ^''''""^'"^ "'' "^^^^ ^ °°"« «f
8. How did the Proven(jaI form the degrees of comparison .?
#•
1 <
ft-
Uni\^tv»iiji of ^Tovoiftd,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GERMAN.
) Robert Sullivan, M-A.
I.
SUBJECT FOR GERMAN COMPOSITION.
"Character of the Ass."
Within twenty lines at least.
Translate :
II.
®tnc ©tiftung ncucr 2lrt unb etgcner ©attune^ tfl bfefc
fpantfc|e 3nquifttton, bte tm ganjen «aufc ber 3eiten hin
SSorbilt) finbct, unt> mtt fcinem geiftlic^en, fcmcm wcltHc^en,
tribunal ju »erglctc^en fiel)t. Snqutftitton bat eg gcj^cben,
fcitbcm bic SScrnunft ftc^ an bag iJetltgc wai^te, [ettbem eg
Bwetfler imb 9^euever ^ah; aber erft urn bte mim beg
bretjebnten 3abr^unbertg, nacbbem eini'gc 33etfpiele bcr
5lbtranntsfett btc ^^terarc^te aufcjefd^reft batten, baitte i\)x
Snnocenttug ber 2)rttte cmen etgeuen Sh'c^terftubl, unb
trenntc auf eine unnaturlic^e SBetfc bte f\eiftltcbc Stufftcbtunb
Unterwetfung sjon bcr ftrofenbcn (^cmlt Urn bcfto ffcberer
au fei;n, baf fern SJicnfc^engeful;! unb feme S3cftecbung bcr
S^atur btc ftarrc ©trengc ibrer ©tatuten aufliJfe, etttjog er
ftc ben S3tfcb6fen unb ber faculartfc|)en ©ciftltcbfctt, bte burc^
btc S3anbc beg bttrgerlid;en Sebcng noc^ ju [cbr an ber 2>?cn*
[(bbett ^ing, urn ftc ^D^Cncbcn ju iibertrageit, ctner 5lbart beg
nicn[(blicbcn 5«amcng, btc btc beiltgen 2;rtebc ber 9^atur
abgcf^iwprctt, btenftbarcn ^reaturen beg riJmifcben ®tublg.
Schiller Geschichte des Abfalls.
ii ^ '
' ^^^:'i5f
- -l/M^-
.'. 1
I* A\^
1. Uine Stiftung, &o. Give to this compound sentflnra
a regular construcuon 111 the ellipsis and e^Iafn the ^u
of zu vergleichen Ueht nvir. u synonym to stlht.
attrLt a^:^'^^ ''''^- ''"^^ *'''^^-^-' -to an
8. A71, il^^ ' iHgc. Turn it into a relative sentence.
4. Es , . .,ff4ih, vf hat sort of verb, and what case does
It govern ? ^^^
5. Die Rierarchie. M%xaQ it.
6. Baute ihr. What does ihr refer to ?
7. Unnaturm Weise. When is tho adverbial idea
to be expressed by the substantive Weise and the adjective
in tho form of the genitive ? Give an example.
8. Urn desto scherer zu aet/n. Give a synonym of
dcsto, and state when je can bo used instead of desto. Give
an example.
9. Untzog er sie. Give the antecedents of er and sic.
10. Den Bischd-fen Urn sie MiSnchen iihertragen.
hi atm r-«j rule of these dative cases.
11. Du nstbaren Kreaturen, &c. With what docs it
stand in opposition ?
III.
Translate :
^arvtcfba.
®o jfc^t t)dn SnM cin nuf tcme^ 3flc{(|c^ JBobcu!
go t'mmcr fteigcnb fommt 3^r ouf W Jpi)\)m
2;c^ ©ott^arbt^, njo bt'c ew'cjm ©cm fmt>,
Jtc m\ bc^ ^tmmetg ©triJmeu fdbfi ficl) fatten.
SDovt ne^mt 3&r 5lbfrf;tct) »on bcv tcutfc^en grbe,
Unb muntcrn 2ouf^ fai;rt ©uc^ tin anbrer ©trout
3n^ Sanb 3talie;t |)fna(), (?uc^ bag gelobte.
Soiller's Wilhelm Tell
1. So zieht so imner^ %. uive the force of both
these so.
■ 'il
^. Die ew' gen Seen. What arc they?
a. Von dea himmels Striimen. Give the force.
4. Dort. Where.
6. Muntern Laufs Ina Land ItaUen. Explain the
rules applicable to these two expressions.
6. (;e;?oJ<(;. What does it qualify ? Turn it into ft
relative sentence.
IV.
German Literature, 7th period, (Gostick's.)
1. Which of Scl,>!!er'3 Dramas won for the poet uni-
vcrsal reputation in hh native land; and which of his
plays was the aiost popular ?
2. Into how many classes can the prose fictions of the
Germans bo arranged ? Name them.
3. In what class do you fix Goete's Wilhelm Meister's
and Wagner 8 novols ?
4. In what class is German literature particularly rich :
and in what is it comparatively poor 'i
5. What writings led tc the conclusion : « There is noth-
ing m the understanding ivhich has not arrived there
through the senses'^ and what did Leibnitz reply to that
conclusion t '^ •'
.<M|
^
TransI
2)1
S3(
1. .
2. j
single 1
nni\)tiuit]i} ot Eorottte*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GERMAN.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
J^xaminers.'fi^^^^^ Forner^ LL.D.
I Robert Sullivan, M. A.
Translate :
I.
2)a»tfon.
Eos Sobra war mid; au,!cnl)lf(fs atmi
.Den brojften SDimin tn en.qlanb."' ^Tiun bcaanit
©er eMe Talbot unb serivtWVem $BoIf ^
3n fanften SCortcn fein gcmaltfamcei
3Som ^la^e fcr;lt(|,. '
Schiller, Maria Stuart, Act iv., Scene xi.
1. Die andern Lords. Why Lords spelt with a final
t f or/""^* '"^ ^'''''^'^* ^^"^P^^ss the ph
«
?
single word
irase into a
8. Aufgehrachte Volk, Turn aufgehraohte into a rela-
tive sentence.
4. Augcnblioks. What does the genitive express, and
explain to what it owes its origin ?
5. iSobald. Fill up the ellipsis.
0, Der ist es ! Das ist er. Explain the peculiarities of
es and das.
7. Ber rettette. What is the antecedent of der ?
8. JV^iin hegann. Give the difference between nun and
jetzt.
9. So kraftvoU iiberzeugend. Repolve iiberzeugend by a
conjunction, and place it after dasz.
10. AUcs, &c. What does a??cs express here? Give its
peculiarities.
Translate :
3n fccm blut'gen X\)<d tcr X^crmopplcn,
!SBo bcv @rtcd)cn freic ©cf^aavcn fielen,
©rub til iDuivmoi- tbvcr iBrii^ev 2)auf:
,/^lHint'vcv ! \cic(ii ten fintcvlofcn C^ltern,
iDajj fitv'ci 3>atcvtant) auf fciefcn geltern
„eparta'^ f iibnc .^clteuluc^cub [an! !" —
lliib 3ci()vtau[cnt)c fint> ^i^Jtaub cjcivorben,
3cuc^ a)iarmovi3 l^circjc <5aule bva4);
3)oc^ tn tvtumpl^tvcnbeu 5lccorben
9ftiffcn'ci bic 3abf()unbcvtc fid) nad^
Hub cvjal^ttcu, tvoU bem etuvmflet(5|'e
3l)vcr Beit/ ^'•'H ber .<:evocn*®iopc
®er ©cfaU'ucn iinb t^ou Spovta'^ Dcinf. —
©vop UHW @vied;cnlaiib buvd) [cine ^elben,
^^Ibcr cjvo^'cr nod; buvd; [cin ^ergelten,
2Bcnu ber ^iivvicr fiiv bie grei()eit [ant
3en[eit l')I)nt cin ©ott mtt cw'flcn 8tral;Ien,
2)od; ba5 Scbcn unU and) [cincn ©lanj.
9Iur mtt 3vb'[d)cm faun fcie (^vbe jal^lcit,
llnb bci OcljiDcifl tuinbct iUi) jum ^vanj.
KoiiNEii, Episeha Fragmenie, &c., page 28L
1. in c?cm blufgen Thai der ThermopyUn, &c. Give
short notes of this event.
,1 *^ .
2. 0ruh in Marmor, Give the subject.
S. KilJine Ileldenjugend. What number do collective
substantives govern the verb in ; and what the pronouns
referring to them ?
4. lahrtansende smdy &c. Paraphrase this line, and
state why sind and not ist,
5. Riefen's. What docs es refer to ?
6. Sich. Is it reflective or reciprocal ? State the use of
einander.
7. Und erzdhlten. Prefix the subject.
8. Hirer Zeit. What does Hirer refer to ?
9. Durch seine Ilelden. Compare durch with von.
10. Aber grosser noch. Fill up the ellipsis.
11. lenselt. Give the force.
12. Will auch. Add the verb.
13. Niir mit Ird'schem. Turn it into a relative sentence.
14 Und der Oelztveig, &c. Turn und into namely, and
the remainder of the line into an attributive adjective,
governed by mit.
> i I
1, '^'ifTTl
' * . .'-.
Transla
Tl
pe<
ex£
cur
err
dec
Translai
]
Unif^tvm^ of STotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ITALIAN.
JSxaminen: ] t^^^ Forneri, LL.D.
3 Robert Sullivan, M.A.
?■
1 M
a
ft I
i
Translate into Italian :
I.
Zeusi entered into a contest of art with Parrasius.
nplS'T.if ^'"*'lf '"f'"' '" *'"'y ^^^^ ^^r^« came and
exaotiv t . ?• -^^^ ""^^ ^^^^"^'^'^^ ^ ^'^'•tain so
exactly that Zeusi coming, said: "Take away the
curtain that we may see this piece." And finding his
error, said; ''Parrasius, thou hast conquered ; I only
deceived birds, thou an artist. ^
Translate into English :
E '1 Duca disse a me ; Piii non si desta
Di qua dal suon dell' angelica tromba.
guando verra la nimica podesta,
Oiascunrityovera la trista tomba,
Ripigheril sua carnc e sua figura,
Udira quel che in etoj-no rimbomba.
bi trapassammo per sozza mistara
Doll' ombre e della pioggia, a passi lenti,
loccando un poco la vita futura :
1 erch 10 dissi : Maestro, esti tormenti
Crescerann' ei dopo la gran sentenza,
U hen minori, o saran si cocenti ?
:,(!>;,»
1 1
1 m
m
\*' \
r
Ed cgli a me : Ritorna a tua scienza,
Cho vuol quanto la cosa e piii perfetta,
Piii senta '1 bene, e cosi la doglienza.
Tuttoche questa gente maledetta
In vera perfezion giamraai non vada,
Di la piu che di qua, essere aspetta.
Noi apigirammo a tondo quella strada,
Parlando p5u assai eh' i' non ridico:
Venimmo al punto dove si digrada:
Quivi trovammo Pluto il gran nemico.
Dante, Inferno, Canto vi.
1. Pill non si desta. Give the force.
2. Di qua dalsuon, kc. Paraphrase especially aw^/e^wa
tromba.
3. Nimica podesta. What is it ?
4. Quel che in eterno rimhomba. What is it ?
5. Toccando un poco. Explain.
6. Dopo la gran sentenza. Define it.
7. Fien. From what Latin verb is it derived ? What
tense is it, and for what does it stand here ?
8. Si cocenti. Give the second term of comparison.
9. A tua scienza. Name it.
10. Di Id, diqud. Add the complement and give the full
force of this line.
11. A tondo. Explain.
12. Pill assai cli i noji ridico. What language is thi
form of comparison common to ? ^
13. Si digrada. Give the force.
14. Pluto il gran nemico. Who is Pluto according to
poets ?
15. 11 gran nemico. Of whom or what ?
III.
Translate into English :
LXX.
Come r alma gentile uscita ei vede,
Rallenta qnel vigor ch' avea raccolto,
E P imperij di s^ libero cede
Al duol gia fatto impetuoso e stolto,
Ch' al cor si stringe, o chiusa in breve sede
La vita, empie di inorte i sensi e'l volto.
Gitl simile all' estimo il vivo langue
Al colore, al silenzio, agli atti, al sangue.
Lxxr.
E ben la vita sua, sdegnosa e schiva,
Spezzando a forza il suo ritegno frale,
La bella aniraa sciolta alfin seguiva,
Che poco innanzi a lei spiegava 1' ale.
Ma quivi stuol de' Franchi a caso arriva,
Cui trae bisogno d' acqua o d' altro tale,
E con la donna, il Cavalier ne porta
In sh mal vivo, e morto in lei ch' e raorta.
LXXII.
Pero che '1 Duce loro ancor discosto
Conosce all' arme il Principe Cristiano ;
Onde v' accorre; e poi ravvisa tosto
La vaga estinta, e duolsi al caso strano.
E giil lasciar non vuole ai lupi esposto
II bel corpo che stima ancor Pagano ;
Ma sovra 1' altrui braccia ambi li pone,
E ne vien di Tancredi al padiglione.
LXXIII.
Affatto ancor nel piano e lento moto
Non si risente il Cavalier ferito ;
Pur fievolmente getr.e, e quinci & noto
Che '1 suo corso vital non e finite :
Ma r altro corpo tacito ed immoto
Dimostra ben che n' e lo spirto uscito.
Cosi portati, e 1' uno e 1' altro appresso,
Ma in diflferente stanza, alfine e messo.
Tasso, Crerusalemme Liberata.
1. Set these four stanzas into regular construction, and
then translate them into English.
2. Al duol gid fatto, ^'o. Form a relative sentence.
3. E chiusa in breve sede, ^-c. Fill up the ellipsis be-
fore chiusa.
4. Empie di morte. Prefix the subject.
mr
5. Gid simile aV estinto. Paraphrase this line.
6. La bella anima sclolta. Name it, and state whv
seiolta '.' •'
7. Aljin Ufjniva. What figure do you perceive in
aeguiva ?
8. A hi. Give the word referred to.
J>. Ne jwrfa. Give the force of ne.
10. In S6> mal vivo e morto, ,j^c. Explain the meaning of
this hnc. °
11. U Altrui braccia. Give the force.
IV.
HISTORY OF ITALIAN LITERATURE. (Sismondi's.)
1. What heroic poems did Boccaccio leave, and what in-
fluence had they over the future poetry of Italy, Spain, and
Portugal ?
2. Why did he object to the terza rima of Dante ?
3. Give the character of the 15th century with respect to
Italian literature.
4. Nnuio some of the men Avho flourished in the I6th cen-
tury, and to whom wo owe the revival of Greek ^md
Latin literature.
5. Give a short biographical sketch of Francesco Filelfo;
state what he left behind, and how ho contributed especially
to the progress of literature.
^m
Wh
^H not?
H
Tra
^H came
! veri
H
Wh
^H tion,
and
1
Wh
^H
•, to
1
Tra
^^1 o'clock is
H
At
H
Wit
^H pens
are
^H Translate
^H
A
^H
late
^H
alwi
■1
goni
mni\}tvuitp of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
SPANISH.
Ji^xamtners. | ^^^^^^ Sullivan, M.A.
... I Hi I IF'''
'1/ I
( i M
I.
guammatical questions.
1. When is the participle past muerto declined, and when
not?
2. Translate : Th/ brother came very near falling. I
came very near writiny to thee this morning.
3. What verb is employed in Spanish to express a repeti-
tion, and what to express, I have just done a thing P
4. When is the participle past, constructed with the verb
tener, to be declined and when not ?
5. Translate : What o'clock is it 1- One o'clock. Seven
o'clock is about striking.
6. A brother of his, a friend of mine.
7. With what word does cuyo agree. Translate ' Whose
pens are these P
II.
Translate into Spanish :
A man had two sons, one of whom liked to sleep very
late in the morning, and the other was industrious, and
always rose very early. The latter having one day
gone out very early, found a purse well filled with
W
money. Ho ran to his hrothcr to inform Mm «f !,■
Rood luck, and said to him : " Sco Lowk ! . ■ '"'
by rising early ?" " Faith !" »n™^ ^ ''1 .;;f
• .f tl,e person to whom it belong, ha,, not Zn^'
than J, Jjo would not havo lost it." ^^laor
III.
Translate :
Poro mientras I03 dos arab.ilcs, ,,or su rcdiicolon v cl
buon trato ,lol vonccnor con olios, gozaban do la luayo
al.undancia, la ciudad, al oontrario, so vcia roduci.lf nl
mayor cstrocl>o por la lalta do todas las cosasi:; ;^
a la vida. Constrcil.dos al fin por la neccsidad s
moradorcs ofrcc.oron echar a los almoravidcs do alii v
cntn-arsc d Jlodngo, si dontro do cierto tiompo no ies
vcnian socorr.s del Africa. Con estas condicioncs
cons.p.eron treguas por dos meses, en cuyo tormino
part.o el Cid A hacor algunas corrcrfas en los contornos
do Pinnacatel, dondo encerr.1 todo el botin que habia
cogido, y despucs pas6 a las tierras del scnor de
Albarracin, y las estrag6 todas en castigo de haberselc
rebelado aqucl moro.
QuiNTANA, Vida del Cid., p. 12.
1. For su reduccion. What does su refer to ? ComnarG
por with para. ^
2. De la mayor, ^c. Give a synonym.
3. Se veia reducida. Turn it into a passive verb.
4. Constrenidos alfin. Fill up the ellipsis.
5. De alii. Suppress and give the equivalent.
6. En cuyo termino. Give the peculiarity of cuyo.
7. Algunas correrias When is uno or alguno to be ex-
pressed, and when not ?
8._ Habersele rebelado, ^c. Analyse hahersele, and trans-
late it literally. Give the three constructions of se.
IV.
Translate :
Do5tA Irene. Con que, Senor D. Diego ^es ya la
de vamonos? ..Buenos dias.. .{Apaga la luz que estd
sobre la mesa.) ^Reza usted ?
D. DiEQO. Sf para rczar cstoy ahora. (Paaedn.
dose con inquietud.) y^asean-
cndo chocolate, y quo aviscn al Mayoral par? quo
onRanchcn luogo que. ;rcro qn6 tic-nc ustcl.^Scnor ?
...Jlay alguna novedad ? ' '
D DiEuo. Si no (loja do h.-.bcr novcdadcs.
I)o.NA IiiEXE. Pues qu6...D.galo ustcd nor Dies
Vaya,_ Vaya !...No sabc ustcd lo asustada quo (stoy
Cualqu.cra cosa, a«r, repc.tina, ,no ren.uevrto. 7n'.o
.•;-l^<^'«<lo ol nll.n.o ,nal parto quo tuvc c(uel6 t n
sumamonto dolicada<lo los 'ncrvios ..Y va ya n ' a dio/
y nuovo anos, si no son voir.to ; poro dosdo*^ .t nccs ya
«o, cualqujora fnolora n.e tras'torna...Ni los bafios m'
e^t dos do cu ebra, ni la cor.scrva <lo tamarind's . " id
mo ha servido, do niancra quo...
I). DiKoo. Vauios, ahora no hablotnos do nnlo^
at quo tratai...^Quc liacen csas muchachas 'i
MoRATiN, m St de las Ninas, Act iii., Scene xi.
1. Es ya la de vdmonos. Fill ud tho nliin.ic t •
the force of the whole. ^ ''"'P"^' ^''^ .^'^^
^- &X para rezar estou ahora. In whaf «n,-r;f i i
speak thisf Whynot«.i;instead of..!!; '^'''' '^''' ^''
'• ^" ^^^^^^^''^ ^*''' ^^'^^ ^^l^at is the subject of pueden ?
4. r^Meamm. Fill up the ellipsis.
5. Zmc(/o <^i«J... Add the complement.
into^kl^ch!"''' ''''''^- ^^''^'^^^^^ novedad :^ Translate
7. Si, no dcja de haher, ,j^o. Give the force.
8. Yva ja i,ara diez y nueve anas. Give the force.
9. Nada me ha servido. When is nada affirmative ?
10. Be que tratar. Fill up the ellipsis.
11. Point out the most strikino-T)enuliarifvorn^-r ••
not common to other modern languages. *^ PCc;uhanties
11^
V.
HISTORY OF SPANISH LITERATURE (Sismonoi's )
1. Characterise the style of Cervantes in his Don Quixote,
and name some of his best novels.
2. Into how many periods may the life of the Cid be
divided? State them, and specify the contents of each
period. Give a short biographical sketch of Mendoza, and
name some of his best prose compositions.
^Wini\}ttuitn of SToronlo*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L.
1. Give the methods of detecting sulphur and sulphurous
acid.
2. Give the methods of detecting sulphuric acid and a
base, in sulphates insoluble in water and acids.
3. Give the blowpipe tests for manganese, iron, copper,
cobalt and chromium.
4. How m'ly arsenical spots or rings be distinguished
from those caused by antimony ?
5. Analyse a mixture of potassa, soda and ammonia salts.
6. Give the tests for distinguishing baryta, strontia, lime
and magnesia salts.
7. How may meconates, sulphocyanates and acetates be
distinguished ?
8. How may the value of binoxide of manganese be
determined ?
9. How may sulphuric acid be freed from arsenic without
diluting.
10. What adulterations may occur in iodide of potassium ?
How do they arise ? How detected ?
1. W]
2. Gi
of the raj
3. CI;
metals) ac
either org
4. Ho
out the ai
5. Wl
logous ser
6. Ho
7. Wh
of the vap
8. Wh
cule ? W
9. Giv
bon, oxyg(
10. At
pourid can
CI., 6.54 ]
obtained ?
Unmvuitp of STotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GENERAL CHEMISTRY.
I
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L.,
1. What is meant by djalisis ?
2. Give instances of the diffusion of gases, and the law
of the rapidity of diffusion.
3. Classify the non-metallic elements (and analogous
inetals) according to their atomicity, and mention compounds
either organic or inorganic, proving the same.
4. How may nitric acid and ammonia be produced with-
out the aid of their salts ?
5. What law is apparent in the boiling points of homo-
logous series ? Give several instances of these series.
6. How is the specific gravity of vapours determined?
7. What connection is there between the specific giavity
of the vapour of a compound and its molecular weight?
8. What is the difference between an atom and a mole-
cule ? What is the active molecule of chlorine ?
9. Give reasons for doubling the old equivalents of car-
bon, oxygen, and the molecule of cyanogen.
10. A hydrocarbon contains 85.71 C, 14.29 H.; a com-
i.w^jiiu Ctiii Dc uDtaiiiua iiuui it containing -ii.uu (J., 4d.40
CI., 6.54 H., required its formula. How is the hydrocarbon
obtained ?
:"r;i rr 3X ' s : :; ' ,saca
W' \ 'A
1. He
tively ?
2. WI
they difFe:
3. Sh
inorganic
oil of mus
4. Ho
cyanogen
5. Wl
tion of ful
6. Re
ferent ser
7. Gi
how decoi
8. Gi'
chlorine,
9. Wl
10. Fr.
relation b
WLnibtvnits of ^ovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864,
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Examiner: Henry Croft, D.C.L.
1. How may an organic compound be analysed qualita-
tively ?
2. What is meant by rests or residues, and how do
they differ from the old compound radicals ?
3. Show how the following bodies may be produced from
inorganic mrjterials: formic acid, alchohol, glycerine, and
oil of mustard.
4. How is hydrocyanic acid related to formic acid, and
cyanogen to oxalic acid ?
5. What is the present idea with regard to the composi-
tion of fulminic acid ?
6. Represent a tribasic acid typically, and give the dif-
ferent series of salts and ethers which it forms.
7. Give the methods of forming the compound ethers,
how decomposed by potassa, and hovv acted on by ammonia.
8. Give the homologues of ethylene, how acted on by
chlorine, what atomicity have they when acting as residues.
9. What are double ethers, how formed ?
10. From what substances can caffeine be obtained? What
relation between it and tlieobromine ?
i'.j'W
li'ii"™
[JiMiiiiiiiaiia?:'
I
i.::r
iir
I ^llIS>'llIi'^>»«flir
•• -.■ll
ll'f
ii
m«mii
j,j I
mni\itvuitn of iETotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOE B.A.
METEOROLOGY.
Examiner: G. T. Kingston, M.A.
1. State a remarkable exception to the law that bodies
contract with a diminution of heat, and explain the beneficial
consequences that result from this exception.
2. Define the terms ^^ specific Jieat" an^ ^^ latent heat ;"
and determine the weight of ice at temperature 16° that
must bo mixed with lib. of water at temperature 50° in
order that the result may be ice at 32°, the specific heat of
ice being 05 and the latent heat of liquefaction 142.
3. Explain the manner in which heat, rendered latent in
the formation of vapour, tends to equalize the temperatures
of localities that are diff'erently circumstanced with respect
to the action of the sun.
4. Describe the barometer : name the corrections to be
applied to its readings, and state in each case whether the
corrections are additive or subtractive, as well as the circum-
stances which determine their increase or diminution.
5. Define the terms annual variation and diurnal varia-
tion. State also the nature and explain the cause of the
change in the amplitude of the diurnal variations of tempera-
ture in the difi"erent seasons.
6. Define the terms ^^ pressure of vapour," and ^^ relative
humidity,'*' and describe the process of deducing these quan-
tities from the readings of the dry and wet thermometers.
7. If the temperature of the air and the pressure of the
vapour be known, shew how the depression of the dew point
may be obtained.
8. Given the total pressure, as shewn by the' barometer,
and the pressure of vapour, find the so called pressure of
dry air.
9. Explain the utility of a series of hourly observations
of temperature at a central station, in its relation to observa-
tions at the same and at other stations taken less frequently
than at every hour.
10. Explain also the utility of temperature observations
continued for a long series of years at some one station, in
their bearing upon shorter series made in other localities.
11. Describe and account for the monsoons in the Indian
seas.
12. Enunciate and explain Dove's law relative to the
rotation of the wind.
13. Give the meaning of the following terms : " Monthly
and annual isothermal lines" ''^monthly normal temperature
of a parallel of latitude" " thermic anomaly" and *' thermic
normals."
14. Investigate a formula for computing the resultant
direction of the wind for any space of time, when the actual
directions of the wind during that time are given, as well as
the number of miles travelled in each direction.
^^
'nf^P
Iff
Si!
mi
I. M
W' k
t-*^
\ia
GEO]
Jg^;
1. Wha
rocks, and
2. Desc
coal perioc
3. Ment
ous period.
4. To wi
Oriskany,
tribution of
, 5. What
its geologic
.6. Descr
minerals.
7. Descri
tlieory of tl
, 8. Descri
it3 origin.
9. How i
seem to govt
}^- What
■e MouD
^nmtms ^t ^ovonto.
jUiI
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
GEOLOGY AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.
&ttmimr.- T. Sierry Hunt, M.A., F.R.s.
miplfot" "" ^'"^"'^^^ "f ^""h ^"'''rica during the
J peS'"" '°°" °^ '^'' P"""'?*' P'an's of the carbonifer-
Ortka^„;r»d^Tref.on'rlt"'K ?°*^ I-'andeilo.Wenlock,
"ibution of the later? '"'°"S' """^ »'"" « 'h^ dis-
i/geoTogtfreCo™'?''""'"' .'^ «'-^™»'»-' »<» "hat are
I iSr""' *'"' ^"""■"'"■' »«i»«; it^ chief reeks and
! ^l^:Ttit;:!z''"""' •" ^""^ «-?-»••. ^^ the ,
I it.tigr"'' '""^ """ of ^o^"' A-""-"- and the theory ef
* '£ntS f *''' "S' "f ""^ laurentides, and of the
'P-mW^.
tl , .1
ir
iW \M
1. D
and giv
2. G
albite,
other ti
3. E:
state wl
4. W
their ha
5. St
geologic
6. H
it obtaii
7. W
and the;
8. Gi
oxydizii
Uni\}tvuitti of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATE FOR B.A.
MINERALOGY.
tt''i
■'■it
Examiner: T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S.
1. Describe what is meant by uemitropism. in crystals,
and give samples from monometric and triclinic forms.
2. Give tlie general clicmical formula of orthoclase and
albite, and explain the relations between the latter and
other triclinic feldspars.
3. Explain the production of kaolin from^feldspar, and
state what becomes of the separated elements.
4. What native compounds of iron are magnetic ? Give
their hardness, gravity, and color.
5. State the mineralogical characters of tinstone, and its
geological relations.
6. How is gold found in nature, and fby what processes is
it obtained ?
7. What are the principal vein-stones of the ores of lead
and their composition ?
8. Give the theory of the blow-pipe, and the manner of
oxydizing and reducing by it.
1
¥ m
Slnlliet^Ctj) of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
MINERALOGY AND GEOLOGY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner : T. Sterry Hunt, M.A., F.R.S.
1. What silicious minerals contain a large proportion of
magnesia ? Give their hardness, density, and composition.
2. Describe the micas, and enumerate the principal species
01 the mica group.
3. Describe the occurrence, association, and probable
origin of deposits of gypsum.
4. Explain the theory of metallic deposits, both in beds
and in veins.
5. Describe the principal groups of mineral springs in
Canada.
'I* '/'I
6. Describe the Quebec group, and its relation to the
other Lower Silurian rocks.
7. Explain jointing, slaty cleavage, and foliation, with tho
causes to v hich they are attributed.
S. Explain the structure of synclinals and anticlinals, and
their relations to hills and valleys.
y. Into how manv filaasPH matr vn^„T>fo;»,g K/x j:..:j_j __4
now are volcanic cones and trappean mountains formed ?
.HT ^T|-r-Tr
I I ,
Wini\>tvuiti!! of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A,
BOTANY AND HISTOLOGY.
^^arniners:l^ll^^^^^^^^
1. The Amomal alliance— its common character— analysis
of its orders, with an account erf their properties and uses.
2. Sub-kingdom DicotyledoncEC, class Gymnogengs : ex-
plain the structural characters of the class, and give some
account of the orders.
3. Analysis of the Urtical alliance, noticing its more
important orders, mth their distinctions and properties.
4. Order Simarubacece — its position and characters— its
properties. Notice of the Cedron.
5. Daphnal alliance — its position. Analysis of its orders,
orders, "with an account of their properties.
6. Order Apocynaceoe — its position and properties : ex-
amples of familiar and beautiful plants belonging to it.
Native example.
7. What are the meaning, objects and present position of
the science of Histology, with its connection with other
important sciences ?
8= Give some account of the rotation of fluids within the
cells of plants.
9. The different microscopical appearance of flax, cotton,
wool and silk. *
10. Sclerogenou3 deposits in vegetable cells; general
mode of deposit ; parts of plants in which such deposits are
most remarkable ; examples of peculiar appearances.
11. Structure of bone— its microscopical appearances, and
their chief varieties.
12. Pedicellarioe of Echinodermata— their peculiar appear-
ance—curious error respecting their nature- their supposed
use. '^^
■ f h '
t ••fMJjF."' :
IP
1. T
viewini
in orde
2. I
differei
accoun
to a m(
mon t}
3. S
aqueou
sary, a
accomj
4. F
its valu
animals
5. G
light aj
6. S
pans 11
parativ
Winibtvm^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY.
JExammera.'i^^'i' ^^^^- Winces, F.L.S.
\ T. J. Cottle, Esq.
1. What are the principal differences in the mode of
viewing the phenomena presented by the animated creation,
in order to derive from them general scientific laws ?
2. Principle respecting the mode of providing for the
different habits of minor groups under a common type, which
accounts for the peculiar development or occasional reduction
to a merely rudimentary state of parts belonging to the com-
mon type.
3. State the reason why a provision for exhalation of
aqueous fluid from the surface of organised beings is neces-
sary, and give some account of the means by which it is
accomplished in the animal kingdom.
4. Food — its varieties, and the circumstances upon which
its value depends. Adaptation of the structure of different
animals to the kind of food they are destined to consume.
5. Give the known particulars respecting the evolution of
light and heat in the vegetable kingdom.
6. Structure of the brain in vertebrata — state the separate
parts found in the brain, and the differences of their com-
parative development in the different divisions.
II"" ii
9
w
:rJ^H
M
m
'^^H
W'
-4-''^^^^^^|
m
W
''^^^^H
T^y
'^^1
If
W A
r^l
Unii^tvuitt:^ ot ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FOURTH YEAR.
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
Examiner: Rev. James Bbaven, D.D.
SMITH'S WEALTH OF NATIONS.
1. a. In the ordinary state of agriculture, what else,
besides the wages of labour, has to be provided for out
of the produce of labour ?
h. " This great apparent profit, however, is frequently
no more than the reasonable wages of labour."
Explain and illustrate, and state the portion of the
subject in which it stands.
2. a. Which of the products of land always aflfords rent?
h. Give examples of products which sometimes do
and sometimes do not afford rent, and shew the causes
of the difference.
c. State the causes of the different money value of
corn at different periods ; and connect this with the
variations in the value of silver.
3. State and exemplify the difference between productive
and unproductive labour. Point out the connexion between
capital and either of these, and its relation to industry and
parsimony respectively.
4. Shew the object of restraints upon the importation of
such goods as can be produced at horaej and discuss the ex-
pediency of such restraints.
5. ** But the political institutions of the English colonies
liave been more favourable to the improvement and cultiva-
tion of this land (North America) than those of any of the
other nations."
Explain this passage and state what point it is intended to
illustrate.
6. " The works constructed by the ancient sovereigns of
Egypt, for the proper distribution of the waters of the Nile,
were famous in antiquity, and the ruined remains of some of
them are still the admiration of travellers."
What subject is illustrated by this paragraph, and how ?
. 'u^
!"«*
,;/;,:
i
' '-'ft
ClnCiitrsfttf of rovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS,
IIO^UIIS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiner: Rev. rnoFESSoii Mubkay.
o
1. a. Of what larger work was tho Novum Organon
intended to form a part? ^
b. What was the end ivhich that larger work had
in view i
c. Explain tho relation of the Novum Orffanon to
the other parts of the work.
a. Into how many parts is the Novum Organon
divided ? State the suhject of each part.
h. In what form are both parts written ?
3. Explain (a) the method wnich IJacon considered tho
great obstacle to the advancement of science, and f^>) the
method which ho proposed to substitute in its place.
4. a. What does Bacon understand by idola ?
h. IIow many kinds of idola does he enumerate?
c. Explain each kind.
5._ State which kind of idola is referred to in each of tho
lollowing quotations :
a. "That our language (when we speak of a chain
of causes and effects) is merely analogical,
must, 1 think, be admitted by every person who
has taken the trouble to reflect on the subject;
and yet it is certain that it has misled the
greater part of philosophers.'' {B. Stewart)
h. Tn our reason there exist fundamental rules
of Its exercise which have completely the ap.
pearanco of objective principles. Now from
his cause it happens, that the subjective neces"
sitjr of a certain connection of our conceptions
IS regarded as an objective necessity of Z
determination of things in themselves." (^an/.)
c. " Musicians think our souls are harmonies,
riiysicians ho d that tlioy complexions be;
Ep^ures make them swarms of atomies, '
Which do by chance into our bodies flee."
{Sir J. DavieB.)
7. Point out the conclusiveness of ' « •
b. Explwn Hamilton's division of tho dualities of
natter, pomt ng out its peculiarity an'd il "cla-
pccptio';^ ""'""'°" '"='-^" --'- -1
says^eid*'""""^ " "" '"""^*'''"' ■'""'''"'S" of tl,e past,"
*■ m feili-"" ''"'!:'"*'' "f ""» "™»<"" of memory
on lieid s own theory of im.ue.Iiate peroeptlo^
lU. fetato Hamilton's distribuh'nn /.p +i
with regard to rerccDtion ^vnl • '■''' ^'^''^ou^ tl'cories
he desi,ites ^^ ^:^ X:^^ ^ZS^^ ^
; 'i m,f
-'S
M
■'*:
"■v .
■f3'i
iSinif^tvmp of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
HONORS.
Examiner: Rev. James Beaven, D.D.
TENNEMANN AND MORELL.
1. Give from Tennemann and Morell several definitions
of philosophy, and show to which of them Aristotle most
nearly approximated. To which does Morell incline ?
2. What place did philosophy hold in the system of
thought of the Christian Fathers ?
3. Connect Leibnitz with previous philosophy, showing
how it contributed to form his mind. Show his divergencies
from it. Point out his leading principles, and connect his
line of thought with subsequent German philosophy.
_ 4. Point out and exemplify the differences between theolo-
gical and philosophical scepticism.
6. Why cannot phrenology serve as the basis of a system
of psychology ? Who has attempted to make it do so ?
What has it really done ?
6. Sketch from Tennemann and Morell the principles of
Fichte's theory of the foundation of human knowledge.
7. Give Maret's place in philosophy. Explain the nature
and objects of his great work, and exhibit its defects.
JOUFFROY AND STEWART.
«„li 71"^* i<!ea according to Jouffroy, is the foundation of
all duty, right, obligation and rules of morality ?" Br
what steps, do wo rise to the conception of this fundamental
Idea i and what is its connexion with God and with beauty?
2 What two facts of our nature does Jouffroy point out
as the basis of mysticism, and how does he support his
opinion ? Sketch its effects on the anchorites.
3. Give Jouff-roy's estimate of the scepticism of the
present age, as compared with that of the 18th century, and
as it is m Itself. "^ '
4. Bentham argues that to contend for an innate principle
of moral action independent of utility is despotic and anar-
chical : explain this argument and the principle against
which It IS directed. Refute it, and show that his own prin-
ciple has these very faults.
5. What share had Shaftesbury, Bufier and Hutcheson
respectively in the development of the doctrine of a moral
sense? With what peculiarities do Hume and Mackintosh
support that doctrine ?
6. Show, from Stewart's arguments in reference to Cud-
worth and Hutcheson, that he did not consider reason by
itself, or feeling by itself, to be the faculty by which we dis-
tinguish right and wrong. How far is Jouff-roy lustified in
asserting that Stewart " inclines to adopt reason, though
declaring that the question is of little importance, if it is
once admitted that the words good and evil represent simple
and real qualities of actions."
¥, . I'
;i' . i.
i: i -m
■|5I|, I
r
Wini\^tvuitsf of ^rotoitito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR B.A.
METAPHYSICS AND ETHICS.
HONOES AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
\ Rev. r.xC.Fi=iS3CE MuAc:tiAT.
THOMSON.
1. Show the utility of some acquaintance with logic, even
if not M]y matured, and on ground the most unlikely.
Illustrate tius from the faculty of anticipation.
2. Connect definition with one kind of immediate infer-
ences.
3. Point out the distinction between formal and material
truth, and show the relations which the four principal cri-
teria of truth bear to each.
4. What are categories, and what is the use of a table of
them ? Examine Aristotle's table by this test.
llV
LOCKE, WITH COUSIN'S CRITIQUE; KANT'S
CRITIQUE OF THE PURE REASON.
1. a. What, according to Cousin, are the two enquiries
which may be made with regard to ideas, and
which of these should com-; / rst ?
h. With which of these does Locke begin ?
c. What objection may bo urged against Locke's
method in this respect ?
2. How has this method of Locke influenced philosophical
researches generally in his school ?
3. ih What is the distinction, on which Cousin insists,
between the logical and the chronological order
of our ideas ?
6. lilastrate this distinction with reference to the
idea cf time.
4. State Cousin's objections to the following doctrines of
Locke, that
a. All words are derived from sensible ideas ;
I. All words are purely conventional ;
c. All general ideas are merely words ;
d. Words are the sole causes of errors.
5. What is the distinction, which Kant institutes, between
knowledge a priori and knowledge a posteriori ?
6. a. Explain the difference between analytic and syn-
thetic judgments.
h. Explain the question in Avhich Kant sums up the
problem of the pure reason, IIoiu are synthetic
judgments a priori possible ?
7. What is Kant's distinction between transcendental and
transcendent P
8. a. What does Kant understand by Transcendental
Aesthetic and Transcendental Logic respectively ?
h. What are the two parts into which Transcendental
Logic IS divided, and the enquiries to which each
IS devoted ?
9. In what sense does Kant use the word idea ?
10. a. What does he understand by an antinomy of the
pure reason ?
h. State any one of the antinomies.
li
t '/ ■ 1
1)'''" «
l' ■ .'} -i
\ A.
;■■■ \< A
t:yi
li
I
pf
. I';
iJ , t|
■H
nni\}tvnltti of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FOURTH YE Ul,
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS,
Examiner: Rev. James Bbaven, D.D.
MILL.
1. Give Mill's definition oT labour generally, and compare
it with Senior's, especially with regard to their accuracy.
Show the several workings of both bodily and mental
labour.
2. " From that time it is the law of production from the
land, that in any given state of agricultural skill and know-
ledge, by increasing the labour, the produce is not increased
in an equal degree."
What are the results of this lav ? What con ractinn^
principle, and how does that work 'i What remeUies, and
when and how far are they effectual ?
3. How does it come to pass that the expressio.i.^ — that
wages depend upon the demand and supply of labour, and
that they depend upon the proportion between lab' ■'. and
capital, — are equivalent to each other? Exf -lin th laws
which govern the proportion of population ? one
locality.
4. Show that credit by itself does not increase capital.
What then are its advantages ? Explain the different ways
in which credit is made to answer the purposes of money.
6. Discuss the jfuestion of restricting the iss, r bank
notes to one establishment, or allowing a plurality, , issuers.
6. Show the effect of tithe, considered as a permanent
m ? r^' r '^l P^i^^ °f ^''^ ^-d the rate ff profits
What other effects has it ? pi^uts.
LIEBER.
1. Support the opinion that ethics ought and can b«
applied to pohtics. Why ought others besides statesmen to
be taught so to apply them ? How do these reasons annlv
more strongly to modern times ? ^^^
2. Point out the permanent and variable eloments in tho
formation of a good form of government, and pply hern to
the^discussion of the question-which is the bLVgov^m.
3. Discuss the case of smuggling.
4. " In Hesse-Cassel it was found that far too many voun^
men received a university education, thus preparrn^/them
for careers m which thoy oould not'succeed, o^wing^to t}^
number of apphc.uts. . was passed which allowed t le
child of certain p.re.. only to study in the universities."
Wl_at subject dr this illustrate ? Discuss the princinle
here involved, an show ^ e of its workings. P'^'^^'P'^
lJ;iff;f\^J'-'^ explait. t. ,^ iea of representatives in
WhJ^' '"'''"' ''^^ ^? ^ ^^ considered as ei mies, and why '
What harm may i ghtly be done to them, anu why 9 "^^ •
m
^
1. D
rib— th
and adj
2. G
extend
3. D
4. Di
5. D(
6. D<
relatione
,. i ■,:' ' , i '■ ,1 11
^niMttuitQ of rovonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
ANATOMY.
FOR HONORS.
Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D.
1. Describe the posterior extremity of the fifth or sixth
rib--the lower extremity of the radius-and the head neck
and adjoming part only of the femur. ' '
2. Give the attachments of the muscles which flex and
extend the fore-arm, with the ligaments of the clb^w Joint
3. Describe the stomach and its relations.
4. Describe the kidney and its relations.
5. Describe the pericardium; its attachments and uses.
6 Describe the left side of the heart, with the course and
relations of the thoracic aorta.
W
.:,(^ :,..,
'[1
'it
m^
■'■ i
1*' -
.;',-
!■' ■t'
^,„i---^'
1 ^H'
1. D
separal
their r(
ponent
2. r
of a lo
3. I
the ch
4. (
tural,c
5. 1
descril
6. ]
the s^
ft
they I
iSluiiietfiiUj? of 5Covonto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
.|,«,B
i^m
FIKST YEAR.
PHYSIOLOGY.
Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D.
1. Describe the methods by which the organic may be
separated from the inorganic constituents of bone: state
their relative proportions, and name the several earthy com-
ponents.
2. Describe the course of the nutritive fluid in the shaft
of a long bone.
3. Describe the several coats of an artery, and mention
the characteristic differences between an artery and a vein.
4. Give a description of areolar tissue, naming its struc-
tural,elements, its various positions and its purposes.
5. Mention the chief agents in gastric digestion, and
describe t'.e gastric mucous membrane.
6. How are the nitrogenous excretions eliminated from
the system? and mention the chief forms under which
they appear.
%i^'
1.
a solid
2.
referrf
3.
liquids
4.
5.
and hj
6. ;
method
7. ]
8. 1
9. J
alkaline
10. l\
&'■*■
Bni\^tvfiiti} Of ^ovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FIRST YEAR.
W ■ :<
'^MimE^'i
CHEMISTRY.
Examiners: J ^^^^"^ Croft, D.C.L.
. i H. Y. Hind, M.A.
a solid h:rvil';th» ra°:r ""^""^ ""= ^j'^^'*" s-"'y ^^
liqufds7'"" "''■"'""''""''^^ "ff^' 'I'o boiling points of
4. By what moans may bodies be orystalised .'
and M^og:;!:' *" P"P»™'i°","'' F.-o,>orties of oxygen
r^el^^Zi!^^'"^^ "^"^-'^^ "J '-^ general
7. Describe the preparation and properties of chlorine.
8. Mention the sources and properties of carbonic acid.
alkatfethran^d'^r^tr;';"'."'^""'''^' °^'"^ »"'^"-.
10. Mention the principal oxides of iron, rrivin^ f„r„„.u.
II
til'*
**' ^
]
and
c
tube
give
and
ad
stror
IC
copp
11
are i
Bulpl
i .:
and
nnihtvnits of Kovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18G4.
FIEST YEAR.
CHEMISTRY.
FOR HONORS.
I H. Y. IIiND, M.A.
m
W
1. Reduce 112° Fahrenheit to Centigrade and Reaumur,
and 60° Cent, to Reaumur and Fahrenheit.
2. What is the cause of the ascent of liquids in narrow
tubes ?
3. What is meant by the latent heat of steam ?
4. What circumstances are essential to combustion ?
5. Explain the formation of hydrogen.
6. Describe the preparation of common phosphoric acid *
give its formula and those of its soda salts.
7. Mention the sources and modes of proparaticn of lif^ht
and heavy carburettcd hydrogen.
8. Describe the preparation of the carbonates of potassa
ad soda.
9. From what mi-orals are the salts of barium and
strontium obtained, and how ?
10. Give the formulas of the o.vi'l'
copper, lead, tin, and mercury.
11. From what substance is arson i..!^ acid obtained ; what
are its principal properties, and why is it often found in
sulphuric acid ?
12. What other elements are usually ranked with arsenic,
and why ?
manganese, iron,
p^"
1.
theh
undei
2.
follov
pulm(
3.
adult.
4.
gang!
5.
portrc
6. ]
state 1
ii» 'illiliU' ■
nnmvmp of ^ovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND TEAR.
PHYSIOLOGY.
Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D.
1. How IS the blood exposed to the action of the air in
the lungs ; and how many cubic inches of air are exchansred
under ordinary circumstances, at oii jl respiration ? *
2. What nerves penetrate tlie pulaionary substance
following the ramifications of the bronchu.s, and of the
pulmonary artery ?
3. Describe the structure and function of the hea-t n. the
adult.
4. Name the most remarkable nerves proceeding from the
ganglia of the thoracic portion cf the sympathetic.
5. What are the peculiarities of the blood of the vena
portfc ?
6. Describe the glands of the duodenum and ileum, and
state what is known of the functions of the latter.
11
;
■'I
i
•■ m
p":k
"
,v.
mBt^R.
¥
1. ■ .. .,
\ri
;*'
>* ,f li
p,
h^^"
^ -^A
•i
IS r
acti
dire
pow
she\
hyd:
and
occi
1(
diffe
1]
outa
V.
Give
mnibtvuitp of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
'>
SECOND YEAR.
CHEMISTRY.
FOR HONORS.
Uxammera: \ H^nry Croft, D.C.L.
I H. Y. Hind, M.A.
, ,iM|
!!■ ' ^'
• "'^^i.^r"'^,'^®.*^® phenomena observed when sutta percha
IS rubbed with flannel. ^ pt^icua
2. Describe an electrical machine and its mode of action.
3. Describe the condensing electroscope and its mode of
action.
4. Describe Grove's galvanic battery. What is the
direction of the current ?
5. Give Ampere's theory of magnets, and show lio^Y a
powerful magnet may be made.
6. Give the present definition of organic chemistry, and
shew why older definitions are erroneouS.
7. Give the sources, preparation and properties of
hydrocyanic acid. ^ ^
8. Give the sources and formulas of methylic, cthylic,
and amyhc alcohols. "^ ^ '
9. In what organic bodies do sulphur and cyanogen
occur? ^ ^^''i"ot.u
10. Give some of the fatty acid series, and show how they
differ from each other. •'
11. What are the amides and nitriles : how arp th^^
obtaineU f , — _ — y
12. What are the compound ammonias ; how obtained?
Vjive instances.
.-.i i'i;"a!!iii!aiiiiii»Bgte5iR-
1.
2.
3.
Leyd(
4.
5.
organ
6.
7.
orgar
8,
and c
9,
10
may
11
12
impo
Uni\}tvf$it^ of roronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINAT NS: 1864.
8ECOND xEAr
chi:mistry.
I 1
"ml
Examiners:
{ Henry Croft, D.C.L.
i 11. Y. Hind, M.A.
1. '}' are the general properties of magnets?
2. What is meant by the term electrical excitation? •
3. Describe some of the effects of a discharge from a
Ley den jar.
4. Describe Volta's pile.
5. What elements enter into the composition of natural
organic bodies ? •
6. Explain the general principle of organic analysis.
7. Give some instances of the artificial formation of
organic bodies.
8. How is cyanogen obtained ; what are its properties
and composition ?
9. What are the products of the fermentation of sugar?
10. Into what classes are the sugars divided, and how
may grape sugar be formed ?
11. What is the nature of gun cotton ?
12. What are the vegetable alkaloids ? Mention the most
important.
w
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
h
//
{/
/-
«p^
f/.
7/
^^
10
I.I
i^ 1^ 111112 2
1^ lis IIIIIM
L25 i 1.4
1.8
1.6
m
v^
^>
>>
'^^^».
>>
C/;.^
/^
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, MY. 14580
(716) 872-4$03
4^
,\
iV
:\
\
^<b
V
"<«v
a
^^
.v-..'^'^^^
«=^^
£^y
Ua
^
I •
m
I" •
■ :-T
!: X'-^b ■
':"'4
■ ■'
. ■■■;»
,V ''^-!'iji^'^«
m
■■ '■ 'If''-,
m
(it
A-
il*' . 'IN,
Wini\itvtiits of Toronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
BOTANY.
„ . f Rev. Professor Hincjks, F.L.S.
■^^«^*"^^«-\ T.J. Cottle, Esq.
1. What are the two principal kinds of organizable mate-
rial of which plants are formed ? How do they differ in
chemical composition ?
2. Deposits on the walls of cells and vessels, what is their
nature, and how is their uniformity interrupted ?
3. Describe the structure and mode of increase of endo-
genous and exogenous wood, and show that three sections
are required to examine by the microscope the nature of the
latter, whilst two suffice for the former.
4. What is meant by the term phyllodium? Give an
example.
5. What is chorisis ? What are its two kinds ? What
class of phenomena is it supposed to explain ?
6. Principal modes of placentation of seeds, with an ex-
planation of their origin.
7. What is the position of the embryo in respect to the
albumen in the seeds of grasses, as wheat, rice, Indian corn.
&c. ? How is the gluten disposed in the seed of wheat ?
m
8. What is the nature of the reproductive system of ferns?
9. The bloodroot or puccoun— what is its scientific name ?
to what natural order does it belong ? what medical proper-
ties belong to it ?
10. Aconitum napellus— monkshood — to what order does
It belong ? What are the general properties of the order,
and how are they manifested in this species ?
11. Name some Canadian examples of the order Scrophu-
lariacese. What are the prevailing properties of the order ?
Name one or two other important medicinal plants belonginff
to it ? IT o e,
12. Give an analysis of the orders of the class Endogense.
';|,:''i '\
,:l . i
Wis III!" I V, P
w - " ■':
:pf!ll|:i:'':!:::J|||
: ■' ... I'n
''iim
,1, .^^,UI,,il
firiiii;;.:.
1
TB
1. 1
it obta
2. ]
3. \
What
variety
4. I
therap
5. \
phur, i
6. ^
7. \
of zinc
8. g
potash,
9. \
are its
by the
10. V
and wl
Wini\itvuits of 3:ototito.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
THERAPEUTICS AND PHARMACOLOGY.
Examiner: Uzziel Ogdkn, M.D.
I" . I'l I
W
'jlllllill
«T init'ilMii
IL
' ii
■M
^ 1. What are the sources of magnesiae sulphus, and how is
It obtained from each ?
2. How is potassae nitras prepared artificially ?
3. What alkaloids are obtained from Peruvian bark?
What are their therapeutical differences, and from which
variety of bark are they respectively obtained ?
4. Name the chief alkaloids of opium, and state their
therapeutical difference.
5. What are the therapeutical properties and uses of sul-
phur, its dose, and officinal preparations ?
6. What is the strength of vinura antimonii ?
7. What are the therapeutical properties, uses and doses
of zinci sulphas, cupri sulphas, and argenti nitras ?
8. State the formulae of the hypophosphites of lime, soda,
potash, and ammonia.
9. What are the physical properties of gamboge ? What
are its therapeutical properties, and how are these modified
by the dose ?
10. Where is jalap obtained, what are its chief constituents,
and what is its dose ?
:■«■
I - , '11
i»!
1. :
tussis.
2 '
treatir
3. '
sical r
4. ^
5.
of the
6. }
would
7. ^
treat ii
8. \
9. \
treat il
10. i
with at
^nmvuits! Of {Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864
I. 'I||l
III
THIRD YEAR.
PRACTICE OF MEDICINE.
Examiner : Uzziel Oqden, M.D.
tuss'is.^'''"^' '^' '''''''' ^^"'P*^™^' «^nd treatment of per-
^r'^Z^n^or^^^^^^^^^^ metastases, and
sicf i S^r '^' ^^"«^« «f endocarditis, and its chief phy-
4. What are the symptoms and treatment of ton^^-'Iitis ^
treat iu'lctsf '"""P'" ''°""''''' ■""> ''»'' "ould you
8. What are the symptoms and signs of acute bronchitis ?
treat if?"" "' "" '^"P"""'"' «J»'i«is, and how would you
with alr^u't. "■' '""'"'"" ""' ^"-6-».s associated
; 'I,
,^4
i
(
( .
' ''1
il
I 4'
ff;
1.
sick ;
2.
hydrc
3. :
4. {
of a ]
wound
5. ^
necesss
with tl
luxatioi
6. A
bright r
7. Gi
the knee
THIJRD YEAR.
ill
'1 , i '
SUKGERr.
2. State th. *^ """^""^ '»-<'<«>"
hydrocele of tJ:t„S'-t„.t«"°'" '""' '-'-nt of
'• "'"^""'^ •""■ "•^»' » acute ab,oe„.
of a T.Z r;r^^"'5"'-.'""J '-atme„t of f^oture
"ound of the lung '^ ' "Sam when compoundeHth
"*;.»'
^^iNi
;^;.i , ..>:•!'
i
w
M
' ijitjy
Ei
1. Wha
2. Wha
3. Wha
4. In fu
what is th(
5. Whai
>Yhat is th(
anluetttltj? of mvonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864.
m
I' Hi.
THIED YEAR.
OBSTETRICS, &c.
Ilzaminer: C. J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S, Enq.
1. What are the symptoms and proofs of pregnancy ?
2. What is labour ?
3. What presentations occur ?
whtt ?MleteCmf °"' "'"" ■"■" ""' -=""-'--«-. and
, N. B — These questions ore also for Honors.
1. Wl
2. W]
founded
3. De
4. De
6. m
6. Wl
Wini\itv»itsf ot Zatonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
■:;-.j|
MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE;
Exammer: C. J. Phubriok, F.R.C.S., Eso.
:■'■' 1,*;;
f"'^' I! i|
1. What is strangulation ?
2 What appearances attend it ? and what may be con-
founded with it ? ^
3. Determine that a woman has been delivered of a child.
4. Determine the time of the delivery.
5. What are the symptoms of poisoning by strychnia ?
6. What are the tests for strychnia ?
N. B — Also for Honors.
I'**' m)
ti
tl
t\
tr
tfa
di
ex
be
ex
ep
hei
pe
ap<
the
^ni\$tvmi^ of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY.
Examiner: M. Barrett, M.A., M.D.
1. Note the differences existing between fishes ^nrl *.««
2. Describo the testes or spermatic organs of birds a, f„
the.r pos,t,on, structure, and perio.Iical df velopLnt '
e.itte^S''rf''.h."'' ""' P"-^^'"'"*!"^'! "lation of ,he co-
5. What substance replaces uric acid in the urin» „f
herWrous an.mals, and what are its most "ema^kawTpr:.'
6. Compare the human skull with that of the anthro„„i^
apes, in reference to the position of th, f^L„ anthropoid
the angles whinh the eondX i *''^..f'"^?°'«'> magnum.
*'lll
,'^.itW
fi',...
1
^M :■
4
dete(
5
6
7
amm
8
grou]
9
10
<Slnfbrrfiiit9 of rotonto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
CHEMISTRY.
I
'Ml
";iii.
I .111
^milii'iiiilM
:;;;fisi:P
--,•:■?!,;■ III!
J !■!!■(«
I' ■i!» il
'11 / : .1.1
^ PI. Y. IIixXD, M.A.
1. Give the tests for potassa .uul ammonia.
2. Give the tests for protoxide and peroxide of iron.
3. Give the tests for oxide of copper.
4. What impurities occur in hydrochloric acid: how
detected ?
5. Give the best tests for lead.
6. Give the best tests for oxide (red) of mercury.
7. What metals are precipitated white by sulphide of
ammonium?
8. What reagents are used in dividing the acids into
groups?
9. How is uric acid detected ?
10. Give the best test for strychnine.
1.
nitric
2.
sorbed
4.
and ho
5.
hydros
6.
disting
7.
8.
calculi
9.
10.
on line
Uni\)tvnit^ of is:otonto«
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18G4.
TIimD YEAR
||.. :! I
Pi''
'f'':ll
CHEMISTRY.
FOR HONORS.
^o^ammer.;/ Henry Croft D.C.L.
\ H. Y. Hind, M.A.
1. How may sulphuric acid be freed from arsenious and
nitric acids ?
2. Describe the process of detecting arsenic when ab-»
sorbed into the tissues.
3. Give the tests for antimony.
4. What metals are precipitated by hydrochloric acid,
and how are they distinguished ?
5. What metals are precipitated from acid solutions by
hydrosulphuric acid ?
6. How may sulphocyanic, mcconic, and acetic acids be
distinguished ?
7. Give the tests for zinc, cliroraiam, and aluminum.
8. How may phosphoric acid be detected in a fusible
calculus ?
9. How may oxalate of lime be recognised ?
10. What process would be adopted in detecting blood
on lineu or steel ?
ilfi!'
i
'i^
'■„. w ■!■, ;,
i'.'M
r-^m
•n
V ■ ■■ ;-.li
%i
CAN
1. ]
the po
2. ^
3. I
4. C
viscera
ings, ai
5. G
supply]
6. E
its brar
7. E
portal 1
8. D
thoraci(
9. G
betweer
uni\^tvm!i of mvmto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1804.
CANDIDATES FOR M.B.-FOR PRIMARY EXAMINA-
TION, OR SECOND YEAR SCHOLARSHIP.
■ km
L..
,-;,flv!i|l
ANATOMY.
:i
Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D.
1. Describe the first cervical vertebra, designating also
the points of muscular and ligamentous attachment.
2. What are the boundaries of the femoral ring ?
3. Describe the anatomy of the inguinal canal and rings.
^ 4. Give the situation, shape, attachments, structure and
visceral relations of the diaphragm, the nature of its open-
mgs, and what they transmit.
5. Give the origin, course and distribution of the nerves
supplying the diaphragm.
6. Describe the extent and relations of the brachial artery.
Its branches and their distribution.
7. Describe the origin, course, termination and use of the
portal vein.
8. Describe the origin, course, termination and use of the
thoracic duct.
9. Give the dissection of the region of the neck lying
between the os hyoides and the inferior maxilla.
■m
\l^'^%
I
Unmvmu of ^ovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
DEGREE OF M.B.
PHYSIOLOGY.
Examiner : M. Barrett, M.A., M.D.
!| ''''')!«/
' i'l'j
li ' wm
!! I'
,1^1
!," Ii*il
i;-i;:l:;
1. Describe the hepatic circulation, and state what
changes are effected in the blood passing through this organ.
2. Name the principal components of the biliary secretion,
and give Pettenkofer's test for bile.
3. Describe the structure and function of the foetal heart.
4. Give the microscopical anatomy, and function of the
kidney.
5. How may the specific gravity of the urine be deter-
mined without the aid of the urinometer, and what informa-
tion does a knowledge of the specific gravity afford ?
6. Trace the longditudinal fibres which are to be seen on
raising the superficial layer of the pons varolii, both up-
wards and downwards ; name the nerves connected with this
tract, and the function to which they are subservient.
•"il
jM
1. \
treatmi
2. y
how w(
3. I
of crou
disease
4. V
how wc
5. A
of age,
appetit
increas
nous a
treated
6. E
Write ^
7. A
tacked
giddine
cold, fji
Whati
other 8
you tre
r/«»-r
Winmvnits of STotonto.
ANNUAL EXAAfTNATIONS : 1864.
DEGREE OF M.B.
PRACTICE OF MEDICINE.
Examiner : Uzziel Ogden, M.D.
'lr-<t
1. What are the symptoms, usual period, of attacl- and
treatment of acute podagra ?
2. What are the most frequent causes of haemoptysis, and
now would you treat it ?
3. How would you diagnose between the false membranes
ot croup and diphtheria, and how would you treat the latt^-r
disease in a child four years old ?
4. What are the most frequent causes of haeraaturia, and
now would you treat it ?
5. A few months ago I was called to see a boy 14 years
of age, who was thin, pale, and slightly anasarcous ; his
appetite was bad, bowels confined ; urine pale ; very much
increased in quantity ; specific gravity 1005 ; very albumi-
nous and containing oil globules. How would you have
treated him. and what would have been your prognosis ?
6. How would you treat acute bronchitis in the adult ?
Write your prescription for the acute stage
7. A young man having studied hard nil winter is at-
tacked near the close of the session with severe headache,
giddiness, and occasional vomiting, head alternately hot and
cold, face pale, eyes pained by light and bowels con^ned.
What is most likely to be the nature of his illness, what
other symptoms would assist your diagnosis, and how would
you treat him ?
W '
1*' .,'
: ) ■■■ (
1.
inflamt
treatm
2.
3.
ulcus s
4.
fractur
5.
require
6.
larger
7.
and wh
8. :
retentii
9.
animal
10.
the tun
each?
mni\$ttms of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR M.B.
SURGERY.
li ■ >' '■■ Mi
■.;„|l|
ii IP ii
i; '.-ili
'imM
mmm
,
ij hj. ^ r||l
ii<;; w
iiir.::.
m
km
Examiner: Wm. T. Aikins, M.D.
\: ■■■ .:i
^ 1. Give the general and local treatment for acute
inflammation of a part, and the reason for each step in said
treatment.
2. Diagnose and treat a case of acute periostitis.
3. State the treatment, (hygienic, and other,) of scrof-
ulous synovitis.
4. State with particularity the treatment for oblique
fracture of the shaft of the femur.
5. Under what circumstances would fracture of the skull
require the employment of the trephine ?
6. State the several steps to be taken in one of the
larger amputations.
7. In malignant diseases what conditions would warrant
and what forbid an operation with the knife ?
8. Name the usual causes, symptoms and treatment for
retention of urine.
^ 9. What is the treatment for a bite inflicted by a rabid
animal ?
10. What are the several varieties as to the condition of
the tumor, &c., of inguinal hernia, and the treatment for
each?
i:;.i ill :i
!«!'■'
•il! ■■ ifl
tfi^i-
m
for
3
lab(
4
Iab(
just
and
5
torn
*6
of tl
*7,
quel
Unmvmn of Toronto.
fi iiiiiiitiiiii.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
lli|li''^^^W
'i,i];'!',i"!'!iH;'i
CANDIDATES FOR M.B.
OBSTETRICS, &c.
Examiner: C.J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S., Enq.
for^it T^^^ '' menstruation ? and what may be mistaken
2. On what do irregularities in menstruation depend?
lab^o'urT''* ""'" '^' '^''^"^' P'°"^' *^'^ ^ ^^"^^'^ '^ i"
4. You are called to attend a woman who has been in
abour more than twenty-four hours, and the child can only
just be reached by the finger : what conditions may exisL
and what is the treatment ? ^ *
f J; .^ T^^^' '?^^^"^ v'" "'"^^ ^^^'bits certain symp-
toms ; what symptoms indicate that she is again pregnant ?
ofliie^'prall!'^ ^^ -^ ^-ctions
*7. Describe the diseases of the placenta, and the conse-
quences to the mother and the conception.
* Honor Questions.
■I- 1' J
■iiiK
liiiii:
iiii
II ■'
! -uwm
mm
F
s
(
a
mm,
Winli^tvuits of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
DEGREE OP M.B.
THERAPEUTICS AND PHARMACOLOGY.
[I 1 '"
1^.
''HI
. !'''■■■ ■iffi
Examiner: Uzziel Ogden, M.D.
1. What are the therapeutical properties of gallic acid,
and what is its dose ?
2. How is the ferri ammonio citras prepared, and what is
its dose ?
3. Where is diosma crenata obtained, and what are its
therapeutical properties ?
4. What are the therapeutical properties of potassae bitar-
tras, and in what doses would you give it ?
5. How is syrupus ferri iodidi prepared, what are its
therapeutical properties, uses and dose ?
6. What are the doses of the hypophosphites of lime, soda,
potash, ammonia, and quinine ? In what respects do they
differ in their effects on the system, and what care should be
observed in their administration ?
7. Vinegar was given in the treatment of some of the
sequelrs of scarlatina during a recent epidemic in Hamilton.
Can you tell me its supposed modus medendi ?
8. Name the most valuable antispasmodics, their doses
and modus operandi.
9. For what disease is sulphur a specific ?
»::::i|lif'
■<" i/: ■!:■
1,
reas
2,
groi
3
insti
4,
doul
5,
org£
6,
and
allt
7,
8,
acid
9,
refe
10
alkn
11
obta
12
vesi
'I It I
'''lli
mnmvms of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
FOURTH YEAR.
CHEMISTRY,
I H. Y. Hind, M.A.
;,l:'
1. Arrange the non-metallic elements in groups, giving
reasons. o &.
2. What metallic elements arc ranked with one of these
groups, and why ?
3. Give the definition of monodi and tribasic acids, give
instances and refer to types.
4. Give the formulas of the magncsian sulphates, the
double magnesian sulphates and the alums.
6. Define organic chemistry, and give the types to which
organic compounds may be referred.
6. Give the general formulas of the alcohols, aldehydes,
and fatty acids, showing how the latter arc derived; refer
all to types.
7. Account for the formation of so-called sulphuric ether.
8. Give the mode of preparation of cyanogen — urea— uric
acid — morphine — formic acid — glycerine.
9. To what class of bodies may the fats and oils be
referred, how are they acted on by potassa ?
10. Give the general process for the extraction of the
alkaloids, and give tiieir characters.
11. What are the ammonium bases, how may they be
obtained V Give their characters.
12. Give the chemical compositon of the more common
vesical calculi.
m
lij'ii
■11
mi
an
lin
ma
sol
mi
1<
an<
•■'■ ■^:l: ■ I
^ni\^tvmi} ot Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
FOURTH YEAR.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
(II. Y. Hind, M.A.
a ; „.■:
1. What impurities may occur in sulphuric acid, and how
may they be detected ?
2. What are the usual impurities in carbonate of soda,
and how detected ?
_ 3. Give the distinguishing tests for baryta, strontia, and
lime.
4. What metals in solution give yellow sulphides ; how
may they be distinguished ?
5. What metals are precipitated black from alkaline
solutions only, and how are they distinguished ?
6. Mention all the liquid tests for arsenious acid.
7. How may strychnine be separated from an organic
mixture and detected ?
8. Give the tests for morphine and opium.
9. Give the tests for blood and bile.
10. Give the tests for iodine, sulphur, phosphoric, boracic
and oxalic acids.
is
1.
deatl
2.
deatl:
3.
what
4.
*5.
vapoi
♦6.
sulph
Unibtvnits ot ttovonu.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR M.B.
MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE.
'-: h
Examiner: C. J. Philbrick, F.R.C.S., Enq.
I.; II
death?^^*^'°"'°^ ^^""^ "" ^^""""^ ^^^ ^®®" produced before
defth?^''^'""'"^ '^^' "" ^''"''' ^^' ^''" produced before
3. What are the symptoms of poisoning by urea ? and
what post mortem conditions confirm the point ?
4. What are the tests of morphia?
vIpouTsY' '^"""^"^ ''''"'^ ^""^ to suspect poisoning by noxious
Jlny,^-''"^' *^^ characteristics of poisoning by oxalic acid,
sulphuric acid, corrosive sublimate, arsenic, sugar of lead ^
* Honor Questione.
ADS'
Ei
1.
lectur
2. :
laws?
3. :
4. :
source
6./
tradis
Utmtvnitp ''f JTotottto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1804.
SECOND YEAR.
AUSTIN'S PROVINCE OF JURISPRUDENCE.
Hxaminera-X^^^^ Orooks, Q. C, LL.D.
Jt^zamtners. | Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
i , 1 =
:.. II
1. Give a brief abstract of the outlines of Mr. Austin's
lectures.
2. How does he distinguish between the different kind of
laws ?
3. Distinguish between command^ duty^ and sanction.
4. Explain what is meant by the theory of utility as the
source of certain laws.
6. What are the diflferent kinds of laws improper, in con-
tradistinction to laws properly so called.
(Ill,
/.«iJi
U:
X
1. Me
theory o
2. Me
of moral
3. Wh
minate ai
4. Dis
5. Dis
morality '
tAt\t\}tvm» ot ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAR
AUSTIN^S JURISPRUDENCE.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
t JiDWARD FlTZaERALD, M.A., LL.B.
thL^lf'.'^-r" "^ '^'' '^''''''''' '^ ^'' Austin to the
theory of utzhti/ as a source of law ?
2. Mention some of the arguments in favour of the theory
of moral sense. i-ueory
3. What is the distinction between laws set by a deter^
mmate and an indeterminate body of persons ?
4. Distinguish between the different forms of government ?
liil!
,i ill! ni'i'i
i!
Mi
iiiijiiii;
mm
Mm
I"; I';:" I . N' „ li, i'
iiiiir-i:!!'-
mnl\}tvuitp of STotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATION : 18G4.
SECOND YEAR.
BOWYER'S CIVIL LAW.
\ Edward FiizaERALD, M.A., LL.B.
litl
1 1
llilliiiiii
II
iii!R!i!i|;!ili,iii(j!:
^ 1. Give a brief sketch of the rise and progress of Roman
jurisprudence.
2. Give a general view of the Institutes.
3. What are the different branches of the law of things ?
4. Distinguish between a legacy and a j^c?^' commissum.
5. What is aa obligation in solidum ?
HH:,
'■m
?i|f!:
WinittKMs^ ot ^0 to It to.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864,
SECOND YEAR
'' ii
j."i, lu;
l!l,;,l|i: '!
im
i'li;
BOWYER^S CIVIL LAW.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: \ ^^^^ ^^^^o^s, Q.C., LL.D.
i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
1. Distinguish between mutuunif commodatum, depositum.
and pignus.
2. What are the diflferent obligations quasi ex contractu ?
3. What different kinds of contracts are involved in the
consideration de societate ?
4. Classify "actions," and explain the nature of each.
6. What are interdicta and their divisions ?
!|);p, ,1; lijij
lii
J.
i^m
iiffil!'
111
iiiiHiiiji
HAL
Exa
1. Wh
during th
2. Whj
Commons
3. Whc
the First ;
4. Wha
^ 5. Give
his reign.
^nmtvnlii) of Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
HALLAM'S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY
JEJzammers:i:t^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D.
{ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
1. What were the different changes in the EnfflishThiir^l,
dunng the reigns of Henry VIII.^Edward Vl^lnS Ma/; 9
the%.^^airh^^:sLf '^^ ''''^- ^^^-- <^^-^-
4. What led to the restoration of Charles 11. ?
hi/;eigi™ ""' '^"^ «»^'itational measures passed during
lii!
Ill', i
:!hi:: !ii:i u
:
II
111::;
!i:
isjr
lii:
il'^:
liiiiiV: ■ 'y''
I!
¥%^^
:i'iv:
r»t:
I
1.
reign
2.
durin
3.
4.
of Qu,
5. ^
ofEni
^niittmts Of 8rov<inM.
ANNUAL liXAMINATIONa.- 1804.
SECOND YEAR.
HALLAM'S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY.
Examiners :} ^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D
i J^DWAiiD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
3. What was involved in the trial of Sacheverel ?
of QuoTn'lr/'' ''"'° "' ""= "™^'"«"» ^-"e *"« reign
ill '-'
''l"i!
:•'!
1/
'ill
iiiii!':'
mni^tvnits of Eovonto^
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
SMITirS MEllCANTILE LAW.
»m ' I
Uxaminera • J ^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
j^xamtners. ^ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A. LL.B.
1. On what principle is it that one partner can bind
another within the scope of the partnership business ?
2. Define a joint stock company. Are there any such in
this country, and if so name some of them ?
3. What title and rights does the transfer of an overdue
note acquire ? Explain fully.
4. What claim can a trustee make upon a policy of insu-
rance effected by him as such trustee on the life of another ?
5. What are the provsions of the 17th section of the
Statute of Frauds, and in what respect is it affected by 9
Geo. IV., chap. 14.
'-!
1
!;.;.„, '^
i
t
1.
order
2.
expre;
the wj
3. 1
formei
What,
4. I
to " T]
provisii
5. A
as to cl
notice (
^ntrttvtutxf of jcoronto.
ANNDAL EXAlilNATIONS : mi.
SECOND YEAR.
SMITH'S MERCANTILE LAW.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
I
■Examiners: f ^^^M Crooks, Q. c., LL D
^Edward Pxiza.RALD:M A ;ll.B.
ordliraftK-f,--^^^^^^^^^ neeessan in
-,t-"trai average ?
What la ou>- law „„ ?],;, subject? "^ ''*'« of interest?
proviaions of the|E„g?Lh act "="™'^ ' «''« ^ome*^:? thf
notice of protest ? ' ^^^*' ^^^ the essentials of the
.*•' ■ -M
hi-
^^^M
V.
1
m
1
SM
E
1. A
relieve '
2. W
fraud ?
3. ^
court en
any cas(
4. w:
the bill
5. Wl
must be
mnmvuitsf of STotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
SMITHES MANUAL OF EUUITY JURIS-
PEUDENCE.
Uzaminers.-f^^^'^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
(JiiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
llm
reHevf f'"'* ""^^^ '"'^^ '^ '^'''^^'' ^"'^ ^ ^^"^* ^f Equity
3 What is meant by "specific performance?" Will the
'*
1
doei
2
in a
and
3.
som(
4.
put i
of he
5.
liabil
fullj
'1' I : ■: \'.
Winmvms^ of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
SMITH'S MANML W MUITY JURIS-
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
JSxaminers.'f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
aoi Sldong r' "^' ''^"*^'^° '''''' ' To which class
2. la ■ pTridence admissible on boli-iir nf n,M
»n a suit ,ific performance of a wlitl IT ^"''^
and if so, . iiat case or cases ? agreement,
3. What is an injunction ^ TTnw I'a ,v i.^. • , «
some of the cases i„^ „,,ieh tins 1^^;; i' ^p'^lTclb!; '"""
putXnleVt^^^^^^^^^^ '-3 ^wi.„„
of her husband ? "'''''*^ ^^ ^^^^ ^J the will
I
"m
ar
CO
m
wl
Wini\}tvnits of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAE.
WILLIAMS ON REAL PROPERTY.
T7 . f Adam Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
^^«^^"^^^-\ Edward Fitzgerald, M. A., LL.B.
11^ "
r:
III::.
1. What is an estate tail, an estate for life, and in fee,
and state the rule in Shelly's case ?
2. Define co-partners, joint tenants, and tenants in
common.
3. What advantage in conveyancing was obtained by
means of the lease and release under the Statute of Frauds ?
4. What is dower, and how is it conveyed when the widow
has married a second time ?
5. Define vendor's lien and state some of the cases in
which this lien will be held to be waived or destroyed ?
I:H :i
m
^nibnmp ot Eovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
SECOND YEAR.
WILLIAMS OJf REAL PllOPERTF.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
i hDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
3. Define corporeal and incorporeal heredlfflmpnfo ^
what were the usual words of conveyance annltZp?' \°v
Is there any word now that will convey bofh? '' '''^ '
4. What is the office of the hahernJnm ir. „ ^
l!|!llllil:!l!l
t'^
:';, ■■!:"
'■ ,; I' :
t;:
f
V
II
' i !!
Wini\}ttms! of zovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIKD YEAR.
ARCHBOLD^S LANDLORD AND TENANT.
Examiners :f^^^^ ^^^oks, Q. C, LL.D.
\ Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
1. What leases require to be in writing, and what under
seal ? Give the authorities. What authority does an agent
require to enable him to execute a valid lease ?
2. What may be distrained for rent, and is the common
law affected by any, and what statute or statutes on this
head, and how P
3. What are emblements, and who are entitled to them ?
4. What notice to quit is necessary in the case of tenancy
trom year to year, quarter to quarter, month to month, and
week to week ? '
. 5. How may leases be validly assigned ? Is a condition
m a lease against assignment legal ?
ill' ii!i
ft
i
lis
!ii! •
lift
i '
i
SI
an
(.1(3
wli
th(
the
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR
ARCHBOLD'S LANDLORD AND TENANT.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners ; f ^^^" Ckooks, Q. C, LL n
I Edwahd FmoEKAiD, M.A.;ll.B.
sio;-crn^:!;:v;;™;":;:;i,;v'.!?i.5;''' «?'- °f "«' ^-c-
they arc rem„vable hy the tenant ? "^ "" '''''^"'«''
tho'samef '"^ """"" "s'"^' »" »'-'« ""o law respecting
1' 13
nnrnvuitii oe ©orontu.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1861
THIRD YEAR.
BURTON'S COMPENDIUM OF REAL
PJtOPERTY.
Exam
inerpr ' ^:;'^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
J ±.L-.'ARD FlTZGEKAU), M.A., LL.B.
law,- a^'b/Itt f "™' ™"" "' ■""'-«- "' "--n
52. What is the efiect of ]imitin<T a
convoyanco ? °
3. Distinguish between the different kinds of
recognised in Im.
4. Define rent.
6. Mention the different kinds of egmtak interests in land.
use upon a use in a
estates
iiiL
!v'ii,
';!!;■,
it,;'
'
i
i
i
i
il
'l..
>'-»
ii
*
■i^v El,
U'.
1. &
2 D
deed oi
.3. Vi
distinct
4. H
sion ? a
5. W
are the ;
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
BURTON\S COMPENDIUM.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: \ ^^^^ Crooks, Q.C, LL.D.
( Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
1. Scintilla juris,
defdortfat' '''""■' '""™' ""'' ™« ^«-». and in
'^|i.'T
li
i
m
m
"If--*:
IH
''*.
ii'WM
■;:i!iil
::|;:ilM
1.
2.
functi
3.
and tl
4.
politic
5. 1
partnii
Illlv'lili
wnmtvms of arotonto.
ANNCAI, EXAMINATIONS: 186il.
THIRD YEAR.
COI'S BRITISH COMMONWEALTH.
hammers iX^"^^'^ Crooks, Q. C, LLD
J JlDWAKD FlIZaERAtD, M.A., LL.B.
1. What arc the objects and duties of a government '
JliZ'';LZf" "°"™™'' '■" '■"»•"■ °f 'I-o existence of
pariSin Gitl Sin" ? '""'""^' """^ ''^-"-trative de-
H li:"l
ill' ;_
!!:'■ "'
flu
tio
i.
dui
iS^mntrms of sroronto*
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIED YEAR.
COX^S BRITISH COMMONWEALTH.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Uxaminers: \ ^^^^ Crooks, Q.C., LL.D.
I Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
H-nn'f^'I? *^^ arguments in favour of a property qualifica-
tion for the exercise of parliamentary suffrage. ^
3. Compare the advantages of open and secret voting.
4. Wiiat is an action at law ? and state briefly its proce-
dure and different stages. "^ ^
5. Distinguish between the different kinds of colonies.
1; ■'■'■-
ii;i'
'''!
!il!^.
r "»» I
IN
1. \}
lite on
2. ^
describe
in equit
3. W
What is
bill does
4. He
ence in \
5. Ho
tow long
aa infant
^nmmts Of rotoHto.
JUfNUAl EXAMINATIOKS. 1864.
THIRD TEAR.
MITFORD ON TLEADIKG, &C.
Examiners : J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL D
iiiDWARD FlTZGEKALD, M.A./lL.B.
an infant ia a defendant ? ' "" P™""""^ '''"e
IH"
i:-
I
llf
lb.'
.'■Mf.
m--:M
111.'
/i
'.',;
^nmmt!^ of mvonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
MITFORD ON PLEADING.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: I ^^^^ Crooks, Q. Q., LL.D
I J1.DWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'lL.B.,
1. Within what time was a mortgagor entiflM f. a
sn\t rptt\"''''-''' ^.^lo^^rj; STr
3. Does a defendant ever reauim o »,«^f c - ^
in what case or cases ? ^ "^'''^ ^"^"^' '-^n^ if so,
4. What was the old methnr? nf o«<.*.-
purchase for valuable coSl^^^^^ ^^^^nce of
were the proper aHegation ? To "b to?f '"' 5"^ ^^=^'
such a defence allowed ? ^"^ ^"^^^^® ^<>^'er, is
5. What does a replication put in issup o. i .x
generally when a plaintiff ought to fi ^ rS ' *• ^ ^***®
amend his bill? ^ ^'^^ replication, or to
til
ife:'-
jiVii^'
.• 'If !
I' "ill?!
^nih.mt^ otzovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 186i.
THIRD YEAR.
SMITH ON CONTRACTS.
Uxammers.'f^^^^ Cj^ooks, Q. C., LL.D.
(Edward Fiizqekald, M.A., LL.B.
to be in writing ? author,t,y of tlie agent require
boL^S;v'Ui?;:u;re."^"'™ *" »"■■- -""-to
of t.::bi\:tSi„Tbr ;:, j;;::/!/^ '^ "^'°?
* .K voluntary grantee ? IVli/? '"'™'"='''' '':>' ™ assignee of
breth'' Jeor:otf aXS if :^L:?^ T' ['■ T^ '" "
between mch . medie>? "" ''" "'"'f d'Aerence
:!::':i
I"
8im^er«ctj? Of coronto^
i;i'' . '.ii
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
TIIIRD YEAR.
SMITH ON CONTEACTS.
HONORS AND SCUOLARSHIPS.
Examiners: {^^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.,
1 Edward Flizqerald, M.A., LL.B.
.]• ^'f ^ }^ ?^® ^^w in reference to contracts in restraint
of trade? Point out the different cases. "^restraint
isL'^i^d^^onr'''^"'^'"' '''' "^ ''''-'^''^' What
3. What is ratification, and the effect of it? Can the
h^rfdo if? ^ ' ' "* °' ''' ''''^-'' "^^^"^'^ W^- -n
a.t )!!' r Tr'' ^J^^"^.' '^ ^^^'t'-^tion, and state the law
as to the limitation of actions in cases of simple contract'
Li^itatolr' '^' ''''P'"'^ ^" ^'^ ^"Slish Statute of
ii''^'i
1. :
one c(
2. :
person
3. (
4. I
to coni
6. ^
2^nf^irrfi(ft» of rorimto*
-ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 1864.
THIRD YEAR.
WESTLAKE'S CONFLICT OF LAWS.
Examiners :\:^^^'^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D.
J Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
one'co^nl^'L'''" "" ^''f^^' ^" bankruptcy obtained in
one country be recognised by the courts of another ?
pefson^? ''^""^ "^'^'"'^ "^"'^ ^''^'''^' ""^^'^ t^e ^«i^«^% of a
3. Give a definition of domicile.
to ton^ralts^r' *^' ^'"^ ^''' "^^^''«^^^« ^P^^ate with respect
5. What is the operation of the lex situs on property ?
f '
ill
i!!;
! I;' ii
m
I
.1 ' ■
re
re
do
to
»
wh
per
^nmvms of Zovonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1834.
THIRD YEAR.
WESTLAKE'S CONFLICT OP LAWS.
HONORS AND SCHOLARSHIPS.
Examiners : J ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C , LL D
( i^BWAUD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'lL.B.
do!; ircxt::,f ° ^"^"' -'^ -^ ^^ »"»s'--. -^ how fa.
5. When testamentary instruments
lat validity Iiave
personal property 't
what validity have they in i^^.Inl^tneirer re^n^'
III
Ijiiiiir
''I'ii:-'
ill
^ni\innm of ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS; 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
i^LACKSTONE, VOL. IV.
Examiners:! :^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL D
i JiDWARD TlTZGERALD, M. A., LL.B.
ii m
2. D^tinguish botwoen principals and accessories.
3. W at a,e the different offences against public justice ^
4. What are the different kinds of homicide »
5. What must exist to constitute the crime of larceny ?
1:1
!!ii.lii
^nmvms^ of STotonto.
ANNUAL EXA MINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
BlACKSTOJfE, VOL. lY.
HONORS.
Examiners: f ^^^^ Ciooks, Q. C., LL D
I iiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
of '^rSZ) '■■"' *"'* °' ""> "- '""' P^»S-- «f the laws
by j,v '"" "" ""' ''"'"™' '"•"'^^ «f ^'-''-g", i„ the tri„l
3- Mention the offences against public trade ?
4. What are the ^iffovent kin,:, of misprisons ?
5- Distinguish betwe>,,. t, ,>„,,op. ^„<, 3,jiti„„ ,
iiii'i
if
'•"'ill
mnmmtif of jroronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
GIBBON^S ROME, &c.
JSxaminers:!^^^^ Crooks, Q.C, LL.D.
i J^DWARD Fitzgerald, M. A., LL.B.
conyisthe^R^tVLtT" ''''''' ""^^^' ^^^^^ ^^^^^on
JutlJall '"" '''' "^^"'' '' *^« reformation effected by
3. Into what different books are the Listitutes divided '
J J. What was the status of the wife under the Roman
5. Explain the Terentillian law
: i' ■!
i rVl,
! li !l/
jk'
mi
m
ill
# ♦
11
r(
^nibtvuits of t ^nto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
GIBBON ^ ARNOLD.
HONOKS.
i Edward Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
2. What was the contract of locatio ?
3. What are the principal points noticed by Gibbon in
respect to rights of property ? "
4. Explain the Valerian and Canuleian laws ?
5. What was the Licinian law ?
ig
I.
^4JSr
' ^r':^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)
4is
1.0
1.1
1.25
UimA
■ 50 "^
^ 1^
1.4
2.5
2.2
1.6
V]
<?
/]
/
% .^>
/A
'/
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
^2%.
"%'•
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. HS80
(716) 873-4503
t/.
ai
th
in
eit
in
wh
^nmvm» of Eotonto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
JAEMAN ON WILLS.
I!xaminer8:i^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL.D.
I Edwakd FiTzaERALD, M.A., LL.B.
5. What interest in personalty is conferred by words
which create an estate tail in realty? Why?
!i'»
^nmmtp ot ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXa"^TIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOE LL.B.
JAKMAJV OJV WILLS.
HONORS.
o^U^rSr^e :-•"/»' -^» » Win .Vs.,
"• ''»nat revokes a will? Qf«. ,
revocation. '''^^ ' State the different cases of
4. What is the effect nf n ^- .
m
m
iiiii
I III I
I'.rhl
HiSiv
^niiitvms Of aroronto.
AmVAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
JUSTINIAN'S INSflTUTES.
Examiners : ^ ■^^^'^ Crooks, Q. n LL D
tEDWAKDFix.aEnALD;M!l!:-li,.B.
1- Quibus constitutionibnq nf ;n ^
caveanttutoresvelcuratores pi^or^bi;? ^T'^'*"^' «* "^^^
-Z^^^. 3, Tit. 24, s. 3. 'P'^"^^''^"«captiscoerceantur.—
(«) Translate.
W What oonsti.„ti„„3 are here referred to?
(0^ What were the relative powers ,^,1 ^ .• .
ian and ward in the RomTn Law . "' "^ «""'
woaidlrlX ^ ""'''"■" "y^ i» which the «»/™,,
3. How were servitudes extinguished 1
4. What was the heres neomariw ?
=i»i
^nmtmp Of ^Torouio.
ANNUAL EXACTIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
JUSTINIAFS INSTITUTES.
HONORS.
W"
!-ii-
Examiners :i^^^^ Crooks, Q. n LT r>
1- Eodem numero sunf inro ^^
™sticor„„, ,„, e.ia„ scrWtm .^^trVh'^"""' *'
3.-Ment.o„ the different kind, ofse [t',:; ^i, ^' '"• ^' «•
referred to ? servitudes tliat are liere
2. Explain totamentum, ealata comitia an^ . ■
3- Distinguish, between re, pnUia-. '"•°«»«'««?
»«««., m eacr^, re, religZI? ' "" """'«'*'«", re,
4 VVhat were the different modes of „„„ • ■
m the Roman law? ""Ocs ot acquiring property
6. Give the formula bv which , «j •
self? ' ^"""» » fideiu,,or bound him-
^nmvmt» of (Toronto,
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
MACKELDEY'S CIVIL LAW.
HONORS.
Uxammers'.f^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., L.LD.
(H-DWARD FlTZGEAilLD, M.A., LL.B.
1. By what different modes are rights terminated ?
eJ^^H:^"" ''''''''' ''' -^^'^ -^^'^-^--^ and the
3. Explain « juridicial possession " ?
4. What is <^aece8sior and give its different classes ?
5. Give a brief analysis of Mackeldey's treatise?
^ni\)tvms Of Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1861
CANDIDATES FOR LL.b".
STODEN ON VENDORS AND PURCHASEBS.
7 ; the „,™o. «»bs^o,ueXTrt1ollt ^^r/^
JuIrtJZfr^'' ""^^ «°"^»y»» - ".-cod, „h.t
se ? ^*" ^nore be recovered in any
of
case?
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1884.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
SPGDENONVEND^D PURCHASERS.
HONORS.
■Examiners:! :^^^^ Crooks, Q. n LL D
>s the principle ? '"'"'"'= °f Fi-ands, and what
nant. of the vendor' in the^Ze/at e^xtncT^' "^ ""^»-
3- What is a„ abstract of title, and ought iuo shew?
4.a;t'otutlStr"tan"th' '' ^"^"^^"'' ^''apter
the grantor defeat a voluntarv 1 ,„ ^'''"'"? "' ^""''^^ of
a -.e for value, and is nSoTe^^Sl; ^ST ^^
!hl
wmntmts Of aroMiuo.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
SUGDEN ON POWERS.
HONORS.
Examiners :S^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL D
(JiDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,'
LL.B.
. 1. Name the different kind of powpr., wu . ■
given bj will called ? ^ ^' ^^^* ^^ a power
Could such third partv be thf „„l f ""'?' '" l*^ °>"»i"'i<i ?
pursuance of the po"Jr ? '^"'''"""' "^ P'»P»«^ sold i„
Unmvmt} J^f ^Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
TAYLOR ON EVIDENCE
Examiners:! ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C., LL.D.
I hDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A., LL.B.
belin'f f t*l™'" '" "^'^'■"'"'"S -■>» »- the right to
've'Zl'^??' ■'■"^^ "' -idenco are admissible
prove handwriting ?
to
^nt\)tvmp or Toronto.
ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 1864.
CANDIDATES FOR LL.B.
TAYLOR ON EVIDENCE
HONORS.
JExaminersJ^^^^ Crooks, Q. C, LL D
(±iDWARD Fitzgerald, M.A.,
LL.B.
does* rgtln/fciT^^^^^^^^^^ r^--' -d when
secondarj evidence ? ^^"'' ^"^^ ^ P^^^J to give
2. In what case or cases are dyinff declaritmnQ „.i • -u,
evidence is necessary of such promise ? ""'*^^'°"'' ^^^^ ^hat
reft h iiirtr^y ? ^^'^0^1)::;? ^^^^t ^"-^<^ *^
trial or examination ? ^^''^ ^' produced at the
5. State some of the mutt^rl,} „7<.
invalidate a written instrumen L thT^".' "l"""" "'"
seeking to enforce it ? ""^ ^""^^ "^ "■ Party
TVNews
OpenLibrary